report ( including introduction, literature, structure working, solidworks design possiblities , references)

no plagiarism 

Printed by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)

Europäisches Patentamt

European Patent Office

Office européen des brevets

(1

9

)

E
P

1

4

9

6

6

0
0

A

2

*EP001496600A2*
(

11

)

EP 1 496 600 A2

(12) EUROPÄISCHE PATENTANMELDUNG

(43) Veröffentlichungstag:
12.01.2005 Patentblatt 2005/02

(21) Anmeldenummer: 04015931.1

(22) Anmeldetag: 07.07.2004

(51) Int Cl.7: H02K 7/06

(

8

4) Benannte Vertragsstaaten:
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR
HU IE IT LI LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR
Benannte Erstreckungsstaaten:
AL HR LT LV MK

(30) Priorität: 11.07.2003 DE

10

332389

(71) Anmelder: SAIA-Burgess Dresden GmbH
01257 Dresden (DE)

(72) Erfinder:
• Flemming, Dietmar

01796 Pirna (DE)
• Howack, Gerd

01731 Kreischa (DE)

(74) Vertreter: Heyner, Klaus, Dr.-Ing.
Patentanwalt
Mittelweg 1H
01728 Bannewitz (DE)

(54) Linearantrieb

(57) Die Erfindung betrifft einen Linearantrieb für
Stellvorgänge zur Erzeugung translatorischer Vor-
schubbewegungen, der mindestens ein Gehäuse (11),
Lagerschilde (5), die dieses Gehäuse (11) stirnseitig be-
grenzen, einen Stator (10), einen Rotor (2) mit einer axi-
al angeordneten mit einem Außengewinde (3.1) ausge-
bildeten Rotorwelle (3), eine Gewindemutter und eine
bewegliche Schraube/Spindel aufweist.

Erfindungsgemäß ist vorgesehen, dass der Rotor
(2) glockenförmig mit einer offenen Stirnseite (2.1) und
einer geschlossenen Stirnseite (2.2) ausgebildet ist,

und eine die Rotorwelle (3) mindestens teilweise ein-
schließende und an der offenen Stirnseite (2.1) des Ro-
tors (2) herausgeführte Stellstange (4) für die Linearbe-
wegung vorgesehen ist. Dabei weist das im Rotor be-
findliche erste Ende (4.2) der Stellstange (4) eine
passfähige auf der Rotorwelle (3) mit Außengewinde
(3.1) aufsitzende Gewindemutter auf. Die Rotorwelle
besitzt an ihren axialen Enden über beide Stirnseiten
(2.1, 2.2) des glockenförmigen Rotors (2) hinaus rei-
chende Gleitlagerzapfen (3.2), die jeweils in einem
Gleitlager (6) geführt sind und die an oder innerhalb der
Lagerschilde (5) platziert sind.

EP 1 496 600 A2
2

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Beschreibung

[0001] Die Erfindung betrifft einen Linearantrieb für
Stellvorgänge zur Erzeugung translatorischer Vor-
schubbewegungen.
[0002] Aus dem Stand der Technik sind Linearmoto-
ren und Linearspindelmotoren als Linearantriebe be-
kannt. Während bei einem Linearmotor im Betrieb ein
Wanderfeld zwischen dem stromdurchflossenen Pri-
märteil und dem Reaktionsteil entsteht, wird beim Li-
nearspindelmotor hingegen ein Drehfeld erzeugt, dass
zur Umwandlung einer Rotationsbewegung des Rotors
in eine Translationsbewegung der Gewindespindel ge-
nutzt wird.
[0003] Linearspindelmotoren weisen einen strom-
durchflossenen Stator und einen rotierenden Rotor auf,
in dem ein Drehfeld induziert wird. Am oder im Rotor ist
eine Gewindemutter angeordnet, die bei Rotation des
Rotors eine passfähige Schraube oder Gewindespindel
antreibt. Die axiale Vorschubbewegung der Spindel wird
genutzt, um eine Stellbewegung eines Stellorgans aus-
zuführen.
[0004] Derartige Linearspindelmotoren werden in der
Praxis im Bereich der Laborund Medizintechnik, der
Sortiertechnik, der Lebensmittelindustrie, im Werkzeug-
maschinenbau, in der Haus- und Gebäudetechnik, der
Verpackungsindustrie sowie im Kraftfahrzeugbereich
und der Unterhaltungselektronik eingesetzt.
[0005] Beispielsweise wird im Bereich der Kraftfahr-
zeugtechnik die Verstellung der Scheinwerfer und im
Bereich der Medizin- und Labortechnik das Öffnen und
Schließen der Ventile oder anderer Drosseleinrichtun-
gen durch Linearspindelmotoren realisiert.
[0006] In der Druckschrift US 6,223,971 B1 ist eine
Antriebseinheit für eine Schweißmaschine offenbart.
Hierbei besteht die Antriebeinheit aus bestrombaren
Spulen und einem Rotor, der als Hohlwelle ausgebildet
ist. Die Lagerung des Rotors erfolgt zweifach unter Ver-
wendung von Radiallagern.
Der Rotor ist mittels Verbindungselementen mit einer
Spindel gekoppelt. Ferner ist eine Stellstange mit Innen-
gewinde vorgesehen, die auf der Spindel axial gleitet.
Das axiale und außerhalb liegende Ende der Stellstan-
ge kann mit einem Funktionselement für Schweißarbei-
ten gekoppelt werden. Dabei ist die Stellstange vollstän-
dig über ihre Längserstreckung mit dem bereits erwähn-
ten Innengewinde ausgestattet. An der Nodrive-Seite
der Antriebseinheit ist ein nicht näher bezeichnetes La-
gerschild angeordnet, welches von einem axialen Ende
der Spindel durchdrungen wird. An diesem axialen En-
de der Spindel ist eine Stellschraube angeordnet, um
die Spindel und somit auch die die Spindel vollständig
umschließende Stellstange im Bedarfsfall manuell be-
dienen zu können.
[0007] Der Nachteil dieser Linearspindelmotoren be-
steht vor allem darin, dass sie konstruktionsbedingt eine
große Baulänge aufweisen und eine nicht unerhebliche
Geräuschemission verursachen. Ursächlich dafür ist

die Lagerung des Rotors mittels eines Wälzlagers und
eines als Gleitlager ausgebildeten Notlagers zu nennen.
Während der Bestromung des Linearmotors erzeugt
das Wälzlager ein Kippmoment, was dazu führt, dass
der Rotor nicht mehr parallel zum Stator geführt wird.
Durch eine Kippung kann ein Schleifen des Rotors am
Stator auftreten.
[0008] Ein weiterer signifikanter Nachteil eines Bau-
teils des Linearspindelmotors, speziell der Gewinde-
spindel, besteht darin, dass ihre Fertigung sehr aufwen-
dig ist. Während die Gewindespindel im Wirkungsbe-
reich der Gewindemutter ein Außengewinde aufweisen
muss, ist sie im Bereich der Verdrehsicherung üblicher-
weise als Vierkant und außerhalb der Verdrehsicherung
als kreisrunder Stab oder Stange ausgebildet.
[0009] Es besteht seit geraumer Zeit bei Betreibern
der Wunsch, Linearantriebe zu entwickeln, die zur
Funktionserfüllung nur ein geringes Spaltmaß zwischen
Rotor und Stator benötigen und dadurch einen höheren
Wirkungsgrad sowie eine erhöhte Laufruhe sicherstel-
len.
[0010] Aufgabe der Erfindung ist es, einen Linearan-
trieb für Stellvorgänge zu entwickeln, der bei gleichem
Funktionsumfang preisgünstiger zu fertigen ist, der
kompakter ausgebildet ist und der eine höhere Laufruhe
aufweist.
[0011] Diese Aufgabe wird erfindungsgemäß da-
durch gelöst, indem der Rotor, der eine axial angeord-
nete sowie ein Außengewinde aufweisende Rotorwelle
besitzt, glockenförmig mit einer offenen Stirnseite und
einer geschlossenen Stirnseite ausgebildet ist, und eine
die Rotorwelle mindestens teilweise einschließende
und an der offenen Stirnseite des Rotors herausgeführ-
te Stellstange für die Linearbewegung vorgesehen ist,
deren im Rotor befindliches erstes Ende eine passfähi-
ge, auf der Rotorwelle mit Außengewinde aufsitzende
Gewindemutter aufweist. Die Lagerung der Rotorwelle
erfolgt durch an ihren axialen Enden über beide Stirn-
seiten des glockenförmigen Rotors hinaus reichende
Gleitlagerzapfen, die jeweils in einem Gleitlager geführt
sind und die an oder innerhalb der Lagerschilde platziert
sind..
[0012] Der glockenförmig ausgebildete Rotor er-
streckt sich stirnseitig zwischen den Lagerschilden des
Gehäuses, wobei die offene Stirnseite des Rotors in
Richtung des Drive-Lagerschildes und die geschlosse-
ne Stirnseite des Rotors in Richtung des Nodrive-Lager-
schildes weist. Innerhalb des glockenförmigen Rotors
ist die mindestens an der offenen Stirnseite des Rotors
überstehende Rotorwelle, die mit einem Außengewinde
versehen ist, axial angeordnet, wobei die aus der offe-
nen Stirnseite des Rotors herausragende und die Ro-
torwelle mindestens teilweise umschließende Stellstan-
ge mit ihrer Gewindemutter passfähig aufsitzt.
[0013] Die gabelförmige bzw. hohlzylindersegment-
förmige Stellstange, die in ihrer Längserstreckung die
Rotorwelle mindestens teilweise einschließt, weist ein
erstes Ende auf, das als Gewindemutter ausgebildet ist

1 2

EP 1 496 600 A2

3

5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55

und mit der Rotorwelle in axialer Wirkverbindung steht.
Der sich daran anschließende Bereich der Stellstange
weist die Form von Hohlzylindersegmenten auf, deren
Enden sich auch in eingezogener Position der Stellstan-
ge über den Bereich des Drive-Lagerschildes hinaus er-
strecken.
[0014] Das erste Ende und das zweite Ende der Stell-
stange sind kraftschlüssig und/oder formschlüssig
durch mindestens einen Gabelschenkel oder durch
Hohlzylindersegmente miteinander verbunden. In einer
bevorzugten Ausführungsform sind jedoch aus Grün-
den einer gleichmäßigen Kraftverteilung und -übertra-
gung die Gabelschenkel paarweise ausgebildet und
diametral angeordnet.
[0015] Der oder die Gabelschenkel durchdringen das
Drive-Lagerschild, so dass eine Linearbewegung in
Richtung des Drive-Lagerschilds realisiert werden
kann.
[0016] Erfindungsgemäß ist der Querschnitt des oder
der Gabelschenkel oder der Hohlzylindersegmente der
Stellstange der Querschnittsform eines Durchbruchs im
Drive-Lagerschildes angepasst, so dass die Stellstange
torsionssicher und formschlüssig mit Spielpassung im
Durchbruch des Drive-Lagerschildes geführt und gehal-
tert ist. Der Durchbruch des Drive-Lagerschild ist dem-
nach als Verdrehsicherung und Linearführung ausgebil-
det, um eine Verkippung der Stellstange (Gewindemut-
ter) zu verhindern.
[0017] Die an dem Rotor befestigte Rotorwelle ist im
Gegensatz zu herkömmlichen Rotoren mittels zweier
identisch ausgebildeter Gleitlager gelagert, was mehre-
re Vorteile mit sich bringt. Zum einen kann auf ein ko-
stenintensives Wälzlager verzichtet werden und zum
anderen neigt der Rotor bei der Rotation zu keinem
Kippspiel. Die Rotorwelle besitzt durch die stabile Lage-
rung nur einen Freiheitsgrad. Die axialen Enden der Ro-
torwelle sind als Gleitlagerzapfen ausgebildet, die über
die Stirnseiten des glockenförmigen Rotors hinaus rei-
chen. Ein weiterer nicht zu unterschätzender Vorteil die-
ser Gleitlager besteht darin, dass der Luftspalt zwischen
dem Stator und dem Rotor in Richtung der Längser-
streckung des Rotors des Linearantriebs konstant aus-
gebildet ist. Der Luftspalt beträgt zwischen 0,1 mm und
0,4 mm. Dadurch, dass die Gleitlager zu keinem Kipp-
spiel neigen, bleibt dieser Luftspalt zwischen Stator und
Rotor auch während der Bestromung des Linearan-
triebs konstant, was zu einer erheblichen Geräuschre-
duzierung und damit Laufruhe gegenüber den Linear-
antrieben aus dem Stand der Technik führt.
[0018] Die Gleitlager sind als kombinierte Quer- und
Längslager ausgebildet und können somit radiale und
axiale Kräfte aufnehmen. Dem radialen Kraftangriff der
Rotorwelle wird mittels zweier Lagerschalen oder einer
Lagerbuchse begegnet, in denen die Mantelflächen der
Endbereiche der Rotorwelle gleiten. Diese Endbereiche
sind bevorzugt als Gleitlagerzapfen ausgebildet. Zur
Ableitung der axialen Kräfte, die u.a. durch das axiale
Bewegungsspiel der Rotorwelle erzeugt werden, wer-

den Axiallager eingesetzt. Diese Axiallager weisen vor-
zugsweise Lagerplatten, beispielsweise aus Stein oder
Metall auf, die die Stirnseiten der Gleitlagerzapfen der
Rotorwelle einfassen und kontaktieren. Diese Lager-
platten sind mit jeweils einer ebenen und einer balligen
Fläche ausgebildet.
[0019] In einer bevorzugten Ausgestaltung der Erfin-
dung wird anstelle einer Spurplatte eine Kugel einge-
setzt. Kugeln sind auf Grund ihrer Formgebung beson-
ders gut geeignet, um die bei der Rotation auftretende
Hertzsche Pressung, die zwischen den Gleitlagerzap-
fen und dem Gleitlager auftritt, zu verkleinern. Zudem
können handelsübliche Metallkugeln eingesetzt wer-
den, die wesentlich preiswerter als Lagerplatten zu fer-
tigen sind.
[0020] Die Gleitlager können aus allen üblichen La-
germaterialien, wie z. B. Sinter-Bronze, Kunststoff oder
Messing gefertigt sein. Um bei hohem Lastspiel Abrieb
an den Gleitlagerzapfen der Rotorwelle zu vermeiden
und gute Reibwerte zu erzielen, sind diese vorzugswei-
se aus härteren Material wie die Gleitlager gefertigt.
[0021] Nach der Konzeption der Erfindung wird die li-
neare Stellbewegung der Stellstange über eine Koppel-
stelle auf ein anwendungsspezifisches Funktionsele-
ment übertragen. Die Koppelstelle ist aus Gründen der
Auswechselbarkeit vorzugsweise außerhalb des Ge-
häuses angeordnet.
[0022] Die Stellstange erstreckt sich demnach vom
Gehäuseinneren bis zur Koppelstelle, während dessen
sich das Funktionselement von der Koppelstelle bis zu
einem Stellorgan erstreckt.
[0023] Die Koppelstelle kann als separates Bauteil
ausgebildet oder an die Stellstange angeformt sein. Als
besonders vorteilhaft in Bezug auf die axiale Kraftüber-
tragung hat sich erwiesen, wenn die Stellstange mittels
Bajonett- oder Schnappverbindungen oder vergleichba-
ren formschlüssigen Verbindungselementen mit dem
Funktionselement in Eingriff gebracht wird. In einer be-
vorzugten Ausführungsform werden Klammern einge-
setzt, welche hohe Zug- und Schubkräfte übertragen.
[0024] Ein besonderer Vorteil des erfindungsgemä-
ßen Linearantriebs besteht darin, dass das mit einer Ge-
windemutter ausgebildete erste Ende der Stellstange
nur innerhalb des glockenförmigen Rotors axial beweg-
lich geführt wird, was zu einer deutlichen Baulängenre-
duzierung des Linearantriebs beiträgt.
[0025] Die signifikanten Vorteile und Merkmale der
Erfindung gegenüber dem Stand der Technik sind im
Wesentlichen:

• kompaktere Bauweise und kürzere Baulänge ge-
genüber herkömmlichen Linearspindelmotoren, da
die Stellstange nur innerhalb des glockenförmigen
Rotors bzw. des Drive-Lagerschildes axial beweg-
lich ausgebildet ist, wobei durch eine Verlängerung
des Drive-Lagerschildes eine Verlängerung des
Stellweges der Stellstange erzielt,

• durch die Trennung der Axial- und Radiallagerung

3 4

EP 1 496 600 A2
4
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55

ist eine besonders preisgünstige Ausführung der
Lagerelemente möglich,

• Luftspalt zwischen Rotor und Stator ist in Richtung
der Längserstreckung des Linearmotors konstant,
da anstelle eines Wälzlagers (Gefährdung durch
Kippspiel !) zwei Gleitlager angeordnet sind, womit
eine höhere Laufruhe entsteht und

• lineare Stellbewegung der Stellstange wird über ei-
ne Koppelstelle auf ein anwendungsspezifisches
Funktionselement übertragen, wobei die Koppel-
stelle außerhalb des Linearmotors angeordnet ist
und damit die Möglichkeit besteht, anwendungs-
spezifische Funktionselemente in besonders vor-
teilhafter Weise anzukoppeln, ohne die gesamte
Stellstange oder wie bislang, die gesamte Spindel
oder Schraube, auszutauschen zu müssen.

[0026] Verschiedene Lösungen und Vorteile der Er-
findung erschließen sich dem Fachmann des Weiteren
aus der folgenden detaillierten Beschreibung einer be-
vorzugten Ausführungsform im Hinblick auf die anlie-
genden

Zeichnungen

; in diesen zeigen:

Fig. 1a schematische Darstellung eines Linearspin-
delmotors aus dem Stand der Technik im
Querschnitt

Fig. 1b schematische Darstellung des Drive-Lager-
schilds des Linearspindelmotors aus dem
Stand der Technik im Axialschnitt

Fig. 1c schematische Darstellung des Drive-Lager-
schilds des Linearspindelmotors aus dem
Stand der Technik im Querschnitt

Fig. 2a schematische Darstellung des erfindungsge-
mäßen Linearantriebs im Querschnitt

Fig. 2b schematische Darstellung des Drive-Lager-
schilds des erfindungsgemäßen Linearan-
triebs im Axialschnitt

Fig. 2c schematische Darstellung des Drive-Lager-
schilds des erfindungsgemäßen Linearan-
triebs im Querschnitt

Fig. 3 Detaildarstellung des erfindungsgemäßen
Linearantriebs

Fig. 4 perspektivische Gesamtdarstellung des er-
findungsgemäßen Linearantriebs

[0027] Die Fig. 1 a zeigt eine schematische Darstel-
lung eines Linearspindelmotors 14 aus dem Stand der
Technik im Querschnitt. Der Linearspindelmotor 14 um-
fasst den Stator 10, das Gehäuse 11, die stirnseitig das
Gehäuse 11 umfassenden Lagerschilde 5, den Rotor 2
mit angeschlossener Gewindemutter 4.3, die Gewinde-
spindel 15 und die Stellstange 4. Die Gewindespindel
15 weist ein Außengewinde 3.1 auf, das sich maximal
bis zum Drive-Lagerschild 5.1 erstreckt. Die Gewinde-
spindel 15 steht kraft- und/oder formschlüssig mit einer
Stellstange 4 in axialer Wirkverbindung. In Stellrichtung
ist die Stellstange 4 unmittelbar im Bereich des Drive-
Lagerschildes 5.1 als Vierkant ausgebildet und wird von

einer des Querschnitts dieses Vierkants entsprechen-
den Durchführung durch Verdrehen gesichert. Diese
Durchführung ist als Verdrehsicherung 8 ausgeführt. In
Stellrichtung ist die Stellstange 4 im Bereich außerhalb
der Verdrehsicherung 8 als Stab oder als Stange mit ei-
ner glatten Oberfläche ausgebildet, wobei das außer-
halb des Gehäuses 11 befindliche axiale Ende der Stell-
stange 4 gleichzeitig als ein nicht näher dargestelltes
Funktionselement 13 ausgebildet ist. Die Lagerung des
zylinderförmigen Rotors 2 erfolgt mittelbar über die
Stellstange 4 und die Gewindespindel 15.
[0028] Die Gewindespindel 15 ist dabei mittels eines
Notlagers 17 und die mit dieser Gewindespindel 15 in
axialer Wirkverbindung stehende Stellstange 4 mittels
eines Wälzlagers gelagert.
Das Wälzlager 16 ist üblicherweise im Bereich des
Drive-Lagerschildes 5.1 angeordnet, während dessen
das als Gleitlager ausgebildete Notlager 17 im Bereich
der Nodrive-Lagerschildes 5.2 angeordnet ist. Das Not-
lager 17 ist derart ausgebildet, um die das axiale Bewe-
gungsspiel der Gewindespindel 15 in jedem Betriebszu-
stand sicherzustellen. Als Betriebszustand soll jede
Stellung der Gewindespindel 15 verstanden werden, die
sie während ihrer Linearbewegung einnehmen kann.
Wie in Fig. 2b ersichtlich, ist das Nodrive-Lagerschild
5.2 konzentrisch abgestuft und weist damit keine ebene
Außenfläche auf. Die axiale Baulänge des Linearspin-
delmotors 14 wird durch den maximal möglichen Stell-
weg der Gewindespindel 15 und Stellstange 4 be-
stimmt.
[0029] Die Fig. 1b und 1c illustrieren eine schemati-
sche Darstellung des Drive-Lagerschilds 5.1 eines Li-
nearspindelmotors 14 aus dem Stand der Technik im
Axial- und Querschnitt. Das Drive-Lagerschild 5.1 weist
einen zentralen Durchbruch in Form einer kreisrunden
Bohrung auf. Der Durchmesser der Bohrung entspricht
dem Außendurchmesser einer Gewindespindel 15, die
durch die Bohrung axial geführt wird. Gegebenenfalls
kann die Bohrung eine ringförmige Dichtung aufweisen.
Die außerhalb des Drive-Lagerschildes 5.1 angeordne-
te Verdrehsicherung 8 ist mit einem koaxialen Kreis nur
angedeutet.
[0030] Die Fig. 2a zeigt eine schematische Darstel-
lung des erfindungsgemäßen Linearantriebs 1 im Quer-
schnitt. Besonders auffällig ist, dass die Gewindemutter
nicht wie bei herkömmlichen Linearspindelmotoren 14
mit dem Rotor 2 verbunden ist und damit einer Relativ-
bewegung gegenüber dem Stator 10 unterliegt, sondern
an einem Ende der gabelförmigen bzw. hohlzylinder-
segmentförmigen axial beweglichen Stellstange 4 in-
nerhalb des Linearantriebs 1 befestigt ist, und damit ei-
ner Absolutbewegung gegenüber dem Stator 10 unter-
worfen wird. Ein erstes Ende 4.2 der Stellstange 4, das
innerhalb des Rotors 2 angeordnet ist, ist zylinderförmig
ausgebildet und weist eine Gewindemutter auf, die kraft
und formschlüssig von einer Rotorwelle 3 axial ange-
trieben wird. Ein zweites Ende 4.3 der Stellstange 4
weist im Querschnitt zwei diametral zueinander ange-

5 6

EP 1 496 600 A2
5
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55

ordnete Segmente eines Kreisrings auf, wobei die bei-
den Enden 4.2, 4.3 der Stellstange 4 durch zwei Gabel-
schenkel bzw. Hohlsegmente 4.4 miteinander verbun-
den sind. Diese Gabelschenkel 4.4 sind durch den
Durchbruch des Drive-Lagerschilds 5.1 geführt. Das au-
ßerhalb des Gehäuses befindliche zweite Ende 4.3 der
gabelförmigen Stellstange 4 ist zugleich als Koppelstel-
le 7 ausgebildet. Die dargestellte Koppelstelle 7 steht
mit einem Funktionselement 13 in axialer Wirkverbin-
dung, wobei das Funktionselement 13 an die anwen-
dungsspezifischen Aufgaben in besonderer Weise in
seiner Form ausgebildet sein kann. Beispielsweise
kann dieses Funktionselement 13 an seinem der Kop-
pelstelle 7 abgewandten Ende eine Kugel oder einen
als Mitnehmer ausgebildeten Flansch aufweisen. Es ist
weiterhin erkennbar, dass die Rotorwelle 3 mit dem Ro-
tor 2 fest verbunden ist. Die Rotorwelle 3 ist an ihren
axialen Enden mittels zweier Gleitlager 6 gelagert. Im
Gegensatz zu einem herkömmlichen Wälzlager 16 in
Verbindung mit einem Notlager 17 gemäß Fig. 1a ist die
Rotorwelle 3 nun stabiler gelagert und neigt nicht zu ei-
nem Kippspiel.
Die Fig. 2b und 2c illustrieren eine schematische Dar-
stellung des Drive-Lagerschilds 5.1 des erfindungsge-
mäßen Linearantriebs 1 im Axial- und Querschnitt. Es
ist erkennbar, dass das Drive-Lagerschild 5.1 einen
zentralen Durchbruch aufweist, durch den die in der Fig.
2a dargestellte gabelförmige Stellstange 4 geführt und
gehaltert wird. Der Durchbruch ist gleichzeitig als Ver-
drehsicherung 12 ausgebildet. Die Form des Durch-
bruchs entspricht dem Querschnitt der Gabelschenkel
4.4 der Stellstange 4. Die durch das Lagerschild 5.1
austretenden Gabelschenkel 4.4 bzw. Hohlzylinderseg-
mente werden außerhalb des Gehäuses 11 durch ein
hier dargestelltes Koppelelement 7 oder durch einen
nichtdargestellten Steg (im Querschnitt Doppel-T-Form
aufweisend) miteinander verbunden. Zwischen Stell-
stange 4 und Durchbruch kann eine nichtdargestellte
Dichtung ausgebildet sein, die den Linearantrieb 1 ge-
genüber der Umgebung wassergeschützt abdichtet.
Somit kann der Linearantrieb 1 auch in spritzwasserge-
fährdeten Bereichen problemlos eingesetzt werden.
[0031] In Fig. 3 ist der erfindungsgemäße Linearan-
trieb 1 im Axialschnitt dargestellt. Der Linearantrieb 1
weist koaxial angeordnete Statorspulen 10, ein Gehäu-
se 11, einen axial angeordneten Rotor 2 mit Rotorwelle
3, eine mit der Rotorwelle 3 in Wirkverbindung stehende
Stellstange 4 sowie das Gehäuse 11 stirnseitig begren-
zende Lagerschilde 5 auf. Der Rotor 2 ist glockenförmig
mit einer axial angeordneten Rotorwelle 3 mit Außen-
gewinde 3.1 ausgebildet. Der Rotor 2 erstreckt sich in-
nerhalb des Gehäuses 11 des Linearantriebes 1 zwi-
schen den Lagerschilden 5 und weist eine offene Stirn-
seite 2.1 und eine geschlossene Stirnseite 2.2 auf. Die
offene Stirnseite 2.1 des Rotors 2 ist dabei in Richtung
des Drive-Lagerschildes 5.1 und die geschlossene
Stirnseite 2.2 des Rotors 2 in Richtung des Nodrive-La-
gerschildes 5.2 ausgebildet.

An der geschlossenen Stirnseite 2.2 des Rotors 2 ist die
Rotorwelle 3 befestigt, die in ihrer Längserstreckung
über die Stirnseiten 2.1, 2.2 des glockenförmigen Ro-
tors 2 hinaus reicht. Die axialen Enden der Rotorwelle
3 sind als Gleitlagerzapfen 3.2 ausgebildet, die in die an
den Lagerschilden 5 angeordneten Gleitlagern 6 ein-
greifen. Jedes Lagerschild 5.1, 5.2 weist jeweils ein
Gleitlager 6 auf. Die Gleitlager 6 sind als kombinierte
Quer- und Längslager derart ausgebildet, dass sie ra-
diale und axiale Kräfte gleichermaßen aufnehmen kön-
nen. Hierbei wurde ein herkömmliches Gleitlager 6, wel-
ches Lagerbuchsen oder Lagerschalen aufweist, um ei-
ne handelsübliche Kugel ergänzt. Diese Kugel ist inner-
halb des Gleitlagers 6 angeordnet und kontaktiert stirn-
seitig die ebenen axialen Enden der Gleitlagerzapfen
3.2. Anstelle einer Kugel kann auch eine Lagerplatte
eingesetzt werden, die eine ebene und eine ballige Flä-
che aufweist. Dadurch, dass die beiden Gleitlager 6 je-
weils radiale und axiale Kräfte aufnehmen können,
konnte auf ein teures Wälzlager 16 verzichtet werden.
Ferner bildet sich durch die beidseitige Lagerung der
Rotorwelle 3 mit gleichartigen Gleitlagern 6 ein konstan-
ter Luftspalt 9 zwischen Stator 10 und Rotor 2 aus. Die-
se Konstanz bezieht sich einerseits auf den Abstand
zwischen Stator 10 und Rotor 2 in Längserstreckung
des Rotors 2, wobei dieser Luftspalt 9 bevorzugt 0,2 mm
beträgt. Andererseits verändert sich dieser Luftspalt 9
auch nicht im Lastzustand, also bei Strombeaufschla-
gung des Linearantriebs 1. Die ein Außengewinde 3.1
aufweisende Rotorwelle 3 steht erfindungsgemäß mit
einer ein passfähiges Innengewinde 4.1 aufweisenden
Stellstange 4 derart in Wirkverbindung, dass eine Rota-
tionsbewegung in eine translatorische Vorschubbewe-
gung umgesetzt wird. Das erste Ende 4.2 der Stellstan-
ge 4 ist zylinderförmig mit einer Gewindemutter ausge-
bildet und der sich daran anschließende Bereich mit
dem zweiten Ende 4.3 der Stellstange 4 weist die Form
von Hohlzylindersegmenten, hier in der Ausführung als
zwei diametral zueinander angeordnete Segmente ei-
nes Kreisrings, auf. Diese Hohlzylindersegmente 4.4
verbinden als Gabelschenkel 4.4 beide Enden 4.2, 4.3
der Stellstange 4 miteinander.
Das zylinderförmige erste Ende 4.2 der Stellstange 4
greift form- und kraftschlüssig in die Rotorwelle 3 ein,
während dessen das hohlzylinderförmige zweite Ende
4.3 der Stellstange 4 außerhalb des Gehäuses 11 des
Linearantriebs 1 mit einem Funktionselement 13 gekop-
pelt ist. Das Drive-Lagerschild 5.1, durch welches die
Gabelschenkel 4.4 der Stellstange 4 geführt sind, ist mit
einem der Querschnittsform der Gabelschenkel 4.4 ent-
sprechenden Durchbruch ausgebildet. Dieser Durch-
bruch weist gemäß Fig. 3 zwei identische Schlitze bzw.
Nuten auf, wobei diese Schlitze bzw. Nuten diametral
zueinander angeordnet und in einem definierten Radius
um das Gleitlager 6 gekrümmt ausgebildet sind. Der
Durchbruch dient nicht nur als Führung der Stellstange
4, sondern auch als Verdrehsicherung 8. Da die Gabel-
schenkel 4.4 der Stellstange 4 und der Durchbruch ge-

7 8

EP 1 496 600 A2
6
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55

mäß den Fig. 2a bis 2c einen identischen Querschnitt
aufweisen, wird die Stellstange 4 während ihrer Axial-
bewegung folglich geführt und gehaltert.
[0032] Die Stellstange 4 steht in axialer Wirkverbin-
dung mit einem nicht näher dargestellten Funktionsele-
ment 13, wobei die Koppelstelle 7 zwischen der Stell-
stange 4 und des Funktionselements 13 außerhalb des
Gehäuses 11 des Linearantriebs 1 ausgebildet ist. Die-
se Koppelstelle 7 dient als Schnittstelle zwischen der
Stellstange 4 und dem Funktionselement 13. Das Funk-
tionselement 13 dient verschiedenen Aufgaben, bei-
spielsweise zur Öffnen und Schließen eines Ventils oder
der Verstellung eines Scheinwerfers bei Kraftfahrzeu-
gen.
Der Linearantrieb 1 ist damit universell für verschiedene
Aufgabenfelder einsetzbar, denn eine Adaption des er-
findungsgemäßen Linearantriebs 1 an die gewünschte
Aufgabenstellung erfordert nur das Ankoppeln eines
entsprechend ausgebildeten Funktionselements 13 an
das außerhalb des Gehäuses des Linearantriebs 1 be-
findliche zweite Ende 4.3 der Stellstange 4 mittels der
Koppelstelle 7. Diese ist bevorzugt als Bajonett ausge-
bildet, um hohe Montagekräfte auf den Rotor 2 zu ver-
meiden.
[0033] Eine perspektivische Gesamtdarstellung des
erfindungsgemäßen Linearantriebs 1 stellt Fig. 4 dar.
Die Stromversorgung des Linearantriebs 1 erfolgt mit-
tels eines das Gehäuse des Linearantriebs 1 durchdrin-
genden elektrischen Anschlusses 18. Es ist erkennbar,
dass die mit dem Funktionselement 13 in axialer Wirk-
verbindung stehende Stellstange 4 mittels eines Kop-
pelelements 7 gekoppelt ist. Die Gabelschenkel 4.4 der
Stellstange 4 sind durch den als Verdrehsicherung 12
ausgebildeten Durchbruch das Drive-Lagerschild 5.1
formschlüssig geführt und gehaltert.

LISTE DER BEZUGSZEICHEN

[0034]

1 Linearantrieb
2 Rotor
2.1 offene Stirnseite des Rotors
2.2 geschlossene Stirnseite des Rotors
3 Rotorwelle
3.1 Außengewinde
3.2 Gleitlagerzapfen
4 Stellstange
4.1 Innengewinde
4.2 erstes Ende der Stellstange
4.3 zweites Ende der Stellstange
4.4 Gabelschenkel, Hohlzylindersegmente
5 Lagerschilde
5.1 Drive-Lagerschild
5.2 Nodrive-Lagerschild
6 Gleitlager
6.1 Kugel
7 Koppelstelle

8 Verdrehsicherung im Stand der Technik
9 Luftspalt
10 Stator
11 Gehäuse
12 Verdrehsicherung, Durchbruch
13 Funktionselement
14 Linearspindelmotor
15 Gewindespindel
16 Wälzlager
17 Notlager
18 elektrischer Anschluss

Patentansprüche

1. Linearantrieb für Stellvorgänge zur Erzeugung
translatorischer Vorschubbewegungen, minde-
stens aufweisend ein Gehäuse (11), Lagerschilde
(5), die dieses Gehäuse (11) stirnseitig begrenzen,
einen Stator (10), einen Rotor (2) mit einer axial an-
geordneten mit einem Außengewinde (3.1) ausge-
bildeten Rotorwelle (3), eine Gewindemutter und ei-
ne bewegliche Schraube/Spindel, dadurch ge-
kennzeichnet, dass der Rotor (2) glockenförmig
mit einer offenen Stirnseite (2.1) und einer ge-
schlossenen Stirnseite (2.2) ausgebildet ist, und ei-
ne die Rotorwelle (3) mindestens teilweise ein-
schließende und an der offenen Stirnseite (2.1) des
Rotors (2) herausgeführte Stellstange (4) für die Li-
nearbewegung vorgesehen ist, wobei deren im Ro-
tor befindliches erstes Ende (4.2) eine passfähige
auf der Rotorwelle (3) mit Außengewinde (3.1) auf-
sitzende Gewindemutter aufweist, und die Rotor-
welle an ihren axialen Enden über beide Stirnseiten
(2.1, 2.2) des glockenförmigen Rotors (2) hinaus
reichende Gleitlagerzapfen (3.2) aufweist, die je-
weils in einem Gleitlager (6) geführt sind und die an
oder innerhalb der Lagerschilde (5) platziert sind.

2. Linearantrieb nach Anspruch 1, dadurch gekenn-
zeichnet, dass die Stellstange (4) gabelförmig
oder hohlsegmentförmig ausgebildet ist und das er-
ste Ende (4.2) sowie das zweite Ende (4.3) der
Stellstange (4) durch mindestens einen Gabel-
schenkel (4.4) miteinander verbunden sind.

3. Linearantrieb nach Anspruch 1 oder 2, dadurch ge-
kennzeichnet, dass der oder die als Hohlzylinder-
segmente ausgebildeten Gabelschenkel (4.4)
durch einen dem Querschnitt des oder der Gabel-
schenkel(s) (4.4) angepassten Durchbruch (12)
des Drive-Lagerschildes (5.1) torsionssicher und
formschlüssig mit einer Spielpassung geführt sind.

4. Linearantrieb nach einem der

Ansprüche

1 bis 3,
dadurch gekennzeichnet, dass der Durchbruch
des Drive-Lagerschild (5.1) als Verdrehsicherung
(8) ausgebildet ist.

9 10

EP 1 496 600 A2

7

5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55

5. Linearantrieb nach Anspruch 1, dadurch gekenn-
zeichnet, dass die Mantelflächen der Gleitlager-
zapfen (3.2) der Rotorwelle (3) in einer Lagerbuch-
se oder in Lagerschalen des Gleitlagers (6) gleiten
und die Stirnseiten der Gleitlagerzapfen durch La-
gerplatten axial im Gleitlager (6) eingefasst sind.

6. Linearantrieb nach Anspruch 5, dadurch gekenn-
zeichnet, dass anstelle einer Lagerplatte eine Ku-
gel verwendet wird, die stirnseitig den Gleitlager-
zapfen (3.2) einfasst und kontaktiert.

7. Linearantrieb nach einem der Ansprüche 1 bis 6,
dadurch gekennzeichnet, dass der Luftspalt (9)
zwischen Stator (10) und Rotor (2) in Richtung der
Längserstreckung des Rotors (2) konstant ausge-
bildet ist und zwischen 0,1 und 0,3 mm beträgt.

8. Linearantrieb nach einem der Ansprüche 1 bis 7,
dadurch gekennzeichnet, dass die Stellstange
(4) in axialer Wirkverbindung mit einem Funktions-
element (13) gekoppelt ist, wobei die Koppelstelle
(7) zwischen der Stellstange (4) und dem Funkti-
onselement (13) außerhalb des Gehäuses (11) des
Linearantriebs (1) ausgebildet ist.

11 12

EP 1 496 600 A2
8

EP 1 496 600 A2
9

EP 1 496 600 A2
10

EP 1 496 600 A2
11

• Bibliographie

Beschreibung
Ansprüche
Zeichnungen

Introduction to Linear Actuators:

Precision Linear Motion Accomplished Easily and Economically

Part

2

of 2

In Part 1, we discussed the basics of a stepper motor-based linear actuator, one of the

most effective ways to convert rotary into linear motion for a wide range of applications. In Part

2, we will explain how to accurately size a linear actuator.

How Is a Linear Actuator Sized?

Sizing a linear actuator is quite easy once you understand the basic needs of the

application. The following is the minimum information needed to begin sizing the proper

device.

1. Linear force needed to move the load, expressed in Newtons (N)

2. Linear distance the load needs to be moved, expressed in meters (M)

3. Time required to move the load, expressed in seconds (s)

4. Table 1 – illustrated below

5. Performance curves illustrated in Haydon linear actuator catalogs

Power Requirements

The power required to meet the application is now calculated using the parameters above.

This will allow the user to easily choose the correct motor framesize needed.

P linear = (distance traveled in Meters) (force in Newtons)
(Time to travel the distance in Seconds) = watts

Once the power is known in watts, choose the proper frame size of the actuator as listed in Table

1. All stepper motor linear actuators require a drive to send the pulses to the motor. As seen in

Table 1, the power for both an L/R drive and a chopper drive is listed. Most applications today

use an electronic chopper drive. Unless the application is battery-powered (as in a handheld

portable device), a chopper drive is highly recommended to get maximum performance from the

linear actuator.

1

Table 1. Frame Sizes and Performance Based On Required Output Power

Hybrid Single Stack

Max. Linear Power (watts)

Series Size Max Force (N)

Linear Travel
Per Step
(micron) L/R Drive Chopper Drive

21000 8

4

5 1.5 – 40 0.3 0.37

28000 11 90

3

–

5

0 0.27 0.51

35000 14 220 1.5 – 50 0 .59 1.5

43000 17 220 1.5 – 50 1.02 2.31

57000 23 880 4 – 50 1.47

6

87000 34 2200 12.7 – 127 N/A 21.19

Hybrid Double Stack

Max. Linear Power (watts)
Series Size Max Force (N)
Linear Travel
Per Step
(micron) L/R Drive Chopper Drive

28000 11 133 3 – 50 N/A 1.14

35000 14 220 15.8 – 127 N/A 2.7

43000 17 350 15.8 – 127 N/A 4.62

57000 23 880 12.7 – 127 N/A 10.08

Canstack

Max. Linear Power (watts)
Series Size Max Force (N)
Linear Travel
Per Step
(micron) L/R Drive Chopper Drive

15000 15mm

7

20 0.025 0.03

20000 20mm 16 25 – 100 0.05 0.06

Z20000 20mm 35 25 – 100 0.09 0.23

26000 26mm 50 6 – 100 0.17 0.18

Z26000 26mm 80 6 – 100 0.18 0.48

36000 36mm 160 3 – 100 0.23 0.69

46000 46mm 260 12.7 – 400 0.55 1.13

2

Velocity

After calculating the mechanical power needed to meet the application requirements, the

linear velocity in inches per second is calculated using the following equation:

Velocity linear = required travel distance (in)
Time to achieve travel (s) = in / s

Force vs. Linear Velocity Curves

Once the required actuator frame size is determined and the linear velocity is calculated,

the “force vs. linear velocity curve” is used to determine the proper resolution of the actuator

lead screw.

Figure 1. Size 17 Actuator – Force vs. Linear Velocity Chart

Actuator Life

There are many variables that ultimately determine life of the actuator. The best way to

predict life is through application testing, which is highly recommended. There is, however, a

first approximation technique that can help estimate this value. The stepper-motor prime mover

contains no brushes to wear out and also utilizes precision, long-life ball bearings. The main

3

wear component is the power nut. The number of cycles can be summarized as a function of

load, as illustrated in Figure 2 below.

Figure 2. Cycles on a Standard Stroke Actuator as a Function of % Max Load

Example #1

Application Requirements:

Req’d Force (lbs) = 15 lbs

Req’d Travel (in) = 3 in

Time To Achieve Travel (s) = 6s

Desired Cycles = 1,000,000

Linear Velocity (in/s) = 3 in / 6 s = 0.5 in/s

• COMPUTATION: Calculate the initial rated force based on required # of cycles:

Step 1:

Refer to Figure 2 and determine the correct sizing factor needed in order for the actuator

to achieve the required 1,000,000 cycles. This is illustrated with the blue line in Figure 3 below.

4

Figure 3. Safety Factor Needed To Meet 1,000,000 Cycles

Step 2:

As indicated in the chart, in order to get 1,000,000 cycles, a factor of 0.5 must be used

when sizing the actuator. The initial rated force required in order to meet the load after

1,000,000 cycles is therefore…

15 lbs / 0.5 = 30 lbs

Step 3:

Convert lbs to Newtons (N)

30 lbs / (0.225 lbs / N) = 133 N

• COMPUTATION: Determine required travel in meters

3 in x (0.0254 M / in) = 0.0762 M

• COMPUTATION: Choose the proper frame size actuator using the selector

chart

Step 1:

Determine the required linear mechanical power in watts

P linear = (133N x 0.0762M) / 6s = 1.7 N-M / s = 1.7 watts
Step 2:

Use Table 1 to determine the correct frame size actuator. As discussed earlier in the

aticle, most applications will use a chopper drive to supply the required input pulses to the

stepper motor. The 43000 (Size 17 Hybrid) was chosen for this application, as highlighted in the

“Hybrid Single Stack” section of Table 1.

5

Hybrid Single Stack

Max. Power; watts

Series Size Max Force (N)
Linear Travel /
Step (micron) L/R Chopper

21000 8 45 1.5 – 40 0.3 0.37

28000 11 90 3 – 50 0.27 0.51

35000 14 220 1.5 – 50 0 .59 1.5
43000 17 220 1.5 – 50 1.02 2.31
57000 23 880 4 – 50 1.47 6
87000 34 2200 12.7 – 127 N/A 21.19

• COMPUTATION: Determine the proper resolution using the “Force vs Linear Velocity”

chart

As determined by the life calculation performed above, an initial load of 30 lbs is to be

moved at a velocity of 0.5in/s. The resulting lead screw resolution required in the Size 17 hybrid

motor is 0.00048” (J resolution), as indicated in Figure 4 below.

Figure 4. Lead screw resolution required in the Size 17 hybrid motor is 0.00048” (J

resolution), as indicated.

6

COMPUTATION: Verify selection by checking force at the required step rate

Earlier in the paper, it was discussed that the lead screw advances based on the number of

input steps to the motor. Haydon performance curves are expressed in both “in/sec” (as

illustrated in Figure 4) and also in “steps/sec” (Figure 5). As an effective check, verify the

selection by checking the force at the required step rate.

Resolution chosen 0.00048 in/step (“J” screw)

Req’d linear velocity 0.5 in/s

Req’d step rate (0.5 in/s) / (0.00048 in/step) = 1041 steps/s

Figure 5.

Figures 4 and 5 are good illustrations of how the pulses to the stepper motor translate into

linear motion through the lead screw.

Conclusion

Through the use of stepper motor-based linear actuators, rotary-to-linear motion takes

place inside the motor itself. This method offers unique advantages over alternative approaches,

such as fewer components, smaller overall footprint size, high force output, and long stroke

lengths. What’s more, the high precision, repeatability, long component are especially attractive,

as are the high resolutions possible.

7

8

In addition, the use of the stepper motor translates to a lower overall cost for OEM

equipment builders in terms of development and production. Most importantly, this method can

be utilized in a variety of vertical markets, including medical, laboratory instrumentation,

semiconductor, aerospace, and virtually any other application where precision linear motion is

required.

About HaydonKerk Motion Solutions

HaydonKerk Motion Solutions is the joining of two world class brands in the field of

linear motion; Haydon™ and Kerk®. Together, the company now offers a broad range of

precision linear motion products. Recognized as a leading manufacturer of stepper motor based

linear actuators, rotary motors, lead screw assemblies, and linear rail and guide systems used in

niche market applications, HaydonKerk Motion Solutions offers high performance with its range

of reliable, precise designs. HaydonKerk Motion Solutions has developed industry-renowned

brands built upon its technical innovation, versatility, customization, product durability, and

dedicated customer service. For more information, please visit our website at

http://www.HaydonKerk.com.

###

http://www.haydonkerk.com/

CEP June 2012 www.aiche.org/cep 33

Back to Basics

Valves control the flow of a fluid through a piping system by opening, closing, or partially obstructing a flow path. All valves require actuation, which may
be manual (i.e., by a person) or automated — i.e., powered
by pneumatic or hydraulic pressure or by electricity. This
article focuses on electric valve actuators.
An electric actuator is an electromechanical device
that interprets a signal from the control system, generates
torque or thrust via a motor, and positions a valve
accordingly. Electric actuators are operated by a
three-phase or single-phase alternating-current
(AC) or direct-current (DC) power source, and
they have a manual override device, such as a
hand wheel, chain wheel, or operation nut, for
use in the event of a power loss. They can be
operated locally or from a central control room.
The basic electric actuator consists of an elec-
tric motor, a gear train, a control unit, a manual
override device, motor controls, and a valve
interface connection where the actuator’s motion
is transferred to the valve (Figure 1). It may also
have integral local or remote-mounted controls.

Electric motor
All electric actuators have an electric motor
that generates torque. These motors are three-
phase AC, single-phase AC, or DC powered. They
are specially designed to have high starting torque,
and are mechanically coupled with the actuator
gear train. Most electric actuator motors are ther-
mally protected to prevent overheating and dam-
age from excessive valve and actuator operation.

Gear train
The gear train multiplies the torque generated by the
electric motor and reduces the speed of the electric motor at
the valve interface. The gear train is characterized by a gear
train ratio, which is the number of input turns divided by the
number of resulting output turns. For example, a gearbox
with a ratio of 8:1 requires eight turns at the input of the
gearbox to yield one output turn.

Actuators automate valves by converting an input
signal into motion. This article explains the basics

of electric actuator design and explores
the different types of electric actuators.

Justin Ledger
AUMA Actuators, Inc.

Harness Electricity to
Operate Valves

p Figure 1. Electric actuators generate torque or thrust with a motor, and position a valve
according to an input signal.

Motor Controls

Gear Train
(Worm Gearbox)

Manual Override
(Hand Wheel)

Valve Interface
Connection

Control Unit

Electric Motor

Electrical
Connection

Reprinted with permission from CEP (Chemical Engineering Progress), June 2012.
Copyright © 2012 American Institute of Chemical Engineers (AIChE).

34 www.aiche.org/cep June 2012

CEP

Back to Basics

Depending on the size and speed requirements of the
application, various gear types, such as worm gears, spur
gears, and bevel gears, can be used within the actuator gear
train.
A worm gearbox consists of two components, a worm-
wheel and a screw-shaped worm gear (Figure 2). The gear
train ratio of a worm gearbox is defined as the number of
teeth on the wormwheel divided by the number of threads on
the worm gear. Typically, the worm gear can be considered
a single tooth, because it acts like a screw with a single start
that meshes with the wormwheel. This simplifies the gear
train ratio to the number of teeth on the wormwheel.
A spur gearbox consists of two gears mounted on paral-
lel shafts, a smaller driver gear and a larger driven gear
(Figure 3). The gear train ratio of a spur gear is the number
of teeth on the driven gear divided by the number of teeth
on the driver gear. For example, if the driven gear has
64 teeth and the driver gear has eight teeth, the gear train
ratio is 8:1. This ratio defines the number of driver gear

revolutions required to turn the driven gear one complete
revolution.
Similar to the spur gear, a bevel gearbox has a smaller
pinion gear that drives a larger ring gear (Figure 4). How-
ever, instead of being mounted on parallel shafts, the shafts
of a bevel gearbox are oriented at an angle of up to 90 deg.
A bevel gearbox’s gear train ratio is the number of teeth on
the ring gear divided by the number of teeth on the pinion
gear.
The efficiency of a gear train depends on the type of
gearing selected, the lubrication used on the gearing, and
other factors such as friction and heat. To calculate a gear
train’s actual output torque, the input torque is multiplied
by the gear train ratio and the efficiency. The efficiency of
the gears is determined by comparing the friction factor
associated with the gearing material to the angles of the
gear teeth themselves. Spur and bevel gearboxes typically
have efficiencies of around 90%, while worm gearboxes are
generally about 35% efficient.
The overall mechanical advantage of a gearbox is the
output torque divided by the input torque. The mechanical
advantage is an important parameter because it allows either
the output torque of a gearbox to be calculated based on the
input torque provided, or the necessary input torque to be
calculated based on the output torque required by the appli-
cation. Alternatively, the mechanical advantage can also be
calculated by multiplying the ratio and efficiency of the gear
train.

Control unit
The actuator gear train interfaces with the control unit.
The control unit measures the number of actuator output
revolutions and compares that to a setpoint to determine
the valve’s position. It has a position feedback device, and
position and torque limit switches that protect the valve
and actuator against overload and damage. Limit switches
operate via a simple electrical circuit — when the switch
is on, the circuit is closed, and electricity travels to the
actuator motor; when the switch is off, the circuit is open,

p Figure 2. Worm gearboxes typically have high gear train ratios, as there
are many more teeth on the wormwheel than on the worm gear.

q Figure 3. Spur gearboxes typically have low gear train ratios and high
efficiencies.

p Figure 4. Bevel gearboxes typically have low gear train ratios and have
rotating shafts oriented at an angle up to 90 deg.

Pinion Gear

Ring Gear

Worm Gear

Wormwheel

Driver Gear

Driven Gear

CEP June 2012 www.aiche.org/cep 35

and electricity does not flow to the actuator, which stops the
valve’s motion.
Position limit switches are provided at a minimum for
both the full-open and full-closed valve positions. Limit
switches can also be used to stop the valve at predetermined
intermediate positions. For example, during process startup
and shutdown, intermediate position switches can be used to
regulate flow through the valve and pipeline.
Torque limit switches prevent damage to the valve by
measuring the actuator’s output torque and shutting off
the motor if the output torque rises above a preset value.
Depending on the application, the actuator can be configured
to stop based on either position or torque limit switches.
Electric actuators may either be intrusive or nonintru-
sive. The conventional intrusive electric actuator utilizes an
electromechanical control unit in which both valve position
and required torque are mechanically measured and micro
switches are activated when the end of travel or a maxi-
mum torque value is reached. Position and torque limits are
mechanically set inside the actuator with a tool, typically a
screwdriver.
Electronic nonintrusive actuators use high-resolution
magnetic transmitters instead of micro switches to mea-
sure valve position. Both position and torque limit settings
are made with the local controls at the actuator or with
remote controls at a computer. These settings are configured
without physically opening the actuator (hence the name
nonintrusive).

Manual override
In the event of a power outage, a manual override such
as a hand wheel, chain wheel, or operation nut can be used
to control the valve. A hand wheel (Figure 5) is sized to
minimize the rimpull, i.e., the amount of force required to
manually operate the valve. A chain wheel (Figure 6) is typi-
cally utilized when the actuator is mounted in a remote or
inaccessible location. An operation nut (Figure 7) is appro-
priate when a large number of rotations (e.g., more than
about 100 turns of the handwheel) or a large rimpull
(e.g., more than about 80 lb) is required to operate the valve.
An operation nut can also be used as an alternative to a chain
wheel when the actuator is not easily accessible.
For safety reasons, the manual override must not be
engaged while the electric motor is operating — i.e., the hand
wheel, chain wheel, or operation nut should not rotate while
the actuator is being operated electrically. Thus, most manual
overrides have a local declutch mechanism to remove the
electric motor from the actuator gear train and engage the
manual override device. Upon return of electric power to the
actuator, the declutch mechanism automatically engages the
electric motor and disengages the manual override device.

p Figure 6. A chain wheel manual override may be used if an actuator is
located in a remote or inaccessible area.

q Figure 7. When a large torque is required to operate the valve, an
operation nut may be used as the manual override device.

p Figure 5. A hand wheel is one type of manual override device provided
for electric actuators.

Article continues on next page

36 www.aiche.org/cep June 2012 CEP

Back to Basics

Motor controller
Electric actuators require a motor controller to direct
the performance of the electric motor. The motor control-
ler (which is separate from the control unit) is responsible
for starting and stopping the motor and selecting forward
or reverse rotation. It consists of a control power supply,
reversing motor contactors, and local operation controls
(e.g., push buttons and lights to indicate actuator operation).
The control power supply, used for safety reasons, is typi-
cally 24 VDC or 115 VAC and supplements the main
three-phase, single-phase, or DC motor power supply.
The control power supply acts as a signal and links the
actuator and control room (i.e., its voltage runs between the
push buttons and the electric actuator). When the actuator
receives a control signal, the reversing motor contactor allows
power from the main motor power supply to flow to the
actuator, which moves the valve in either the open or closed
direction. Low-voltage power supply is used at the push but-
ton because it is safer than the main power supply. Further-
more, the cost to wire the control power supply is less than
the cost to wire the main power supply from the push button
to the actuator because the required wire size is smaller.
Plant engineers and operators can monitor the valve and
actuator on a local display (Figure 8) or in a control room.
Many actuators display the current valve position; some
have the ability to display and store complete diagnostic
information, such as the number of operations in the previ-
ous 24 hours or the amount of torque required to complete
a valve stroke. This information helps the operator monitor
the performance of the process and predict maintenance
requirements.
Electric actuator controls can be as simple as a push but-
ton with indicating lights to signal when the valve reaches
the open or closed position, or as complicated as a full LCD
display with remote control capabilities.

Output motion
An electric actuator and the valve it operates are typi-
cally directly connected. A direct-mount electric actuator is
bolted to the valve’s mounting flange. However, the actuator
can be mounted separate from the valve and connected via
a drive shaft or an extended threaded stem. This typically is
required when the valve is buried or in a vault and the opera-
tor needs easy access to the actuator.
The actuator output mechanism can vary and depends
on the valve interface. For torque-only applications, a shaft
with a keyway is often used to operate the valve. For thrust
applications, a threaded stem translates the torque produced
in the actuator to a linear force at the valve. Special bearings
within the actuator support the linear force.
If the application involves high temperatures, the actua-
tor must be able to withstand thermal expansion of the
valve stem. Actuator drive train damage can be avoided by
incorporating an output drive with a linear spring to allow
for valve stem expansion.
The actuator’s output motion may be linear or rotary;
rotary output may be multi-turn or part-turn.

Multi-turn actuators
Gate, globe, pinch, and diaphragm valves are the most
common types of multi-turn valves. A multi-turn valve
requires more than one full revolution of the actuator to
operate the valve. In other words, it requires more than
360 deg. of rotational motion to complete one full valve
stroke (i.e., to run from the fully open position to the fully
closed position).
Depending on the type of valve, the actuator may operate
an input shaft or a threaded stem on the valve. Valve stem
threads convert the torque generated by the actuator into
a linear force or thrust. This force is typically measured in
pounds, ounces, or kilo-Newtons.
In some large multi-turn applications, the use of an
electric actuator alone may not be cost effective or generate
enough torque. In either of these cases, a multi-turn gear-
box can be inserted between the multi-turn actuator and the
valve. This increases the overall output torque generated by
the actuator, but also increases the number of turns and the
time required to stroke the valve. The torque increase gener-
ated by the multi-turn gearbox is defined by its mechanical
advantage, which depends on the type of gearing, the gear
ratio, and the efficiency of the gearing. The number of turns
increases by the overall gear train ratio of the multi-turn
gearbox. Most multi-turn gearboxes use either spur or bevel
gearing due to their inherently high efficiencies. However,
worm gears can also be used for specific multi-turn appli-
cations. An example of a large application that requires
a multi-turn gearbox is a main steam isolation valve at a
power plant.

p Figure 8. Electric actuators can be operated via manual switches or a
local display panel.

CEP June 2012 www.aiche.org/cep 37

Part-turn actuators
Part-turn actuators are used with valves that require less
than one full output revolution to complete the valve stroke,
such as butterfly, plug, and ball valves. The quarter-turn actua-
tor, which provides approximately 90 deg. of actuator output
rotation, is the most common part-turn actuator. Part-turn
actuators provide only torque; they do not generate thrust.
Direct-mount part-turn electric actuators are suitable
for many part-turn applications. Part-turn gearboxes can
be selected to increase the output torque. Because part-turn
gearboxes utilize worm gearing, multiple input turns are
needed to generate 90 deg. of output at the valve interface.
Therefore, a part-turn gearbox must be coupled with a multi-
turn actuator in order to generate the large torque required
for a part-turn valve. It is usually more cost-effective to
couple a multi-turn actuator with a part-turn gearbox than it
is to purchase a large direct-mount part-turn electric actuator.

Linear actuators
Linear actuators use linear motion to produce thrust,
rather than torque, to open and close a valve. Linear valves
include gate, globe, pinch, and diaphragm valves. In true
linear actuators, a rod or cylinder pushes and pulls the valve
open and closed instead of a threaded stem.

One way to generate a linear force is with a multi-turn
actuator coupled to a linear gearbox. The linear gearbox
converts the rotation and torque from the multi-turn actuator
into a linear motion and force by means of threaded compo-
nents within the linear gearbox (Figure 9).
Linear applications can have size requirements similar to
those of either multi-turn or part-turn applications. However,
only thrust is considered when selecting a suitable linear
electric actuator.

Applications
Electric actuators can be found anywhere a fluid process
is automatically controlled by a valve. This can include
water and wastewater treatment plants, power plants, and
petrochemical plants, among other industrial applications.
For example, at a conventional power plant, electric actua-
tors can control the volume of discharged water from a
boiler, the ratio of air to fuel fed into an incinerator, the flow
of high-pressure steam to a turbine, and they can operate
dampers that control the amount of exhaust that exits the
power plant. Solar-powered electric actuators have recently
been used in remotely located farm irrigation systems.
Based on the application, the environment in which the
electric actuator operates can drastically vary. Actuators can
require coatings, greases, seals for high- or low-temperature
processes, and special industry approvals. For example, in a
petrochemical plant where explosive gases may be present,
explosionproof actuators may be required.

Closing thoughts
It is important to remember that electric actuators are
ultimately responsible for automating and controlling
valves, and they are often added to existing manual valves to
improve automation control in a system. Electric actuators
are a critical tool for industrial applications that require the
precise control of fluids and chemicals.

p Figure 9. Linear gearboxes convert the torque generated in multi-turn
actuators into linear thrust via threaded components.

Justin Ledger is a project manager for AUMA Actuators, Inc. (100
Southpointe Blvd., Canonsburg, PA 15317; Phone: (724) 743–2862;
Fax: (724) 743–4711; Email: justin.ledger@auma-usa.com; Website:
www.auma-usa.com). In this role, he focuses on international projects.
He works closely with both outside and inside sales departments,
interfaces across all departments within AUMA and with its vendors
and representatives, and serves as the company’s training coordinator.
He has been with AUMA for 6 years, during which he has worked in
both the engineering and sales departments. He earned a mechanical
engineering degree from Pennsylvania State Univ. and will complete an
MBA from the Joseph M. Katz Graduate School of Business at the Univ.
of Pittsburgh later this year.

Additional reading
1. Gordon, B., “Valves 101: Types, Materials, Selection,” Chem.

Eng. Progress, 105 (3), pp. 42–45 (Mar. 2009).

CEP

Rotary Input from Multi-Turn Acutator

Actuator Mounting
Flange

Internal Threaded Components
to Convert Rotary Input to

Linear Output

Valve Mounting Flange

Linear Output

www.thomsonlinear.com

Miniature Components and Systems

Thomson performance, precision and reliability – in miniature form

2

www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Thomson – Your Source for Miniature Machine Components
A single source for miniature components engineered to work together

Thomson produces the widest selection of miniature linear and rotary components
that are engineered to work together. This equates to faster design times, less
installation problems, and higher performance and reliability.

The Thomson family of miniature products provide linear thrust and guidance
or rotary motion control in the smallest packages available. They all benefit
from Thomson’s long experience in motion control engineering and have all the
advantages and features offered for standard size products.

Thomson also provides customized solutions. Whether you need alternative
materials, customized nut geometry, custom configured bearings, special end
machining or mounting features, Thomson has the solution.

Miniature Metric Linear Bearings

Miniature Metric Rolled Ball Screws

Glide Screw™

Compact and cost competitive, these new bearings can
help bring high performance linear guidance to miniature
equipment.

The new line of rolled ball screws from Thomson are
designed to offer industry leading capacity, smoothness
and quiet operation. The design allows for simple
customization and cost effectiveness.

By combining a lead screw and a linear bearing, the GlideScrew
allows designers to reduce the footprint of their equipment, improve
uptime and reduce cost of ownership of the end product.

NEW PRODUCT!

NEW PRODUCT!

NEW PRODUCT!

3

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

The Thomson Advantage

Smaller components enable designers to reduce the size and weight of their
end product, resulting in products that are smaller, lighter, and less expensive to
produce. A smaller product will also reduce packaging and transportation cost,
while lessening the overall environmental impact of the equipment. Choosing
Thomson as your supplier brings some additional advantages as well.

Miniature BrakesMiniature Lead Screws

CustomizationMiniature Linear Motion Systems

Thomson Advantages

Advantage Benefits

Widest variety of miniature linear products on the
market

• Expedited design time
• Single source of engineering support
• Consolidated supply base

Products designed to work together • Online sizing and selection tools for easy design
• Fewer installation problems
• Higher peformance equipment

Easy customization • Custom sizes, finishes, materials and more
• Optimized cost, size and performance

Genuine Thomson quality • Fewer defects and field failures
• Lower overall cost of ownership

Global company • Sales and support around the globe
• Safe partner with proven track record
• Knowledge about local standards and preferences

Thomson offers customized
solutions for all our products.
The customization can
be anything from a minor
adjustment to a completely new
design. See page 15 or contact
us for more information!

Thomson Deltran Power-off
brakes have been providing low
cost, high performance solutions
in small diameters for over 45
years. We offer brakes with the
highest torque to diameter ratios
on the market.

Thomson was the first company in the world to present
a linear motion system. Today we offer a large range of
different models including miniature sizes.

Thomson is a global leader in lead screw technology.
Our broad offering, high quality and ability to customize
set Thomson apart.

4 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Linear Motion Miniature Products Overview*

Product Image Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page

Basic
Specifications

Unit of Measure Anti-backlash
or Preload

Feature

No or Low
Maintenance

Required

Noise

Level

Product
Cost
Level

Stiffness
Properties

Accuracy
Properties

Corrosion
Resistance
Properties

Thrust
Capacity

Level

Guidance
Capacity

Level

Metric Inch

Lead Screws Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
MTS Flange Mount Supernut (MTS)

8
6 – 20 mm

3/16 – 3/4 in. • • • –

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Anti-Backlash Supernut (AFT)

8
10 mm

3/8 – 1/2 in. • • • • –

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
XC Anti-Backlash Supernut (XC)

8
6 – 24 mm
3/16 – 1 in. • • • • –

Ball Screws Miniature Metric Rolled (TSI)

9

6 – 14 mm • –

NEW!

Linear Bearings 60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)

10 1/8 – 1/4 in. • –

60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)

10
3 – 12 mm • –

NEW!

60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Super Ball Bushing Bearing (SP)

10
12 – 40 mm

1/2 – 1-1/2 in. • • • –

Profile Rail Guides Microguide™ (TSR) 11 5 – 15 mm • • –

Glide Screws GlideScrew™ (GS)
12 4 – 10 mm

3/16 – 3/8 in. • • •NEW!

Linear Motion Systems MicroStage® (MS)

13

MS25: 50 x 25
MS33: 60 × 33 • • •

Rotary Motion Miniature Products Overview*

Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page

Basic
Specifications

Unit of Measure Manual
Release
Function

No
Maintenance

Required

Noise
Level

Product
Cost
Level

Torque
to

Size Ratio

Energy
Efficieny

Level
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties

Backlash
Level

Expected
Life

Metric Inch

Brakes Metric Power-off Brake (MBRP) 14 37 – 75 mm • • • •

Spring-set Power-off Brake (FSB) 14 34.8 – 44.5 mm • • •

Miniature Components and Systems Overview

Products providing thrust

Products providing guidance

Products providing both thrust and guidance

Products providing rotary motion control

5

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Linear Motion Miniature Products Overview*
Product Image Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page
Basic
Specifications
Unit of Measure Anti-backlash
or Preload
Feature
No or Low
Maintenance
Required
Noise
Level
Product
Cost
Level
Stiffness
Properties
Accuracy
Properties
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties
Thrust
Capacity
Level
Guidance
Capacity

LevelMetric Inch

Lead Screws Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
MTS Flange Mount Supernut (MTS)
8
6 – 20 mm
3/16 – 3/4 in. • • • –
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Anti-Backlash Supernut (AFT)
8
10 mm
3/8 – 1/2 in. • • • • –
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
XC Anti-Backlash Supernut (XC)
8
6 – 24 mm
3/16 – 1 in. • • • • –
Ball Screws Miniature Metric Rolled (TSI)
9

6 – 14 mm • –
NEW!

Linear Bearings 60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)
10 1/8 – 1/4 in. • –
60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)
10
3 – 12 mm • –
NEW!
60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and
Super Ball Bushing Bearing (SP)
10
12 – 40 mm
1/2 – 1-1/2 in. • • • –
Profile Rail Guides Microguide™ (TSR) 11 5 – 15 mm • • –
Glide Screws GlideScrew™ (GS)
12 4 – 10 mm
3/16 – 3/8 in. • • •NEW!
Linear Motion Systems MicroStage® (MS) 13
MS25: 50 x 25
MS33: 60 × 33 • • •
Rotary Motion Miniature Products Overview*
Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page
Basic
Specifications
Unit of Measure Manual
Release
Function
No
Maintenance
Required
Noise
Level
Product
Cost
Level
Torque
to
Size Ratio
Energy
Efficieny
Level
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties
Backlash
Level
Expected
Life
Metric Inch
Brakes Metric Power-off Brake (MBRP) 14 37 – 75 mm • • • •
Spring-set Power-off Brake (FSB) 14 34.8 – 44.5 mm • • •

Good

Better

Best

* These are a small selection from our standard product ranges. More product ranges are
available and most products also come in additional sizes and versions. Thomson specializes
in making customized products to meet your exact specifications. See page 15 for more
information.

6 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Diagnostic and Life Science Instruments
• Chemistry analyzers
• Hematology instruments
• Histology and microscopy instruments
• Molecular biology instruments
• Lab automation

Applications

Miniature linear motion components are ideal for applications where precise
movement of small loads is critical. In particular, they add value in instruments for
medical diagnostics, test and measurement equipment and engraving and printing,
as well as a broad range of fluid pumping and pick-and-place applications.

Fluid pumps benefit from the smooth,
precise motion of Thomson miniature
components.

Fluid handling machines can rely on Thomson
miniature components for every axis of motion.

Fluid Pumping
• Medical infusion pumps
• Industrial fluid pumps
• Lubrication pumps
• Syringe pumps

MRBP Brake

Miniature Metric Bearing and
60 Case LinearRace Shafting

MicroGuide™ Profile Rail

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
Supernut

TSI Miniature Rolled Ball Screw

Super Ball Bushing Bearings and
60 Case™ LinearRace Shafting

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Supernut

7

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Test and Measurement Equipment
• Torque testers
• Load and pull testers

Thomson provides custom sizes, finishes, and
materials for engraving/printing machines to
deliver an optimized solution.

Cap tightening/inspection machines utilize a
system of miniature Thomson components that
have been engineered to work together, thereby
reducing design time and overall time to market.

Applications

MicroStage® Linear Motion System

Glide Screw™

Microguide™ Profile Rail

TSI Miniature Rolled Ball Screw

FSB Brake

Other Applications
• Portable installations (e.g. bedside scanner)
• Portable ventilators
• Dosage equipment
• Electronics manufacturing equipment
• Inspection, scanning, and printing equipment
• Packaging and dispensing equipment
• Aerospace and defence applications
• Vending machines

Robotics and Pick & Place Equipment
• Engraving, scanning, and printing machines
• Electronics manufacturing equipment
• Medical surgery manipulators/robots
• Manipulators for use in hazardous areas
• Camera inspection equipment

8 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Lead Screws
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and Supernut MTS, AFT, and XC

Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Please visit the lead screw section on our website. Here you
can see our complete range of lead screws and also find useful
resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

Main Features

Thomson BSA Lead Screw
• Lead accuracy up to 0.003 in/ft
• Highly customizable solutions for OEM applications
• Precision screw machining
• Optional materials and coatings available

Supernut MTS
• Excellent lubricity and dimensional stability
• Cost effective manufacturing including integral flange

Supernut AFT
• Designed for light load applications
• Offers smooth movement and low drag torque
• Anti-backlash adjusts for wear for the life of the nut

Supernut XC
• Utilizes Thomson BSA patented ActiveCAM technology
• Offers low drag torque and high axial stiffness
• Anti-backlash insures consistent performance and repeatability

Performance Specifications
Product Line Supernut

Model MTS AFT XC

Screw diameter range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

6 – 20
3/16 – 3/4

10
3/8 – 1/2

6 – 24
3/16 – 1

Lead range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

2 – 45
0.05 – 2

2 – 35
0.063 – 1.2

2 – 45
0.05 – 2

Backlash [mm] < 0.254 0 0

Axial design load, maximum [N] 1225 110 1560

Accuracy, standard rolled (precision rolled) [µm/300 mm] 250 (75)

Maintenance designed to minimize preventative maintenance

9
Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Ball Screws
Miniature Metric Rolled Ball Screw TSI

Main Features

Performance Specifications
Product Line Miniature Metric Rolled Ball Screws TSI

Screw diameter, nominal [mm] 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 14

Lead [mm] 2 2 2.5 3 2 3 4 10 2 3 4 5 3

Nut size (ø diam. × length) [mm] 16 × 22 18 × 24 18 × 24 18 × 25 19.5 × 22 21 × 29 21 × 35 23 × 35 24 × 40 26 × 40 25 x 38 24 x 37 30 × 35

Dynamic load capacity (1) [kN] 1.6 2.3 3.1 2.7 2.7 6.7 5.8 4.1 4.5 9.6 8.9 6.4 6.7

Static load capacity [kN] 2.1 2.9 4.0 3.1 3.8 9.6 8.2 5.8 7.6 16.4 14.5 10.2 11.6

Length of screw, maximum [mm] 1000 1500 2000

Axial backlash, maximum [mm] 0.15 (0.05 on request)

Material carbon steel (stainless on request)

Maintenance high load density insures maximum life

• Design maximizes load capacity
• Quiet and smooth performance
• Flexible ball nut mounting configurations and rapid prototyping
• Exceeding 100 % more capacity than competition in
most size
• Higher load capacity equates to longer life
• Precision rolled screws to T7 accuracy class

NEW PRODUCT!
Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Please visit the ball screw section on our website. Here you
can see our complete range of ball screws and also find useful
resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

(1) L10 life is based on one million revolutions.

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

10 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Main Features

Linear Bearings
60 Case™ Linear Race Shafting and Linear Bearing INST, MM, and SP

60 Case Linear Race Shafting
• Manufactured to the highest quality standards
• Different materials, surface treatments, and special
machining available

Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)
• Very high accuracy and responsiveness
• For smaller loads

Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)
• Light and compact
• Up to 27 times longer life than conventional linear bearings

Super Ball Bushing Bearing (SP)
• Low cost, easy to install and long life
• Industry standard for self-aligning linear bearings

Performance Specifications
Product Line Miniature Instrument INST Miniature Metric MM Super Ball Bushing SP

Unit of measure version Inch Metric Metric Inch

Shafting size range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

–
1/8 – 1/4

3 – 12
–

12 – 40
–

–
1/2 – 1-1/2

Dynamic bearing load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[N]
[lbf]

84 650 14700
–

–
3000

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 3

Friction coefficient 0.001 – 0.004

Bearing material (standard configuration) 440 stainless steel carbon steel and delrin

Maintenance light lubrication

NEW PRODUCT!
Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Please visit the linear bearings and guides section on our web-
site. Here you can see our complete range of linear bearings
and guides and also find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

11

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Profile Rail Guides
MicroGuide™ TSR

• Low profile
• Comes in two profile styles – standard and wide
• Available in two accuracy classes – H and P
• Very quiet and smooth operation
• Low weight
• Industry standard, drop-in replacement
• High moment load capacity
• Two track gothic arch ball groove geometry enables single
rail application

Main Features

Performance Specifications
Product Line Microguide

Model TSR5Z TSR7Z TSR7ZW TSR9Z TSR9ZW TSR12Z TSR12ZW TSR15Z TSR15ZW

Size of carriage and rail (w × h) [mm] 6 × 12 8 × 17 9 × 25 10 × 20 12 × 30 13 × 27 14 × 40 16 × 32 16 × 60

Rail length, minimum/maximum [mm] 40/160 40/1000 50/1010 55/1015 50/1010 70/1020 70/1030 150/1030 110/1030

Dynamic load, maximum [N] 336 924 1370 1544 2450 2780 4020 4410 6660

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 3

Acceleration, maximum [m/s2] 50

Accuracy [± mm] up to 0,01

Material [kg/m] 440 stainless steel

Maintenance little or no lubrication

Please visit the profile rail guides section on our website. Here
you can see our complete range of linear bearings and guides
and also find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.
Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

12 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Glide Screws
Glide Screw™ GS

Performance Specifications
Product Line Glide Screw™

Model GS4 GS6 GS10 GS18 GS25 GS37

Screw diameter
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

4
–

6
–

10
–

–
0.188

–
0.250

–
0.375

Screw lead
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

1, 4, 8
–

1, 6, 12
–

2, 6, 12
–

–
0.05, 0.125

–
0.05, 0.5, 0.75

–
0.063, 0.5, 1

Screw length, maximum
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

150
–

250
–

450
–

–
6

–
10

–
18

Axial load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[N]
[lbs]

89.0
–

133.4
–

311.4
–

–
30

–
45

–
70

Moment load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[Nm]
[in-lbs]

2.3
–

5.4
–

15.5
–

–
20.5

–
47.5

–
137.5

Maintenance maintenance free

• Lead screw and linear bearing combined
• Aligned from factory
• Side load and moment load capable
• Integrated lubrication block – no maintenance requried
• Smooth and quiet motion
• Cylindrical or flanged nuts available
• Versions for high temperature, clean room and food grade
applications available

Main Features
NEW PRODUCT!
Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Please visit the Glide Screw section on our website. Here you
can see our complete range of glide screws and also find useful
resources such as:
• Product selector
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

13
Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Linear Motion Systems
MicroStage® MS25 and MS33

Performance Specifications
Product Line Microstage

Model MS25 MS33

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 50 × 25 60 × 33

Dynamic carriage load, maximum [N] 100 150

Stroke length, maximum [mm] 705.5 704

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 0.85 1.02

Accuracy [± mm] 0.18 / 300 mm

Repeatability [± mm] 0.005

Type of screw lead screw

Maintenance lubrication of screws and guides

• Ultra compact
• Low cost
• Low weight
• High accuracy and repeatability
• Smooth motion
• Corrosion resistant options available
• RediMount motor mounting kit included

Main Features

Please visit the linear motion systems section on our website.
Here you can see our complete range of linear motion systems
and also find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.
Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

14 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Brakes
Power-off Brakes, MBPR, and FSB

Performance Specifications
Product Line Metric Power-off Brake Power-off Brake

Model MBRP15 MBRP19 MBRP22 MBRP26 MBRP30 FSB15 FSB17

Body diameter [mm] 37 47 56 65 75 34.8 44.5

Body length [mm] 32 32 32 34 36 22.9 26.9

Mounting hole bolt circle diameter [mm] 32 40 48 58 66 30 39.2

Hub bore sizes [mm] 5, 6 6, 7 8 10 12 3, 4, 5 5, 6, 8

Static torque [Nm] 0.24 0.5 1 2 4 0.12 0.34

Power [W] 5 6.5 8.2 11.5 13 6 7

Weight [kg] 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 0.09 0.27

Supply voltages (standard) [VDC] 12, 24, 90

MBRP series
• Spring-set electromagnetic power-off brake
• Five frame sizes
• Low cost
• Simple installation
• Superior torque to size ratio
• Energy efficient
• Optional manual release lever available
• UL recognized component

FSB series
• Spring-set electromagnetic power-off brake
• Two frame sizes
• Low cost
• Simple installation
• Superior torque to size ratio
• Energy efficient

Main Features
Please visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Please visit the clutches and brakes section on our website.
Here you can see our complete range of clutches and brakes
and also find useful resources such as:
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

15

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

A selection of custom lead screw nuts

Customization

Applications often have unique challenges that cannot
always be solved by an off-the-shelf solution. Thomson
specializes in providing custom engineered
solutions quickly and cost effectively to
address these requirements.

Selection of Customization Possibilities

Type of customization Examples

Custom materials • Stainless steel bearings or an aluminium/plastic housing
• Nuts or bushings made in a special metal, plastic, composite or ceramic material
• Replacement of hardware to meet demands in special environments

Custom surface treatment • Paint of different quality or/and color
• Thicker anodization on aluminum parts
• Specially coated screws or sliding surfaces (PTFE, chrome, black oxide, etc.)

Custom size or geometry • Non standard stroke lengths
• Custom end machining or motor/mounting interfaces
• Special nut, carriage or flange designs

Custom assemblies • Product shipped with mounting brackets, gearboxes or/and motors mounted
• Product shipped in parts or sub assemblies for the customer to assemble
• Product shipped mounted to the customers equipment

Custom services • Special lubrication
• Special stocking or transportation program
• Training of engineers, maintenance or other personnel
• Special service, repair or/and maintenance program
• Special packaging, testing, certification or quality control procedures
• Engineering evaluation

New designs • Change or combine one or several products in to a new product
• Clean sheet designs

Thomson has proven that custom designs can offer
the optimum performance and overall cost. 3D CAD
design, rapid prototyping and flexible manufacturing
have made customization a faster process, once
the product is ready and approved it will be
manufactured and shipped as quickly as a standard
product.

16 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Miniature_Components_Systems_BRUK-0011-02B | 20160620
Errors and technical alterations reserved. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of this
product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. © 2016 Thomson Industries, Inc.

www.thomsonlinear.com

EUROPE
United Kingdom
Thomson
Office 9, The Barns
Caddsdown Business Park
Bideford
Devon, EX39 3BT
Phone: +44 (0) 1271 334 500
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 (0) 7022 504 0
Fax: +49 (0) 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 (0) 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 (0) 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Largo Brughetti
20030 Bovisio Masciago
Phone: +39 0362 594260
Fax: +39 0362 594263
E-mail: sales.italy@thomsonlinear.com

Spain
Thomson
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 (0) 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 (0) 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

SOUTH AMERICA
Brasil
Thomson
Av. Tamboré, 1077
Barueri, SP – 06460-000
Phone: +55 (11) 3616-0191
Fax: +55 (11) 3611-1982
E-mail: sales.brasil@thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO
Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: 1-540-633-3549
Fax: 1-540-633-0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

ASIA
Asia Pacific
Thomson
E-mail: sales.apac@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 2205, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 6661 802
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson
c/o Fluke Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
#424, Deodhar Center,
Marol Maroshi Road,
Andheri – E, Mumbai – 400059 India
Phone: +91 22 29207641
E-mail: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Phone: +81-6-6386-8001
Fax: +81-6-6386-5022
E-mail: csjapan@scgap.com

Korea
Thomson
F7 Ilsong Bldg, 157-37
Samsung-dong, Kangnam-gu,
Seoul, Korea (135-090)
Phone: +82 2 6917 5049
Fax: +82 2 528 1456
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 1

SCREW-DRIVEN VS. BELT-DRIVEN RODLESS
ACTUATORS:
How to select drive trains for reliability,
efficiency and long service life

By Igor Glikin, Senior Mechanical Engineer
Tolomatic, Inc.

Introduction

Most electromechanical rodless actuators commonly use one of two main
drive trains to convert rotary motion of the electrical motor to linear motion
of the actuator’s load-carrying device: a power screw drive or a timing belt
drive. While both screw and timing belt drives offer efficiency, reliability and
long life while requiring very little maintenance, each has its limitations.
This paper describes how each drive train works, what materials are used
and why each is suited for a particular application. Drive trains are integral
to actuator design; understanding their critical aspects and parameters is
an important first step to creating efficient and economical motion control
systems.

KEY FACTORS AFFECTING DRIVE TRAIN SELECTION

Power screw drives and timing belts carry a dual function in linear motion.
They are used for linear positioning and therefore need to provide acceptable
accuracy and repeatability. At the same time they transmit power, which
requires them to possess sufficient strength. A screw mechanism produces
linear motion by rotating either (most common) the screw or the nut in an
assembly. Similarly, timing belt drives transmit torque and linear motion from
a driving pulley via the belt to a driven pulley.

The motion control application determines which drive train to select. Basic
to any motion control system selection are duty cycle, life cycle and cost.
More pertinent to drive train selection are length of stroke, linear velocity
and acceleration, as well as orientation of move. Drive trains vary in capacity,
so thrust of the actuator, as well as load and force of the actuator carrier,
will also affect drive train choice. Shock loads and noise are important
considerations for some types of processing.

About the Author

Igor Glikin has
over 20 years
of experience in
motion control
industry. Igor
holds a degree
in Mechanical
Engineering
from State

Marine Technical University in St.
Petersburg, Russia. He is currently
a Senior Mechanical Engineer in
Tolomatic.

Tolomatic is a leading supplier of lin-
ear actuators, both electric and pneu-
matically driven. Tolomatic’s expertise
includes linear actuators, servo-driven
high-thrust actuators, servo and step-
per motors, drives, and configured
linear systems. Standard products are
built to order and shipped in five days
or less. Tolomatic also manufactures
right-angle gear drives, caliper disc
brakes, and clutches.

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 2

Power screw drives are known
for high-thrust capacity as
well as accuracy and
repeatability.

Lead screws (also called
Acme screws) are known for
their relatively low cost and
smooth, quiet operation.

Additional factors that determine the selection of drive train technology
include:
• Accuracy of a positional move (the ability of the actuator to achieve a

commanded position, or the difference between the actual position and a
commanded one)

• Repeatability (the degree to which an actuator can return to a reference
position in multiple attempts. Unidirectional repeatability is measured by
approaching the position from a single direction; bidirectional repeatability
is measured by approaching it from opposing directions)

• Permissibility of backdriving (ability of an electromechanical actuator to
lose its carrier’s position under axial load at loss of power)

POWER SCREW DRIVES: High axial thrust, moderate stroke
length and speed

Power screw drives are known for high-thrust capacity as well as accuracy
and repeatability. Relatively low system inertia and predictable service life
(ball and roller screw drives) are additional benefits. These parameters make
power screw drives ideal for a variety of applications such as machine tools,
assembly and packaging equipment, robots etc.

The limitations of power screw drives include shorter length than belt
drives, running speeds limited by critical speed values (rotational speeds
approaching the system’s natural vibration frequency, leading to resonance),
and reduced duty cycle compared to belt drives.

Three primary types of screws are used in linear actuators: lead (or Acme),
ball screws and, less common, roller screws. The differences are in the design
of the thread shape along with the design and operation of a matching nut.

1. Lead Screws
Lead screws (also called Acme screws) are known for their relatively low
cost and smooth, quiet operation. The trapezoidal threads of lead screws
are made of carbon, alloy or stainless steel (typically produced by rolling
in lengths up to 12 feet), and are available in a wide variety of diameters
and leads. Solid nuts used with lead screws are usually made of composite
materials (most commonly acetal resins) or bronze.

Fig. 1. Trapezoidal thread of an Acme screw

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 3

Heat generation prevents
actuators driven by lead
screws from being used at
high speeds or with high
axial loads.

Ball screw assemblies offer
reduced friction and
increased mechanical
efficiency.

A solid nut sliding along a lead screw’s threads creates a line contact between
the surfaces of the two parts. As a result of the friction losses of this motion,
drive efficiency is less than 60 percent. Drive efficiency is a function of (a)
coefficients of friction between lead screw and lead nut; and (b) the lead
screw’s helix angle.

Energy lost due to friction is dissipated as heat, which limits the application’s
duty cycle. Heat generation prevents actuators driven by lead screws from
being used at high speeds (aside from critical speed limitations) or with high
axial loads.

Bidirectional repeatability is mainly affected by the amount of axial backlash
or free play of a lead nut on the screw. Unidirectional repeatability is typically
affected by component wear. Typical rolled-lead nuts will produce up to
.010” (.254 mm) of backlash. In many cases, anti-backlash, spring-loaded,
self-adjustable lead nuts (available in a variety of designs) eliminate this
problem.

Due to low efficiency, most lead screws (all those with efficiency under 50
percent) cannot be backdriven.

2. Ball Screws

Ball screws are power screws that work as helical raceways for high-grade,
chrome steel ball bearings. Ball recirculate inside a nut and are normally
manufactured of high-carbon, alloy or hardenable stainless steel. Depending
on lead accuracy requirements, ball screws can be produced by rolling in
lengths up to 12 feet, or precision-grinding in shorter lengths. They are also
available in a variety of diameters and leads. Ball screws with ground threads
cost significantly more than rolled screws, but can be manufactured with a
high lead accuracy grade that some applications require.

Fig. 2. A ball nut with two circuits of balls.
(Photo courtesy of Rockford Ball Screw)

Ball-screw assemblies offer two main advantages compared to lead screws:
Balls move along the screw threads in a rolling motion based on a point of
contact between the surfaces. This significantly reduces friction and increases
mechanical efficiency (which for most ball screw drives is typically no less
than 90 percent).

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 4

Due to their high efficiency,
properly lubricated ball screw
drives offer higher speeds
and higher duty cycles
compared to lead screws.

Roller screw drives are not
commonly used in rodless
actuator applications.

1) Since ball nuts are essentially rolling bearings, their dynamic load ratings
can be readily calculated according to ISO standards. This makes expected
service life highly predictable.

2) As with lead nuts, different methods control backlash and improve
repeatability of ball nut assemblies. Spring-loaded ball nuts are available,
as well as ball nuts that are custom fit with balls of selected sizes that
minimize backlash or eliminate it altogether, effectively creating negative
clearance or preload.

Due to their high efficiency, properly lubricated ball screw drives offer higher
speeds (limited by critical speed values as well as by allowable speeds of ball
recirculation inside a nut) and higher duty cycles compared to lead screws.
Ball nut assemblies are capable of delivering a high thrust. Available thrust
is a function of the size and total number of the balls in a ball nut assembly.
Because of their high efficiency, most ball nuts can be backdriven.

While offering a smooth linear motion, ball screw drives are often noisier
than lead screw drives.

3. Roller Screws
Roller screw drives are not commonly used in rodless actuator applications.
Information is given here primarily for reference purposes. Rodless actuators
typically have a built-in bearing system, and as a result are designed to
“carry” loads as opposed to “pushing” them. Due to this fact, thrust
requirements are usually much lower. In most rodless applications, ball
screw drives are quite capable of handling the force and precision and don’t
require the higher thrust capacities or the higher cost of roller screw drives.
Planetary roller screws use threaded rollers, instead of balls, as the load
transfer elements between nut and screw. Providing more bearing points
than ball screws within a given volume, roller screws can be more compact
for a given load capacity. They are made of alloy steel and are manufactured
by grinding—which accounts for their higher cost.

Fig. 3. A typical planetary roller nut

Roller screws have significantly higher service life than ball screws. Roller
screw actuators have high dynamic load ratings (up to several dozen tons of

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 5

Timing belts offer 90%
efficiency, they are easy to
operate and have a long
service life.

The size and width of a belt
are determined primarily by
the amount of torque to be
transmitted.

force). Only hydraulic cylinders have higher single-unit actuator capacity.
Roller nuts have lower efficiency than ball nuts and are prone to overheating
in high duty-cycle applications. Roller nuts, however, are invaluable from the
standpoint of “force density” and life.

TIMING BELT DRIVES

The teeth of a timing belt mesh with corresponding grooves on the pulleys,
preventing any relative motion between the belt and pulleys. This ensures
synchronous linear motion with a permanent speed ratio.

Timing belt drives are efficient (90 percent to 93 percent) and easy to operate
and maintain. They have a long service life because there are few moving
parts and low component wear. They can be operated at 100 percent of
duty cycle with no critical speed limitations and are available in much longer
lengths than screw drives. These benefits make timing belt drives ideal for
long stroke applications requiring high linear velocity and acceleration.
Length of stroke of a timing belt actuator is limited only by the ability to
efficiently tension long strands of the timing belt.

On the downside, timing belt drives have reduced load-carrying (thrust)
capacity compared to screw drives. They also have lower accuracy and
repeatability. There are no good methods for estimating service life. Belt
drives are more sensitive to impact loads, and some timing belt materials
are prone to gradual elongation during operation, which requires periodic
tensioning. Improperly tensioned long belt drives could slip (jump teeth) at
high accelerations. Belt drives often require speed reduction to overcome
high inertia associated with loads and pulleys. Vertically positioned belt drives
require emergency brakes to prevent backdriving under the weight of load at
power loss. Timing belts are available in various materials, sizes, widths and
tooth geometries.

The choice of belt material is determined by the application’s tensile strength
and elasticity requirements. The size and width of a belt are determined
primarily by the amount of torque to be transmitted.

Selection of timing belt geometry and pitch (distance between two adjacent
teeth) are also important for strength, but selection is also made based on
the type of application and its parameters (speed, accuracy and repeatability
of linear positioning, environmental factors, noise, etc.).

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 6

Fiberglass tensile cords typi-
cally provide a very low
elongation but are not well
suited for impact or shock
loading.

Steel cords provide high
strength, excellent shock re-
sistance, high-torque opera-
tion at low speeds and better
positioning accuracy.

Fig. 4. A typical timing belt construction

1. Timing Belt Materials

Timing belts are typically made of a flexible polymer material molded over
reinforcing tensile cords. The most commonly used materials are neoprene
and polyurethane belts with steel cords or fiberglass, aramid (Kevlar) or
carbon fibers, sometimes with additional nylon tooth facing.

Fiberglass tensile cords typically provide a very low elongation but are not
well suited for impact or shock loading. They are lower in tensile strength
than steel, aramid or carbon. Aramid (Kevlar) fibers also have a low stretch,
but have a high tensile strength and good shock load resistance.

In addition to high strength and excellent shock resistance, steel cords
provide better high-torque operation at low speeds and better positioning
accuracy.

2. Timing Belt Tooth Geometry

Timing belts commonly have curvilinear tooth profiles. The curvilinear timing
belt profiles such as HTD® and PolyChain GT2® have excellent qualities,
including high shear strength, good positioning accuracy, light construction,
very low stretch, longer life, quieter operation and lower cost. The deeper
tooth design of these profiles increases resistance to slippage (cogging,
jumping teeth).

PolyChain GT2® timing belts are available in some of the actuators as special
equipment for custom high-thrust configurations.

Pitch

To
o

t

h
D

ep
th

B
el

t
H

ei
gh

t

To
ot

h
D
ep
th
B
el
t
H
ei
gh
t
Pitch

Fig. 5. Timing belt tooth geometry

Copyright © 2014 Tolomatic, Inc. Screw-Driven vs. Belt-Driven Rodless Actuators–How to select drive trains for reliability, efficiency and long service life
www.tolomatic.com 763-478-8000 9900-9210_00 Page 7

Timing belts are the easy
choice for long-stokes, with
high linear velocity and
acceleration. For other appli-
cations, consider all param-
eters to make the best choice.

SUMMARY

Many applications make the choice of a linear drive easy. For example,
timing belt drives are ideal for long-stroke applications requiring high linear
velocity and acceleration. The length of stroke of a timing belt actuator is
limited only by the ability to efficiently tension long strands of timing belt. If
the application stroke length and speed are moderate, but the axial thrust
is high, and (or) if a high positional accuracy is required, then power screw
drives are an ideal fit.

When the choice isn’t as obvious, consider all available application
parameters to make a good selection.

Some broad guidelines for a linear actuator drive type selection are given
in Figure 5 below. The strokes, speeds, force, accuracy and repeatability
numbers will vary with rodless actuator manufacturers. The numbers below
reflect Tolomatic rodless actuator specifications, but the general comparisons
between screw and belt drives will be similar.

PARAMETER POWER SCREW DRIVE TIMING BELT DRIVE

Length of stroke Short to medium (up to 120 in.)

Limited by physical length of screw
stock, actuator body and bearing system

Long (up to 204 in. in standard con-
figuration, longer lengths possible)

Limited only by ability to tension the
timing belt

Linear velocity Low to medium (up to 50–60 in/sec)

Limited by critical speed of the screw
and DN of nut

High (Up to 200 in/sec)

Axial force (thrust) High (up to 2,700 lbf.) Medium (up to 325 lbf.)

Lead accuracy Good (.003–.004 in./ft. for standard
rolled ball nuts; .005–.006 in./ft. for com-
posite nuts)

Medium (.010–.015 in./ft.*)

Unidirectional repeatability Good (±.0005 in.) Good to medium (±.002 in.)

Backdriving Will occur with some of the nut leads Will always occur

Resistance to shock loads Good Medium

Operation at high duty cycle Medium to good Excellent

Expected service life More predictable, based on Dynamic
Load Rating calculation

Based on testing

Maintenance Low to medium Low

Drive efficiency Medium to high depending on the nut
type (60% for composite nuts, 90% for
ball nuts)

High (90%)

* With properly tensioned belt

Fig. 5. General guidelines for linear actuator drive type selection.

Thomson WhisperTrak™ Electric Linear Actuators
Quiet, Strong and Compact

www.thomsonlinear.com

http://www.thomsonlinear.com/website/com/eng/products/actuators/linear_actuators/whispertrak.php

Thomson – the Choice for Optimized Motion Solutions
Often the ideal design solution is not about finding the fastest, sturdiest, most accurate
or even the least expensive option. Rather, the ideal solution is the optimal balance of
performance, life and cost.

The Best Positioned Supplier of Mechanical Motion Technology
Thomson has several advantages that makes us the supplier of choice for motion control technology.
• Thomson own the broadest standard product offering of mechanical motion technologies in the industry.
• Modified versions of standard product or white sheet design solutions are routine for us.
• Choose Thomson and gain access to over 70 years of global application experience in industries including packaging, factory auto-

mation, material handling, medical, clean energy, printing, automotive, machine tool, aerospace and defense.
• As part of Danaher Corporation, we are financially strong and unique in our ability to bring together control, drive, motor, power

transmission and precision linear motion technologies.

A Name You Can Trust
A wealth of product and application information as well as 3D models, software tools, our distributor locator and global contact infor-
mation is available at www.thomsonlinear.com. For assistance in Europe, contact us at +44 1271 334 500 or e-mail us at sales.uk@
thomsonlinear.com.
Talk to us early in the design process to see how Thomson can help identify the optimal balance of performance, life and cost for your
next application. And, call us or any of our 2000+ distribution partners around the world for fast delivery of replacement parts.

The Danaher Business System
The Danaher Business System (DBS) was established to increase the value we bring to customers. It is a mature and successful set of
tools we use daily to continually improve manufacturing operations and product development processes. DBS is based on the principles
of Kaizen which continuously and aggressively eliminate waste in every aspect of our business. DBS focuses the entire organization on
achieving breakthrough results that create competitive advantages in quality, delivery and performance – advantages that are passed
on to you. Through these advantages Thomson is able to provide you faster times to market as well as unsurpassed product selection,
service, reliability and productivity.

Local Support Around the Globe

Application Centers Global Design & Engineering CentersGlobal Manufacturing Operations

Table of Contents
Thomson WhisperTrakTM Linear Actuators . . . . . . . . .

3

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 4

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Order Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 1

0

Actuator Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 1

5

Application Data Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 18

3

WhisperTrakTM

www.thomsonlinear.com

Thomson WhisperTrakTM Linear Actuators

Thomson WhisperTrakTM Linear Actuators are the newest addition to
our well-known electric linear actuator family. This new actuator sets a
new standard for personal mobility, medical, rehab, office and domestic

applications. It is small, quiet, washdown-proof
and created from the accumulated

knowledge that Thomson has
gathered by being the

actuator industry
leader for over

40 years.

www.thomsonlinear.com4

Features and Benefits

Thomson WhisperTrakTM linear actuators were designed to incorporate features that enable machine
builders the greatest flexibility in their design. A sleek and compact design, washdown protection,
electronic limit switches and a global sales and service organization are just some of the features
offered. The result is the optimum actuator for the applications it is built to serve.

maintenance throughout the entire life of the actuator.
The average life is 10,000 cycles (one full stroke back and
forth) at the maximum load. Once properly installed, the
Thomson WhisperTrak linear actuator will provide trouble-
free operation with zero maintenance, thereby reducing the
total cost of ownership.

Unique options
The Thomson WhisperTrak linear actuator is unique in that
it offers a compact machine footprint and robust features
that are unavailable anywhere else. The electronic limit
switches (ELS) and anti-rotation options are available
off the shelf and fit within the compact envelope of the
standard model. Mounting options include standard as
pictured or rotated 90 degrees.

World wide representation
For over 40 years Thomson has provided simple, innovative,
and dependable linear actuator solutions. With global sales
and manufacturing facilities, Thomson is able to respond
quickly to all customer needs. The Thomson WhisperTrak
linear actuator is designed to meet all relevant certificates
and is built in accordance with ISO 9000.

Exceptionally quiet
Thomson WhisperTrak linear actuators boast a low sound
level of less than 45 dBa, about the same as an average
library. This quiet, consistent low sound level is conducive
to personal mobility applications and provides unobtrusive
linear motion in an elegant package.

Permanent sealing for environmental protection
The actuator is able to operate in harsh conditions where
it is exposed to washdown, rain, dust, or other particulate
without the use of any additional cover. The Thomson
WhisperTrak linear actuator is rated for protection class
IP67.

Compact and compatible
The Thomson WhisperTrak linear actuator is one of the
most compact actuators on the market and pin to pin
compatible with virtually all competitor actuators in this
segment. This allows you to easily replace an existing
actuator with the Thomson WhisperTrak linear actuator and
gain the space saving benefits while reducing weight.

Maintenance free
Our new actuator is unique in that it requires zero

5
WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

Aluminum front adapter

Stainless steel extension tube

Ultrasonically welded plastic cover

High quality DC motor

Extension tube sealing ensuring IP6

7

Aluminum cover tube

Quiet, reliable, self locking acme screw

Low noise lubricated for life gear

Die Cast Rear adapter
adaptable to custom

configuration

Applications

Rehab and handicap equipment
Personal mobility is a growing area for linear actuators.
Equipment designed to offer mobility or rehabilitation to
disabled, elderly, or injured people can include wheel
chairs, patient lifts, handicapped accessible cars/trucks,
and other rehabilitation equipment.

Medical/hospital equipment
Patient beds, x-ray machines and examination chairs
are just a few examples where linear actuators are
used. In fact, every place where a simple, reliable and
electrified movement is needed a linear actuator is likely
the answer.

Furniture
The quiet operation and small footprint of the Thomson
WhisperTrak linear actuator make it ideal for home or
office furniture requirements where silent operation
is an issue. Adjustable desks, beds, reclining chairs,
and the positioning of heavy TV screens benefit from
the quiet, precise actuation of the WhisperTrak linear
actuator.

Limitless possibilities
Whether the standard product meets your specifications
or you require a more customized solution, Thomson
engineers are available to discuss any of your
application needs.

The Thomson WhisperTrak electric linear actuator offers incredible
flexibility. Any application which requires a small footprint or quiet
operation would benefit from it. Specifically, personal mobility,
rehab, medical equipment, office and domestic machines, are
well suited as a result of its compact envelope and unique
operating features such as quiet operation and one piece housing.

Wheel chair
Wheel chairs can
have up to a dozen electrified
movements. In this example the
back of the seat, the seat tilt angle
and the foot rest are adjustable
using Thomson WhisperTrak linear
actuators.

Beds
Beds in hospitals or at home are
commonly equipped with actuators
to adjust different functions. In this
image the back and the leg angles
are adjustable but actuators are also
used to tilt, turn, and position beds in
almost any way imaginable to make
life easier for the patient, nurse and
the cleaning staff.

Bath chair lift
For simple and safe
handling the lift
movement is electrically
actuated. The Thomson
WhisperTrak linear
actuator is light-
weight and quiet and
makes cleaning easy
without worry of water
ingression or exposure
to detergents.

www.thomsonlinear.com6

Technical Specification 2000N
Voltage

Input voltage [VDC] 12 2

4

Load

Static load (Fx), maximum [N] 2000 (450 lbs)

Dynamic load (Fx), maximum [N] 2000 (450 lbs)

Stroke

Stroke lengths, standard [cm] 10, 20, 30, 40, 50

Current

Current consumption, rated load [A] 4.5 2.2

Current consumption, stall/in-rush [A] 14 8.0

General data

Speed, no load [mm/s] 5.8 (.23″/s)

Speed, rated load [mm/s] 4.0 (.16″/s)

Operating temperature limits [°C] -25 to +40
(-13F to 104F)

Duty cycle, maximum [%] 10

Life, average [cycles] 10 000

Sound level [dBa] < 45

Lead screw type acme

Protection class IP67

Certificates CE (EN60601-1)
UL (UL60601-1)

Features

• Maintenance free
• Very high sealing degree due to ultrasonic welding of enclosure
• Washdown proof during operation
• Can be submerged when not operating
• Compact and light weight

Options

• Electronic limit switches (ELS)

1

• Anti rotation mechanism 2
• Mounting adapters turned 90°

1 Shuts off power at the end of stroke and all along the stroke at overload condi-
tions.
ELS is normally set for 120% of the rated dynamic maximum load.

2 Prevents the extension tube from rotating if it is not fixed in the end.

Specifications

Specifications are subject to change without notice. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the
suitability of this product for a specific application.

7
WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

Dimensions

Cable length, see
ordering key page 10

W • • 02 (max. load 2000 N (450 lbs)

Stroke “S” mm (inch) 100 (3.94) 200 (7.87) 300 (11.81) 400 (15.75) 500 (19.69)

Retracted Length “L” mm (inch) 238 (9.37) 338 (12.31) 438 (17.24) 589 (23.19) 689 (27.13)

Weight kg (lbs) 1.20 (2.65) 1.35 (2.98) 1.5 (3.31) 1.65 (3.64) 1.80 (3.97)

Performance Diagram

1
3
4
0

2 (0.08)

4 (0.16)

6 (0.24)

8 (0.31)

SPEED [mm/s (in/sec)]

0 500 1000 1500 2000

Dynamic Load [N (lbs)]

0
2

510 (0.39)
Current [A]

(112.5) (450)(225) (337.5)

Speed Current @ 12 VDC Current @ 24 VDC

5.1 Dimensions

www.thomsonlinear.com8

Actuator Limit Switch and Feedback Options

Electronic Limit Switches / Low Level Switching, ELS (Option E)
An optional Electric Limit Switch (ELS) can be integrated into Thomson WhisperTrak electric linear
actuators. This electronic control automatically turns off power to the motor when current exceeds
a preset threshold either at ends of stroke or due to a mid-stroke overload condition. This current
threshold is directly related to thrust and can be set at the factory during assembly to independently
control extend and retract travel. The default setting is rated dynamic load plus 20% (2.4KN).

9

WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

1. Model and input voltage

W12 = WhisperTrakTM, 12 VDC

W24 = WhisperTrakTM, 24 VDC

2. Maximum dynamic force

02- = 2000 N (450 lbs)

3. Lead screw diameter, TPI (threads / inch) and type

58A = 5 (0.465 inches), 8 threads / inch, acme

4. Maximum stroke length

10- = 100 mm

20- = 200 mm

30- = 300 mm

40- = 400 mm

50- = 500 mm

5. Limit switch and feedback options

N = no option – for use with Thomson DCG Control

E = electronic limit switches / low level switching (ELS)

6. Adapter position1 and anti-rotation mechanism options

S = standard mounting adapter position, no anti rotation

3 = mounting adapters turned 90°, no anti rotation

A = standard mounting adapter position with anti-rotation

M = mounting adapters turned 90° with anti-rotation

7. Cable and Connector Options

1 = 1 meter long cable with flying leads (for customer supplied connectors)

2 = 1 meter long cable with phono type connector, Ø 6.3 mm
3 = 2 meter long cable with DIN type connector (used with DCG Control)

4 = 1 meter long cable with Pac Con type connector (includes mating

connector)

5 = 1 meter long cable with Pac Con type connector for the actuator

motor (includes mating connector) and flying leads for limit switch

and feedback options

8. Enclosure color

B =

black

W =

white

Ordering Key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

W12 02- 58A 10- N S 1 B

Standard position

Adapter turned 90°

Ordering Key

1 Definition of rear adapter hole positions.

The Thomson Whispertrak is warranted
to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of twelve (12)
months from date of delivery. The ap-
plication of this product is the responsi-
bility of the buyer and Thomson makes
no representation or warranty as to
the suitability of the product for any
particular use or purpose. For a copy of
the entire warranty for this product that
is contained in our standard terms and
conditions of sale, please go to http://
www.thomsonlinear.com/website/com/
eng/support/terms_and_conditions.php

www.thomsonlinear.com10

Electrical Wiring Diagrams
DC-actuators

By switching the polarity of the voltage to the motor the extension tube will change direction (example N). When using
the ELS option the direction of the extension tube travel is controlled by switching the COM (common) output to the EXT
(extend) or RET (retract) inputs.

When switching the motor voltage directly (example N), make sure that the switch and the wiring can handle the maxi-
mum motor current.

Always protect the actuator and the wiring by using a fuse between the actuator and the power source.

Actuators without ELS option (N version): the actuator voltage must be switched off when reaching the ends of stroke
or due to a mid-stroke overload to avoid causing damage to the actuator. If Thomson DCG Control (P 13) is not used the
application must be approved by factory.

Actuator with ELS option (E version): the actuator will automatically switch off when reaching the ends of stroke or a
mid-stroke overload. E version for use where customer provides power supply, but requires Electronic load limiting, or
low level switching.

black

N – standard (no option) – for use with Thomson DCG Control

D – with digital feedback (optional)

E – with ELS / Low Level Switching (optional)

black
black

red

red

blue

brown+5 V

0 V

source select

input clock

data I/O

orange

green

white

brown

green
white
red

M Actuator motor
S1 Double pole double throw (DPDT) switch
S2 Single pole double throw (SPDT) switch
E Electronic limit switches

11

WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

Control DCG

• Controls available for single actuator operation.
• Small and light weight control operated via a control

pendant which is ordered separately.
• Built in Electronic Limit Switches (ELS) stop the actuator

automatically at end of stroke or mid stroke stall.
• The control pendant is ordered separately.
• Use of this control limits the duty cycle to the actuator

to 10%.
• If you choose to use an alternative controller other

than the DCG units specified, please contact Thomson
Application Engineers for further information.

Actuator Compatibility

DCG-152 – 2KN Single 24V WhisperTrak Linear Actuator with
“N” option.

Actuator Controls

Wiring Diagram
Actuators used with the DCG control have integral plugs
for direct connection. (Cable option 3.) See order key for
more information.

Dimensions

Power Cords included:
DCG24-1U (U.S. version) has 3 m long with US three
prong power plug or for DCG24-1M (EU) units 3 m Long
with Europlug (CEE 7/16) power plug.

www.thomsonlinear.com12

Actuator Controls
Specifications

DCG – 152

Compatible with actuator W2402-58A•••N

Input voltage [Vac] 1 × 230 ± 6% 1 × 115 ± 6%

Input frequency [Hz] 50 60

Output voltage [Vdc] 24

Output current, max. [A] 2,4

Operating temperature limits [°C] +5 – +45

Max. duty cycle @ 25 °C [%] 10

Maximum on time [s] 180

Weight of control [kg] 1.9

Protection class double insulated

Electronic limit switches yes

Included control pendant no

Certificates CE

Part number DCG24-1M-0152 DCG24-1U-0152

These controls are current limited. Review the current/load curves for the actuator you selected to make sure the control will provide enough current
for the thrust you need.

Control will shut off if duty cycle is exceeded and automatically reset when cooled off.

Control pendant type DCG14-1H is recommended, see page 14.

Control DCG

13

WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

DCG Control Pendant

• Handy and light weight control pendant with spiral
cord cable which connects to the DCG to control one
or synchronous WhisperTrak linear actuators via mo-
mentary push buttons.

Specifications

Parameter DCG14-1H

Weight [kg] 0,4

Cable length [mm] 1200

Certificates CE

Part number DCG14-1H

Actuator Controls
Control Accessories

Control to Control Cable for DCG

Specifications

Parameter

Lead cross section [mm2] 7 × 0,14

Cable length [mm] 2450

Part number D620 095

• This cable connects with its plug to the control
pendant input on DCG in order to connect the control
to another device than the DCG control pendant.

www.thomsonlinear.com14

Acme Screw
Acme screws typically have low efficiencies, which self lock
and resist back driving. The low efficiency suits applications
with shock and vibration.

Actuator Housing
The actuator housing provides environmental protection for the
internal components and may also be a structural member of the
actuator.

Adapters (Front and Rear Clevis)
The front and rear adapters are the connection points for
mounting most Thomson actuators. The front adapter is usually
a cross hole but optionally may be a tapped hole, threaded rod,
universal rod end, or slotted adapter with cross hole. The rear
adapter may be cast into the actuator housing or held in place
with a nut.

Anti Rotation Mechanism
A feature available on some actuators that resolves the
restraining torque within the actuator. The extension tube will
not rotate on actuators with this feature.

Certificates
CE certification and UL listing are the two main third party
approvals available for actuators. All actuators sold in the EU
are CE certified while some actuators sold outside of the EU may
not be. If you order your actuator outside of the EU and need a
CE certification, contact the factory to verify availability and be
sure to include the request on your order.

Controls
Controls can be external to the actuator and provide the actuator
with the correct voltage, have either membrane or pendant
operators and some have position indicators. The Thomson
WhisperTrak series of electric linear actuators also has optional
internal controls that continuously monitor the operation of the
actuator.

Cover Tube
The cover tube provides protection for the lead screw and
provides protection and support for the extension tube. For
the Thomson WhisperTrak actuators, the cover tube can also
provide the rear mounting connection.

Customization
Even the most versatile actuator may not always suit all
applications. But whatever your need is, our engineers are
ready to help you to customize the actuators according to your
requirements. We build more exclusive actuators than anyone
else and have decades of experience of producing actuators to
meet special needs.

Duty Cycle
on time
Duty cycle =
(on time + off time)

Example: 10 seconds on, 90 seconds off

10 s

(10 s + 90 s)
= 10% duty cycle

The duty cycle is a function of the maximum rated load and the
ambient temperature. Ambient temperatures above the stated
will affect the duty cycle negatively while lower temperatures
and/or lower load will affect it positively.

Dynamic Load
The dynamic load rating is how much load the actuator will
move when power is applied. Also see “load rating”.

Electronic Limit Switches (ELS)
ELS stands for Electronic Limit Switches and it is a current
sensing function used in some actuator control models. The ELS
senses the current and if the current exceeds a pre-set level the
control cuts the power to the motor. This function can be used to
detect and stop at the ends of the actuator stroke or to stop the
actuator if it runs into an obstacle.

End Play (Backlash)
The stack up of tolerances within the lead screw assembly and
gearing allowing some linear movement of the extension tube
without rotating the motor.

Extension Tube
The extension tube slides in and out of the actuator and is
connected via the front adaptor to the load being moved or
positioned.

Input Voltage
The nominal voltage required to operate the actuator. All
actuators will accept at least a ± 10 % variation of the nominal
voltage but a change in the voltage will result in a change of
the speed of dc actuators. Controls are available that accept 115
or 230 Vac input and provide 24 Vdc output to operate 24 Vdc
actuators.

Glossary
A – In

15

WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

Glossary
In – Re

at the same temperature as the operating temperature. Contact
customer support if the operating temperature will be exceeded
during storage or transportation.

Output Voltage
Output voltage is the voltage from the control to run the actuator.
The controls for dc actuators have 24 Vdc output. The controls
for ac actuators have either 115 or 230 Vac output.

Protection Class
The protection class refers to the environmental rating of the
enclosure. The first digit applies to airborne contaminants and
the second digit to water/moisture.
IP33: protected against the penetration of solid objects with a
diameter greater than 12 mm and against direct sprays of
water up to 60 degrees from vertical.
IP44: protected against the penetration of solid objects with a
diameter greater than 1 mm and against water sprayed
from any direction.
IP45: protected against the penetration of solid objects with a
diameter greater than 1 mm and low pressure water jets
from any direction.
IP51: protected from dust and vertical dripping water/
condensation.
IP52: protected from dust and dripping water/condensation
falling at an angle up to 15 degrees from vertical.
IP56: protected from dust and high pressure water jets from
any direction.
IP65: dust tight and protected against low pressure water jets
from any direction.
IP66: dust tight and protected against high pressure water jets
from any direction.
IP67: dust tight and protected against the effect of immersion in
water between 150 mm (5.9 inch) and 1 meter (39.4 inch).

Restraining Torque
The torque which is developed between the clevis on the
extension tube and rear mount(clevis or trunnion) when the unit
extends or retracts (Fig. c).

Fig. c

Installation Instructions
Each actuator has an installation manual to answer typical
questions about mounting and wiring the actuators.

Lifetime Expectancy
Life is a function of load and stroke length.

Linear Actuators
Actuators providing a linear thrust via an extension tube to lift,
lower, push, pull or position a load.

Load Rating
The load rating is the minimum amount of force the actuator
will provide during its lifetime. The load rating of all rod style
actuators is the same for both compression and tension loads.
Also see “dynamic load”, “static load” and “tension and
compression load”.

Maximum On Time
The maximum amount of time an actuator may operate without
stopping to “cool off”. For high load and long stroke actuators
this may be one extend or retract cycle. The actuator should not
exceed 10% duty cycle at full rated load. The maximum on time
for WhisperTrak is 180 seconds.

Mounting
Electrak actuators are quickly and easily mounted by slipping
pins through the holes on each end of the unit and into brackets
on the machine frame and the load. Roll or spring type mounting
pins should be avoided. The mounting pins must be parallel to
each other as shown below (Fig. a). Pins which are not parallel
may cause the actuator to bind. The load should act along the
axis of the actuator since off center loads may cause binding
(Fig. b).

Fig. a Fig. b

Operating and Storage Temperature
The operating temperature is the range in which the actuator may
be safely operated. At higher temperatures the duty cycle needs
to be lower than 10%. All actuators can be stored or transported

www.thomsonlinear.com16

Glossary
Ro – Vo
RoHS Compliance
All actuators, controls and accessories sold in the EU are RoHS
compliant unless otherwise stated, while products sold outside
of the EU may not be. If you order an actuator outside of the EU
and need it to be RoHS compliant, contact the factory to verify
availability and be sure to include the request on your order.

Service and Maintenance
Actuators are maintenance free.

Sizing and Selection
The Thomsonlinear.com web site includes a product advisor that
can be used to walk through the decision process for picking the
best actuator and to get the ordering data for your choice. Go
to www.thomson.com/linear_actuator_advisor to find out more.

Speed
DC actuators have a direct load/speed relationship. As the load
increases, the speed of the dc actuators decreases. There are
curves to show the speed from no load to full rated load.

Static Load
The static load rating is how much load the actuator will hold
with power off. Also see “load rating”. If nothing else is stated
the static load rating is for the actuator extension tube being
fully retracted. The static load rating will decrease as the tube
extends.

Synchronous Operation
Motor speed cannot be controlled with enough precision to
ensure that the actuators will remain synchronized and a binding
effect could take place. Actuators equipped with a digital
feedback encoder can also be synchronized using controls
designed for synchronous operation.

Tension and Compression Load
A tension load tries to stretch the actuator and a compression
load tries to compress the actuator (Fig. d). Most actuators can
manage the same tension and compression load. Also see “load
rating”.

Fig. d

Load
Load

Trapezoidal Screw
Screw type with similar characteristics as an acme screw. Also
see “acme screw”.

Vent
The Thomson WhisperTrak electric actuator has a breather in
the housing to allow the actuator to operate without creating a
vacuum and drawing water through the seals on the cover tube.

Voltage Drop
Long leads/cables between the power source and the actuator
will result in a voltage drop for DC units. This voltage drop can
be avoided by sizing the leads in accordance with the following
lead
cross section selection table. The table is based on an ambient
temperature of 30 °C or less. A higher ambient temperature may
result in the need for a greater lead cross section.

Lead Cross Section Selection Table [mm2]

Current
draw
[A]

Cable
length
[m]

Actuator input
voltage [Vdc}

12 24

0 – 10

0 – 3 1,5 1,5

3 – 6 2,5 1,5

6 – 10 4 1,5

10 – 15

0 – 3 1,5 2,5

3 – 6 2,5 2,5

6 – 10 4 2,5

15 – 20

0 – 3 2,5 –

3 – 6 4 –

6 – 10 6 –

17

WhisperTrakTM
www.thomsonlinear.com

Submitted by: Phone: Date:

1. Company name 20. Do you need any special retracted length (cross hole c/c in mm)?

2. Street address 21. Is anti-rotation of the extension tube required (yes/no)?

3. City-state, zip 22. What is the input voltage?

4. Contact name 23. Do you need any of the optional features of the actuator?

5. Phone 24. How will the actuator be connected (standard or special cabling)?

6. Fax 25. Is mating connector required if connector is included in the actuator?

7. E-mail 26. Do you need any special paint or finish?

8. What is the estimated annual volume? 27. Is manual override necessary?

9. What is the target price? 28. What are the environmental conditions (dusty, outdoors, wash down)?

10. What is the current or alternative solution? 29. What is the operation temperature range in Celsius?

11. How much load is moved in Newton? 30. What is the duty cycle (on-time / on-time + off-time) in seconds?

12. How much load do you need to hold in Newton? 31. Do you need any certificate (UL, CE, etc.)?

13. How will the actuator be mounted (horizontal/vertical)? 32. Do you require any print (dwg, dxf, faxed, email)?

14. Is the load trying to stretch or/and compress the actuator? 33. Describe any additional requirements (packaging, labeling, etc.)

15. What speed do you want the actuator to move in mm/s?

16. What is the life of the unit in cycles (one cycle = extend and retract)?

17. What is the stroke length?

18. How will the actuator be mounted to the extension tube?

19. How will the actuator be mounted to the rear adaptor?

* Please enter all fields in the form and send it and any drawing to customer service by mail, fax or email. See the back of the catalog for the nearest
location.

Application Data Form*
Worksheet

www.thomsonlinear.com18

www.thomsonlinear.com
EU201210-02 EN LIM 2k TJ 201210
Specifications are subject to change without notice. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of
this product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. © 2012 Thomson Industries, Inc.

EUROPE

United Kingdom
Thomson
Phone: +44 (0) 1271 334 500
Fax: +44 (0) 1271 334 501
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 (0) 7022 504 0
Fax: +49 (0) 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 (0) 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 (0) 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Largo Brughetti
20030 Bovisio Masciago
Phone: +39 0362 594260
Fax: +39 0362 594263
E-mail: info@thomsonlinear.it

Spain
Thomson
Rbla Badal, 29-31 7th, 1st
08014 Barcelona
Phone: +34 (0) 9329 80278
Fax: + 34 (0) 9329 80278
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 (0) 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 (0) 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO

Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: 1-540-633-3549
Fax: 1-540-633-0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

ASIA

Asia Pacific
Thomson
750, Oasis, Chai Chee Road,
#03-20, Technopark @ Chai Chee,
Singapore 469000
E-mail: sales.hk@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 2205, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 6661 802
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson India
10th Floor , Sigma Building
Hiranandani Business Park
Powai , Mumbai – 400076
E-mail: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Tel: +81-6-6386-8001
Fax: +81-6-6386-5022
E-mail: csinfo_dicgj@danaher.co.jp

Korea
Thomson
F12 Ilsong Bldg, 157-37
Samsung-dong, Kangnam-gu,
Seoul, Korea (135-090)
Phone: +82 2 6917 5049
Fax: +82 2 6917 5007
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

www.thomsonlinear.com

Miniature Components and Systems

Thomson performance, precision and reliability – in miniature form

2

www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Thomson – Your Single Source for Miniature Machine
Components Engineered to Work Together

Thomson produces the widest selection of miniature linear and rotary components
that are engineered to work together. This equates to faster design times, less
installation problems, and higher performance and reliability.

The Thomson family of miniature products provide linear thrust and guidance
or rotary motion control in the smallest packages available. They all benefit
from Thomson’s long experience in motion control engineering and have all the
advantages and features offered for standard size products.

Thomson also provides customized solutions. Whether you need alternative
materials, customized nut geometry, custom configured bearings, special end
machining or mounting features, we have the solution.

Miniature Metric Linear Bearings

Miniature Metric Rolled Ball Screws

Glide Screw™

Compact and cost competitive, these bearings can help
bring high-performance linear guidance to miniature
equipment.

This line of rolled ball screws from Thomson are
designed to offer industry leading capacity, smoothness
and quiet operation. The design allows for simple
customization and cost effectiveness.

By combining a lead screw and a linear guide, the Glide Screw
allows designers to reduce the footprint of their equipment, improve
uptime and reduce cost of ownership of the end product.

3

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

The Thomson Advantage

Smaller components enable designers to reduce the size and weight of their
end product, resulting in products that are smaller, lighter and less expensive to
produce. A smaller product will also reduce packaging and transportation cost,
while lessening the overall environmental impact of the equipment. Choosing
Thomson as your supplier brings some additional advantages as well.

Miniature BrakesMiniature Lead Screws

CustomizationMiniature Linear Motion Systems

Thomson Advantages

Advantage Benefits

Widest variety of miniature linear products on the
market

• Expedited design time
• Single source of engineering support
• Consolidated supply base

Products designed to work together • Online sizing and selection tools for easy design
• Fewer installation problems
• Higher-performance equipment

Easy customization • Custom sizes, finishes, materials and more
• Optimized cost, size and performance

Geniune Thomson quality • Fewer defects and field failures
• Lower overall cost of ownership

Global company • Sales and support around the globe
• Safe partner with proven track record
• Knowledge about local standards and preferences

Thomson offers customized
solutions for all of our products
– from a minor adjustment to
a completely new design. See
page 15 or contact us for more
information.

Thomson Deltran Power-off
brakes have been providing low-
cost, high-performance solutions
in small diameters for more than
50 years. We offer brakes with
the highest torque-to-diameter
ratios on the market.

Thomson was the first company in the world to present
a linear motion system. Today we offer a large range of
different models, including miniature sizes.

Thomson is a global leader in lead screw technology.
Our broad offering, high quality and ability to customize
set us apart.

4 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Linear Motion Miniature Products Overview*

Product Image Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page

Basic
Specifications

Unit of Measure Anti-backlash
or Preload

Feature

No or Low
Maintenance

Required

Noise

Level

Product
Cost
Level

Stiffness
Properties

Accuracy
Properties

Corrosion
Resistance
Properties

Thrust
Capacity

Level

Guidance
Capacity

Level

Metric Inch

Lead Screws Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
MTS Flange Mount Supernut (MTS)

8
6 – 20 mm

3/16 – 3/4 in. • • • –

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Anti-Backlash Supernut (AFT)

8
10 mm

3/8 – 1/2 in. • • • • –

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
XC Anti-Backlash Supernut (XC)

8
6 – 24 mm
3/16 – 1 in. • • • • –

Ball Screws
Miniature Metric Rolled – Flanged (FSI)
Miniature Metric Rolled – Threaded (TSI)
Miniature Metric Rolled – Round (RSI)

9 10– 12 mm • –

Linear Bearings 60 Case
® Linear Race Shafting and

Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)
10 1/8 – 1/4 in. • –

60 Case® Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)

10 3 – 12 mm • –

60 Case® Linear Race Shafting and
Super Ball Bushing Bearing (SP)

10
12 – 40 mm

1/2 – 1-1/2 in. • • • –

Profile Rail
Guides

Microguide™ (TSR) 11 5 – 15 mm • • –

Glide Screws Glide Screw™ (GS) 12
4 – 10 mm

3/16 – 3/8 in. • • •

Linear Motion
Systems

MicroStage® (MS)

13

MS25: 50 x 25
MS33: 60 × 33 • • •

Rotary Motion Miniature Products Overview*

Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page

Basic
Specifications

Unit of Measure Manual
Release
Function

No
Maintenance

Required

Noise
Level

Product
Cost
Level

Torque
to

Size Ratio

Energy
Efficiency

Level
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties

Backlash
Level

Expected
Life

Metric Inch

Brakes Metric Power-off Brake (MBRP) 14 37 – 75 mm • • • •

Spring-set Power-off Brake (FSB) 14 34.8 – 44.5 mm • • •

Miniature Components and Systems Overview

Products providing thrust

Products providing guidance

Products providing both thrust and guidance

Products providing rotary motion control

5

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Linear Motion Miniature Products Overview*
Product Image Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page
Basic
Specifications
Unit of Measure Anti-backlash
or Preload
Feature
No or Low
Maintenance
Required
Noise
Level
Product
Cost
Level
Stiffness
Properties
Accuracy
Properties
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties
Thrust
Capacity
Level
Guidance
Capacity

LevelMetric Inch

Lead Screws Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
MTS Flange Mount Supernut (MTS)
8
6 – 20 mm
3/16 – 3/4 in. • • • –
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Anti-Backlash Supernut (AFT)
8
10 mm
3/8 – 1/2 in. • • • • –
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
XC Anti-Backlash Supernut (XC)
8
6 – 24 mm
3/16 – 1 in. • • • • –
Ball Screws
Miniature Metric Rolled – Flanged (FSI)
Miniature Metric Rolled – Threaded (TSI)
Miniature Metric Rolled – Round (RSI)
9 10– 12 mm • –
Linear Bearings 60 Case
® Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)
10 1/8 – 1/4 in. • –
60 Case® Linear Race Shafting and
Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)
10 3 – 12 mm • –
60 Case® Linear Race Shafting and
Super Ball Bushing Bearing (SP)
10
12 – 40 mm
1/2 – 1-1/2 in. • • • –
Profile Rail
Guides
Microguide™ (TSR) 11 5 – 15 mm • • –
Glide Screws Glide Screw™ (GS) 12
4 – 10 mm
3/16 – 3/8 in. • • •
Linear Motion
Systems
MicroStage® (MS) 13
MS25: 50 x 25
MS33: 60 × 33 • • •
Rotary Motion Miniature Products Overview*
Product Group Product Line Name (Product Suffix) See
Page
Basic
Specifications
Unit of Measure Manual
Release
Function
No
Maintenance
Required
Noise
Level
Product
Cost
Level
Torque
to
Size Ratio
Energy
Efficiency
Level
Corrosion
Resistance
Properties
Backlash
Level
Expected
Life
Metric Inch
Brakes Metric Power-off Brake (MBRP) 14 37 – 75 mm • • • •
Spring-set Power-off Brake (FSB) 14 34.8 – 44.5 mm • • •

Good

Better

Best

* These are a small selection from our standard product ranges. More product ranges are
available, and most products also come in additional sizes and versions. Thomson specializes
in making customized products to meet your exact specifications. See page 15 for more
information.

6 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Diagnostic and Life Science Instruments
• Chemistry analyzers
• Hematology instruments
• Histology and microscopy instruments
• Molecular biology instruments
• Lab automation

Applications

Miniature linear motion components are ideal for applications where precise
movement of small loads is critical. In particular, they add value in instruments for
medical diagnostics, test and measurement equipment, and engraving and printing,
as well as a broad range of fluid pumping and pick-and-place applications.

Fluid pumps benefit from the smooth,
precise motion of Thomson miniature
components.

Fluid handling machines can rely on Thomson
miniature components for every axis of motion.

Fluid Pumping
• Medical infusion pumps
• Industrial fluid pumps
• Lubrication pumps
• Syringe pumps

MRBP Brake

Miniature Metric Bearing and
60 Case® LinearRace® Shafting

Microguide™ Profile Rail

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
Supernut

TSI Miniature Rolled Ball Screw

Super Ball Bushing® Bearings and
60 Case LinearRace Shafting

Thomson BSA Lead Screw and
AFT Supernut

7

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Test and Measurement Equipment
• Torque testers
• Load and pull testers

Thomson provides custom sizes, finishes and
materials for engraving/printing machines to
deliver an optimized solution.

Cap tightening/inspection machines utilize a
system of miniature Thomson components that
have been engineered to work together, thereby
reducing design time and overall time to market.

Applications

MicroStage® Linear Motion System

Glide Screw™

Microguide Profile Rail

TSI Miniature Rolled Ball Screw

FSB Brake

Other Applications
• Portable installations (e.g. bedside scanner)
• Portable ventilators
• Dosage equipment
• Electronics manufacturing equipment
• Inspection, scanning and printing equipment
• Packaging and dispensing equipment
• Aerospace and defense applications
• Vending machines

Robotics and Pick & Place Equipment
• Engraving, scanning and printing machines
• Electronics manufacturing equipment
• Medical surgery manipulators/robots
• Manipulators for use in hazardous areas
• Camera inspection equipment

8 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Lead Screws
Thomson BSA Lead Screw and Supernut (MTS, AFT and XC)

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Visit the lead screw section on our website to see our complete
range of lead screws and find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

Main Features

Thomson BSA Lead Screw
• Lead accuracy up to 0.003 in./ft. (75 µm/300 mm)
• Highly customizable solutions for OEM applications
• Precision screw machining
• Optional materials and coatings available

Supernut MTS
• Excellent lubricity and dimensional stability
• Cost-effective manufacturing, including integral flange

Supernut AFT
• Designed for light load applications
• Offers smooth movement and low drag torque
• Anti-backlash adjusts for wear for the life of the nut

Supernut XC
• Utilizes Thomson BSA patented ActiveCAM technology
• Offers low drag torque and high axial stiffness
• Anti-backlash ensures consistent performance and repeatability

Performance Specifications
Product Line Supernut

Model MTS AFT XC

Screw diameter range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

6 – 20
3/16 – 3/4

10
3/8 – 1/2

6 – 24
3/16 – 1

Lead range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

1 – 50
0.031 – 2.000

2 – 20
0.050 – 1.200

1 – 50
0.050 – 2.000

Backlash [mm] < 0.254 0 0

Axial design load, maximum [N] 1225 110 1560

Accuracy, standard rolled (precision rolled) [µm/300 mm] 250 (75)

Maintenance Designed to minimize preventative maintenance

9

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Ball Screws
Miniature Metric Rolled Ball Screw (FSI, TSI, RSI)

Main Features

Performance Specifications
Product Line

Screw diameter, nominal [mm] 10 10 10 12

Lead [mm] 2 3 10 2

Nut size (diameter × length) [mm] ø 19.5 × 22 ø 21 × 29 ø 23 × 35 ø 20 × 40

Dynamic load capacity (1) [kN] 2.0 4.8 2.9 6.8

Static load capacity [kN] 3.4 8.6 5.2 13.1

Length of screw, maximum [mm] 1800

Axial backlash, maximum [mm] 0.05

Material Carbon Steel

Maintenance High load density ensures maximum life

• Design maximizes load capacity
• Quiet and smooth performance
• Flexible ball nut mounting configurations and rapid prototyping
• Exceeds 100% more capacity than competition in
most sizes
• Higher load capacity equates to longer life
• Precision rolled screws to T7 accuracy class

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Visit the ball screw section on our website to see our complete
range of ball screws and find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

(1) L10 life is based on one million revolutions.

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

10 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Main Features

Linear Bearings
60 Case® LinearRace® Shafting and Linear Bearings (INST, MM and SP)

60 Case LinearRace Shafting
• Manufactured to the highest quality standards
• Different materials, surface treatments and special
machining available

Miniature Instrument Bearing (INST)
• High accuracy and responsiveness
• For smaller loads

Miniature Metric Bearing (MM)
• Light and compact
• Up to 27 times longer life than conventional linear bearings

Super Ball Bushing® Bearing (SP)
• Low cost, easy to install and long life
• Industry standard for self-aligning linear bearings

Performance Specifications
Product Line Miniature Instrument (INST) Miniature Metric (MM) Super Ball Bushing (SP)

Unit of measure version Inch Metric Metric Inch

Shafting size range
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

–
1/8 – 1/4

3 – 12
–

12 – 40
–

–
1/2 – 1-1/2

Dynamic bearing load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[N]
[lbf]

84 650 14700
–

–
3000

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 3

Friction coefficient 0.001 – 0.004

Bearing material (standard configuration) 440 stainless steel Carbon steel and delrin

Maintenance Light lubrication

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Visit the linear bearings and guides section on our website to
see our complete range of linear bearings and guides and find
useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

11

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Profile Rail Guides
Microguide™ (TSR)

• Low profile
• Comes in two profile styles – standard and wide
• Available in two accuracy classes – H and P
• Quiet and smooth operation
• Low weight
• Industry standard, drop-in replacement
• High moment load capacity
• Two-track, gothic-arch ball groove geometry enables single
rail application

Main Features

Performance Specifications
Product Line Microguide

Model TSR5Z TSR7Z TSR7ZW TSR9Z TSR9ZW TSR12Z TSR12ZW TSR15Z TSR15ZW

Size of carriage and rail (width × height) [mm] 6 × 12 8 × 17 9 × 25 10 × 20 12 × 30 13 × 27 14 × 40 16 × 32 16 × 60

Rail length, minimum/maximum [mm] 40/160 40/1000 50/1010 55/1015 50/1010 70/1020 70/1030 150/1030 110/1030

Dynamic load, maximum [N] 336 924 1370 1544 2450 2780 4020 4410 6660

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 3

Acceleration, maximum [m/s2] 50

Accuracy [± mm] up to 0.01

Material [kg/m] 440 stainless steel

Maintenance Little or no lubrication

Visit the profile rail bearings section on our website to see our
complete range of linear bearings and guides and find useful
resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.
Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

12 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Glide Screws
Glide Screw™ (GS)

Performance Specifications
Product Line Glide Screw

Model GS4 GS6 GS10 GS18 GS25 GS37

Screw diameter
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

4
–

6
–

10
–

–
0.188

–
0.250

–
0.375

Screw lead
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

1, 4, 8
–

1, 6, 12
–

2, 6, 12
–

–
0.05, 0.125

–
0.05, 0.5, 0.75

–
0.063, 0.5, 1

Screw length, maximum
metric version
inch version

[mm]
[in.]

150
–

250
–

450
–

–
6

–
10

–
18

Axial load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[N]
[lbs]

89.0
–

133.4
–

311.4
–

–
30

–
45

–
70

Moment load, maximum
metric version
inch version

[Nm]
[in-lbs]

2.3
–

5.4
–

15.5
–

–
20.5

–
47.5

–
137.5

Maintenance Maintenance free

• Lead screw and linear bearing combined
• Patented design
• Aligned from factory
• Side load and moment load capable
• Integrated lubrication block – no maintenance requried
• Smooth and quiet motion
• Cylindrical or flanged nuts available
• Versions for high temperature, clean room and food grade
applications available

Main Features

NEW PRODUCT!

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Visit the Glide Screw section on our website to see our com-
plete range of glide screws and find useful resources such as:
• Product selector
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

13
Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Linear Motion Systems
MicroStage® (MS25 and MS33)

Performance Specifications
Product Line MicroStage

Model MS25 MS33

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 50 × 25 60 × 33

Dynamic carriage load, maximum [N] 100 150

Stroke length, maximum [mm] 705.5 704

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 0.85 1.02

Accuracy [± mm] 0.18 / 300

Repeatability [± mm] 0.005

Type of screw Lead screw

Maintenance Lubrication of screws and guides

• Ultra compact
• Low cost
• Low weight
• High accuracy and repeatability
• Smooth motion
• Corrosion-resistant options available
• RediMount™ motor mounting kit included

Main Features

Visit the linear motion systems section on our website to see
our complete range of linear motion systems and find useful
resources such as:
• Product selector
• Linear Motioneering sizing and selection software
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.
Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

14 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Brakes
Power-off Brakes (MBRP and FSB)

Performance Specifications
Product Line Metric Power-off Brake Power-off Brake

Model MBRP15 MBRP19 MBRP22 MBRP26 MBRP30 FSB15 FSB17

Body diameter [mm] 37 47 56 65 75 34.8 44.5

Body length [mm] 32 32 32 34 36 22.9 26.9

Mounting hole bolt circle diameter [mm] 32 40 48 58 66 30 39.2

Hub bore sizes [mm] 5, 6 6, 7 8 10 12 3, 4, 5 5, 6, 8

Static torque [Nm] 0.24 0.5 1 2 4 0.12 0.34

Power [W] 5 6.5 8.2 11.5 13 6 7

Weight [kg] 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 0.09 0.27

Supply voltages (standard) [VDC] 12, 24, 90

MBRP Series
• Spring-set electromagnetic power-off brake
• Five frame sizes
• Low cost
• Simple installation
• Superior torque-to-size ratio
• Energy efficient
• Optional manual release lever available
• UL-recognized component

FSB Series
• Spring-set electromagnetic power-off brake
• Two frame sizes
• Low cost
• Simple installation
• Superior torque-to-size ratio
• Energy efficient

Main Features
Visit our microsite for more information on our miniature
products offering.

Visit the clutches and brakes section on our website to see
our complete range of clutches and brakes and find useful
resources such as:
• CAD models
• Webinars
• Literature and technical articles

Microsite: www.thomsonlinear.com/mini
Website: www.thomsonlinear.com

15

Miniature Components and Systems
www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

A selection of custom lead screw nuts

Customization

Applications often have unique challenges that cannot
always be solved by an off-the-shelf solution. Thomson
specializes in providing custom-engineered
solutions quickly and cost effectively to
address these requirements.

Selection of Customization Possibilities

Type of customization Examples

Custom materials • Stainless steel bearings or an aluminium/plastic housing
• Nuts or bushings made in a special metal, plastic, composite or ceramic material
• Replacement of hardware to meet demands in special environments

Custom surface treatment • Paint of different quality and/or color
• Thicker anodization on aluminum parts
• Specially coated screws or sliding surfaces (PTFE, chrome, black oxide, etc.)

Custom size or geometry • Non-standard stroke lengths
• Custom end machining or motor/mounting interfaces
• Special nut, carriage or flange designs

Custom assemblies • Product shipped with mounting brackets, gearboxes and/or motors mounted
• Product shipped in parts or sub-assemblies for the customer to assemble
• Product shipped mounted to the customer’s equipment

Custom services • Special lubrication
• Special stocking or transportation program
• Training of engineers, maintenance or other personnel
• Special service, repair and/or maintenance program
• Special packaging, testing, certification or quality control procedures
• Engineering evaluation

New designs • Change or combine one or several products into a new product
• Clean sheet designs

Thomson has proven that custom designs can
offer optimum performance at a low overall cost.
3D CAD design, rapid prototyping and flexible
manufacturing have made customization a faster
process. Once the product is ready and approved,
it will be manufactured and shipped as quickly as a
standard product.

16 www.thomsonlinear.com/mini

Miniature_Components_Systems_BREN-0011-03 | 20180320 KB
Specifications are subject to change without notice. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of
this product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. ©2018 Thomson Industries, Inc.

www.thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO
Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: 1-540-633-3549
Fax: 1-540-633-0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

EUROPE
United Kingdom
Thomson
Office 9, The Barns
Caddsdown Business Park
Bideford
Devon, EX39 3BT
Phone: +44 (0) 1271 334 500
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 (0) 7022 504 0
Fax: +49 (0) 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 (0) 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 (0) 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Largo Brughetti
20030 Bovisio Masciago
Phone: +39 0362 594260
Fax: +39 0362 594263
E-mail: info@thomsonlinear.it

Spain
Thomson
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 (0) 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 (0) 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

ASIA
Asia Pacific
Thomson
E-mail: sales.apac@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 2205, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 6661 802
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson
c/o CNRG Energy India Pvt. Ltd.
Unit No. FF A 07
rt Guild House, A Wing, 1st Floor, L.B.S Marg
Kurla – West, Mumbai – 400070 India
Phone: +0091 22 6249 5043
E-mail: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Phone: +81-6-6386-8001
Fax: +81-6-6386-5022
E-mail: csjapan@scgap.com

Korea
Thomson
F7 Ilsong Bldg, 157-37
Samsung-dong, Kangnam-gu,
Seoul, Korea (135-090)
Phone: +82 2 6917 5049
Fax: +82 2 528 1456
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

SOUTH AMERICA
Brazil
Thomson
Av. Tamboré, 1077
Barueri, SP – 06460-000
Phone: +55 (11) 3616-0191
Fax: +55 (11) 3611-1982
E-mail: sales.brasil@thomsonlinear.com

LINEAR ACTUATORS

Rolaram

3

Contents

Linear Actuators (Electro-Mechanical)

1 Overview of Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range ……………………………………………………….4
2 Working Applications for Rolaram® Actuators ……………………………………………………….6
3 Product Code for Rolaram® Actuators ………………………………………………………………….7
4 Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range …………………………………………………………………………8
5 How to Select a Rolaram® Actuator ……………………………………………………………………10
6 Rolaram® Performance Data ……………………………………………………………………………..11
7 Rolaram® Linear Actuator Dimensions ……………………………………………………………….17
8 Rolaram® Accessories and Options …………………………………………………………………….21
9 Special Rolaram® Designs and Applications ………………………………………………………..22

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

1. Overview of Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range

What is a Rolaram® Linear Actuator?
Rolaram® is an electro-mechanical linear actuator, which consists of either a Spiracon™ planetary roller screw or a

b

all screw, driven by
an electric motor, through a reduction gearbox. The lead screw converts rotary motion to linear movement. As the screw rotates, the nut
extends and retracts the ram, which is attached to the load.

Nut
Housing

Roller

Load Bearing
Element

Thrust
Bearing

Wiper Seal

Needle Roller Bearing

Spiracon Nut

Parallel Configuration

Helical Spur
Gearbox

Brake Motor

Thrust Bear-
ing Housing

Tapered Roller
Thrust Bearings

Spiracon
Roller Screw

Outer Casing Wiper Seal

Screw Support
Bearing Bearing Support

Inner Ram

Clevis End

The Spiracon™ Roller Screw
This unique patented system consists of a multi-start screw with
an involute thread form and a number of planetary rollers with
annular grooves, which engage with the screw. These rollers also
engage with a grooved load bearing element, which transmits the
load through roller thrust bearings, to the nut housing. The rolling
action results in a high efficiency mechanism, while the line contact
and hardened and ground construction achieves a high dynamic load
carrying capacity, along with almost no axial backlash or wear.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Main features of Rolaram® Actuators
• High efficiency screw mechanism and gearbox
• High dynamic load capacity and wide speed range
• Controllable for synchronisation
• Precise repeatability of positioning
• Long life and low maintenance and running costs
• Clean operation and low noise
• Cost effective package
• Guided ram option

Advantages over other Actuators
Rolaram actuators can not only match the load capacity of hydraulic cylinders and exceed the load capacity of conventional
electro-mechanical actuators but also provide:

• Easy installation, no pipework, powerpack and valves
• Easy synchronisation of more than one unit
• Accurate and repeatable positioning using simplified system
• Low power consumption and running costs
• No oil leaks, contamination or fire risk
• Low noise system
• Higher dynamic capacity, higher speed capability and longer life

Applications for Rolaram® Actuators
Rolaram actuators are well proven throughout the world in a wide variety of industries including
Nuclear Food Processing Aerospace Paper
Metal Processing Offshore and Marine Medical Communications Automotive Defence Typical applications include:
Scissor lifts, lifting platforms, robotics, continuous paint pumps, medical beds, coiling/decoiling machines, tundish cars, continuous
operation process lines.

Drive Configurations

Right Angle Parallel In-Line

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

2. Working Applications for Rolaram® Actuators

Application
Die splitter for opening up 20 tonne die sets, prior to their use in the
production of car body panels.

Linear Actuation Requirements
Dies require to be split evenly, with all corners being moved simultaneously, within 5 microns of each
other.

Solution
4 identical Rolaram actuators mounted one on each corner of the die splitter. Each driven by a servo
motor, controlled by a PLC, to ensure synchronisation of all 4 actuators, within the required limits of
positional accuracy. Cranes were previously used to split the dies and the die splitter now represents a
considerable time saving in preparing dies for production.

Application
European Community funded research project, to monitor the steering roll characteristics on a
zincplating line for steel strip. The aim is to optimise downtime and repairs on the line.

Linear Actuation Requirements
5 axis control of the steering roll (X, Y, Z and tilt), to a repeatable positional accuracy of less than 10
microns.

Solution
5 Rolaram actuators, each driven by an AC synchronous servo motor, controlled by a Programmable
Multi Axis Control System. The units are fitted with an incremental encoder, a load cell and backlash
free gimble mounting.

Operating
Moving a maximum load of 270kg at a maximum acceleration of 1 metre/second2 and a maximum speed
of Characteristics 0.5 metre/second, to a repeatable accuracy of less than 10 microns.

Application
Grinding head adjustment to put precise tapers on camshaft cam lobes.

Linear Actuation Requirements
Moving a load of 270kg, on a continuous duty cycle, over an operating life of 10 years.

Solution
A single Rolaram actuator fitted with an AC servo motor and encoder.
Unit is sealed to prevent the ingress of abrasive dust.

Application
De-chocking car for removal and refitting of 14 tonne bearing assemblies
(chocks) on steel rolls.

Linear Actuation Requirements
4 stage sequence of operation
• Locate car on its rails, parallel to and exactly on centre line of bearing assembly.
• High speed traverse drive to place lift platform under bearing assembly.
• Raise lift platform to sense load of 14 tonne bearing assembly, then
move 75 microns to locate centrally around tapered shaft of steel roll.
• Drive platform traverse to clear bearing assembly from shaft (slow speed) then safely locate bearing
assembly on car (high speed). A hydraulic solution was unable to satisfy the above requirements.

Solution
A total of 2 Rolaram actuators and 6 Spiracon roller screws, to provide a combination of high speed
(up to 45 metres/minute), very slow speed and micron accuracy. Since the de-chocking car has been
installed, the time required to prepare rolls for changing at the mill stands has been reduced by up to
50%.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

3. Product Code for Rolaram® Actuators

The product code is of the following form:

Example Part Number

Notes: (1) The above part number defines a standard catalogue unit. Where a standard unit does not meet the
customer’s requirement, Power Jacks will be pleased to design a special unit.

(1) Product Code
An 8 digit code obtained from
Technical Charts (refer 2.2.6.)

(2) Drive Configuration
R – Right Angle
P – Parallel
H – In-Line

(3) Unguided/guided
P – Unguided Ram
K – Guided Ram

(1) Model R075 Actuator with linear speed of 600 mm/min

(2) Parallel Drive Configuration

(3) Guided Ram

(4) Stroke of 400 mm

(5) Screwed End Fitting

(6) Trunnion Mounting with Trunnion Feet and End Cap Foot

(7) With Proximity Switches

(8) Without Encoder

(4) Stroke
A 4 figure code to represent the
required stroke in mm.

(5) End Fitting
C – Clevis End
T – Top Plate
S – Screwed End

(6) Mounting
RC – Rear Clevis
TN – Trunnion withoutFeet
TF – Trunnion with Trunnion Feet
TE – Trunnion with Trunnion Feet and
End Cap Foot

(7) Proximity Switches
P – With stroke detecting Proximity
Switches
0 – Without stroke detecting Proximity
Switches

(8) Encoder
E – With Encoder
0 – Without Encoder

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

R 0 7 5 0 6 0 0 P K 0 4 0 0 S T E P 0

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

4. Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range

There are 8 standard Rolaram models, available in 2 standard drive configurations, each with 10 linear speeds and offering a wide range of
load capabilities. The R050, R075, R100 and R125 models are available in a Ball Screw version, for applications where positional accuracy is
less important and a more cost effective solution is desired.

Where the standard range does not meet the application specification, special actuators can be designed to meet customers’ specific
requirements (refer page 9).

Dynamic Load Capacity and Linear Speed
Dynamic load capacity from 4 kN to 400 kN (0.4 to 40 tonnes). A wide choice of linear speeds is available, from less than 250 mm/ minute to
7000 mm/minute. The speed range is achieved by using a combination of gearbox ratios, screw leads and standard motor speeds. The load/
speed curves below illustrate by model how the dynamic load capacity varies with linear speed.

Load/Speed Curves

Drive
The drive is a standard 415v 3ph AC brake motor, mounted either at right angles or parallel to the actuator ram. The motor is fitted with a
brake as standard, to insure that despite the high efficiency screw and gear system, the actuator is self sustaining and will not back drive.
High efficiency helical spur and spiral bevel gearing are used to achieve the choice of reduction ratios and the option of a right angle or
parallel drive.

Stroke
Each model can be provided with a stroke length up to the maximum shown in the Technical Charts. Please note that these strokes allow
for the maximum dynamic load in compression. For a tensile load, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated depending on the
linear speed. Where the stroke required exceeds the maximum shown, or there is a high static load, please contact our Technical Sales
Department.

Standard Features
• Right angle or parallel drive configurations
• Choice of end fittings – clevis, screwed end, top plate
• Trunnion mounting (with or without feet)
• Rear Clevis
• Proximity switches, encoder
• Ball screw version for R075, R100 and R125 models
• Guided ram

400 R

2

50

350

300 R225

250

200 R175

150

R150
100

50

R125
B125

R100
B100

R075
B075
B050

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Dynamic Load
Capacity

(kN)

Linear Speed
(x 103 mm/min)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Operating Life and Duty
The actuator models listed in the Technical Charts are capable of very high operating lives (in excess of 10,000 hours for some high speed
models). The ball screw version may have a lower life expectancy than the equivalent roller screw version. Due to the almost limitless
number of possible configurations, please consult our Technical Sales Department for an estimate of life for individual applications.
Continuous duty applications e.g. reciprocating pumping systems can also be realised.

Efficiency
The inherent high efficiency of the screw and helical spur and spiral bevel gear system combine to give an overall mechanical efficiency of
typically 80%. Power consumption is therefore minimised and a compact actuator is assured.

Synchronisation
Synchronisation of two or more Rolaram actuators can be achieved in one of two ways, depending on the requirements of the application:
• Using encoders, synchronous motors or servo systems (i.e. each unit motorised)
• By linking the units mechanically with drive shafting, driven by one common motor

Positional Accuracy
The inherent accuracy of the roller screw and low backlash gearing provide repeatable positioning to within 0.005mm (5 microns), when the
actuator is combined with a suitable drive and control system. Ball screw models have a positional accuracy of 50 microns.

Guiding the Load
Side loads on the actuator ram should be avoided by ensuring that the load is guided. The load guide mechanism should resist the torque
developed at the ram by the screw mechanism, thus precluding the use of spherical end fittings. The guided ram option, which utilises
rolling element followers, eliminates the need for torsional restraint and therefore allows flexibility in the choice of end fittings.

Mounting Position
The Rolaram actuator can be mounted for operation in any orientation.

Safety Features
• In the event of power failure, the fail-safe brake on the motor will maintain the position

of the actuator

• Totally enclosed and sealed unit
• Built in proximity switches/limit switches
• Guided ram version

Operating Environment
All units are constructed and finished to suit industrial operating conditions. The actuator is sealed at the ram and including the standard
brake motor is protected to IP55 enclosure. Normal operating temperatures are from -10°C to +50°C. However, Power Jacks products have
been proven in very low operating temperatures (-30°C- Arctic) and in very high temperatures (+70°C- steelworks). Please contact our
Technical Sales Department to discuss hostile or hazardous operating environments.

Lubrication and Maintenance
Rolaram actuators require only a minimum of maintenance during the normal operating life. Depending upon the duty, periodic lubrication
should be carried out on the Spiracon roller nut, thrust housing and helical spur/spiral bevel gearbox, according to the application and our
recommended maintenance instructions.

Specials
The Rolaram concept has been successfully applied in many varied “special” applications, requiring for example:
• Very high linear speed (over 50 metres/minute) or acceleration (over 3 metres/sec2)
• Very high dynamic load (over 1000kN)
• In-line drive configuration
• Special drive e.g inverter, servo, DC, stepper
• Temperature extremes or hazardous environment (e.g. subsea)
• Built in load cell
• Special mounting or restricted space
• Very low noise (under 60dB)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Example
Dynamic Load = 50 kN (in compression)
Linear Speed = 900 mm/minute Stroke = 1500 mm
Parallel drive configuration, unguided ram, fitted with a clevis end, trunnion mounting (without feet) and proximity switches.

Step 1
Using load/speed curves on page 8, select model R125.

Step 2
Referring to Technical Chart for Model R125-Parallel Configuration on page 11, select product code R1251040.

Step 3
The required stroke of 1500 mm is less than the maximum shown (1600 mm).

Step 4
The complete product code is therefore R1251040-P-P-1500-C-TN-P-0

5. How to Select a Rolaram® Actuator
There are 4 simple steps as follows :

Step 1
Using the load/speed curves on page 8, select the actuator model
which has an adequate dynamic load capacity for the required
linear speed. Positional accuracy and life considerations may
dictate selection of the roller screw version for models R075, R100
and R125.

Step 2
Referring to the Technical Charts (page 11) for that model, select
the nearest linear speed for the chosen right angle or parallel drive
configuration.

Step 3
Check the required stroke is within the maximum stroke limit.

Step 4
Choose the end fitting, mounting arrangement and other options
required to complete the full product code shown on page 7.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

6. Rolaram® Performance Data
General Rolaram Performance Summary

Model B050/R050
Parallel Configuration

Ball Screw

Product Code Linear Speed
(mm/min)

Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compres

sion �

Basic Weight (kg)
�

Power (kW) Frame
Size

B0500260 260 13 0.18 63 835 46

B0500440 440 11 0.25 63 930 46.5

B0500550 550 10 0.37 63 990 47

B0500700 700 9.5 0.37 80 1025 47

B0501080 1080 8 0.55 80 1140 50

B0501560 1560 7 0.75 80 1250 50

B0502150 2150 6.5 0.75 80 1300 50

B0502750 2750 6 0.75 80 1365 50

B0503600 3600 5.5 1.1 80 1435 55

B0505550 5550 4.5 1.1 80 1620 55

Roller Screw

Product Code Linear Speed
(mm/min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �

Basic Weight (kg)
�
Power (kW) Frame
Size

On Application

Notes 1. Static load capacity = 19kN
2. For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on linear speed.
3. Total weight = basic weight + 2.2 kg (ball screw) per 100 mm stroke.
4. All weights are approximate.

Load Up to 400 kN (40 Te)

Linear Speed Up to 7000 mm/min

Stroke Up to 5000 mm

Efficiency 80% (typical)

Accuracy
Roller Screw Up to within 0.005 mm (5 micron)

Ball Screw Up to within 0.05 mm (50 micron)

Operating Temperature
Normal -10o C → +50o C
Extreme (consult Power Jacks) -30o C → +70o C

Life 10 000 hours typical as standard at full rated load and speed

Enclosure IP55

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B075/R075

Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)

Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �

Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size

B
A

L
L

S
C

R
E

W

B0750280 � 280 21.0 0.18 80 2200 22.5

B0750720 � 720 16.0 0.25 71 2500 22.5

B0750970 � 970 12.0 0.25 71 2900 22.5

B0751270 1270 9.0 0.25 71 3200 22.5

B0751470 1470 7.8 0.25 71 3500 22.5

B0751650 1650 7.0 0.37 71 4000 22.5

B0752560 2560 6.6 0.37 71 4000 22.5

B0754030 4030 6.2 0.55 71 3400 22.5

B0754700 4700 5.3 0.55 71 3100 22.5

B0757130 7130 4.8 0.75 80 2500 36.5

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size

R

O

L
L

E
R

S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 � 240 23.0 0.12 71 400 22.5

R0750620 � 620 19.0 0.25 71 450 22.5

R0750840 � 840 14.0 0.25 71 530 22.5

R0751010 1010 11.5 0.25 71 600 22.5

R0751280 1280 9.0 0.25 71 690 22.5

R0751850 1850 9.3 0.37 71 690 22.5

R0752400 2400 7.2 0.37 71 750 22.5

R0754290 4290 6.0 0.55 71 750 22.5

R0754800 4800 5.4 0.55 71 800 22.5

R0757000 7000 5.0 0.75 80 800 36.5

Notes: � Static load capacity = 36KN

Model B075/R075
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B0750280 250 22.0 0.12 63 2200 29.0

B0750720 670 17.0 0.25 71 2500 29.0

B0750970 1340 12.7 0.37 71 2900 30.0

B0751270 1600 10.5 0.37 71 3200 30.0

B0751470 1960 8.6 0.37 71 3500 30.0

B0751650 2670 6.4 0.37 71 4100 30.0

B0752560 3200 5.3 0.37 71 3800 30.0

B0754030 5400 4.7 0.55 71 2900 30.0

B0754700 6080 4.1 0.55 71 2700 30.0

B0757130 6770 3.1 0.75 71 2600 30.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 220 24.0 0.12 63 400 29.0

R0750620 600 19.0 0.25 63 450 29.0

R0750840 1020 17.0 0.37 71 480 30.0

R0751010 1220 14.3 0.37 71 530 30.0

R0751280 1570 11.2 0.37 71 600 30.0

R0751850 2040 8.5 0.37 71 690 30.0

R0752400 2610 6.7 0.37 71 770 30.0

R0754290 4070 6.5 0.55 71 780 30.0

R0754800 5930 4.4 0.55 71 940 30.0

R0757000 7120 3.7 0.75 71 1000 30.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 36kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 2.4 kg (ball screw) or 1.0 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B100/R100
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1000280 � 280 41.5 0.25 80 2400 40.0

B1000350 � 350 33.0 0.25 80 2700 40.0

B1000970 � 970 26.0 0.55 80 3000 40.0

B1001280 1280 19.5 0.55 80 3500 40.0

B1001660 1660 15.0 0.55 80 4000 40.0

B1002380 2380 14.4 0.75 80 4100 40.0

B1002590 2590 13.2 0.75 80 4200 40.0

B1004100 4100 12.2 1.1 80 3700 40.0

B1004780 4780 10.5 1.1 80 3400 40.0

B1007180 7180 9.6 1.5 90 2800 45.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1000240 � 240 48.0 0.25 80 850 40.0

R1000300 � 300 38.0 0.25 80 900 40.0

R1000840 � 840 30.5 0.55 80 1100 40.0

R1001010 1010 25.5 0.55 80 1200 40.0

R1001280 1280 20.0 0.55 80 1400 40.0

R1001840 1840 19.0 0.75 80 1400 40.0

R1002380 2380 14.8 0.75 80 1500 40.0

R1004410 4410 11.7 1.1 80 1750 40.0

R1004920 4920 10.4 1.1 80 1800 40.0

R1007080 7080 9.9 1.5 90 1800 49.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 75kN

Model B100/R100
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1000270 270 42.0 0.25 71 2400 47.0

B1000530 530 32.0 0.37 71 2700 47.0

B1000930 930 27.0 0.55 80 3000 47.0

B1001260 1260 20.0 0.55 80 3500 47.0

B1001680 1680 15.0 0.55 80 4000 47.0

B1002090 2090 12.0 0.55 80 4500 47.0

B1003060 3060 11.2 0.75 80 4200 50.0

B1004290 4290 8.0 0.75 80 3600 50.0

B1006770 6770 7.4 1.1 80 2800 50.0

B1007580 7580 6.6 1.1 80 2700 50.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)

Dynamic Load capac-
ity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm)
in Compres-

sion �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1000360 360 50.0 0.37 71 800 47.0

R1000490 490 35.5 0.37 71 900 47.0

R1000930 930 28.0 0.55 71 1100 47.0

R1001140 1140 23.0 0.55 71 1200 47.0

R1001510 1510 16.4 0.55 71 1400 47.0

R1001900 1900 13.7 0.55 71 1500 47.0

R1002880 2880 13.0 0.75 80 1600 50.0

R1003900 3900 9.1 0.75 80 1800 50.0

R1006430 6430 8.1 1.1 80 1800 50.0

R1007200 7200 7.2 1.1 80 1900 50.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 75kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 3.3 kg (ball screw) or 1.6 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B125/R125
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1250380 � 380 65.0 0.55 80 1900 61.0

B1250630 � 630 54.0 0.75 90 2100 61.0

B1251180 1180 42.5 1.1 90 2300 61.0

B1252030 2030 34.0 1.5 90 2600 61.0

B1252370 2370 29.0 1.5 90 2900 61.0

B1253020 3020 22.8 1.5 90 3200 61.0

B1253380 3380 20.4 1.5 90 3400 61.0

B1254100 4100 16.8 1.5 90 3700 61.0

B1254780 4780 14.4 1.5 90 3400 61.0

B1257130 7130 14.0 2.2 100 2800 68.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1250330 � 330 78.0 0.55 90 1600 61.0

R1250550 � 550 64.0 0.75 90 1800 61.0

R1250890 890 58.0 1.1 90 1900 61.0

R1251390 1390 50.5 1.5 90 2000 61.0

R1251760 1760 40.0 1.5 90 2100 61.0

R1252000 2000 37.0 1.5 90 2200 61.0

R1252450 2450 28.5 1.5 90 2400 61.0

R1254440 4440 23.2 2.2 90 2600 61.0

R1254960 4960 20.7 2.2 90 2600 61.0

R1257180 7180 19.5 3.0 90 2600 72.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 120kN

Model B125/R125
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1250390 390 64.0 0.55 80 1900 78.0

B1250620 620 55.5 0.75 80 2000 78.0

B1251090 1090 46.0 1.1 90 2200 82.0

B1251990 1990 34.0 1.5 90 2600 82.0

B1253420 3420 29.0 2.2 90 2900 82.0

B1254040 4040 25.0 2.2 90 3100 82.0

B1255010 5010 20.0 2.2 90 3300 82.0

B1255820 5820 17.0 2.2 90 3100 82.0

B1256860 6860 14.6 2.2 90 2800 82.0

B1258510 8510 11.8 2.2 90 2500 82.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 330 80.0 0.55 80 1500 78.0

R0750620 770 68.0 1.1 80 1600 78.0

R0750840 1040 67.6 1.5 90 1600 82.0

R0751010 1530 46.0 1.5 90 2000 82.0

R0751280 2380 43.6 2.2 90 2040 82.0

R0751850 2980 34.8 2.2 90 2200 82.0

R0752400 3610 28.8 2.2 90 2400 82.0

R0754290 4240 24.5 2.2 90 2500 82.0

R0754800 5130 20.2 2.2 90 2700 82.0

R0757000 6060 17.1 2.2 90 2740 82.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 120kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 4.2 kg (ball screw) or 2.2 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model R150
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1500440 � 440 118.0 1.1 90 2180 90.0

R1500760 � 760 92.0 1.5 100 2300 100.0

R1501160 � 1160 88.6 2.2 100 2300 100.0

R1501400 1400 73.5 2.2 100 2650 100.0

R1501770 1770 58.2 2.2 100 2800 100.0

R1501910 1910 53.9 2.2 100 3000 100.0

R1503590 3590 39.1 3.0 100 3300 100.0

R1504530 4530 30.9 3.0 100 3600 100.0

R1505060 5060 27.7 3.0 100 3500 100.0

R1507230 7230 25.9 4.0 112 3500 105.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1500420 420 122.0 1.1 90 2000 101.0

R1500680 680 103.8 1.5 90 2180 101.0

R1501070 1070 97.4 2.2 90 2200 101.0

R1501420 1420 73.0 2.2 90 2500 101.0

R1501810 1810 57.4 2.2 90 2800 101.0

R1502260 2260 45.8 2.2 90 3200 101.0

R1502980 2980 34.8 2.2 90 3500 101.0

R1503610 3610 28.8 2.2 90 3600 101.0

R1504240 4240 24.5 2.2 90 3700 101.0

R1506060 6060 17.1 2.2 90 3500 101.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 185kN

Model R175
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1750460 � 460 225.0 2.2 112 2200 165.0

R1750570 � 570 180.0 2.2 112 2400 165.0

R1751160 � 1160 121.0 3.0 100 3000 161.0

R1751810 1810 103.6 4.0 112 3100 165.0

R1752020 2020 92.7 4.0 112 3300 165.0

R1752860 2860 65.4 4.0 112 3800 165.0

R1753610 3610 51.8 4.0 112 4000 165.0

R1754560 4560 41.0 4.0 112 4000 165.0

R1755100 5100 36.7 4.0 112 3800 165.0

R1757230 7230 35.6 5.5 132 3600 210.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1750220 220 210.0 1.1 90 2200 158.0

R1750650 650 176.0 2.2 100 2400 168.0

R1751120 1120 140.0 3.0 100 2700 168.0

R1751330 1330 117.0 3.0 100 3000 168.0

R1751880 1880 102.8 4.0 112 3100 175.0

R1752140 2140 83.7 4.0 112 3400 175.0

R1752680 2680 67.0 4.0 112 3800 175.0

R1753300 3300 53.4 4.0 112 4000 175.0

R1754760 4760 40.2 4.0 112 4000 175.0

R1755690 5690 32.6 4.0 112 3900 175.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 335kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 2.8 kg (R150) or 3.0 kg (R175) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model R225
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2250340 � 340 300.0 2.2 132 3000 307.0

R2250580 � 580 240.0 3.0 132 3300 311.0

R2250880 � 880 212.5 4.0 112 3500 285.0

R2251180 � 1180 158.0 4.0 112 3950 285.0

R2251820 1820 141.4 5.5 132 4100 306.0

R2252880 2880 89.3 5.5 132 4800 306.0

R2253610 3610 71.2 5.5 132 4900 306.0

R2254560 4560 56.3 5.5 132 4600 306.0

R2255100 5100 50.4 5.5 132 4600 306.0

R2257230 7230 48.5 7.5 132 4500 316.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2250370 370 280.0 2.2 100 3000 297.0

R2250750 750 246.0 4.0 112 3200 301.0

R2251010 1010 196.5 4.0 112 3500 301.0

R2251250 1250 184.0 4.0 112 3600 301.0

R2251480 1480 174.4 5.5 132 3700 348.0

R2252610 2610 124.7 5.5 132 4200 348.0

R2252860 2860 90.0 5.5 132 4800 348.0

R2253490 3490 73.8 5.5 132 4900 348.0

R2254960 4960 51.9 5.5 132 4700 348.0

R2256720 6720 43.9 5.5 132 4600 348.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 450kN

Model R225
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2500470 � 470 402.0 4.0 132 3000 405.0

R2500790 � 790 327.0 5.5 132 3200 417.0

R2501190 � 1190 294.0 7.5 132 3500 431.0

R2501440 1440 243.5 7.5 132 3800 431.0

R2501820 1820 192.8 7.5 132 4100 431.0

R2502030 2030 172.5 7.5 132 4300 431.0

R2503000 � 3000 143.4 9.5 132 4500 441.0

R2503630 3630 118.6 9.5 132 4800 431.0

R2505150 5150 99.8 11.0 160 4500 457.0

R2507330 7330 95.7 15.0 160 4500 467.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2500670 670 386.0 5.5 132 3000 483.0

R2501140 1140 329.0 7.5 132 3300 483.0

R2501340 1340 262.5 7.5 132 3600 483.0

R2501860 1860 250.5 9.5 132 3750 483.0

R2502350 2350 189.8 9.5 132 4100 483.0

R2502820 2820 165.3 9.5 132 4300 483.0

R2503520 3520 132.3 9.5 132 4700 483.0

R2504080 4080 116.5 9.5 132 4800 483.0

R2504630 4630 95.0 9.5 132 4800 483.0

R2505560 5560 75.3 9.5 132 4600 483.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 600kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 5.1 kg (R225) or 5.8 kg (R250) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

7. Rolaram Linear Actuator Dimensions
Rolaram – Parallel Motor Configuration – Trunnion Mount

Rolaram Actuators with Roller Screw

Size
R050 R075 R100 R125 R150 R175 R225 R250

Frame
63

Frame
80

Frame
63

Frame
71

Frame
71
Frame
80
Frame
80

Frame
90

Frame
90
Frame
90

Frame
100

Frame
112

Frame
100
Frame
112

Frame
132

Frame
132

AØ

A
v

a

il
ab

le
o

n
r

eq
u

es
t

A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

102 120 145 175 195 255 275

BØ 40 50 70 90 110 140 150

C 208 248 305 320 385 465 560

D

340 360 385 409 426 463 463 510 545 3568 558 581 660 750

E 158 190 226 226 255 306 350

F 264 272 337 337 385 385 385 454 454 454 522 522 530 586

G 122 147 178 178 206 251 281

HØ 130 145 145 162 162 181 181 181 203 228 203 228 266 266

I 227 248 242 266 266 303 303 310 345 368 345 368 447 443

J 118 143 160 160 200 213 307

K 60 68 68 67 67 75 75 75 90 95 90 95 122 122

L 113 125 125 137 137 147 147 147 158 171 158 171 196 196

M 267 324 387 387 438 527 581

N 77 90 107 107 123 146 172

AE 110 142 160 185 206 270 285

AF 125 110 145 180 165 180 190

Rolaram Actuators with Ball Screw

Size
B050 B075 B100 B125

Frame
63
Frame
80
Frame
63
Frame
71
Frame
71
Frame
80
Frame
80
Frame
90
AØ
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

102 120 145

BØ 75 92 106

C 208 248 305

D 340 360 385 409 426 463

E 158 190 226

F 264 272 337 337 385 385

G 122 147 178

HØ 130 145 145 162 162 181

I 227 248 242 266 266 303

J 118 143 160

K 60 68 68 67 67 75

L 113 125 125 137 137 147

M 267 324 387

N 77 90 107

AE 110 142 160

AF 125 110 145

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimeteres (mm)
unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

J Motor I
Brake K

Motor ØH

Guided Option

C

AF

Ø

B

Ø
A

Ø

A
E

L

N

E

G F M

D

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Rolaram® – Parallel Motor Configuration – Rear Clevis Mount
Rolaram with rear clevis mounting enables the actuator to be configured for double clevis arrangements.
Details below are for the B050 Rolaram Actuator only. For all other sizes contact Power Jacks.

B050 – Rolaram®

Standard Clevis, Top Plate and Threaded Ends are available on request.

Frame 63 71 80
A 432 + Stroke 432 + Stroke 432 + Stroke

B 20 HB 20 HB 20 HB

C 120 120 120

D 50 50 50

E 80 80 80

F 176 176 176

G 88 88 88

H 282 282 282

J 85 85 85

K 197 197 197

L 471 499 543

M 122 137 158

N 160 + Stroke 160 + Stroke 160+ Stroke

P 112 112 112

Q 110 110 110

R 50 50 50

S 25 25 25

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimetres (mm) unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

ØB

C

S

R

F

G

ØM

N

A
L

P

ØB
S

K
H

ØD

ATravel

Q

ØE
J

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Rolaram® – Right Angled Motor Configuration – Trunnion Mount

2.2.7.3.1. Roller Screw and Ball Screw

Size R/B 050 R/B 075 R/B 100 R/B 125 R/B 150
Frame 71 Frame 80 Frame 80 Frame 90 Frame 90 Frame 100 Frame 90 Frame 100 Frame 112

O
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

157.5 190 210 236.5

P 155 max 209 max 233 max 245 max 243 max 255 max 285 max 295 max 292 max

Q 110 140 140 170

R 158 193 193 235

SØ 145 162 162 181 181 203 181 203 228

T 207 232 232 275 275 275 275 305 325

U 68 67 67 75 75 90 75 90 95

V 186 223 223 226 226 261 226 261 273

WØ 160 200 200 200 200 250 200 250 250

X 62 60 72 85

Y 220.5 max 274.5 max 316 max 328 max 326 max 338 max 383 max 393 max 390 max

AB 10 12 12 18

AE 110 142 160 185

AF 125 110 145 180

Size R/B 175 R/B 225 R/B 250
Frame 100 Frame 112 Frame 132 Frame 112 Frame 132 Frame 132 Frame 160

O 300 365 370

P 270 max 343 max 363 max 332 max 427 max 383 max 383 max

Q 210 240 280

R 291 338 406

SØ 203 228 266 228 266 266 326

T 305 325 395 325 395 395 521

U 90 95 122 95 122 122 130

V 261 273 323 273 323 323 380

WØ 250 250 300 250 300 300 350

X 107 128 151

Y 391 max 464 max 484 max 468 max 563 max 546 max 546 max

AB 22 26 32

AE 206 270 285

AF 165 180 190

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimeteres (mm) unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

U
(Brake)

T
(Motor)

Y
P

ØS

Guided Option

X

ØB ØA ØAE

Q

AB

R

Motor V

ØW

AFO

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

End Fittings and Mountings

YY

DD

Trunnion

VV

EE

ØCC

Clevis End Screwed End Top Plate

WW

LL + Stroke

ØII JJ

YY

AC

AA

ØZ

BB

Trunnion Feet/End Cap Foot

MM

O
O

Notes 1. Dimensions in brackets refer to Ball Screw Models.

PP
QQ

ZZ + Stroke

SS

TT + Stroke

AG

YY XX

AD

RR

FF

GG

NN

UU
YY

KK

H
H

K
K

Size 075 100 125 150 175 225 250
ZØ (H7) 20 28 35 42 55 70 80

AA 23 32 38 47 62 78 90

BB 25 30 35 40 50 70 80

CCØ 105 (145) 130 (175) 170 (210) 220 270 300 330

DD 14 18 22 26 33 33 39

EE
4 X Ø13.5 X 80

PCD (115)
4 X Ø18 X 100

PCD (140)
4 X Ø22 X 130

PCD (165)
4 X Ø26 X 170

PCD

4 X Ø33 X 205

PCD
6 X Ø33 X 235

PCD
6 X Ø39 X 260

PCD

FF M24 X 3 M36 X 4 M36 X 4 M48 X 5 M68 X 6 M80 X 6 M80 X 6

GG 35 40 50 60 75 90 125

HH 211 290 325 324 355 530 610

IIØ (F7) 35 45 60 70 95 110 125

JJ 32 45 50 60 80 90 105

KK 115 160 175 190 195 260 310

LL 300 305 363 495 750 850 750

MM 85 100 110 120 150 180 195

NN 14 20 25 35 40 45 50

OO 251 350 389 412 453 640 742

PP 100 140 154 238 308 350 400

QQ 60 80 90 150 210 240 268

RR 120 145 180 210 260 280 350

SS 6 X Ø13.5 6 X Ø22 6 X Ø26 6 X Ø33 6 X Ø39 6 X Ø45 6 X Ø52

TT 281 305 407 505 767 903 790

UU 160 205 250 300 370 410 500

VV 20 23 27 32 40 52 60

WW 28 37 45 54 72 90 105

XX 40 45 57 67 85 102 140

YY 50 41 24 50 58 32 60

ZZ 301 335 442 550 822 968 865

AC 20 28 35 45 55 70 80

AD 39 40.5 7.5 35 41 12 35

AG 70 90 85 110 135 155 180

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

8. Rolaram®Accessories and Options
Limit Switches
Standard Rolaram®Actuator Limit Switch
• Inductive proximity switches
• Cylindrical design M18 x 1
• Standard housing made from brass or stainless steel.
• DC-voltage
• Sizes: A = 60 mm, B = 51.5 mm

Rolaram® Limit Switch Technical Data

Parameter Data
Type Four-wire PNP/NPN/NO/NC programmable

Housing Material Brass housing

Nominal Sensing Distance, Sn 5mm

Weight (kg) 0.120

Connecting Cable 4 core x 0.34mm2, 2m long (other lengths available on request)

Degree of Protection IP 68

Sensing Distance, Sr 0 → 4mm
Repeat Accuracy, R 3% of Sr

Diffential Travel, H 1 15% of Sr

Operating Temperature -25 → + 80°C
Output State Indicator LED

Voltage, Uo 12 → 24VDC
Operating Voltage, Ub (including residual ripple) 10 → 38VDC
Switching power, I 0 → 200mA, including overload and short circuit connection
Voltage Drop, Ud (output controlled) 2.6V

Residual Current, Ir (output locked) –

Idle Current, Ia 10mA

Maximum Switching Frequency, f 2000Hz

Delay Times Stand-by delay tv = 5ms, switch-on time ton = 1.15ms, switch-off time toff = 0.35ms

Optional Rolaram®Actuator Limit Switch
Other limit switches can be supplied to suit most applications e.g:
• Different sizes, shape, design and enclosure electro-mechanical limit switches
• Inductive proximity sensor
• Hazardous Area rated electro-mechanical limit switch
• High or low temperature rated limit switches or sensors. For all of these options consult Power Jacks for details

Encoders for Rolaram® Actuators
Encoders for Rolaram linear actuators can be provided fitted to the rear of the electric motor (beneath the cowling). For further details
please consult Power Jacks.

Optional Materials for Rolaram® Actuator Construction
As with all other Power Jacks products these actuators can be manufactured with alternative materials to meet the most demanding
application. Consult Power Jacks for advice.

a
b

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

9. Special Rolaram® Designs and Applications
Actuator
R150 model, roller screw version, in-line drive.

Application
Driving reciprocating, double acting paint pumps in the first all-electric
paint mix facility in Europe.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The dynamic load is 17.9 kN in both directions, at a linear speed of 3
metres/minute

and a continuous duty cycle of 24 hours/day, 365 days/year. Each pump
delivers 40 litres of paint/minute at 12 bar, 12 cycles/minute. The paint
shop output is 30 cars/hour

(Phase 1) and 60 cars/hour (Phase 2).

Solution
Each pump is driven by a special R150 Rolaram actuator and a total of
31 actuator and pump systems are installed.

The actuator’s features are:
• In-line configuration, minimizing the installation footprint
• Completely sealed unit, ensuring no contamination of the pumped medium
• Intrinsically safe, eliminating explosion risk
• Fitted with a keyed screw mechanism

An electro mechanical solution was preferred to pneumatics/hydraulics due to significantly reduced running costs, high
life and reliability, high efficiency, low maintenance, low paint degradation and quiet operation.

Actuator
B100 model, ball screw version, parallel drive.

Application
Full body, multi purpose X ray examination table.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The dynamic load is 65 kN and high positional accuracy is required to achieve a defined
axial play of the ram. Due to the clinical environment, the ability to tilt and elevate at
the same time is unique and no other table on the marketplace is available with this
feature. Operating in a medical environment, a major requirement of the actuators is
low noise and the units cannot exceed 60 dB.

Solution
Two B100 ball screw Rolaram actuators, both parallel drive configurations, are fitted
on each X ray table and they are synchronized for horizontal and vertical positioning
through a complex servo control system. The actuators are tested to withstand 8 times
the maximum load, without catastrophic failure. Due to space constraints, they are of a
compact design and conform to strict aesthetic criteria.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Actuator
Spring return actuator, ball screw version, in-line drive.

Application
Failsafe operation of ventilation dampers.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The actuator opens and closes the damper and maintains a 3 kN
load to ensure that the damper is sealed. The damper must open
and close in 2 seconds and operate at 250°C for 1 hour. In the
event of power failure, the actuator must failsafe in the closed
position.

Solution
One off ball screw actuator is fitted onto each damper. The actuator contains a pre-
loaded spring and is fitted with a high temperature brake motor. The internal spring
and drive configuration will allow the ram to retract automatically in the event of
power failure. Three adjustable limit switch positions are provided and the stroke can
be set within the allowable 120 mm, by adjusting these switches. All components are
selected for the appropriate approved temperature requirement. The actuator has a
fire test certificate for operation at 250°C for 1 hour.

Actuator
R175 model, roller screw version, right angle drive.

Application
Positioning a weir gate for water level adjustment.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The actuator moves a dynamic load of 150 kN (static load of 330 kN), at a linear speed
of 240 mm/minute, has a stroke of 2700 mm and a life requirement of 40 years.

Solution
One actuator is fitted on each weir gate and has several special
features:
• Universal joint at the ram end to compensate for misalignment and to resist

the load torque

• Geared motor drive with hand wind facility
• Positional indication and end of travel limit switches
• Non contaminating grease
This application is in a remote location and an electro mechanical solution was
preferred over hydraulics due to low power requirements, no expensive hydraulic
power pack, no hydraulic fluid leakage i.e. no water contamination and minimal
maintenance.

LINEAR ACTUATORS

Rolaram

3

Contents

Linear Actuators (Electro-Mechanical)

1 Overview of Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range ……………………………………………………….4
2 Working Applications for Rolaram® Actuators ……………………………………………………….6
3 Product Code for Rolaram® Actuators ………………………………………………………………….7
4 Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range …………………………………………………………………………8
5 How to Select a Rolaram® Actuator ……………………………………………………………………10
6 Rolaram® Performance Data ……………………………………………………………………………..11
7 Rolaram® Linear Actuator Dimensions ……………………………………………………………….17
8 Rolaram® Accessories and Options …………………………………………………………………….21
9 Special Rolaram® Designs and Applications ………………………………………………………..22

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

1. Overview of Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range

What is a Rolaram® Linear Actuator?
Rolaram® is an electro-mechanical linear actuator, which consists of either a Spiracon™ planetary roller screw or a

b

all screw, driven by
an electric motor, through a reduction gearbox. The lead screw converts rotary motion to linear movement. As the screw rotates, the nut
extends and retracts the ram, which is attached to the load.

Nut
Housing

Roller

Load Bearing
Element

Thrust
Bearing

Wiper Seal

Needle Roller Bearing

Spiracon Nut

Parallel Configuration

Helical Spur
Gearbox

Brake Motor

Thrust Bear-
ing Housing

Tapered Roller
Thrust Bearings

Spiracon
Roller Screw

Outer Casing Wiper Seal

Screw Support
Bearing Bearing Support

Inner Ram

Clevis End

The Spiracon™ Roller Screw
This unique patented system consists of a multi-start screw with
an involute thread form and a number of planetary rollers with
annular grooves, which engage with the screw. These rollers also
engage with a grooved load bearing element, which transmits the
load through roller thrust bearings, to the nut housing. The rolling
action results in a high efficiency mechanism, while the line contact
and hardened and ground construction achieves a high dynamic load
carrying capacity, along with almost no axial backlash or wear.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Main features of Rolaram® Actuators
• High efficiency screw mechanism and gearbox
• High dynamic load capacity and wide speed range
• Controllable for synchronisation
• Precise repeatability of positioning
• Long life and low maintenance and running costs
• Clean operation and low noise
• Cost effective package
• Guided ram option

Advantages over other Actuators
Rolaram actuators can not only match the load capacity of hydraulic cylinders and exceed the load capacity of conventional
electro-mechanical actuators but also provide:

• Easy installation, no pipework, powerpack and valves
• Easy synchronisation of more than one unit
• Accurate and repeatable positioning using simplified system
• Low power consumption and running costs
• No oil leaks, contamination or fire risk
• Low noise system
• Higher dynamic capacity, higher speed capability and longer life

Applications for Rolaram® Actuators
Rolaram actuators are well proven throughout the world in a wide variety of industries including
Nuclear Food Processing Aerospace Paper
Metal Processing Offshore and Marine Medical Communications Automotive Defence Typical applications include:
Scissor lifts, lifting platforms, robotics, continuous paint pumps, medical beds, coiling/decoiling machines, tundish cars, continuous
operation process lines.

Drive Configurations

Right Angle Parallel In-Line

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

2. Working Applications for Rolaram® Actuators

Application
Die splitter for opening up 20 tonne die sets, prior to their use in the
production of car body panels.

Linear Actuation Requirements
Dies require to be split evenly, with all corners being moved simultaneously, within 5 microns of each
other.

Solution
4 identical Rolaram actuators mounted one on each corner of the die splitter. Each driven by a servo
motor, controlled by a PLC, to ensure synchronisation of all 4 actuators, within the required limits of
positional accuracy. Cranes were previously used to split the dies and the die splitter now represents a
considerable time saving in preparing dies for production.

Application
European Community funded research project, to monitor the steering roll characteristics on a
zincplating line for steel strip. The aim is to optimise downtime and repairs on the line.

Linear Actuation Requirements
5 axis control of the steering roll (X, Y, Z and tilt), to a repeatable positional accuracy of less than 10
microns.

Solution
5 Rolaram actuators, each driven by an AC synchronous servo motor, controlled by a Programmable
Multi Axis Control System. The units are fitted with an incremental encoder, a load cell and backlash
free gimble mounting.

Operating
Moving a maximum load of 270kg at a maximum acceleration of 1 metre/second2 and a maximum speed
of Characteristics 0.5 metre/second, to a repeatable accuracy of less than 10 microns.

Application
Grinding head adjustment to put precise tapers on camshaft cam lobes.

Linear Actuation Requirements
Moving a load of 270kg, on a continuous duty cycle, over an operating life of 10 years.

Solution
A single Rolaram actuator fitted with an AC servo motor and encoder.
Unit is sealed to prevent the ingress of abrasive dust.

Application
De-chocking car for removal and refitting of 14 tonne bearing assemblies
(chocks) on steel rolls.

Linear Actuation Requirements
4 stage sequence of operation
• Locate car on its rails, parallel to and exactly on centre line of bearing assembly.
• High speed traverse drive to place lift platform under bearing assembly.
• Raise lift platform to sense load of 14 tonne bearing assembly, then
move 75 microns to locate centrally around tapered shaft of steel roll.
• Drive platform traverse to clear bearing assembly from shaft (slow speed) then safely locate bearing
assembly on car (high speed). A hydraulic solution was unable to satisfy the above requirements.

Solution
A total of 2 Rolaram actuators and 6 Spiracon roller screws, to provide a combination of high speed
(up to 45 metres/minute), very slow speed and micron accuracy. Since the de-chocking car has been
installed, the time required to prepare rolls for changing at the mill stands has been reduced by up to
50%.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

3. Product Code for Rolaram® Actuators

The product code is of the following form:

Example Part Number

Notes: (1) The above part number defines a standard catalogue unit. Where a standard unit does not meet the
customer’s requirement, Power Jacks will be pleased to design a special unit.

(1) Product Code
An 8 digit code obtained from
Technical Charts (refer 2.2.6.)

(2) Drive Configuration
R – Right Angle
P – Parallel
H – In-Line

(3) Unguided/guided
P – Unguided Ram
K – Guided Ram

(1) Model R075 Actuator with linear speed of 600 mm/min

(2) Parallel Drive Configuration

(3) Guided Ram

(4) Stroke of 400 mm

(5) Screwed End Fitting

(6) Trunnion Mounting with Trunnion Feet and End Cap Foot

(7) With Proximity Switches

(8) Without Encoder

(4) Stroke
A 4 figure code to represent the
required stroke in mm.

(5) End Fitting
C – Clevis End
T – Top Plate
S – Screwed End

(6) Mounting
RC – Rear Clevis
TN – Trunnion withoutFeet
TF – Trunnion with Trunnion Feet
TE – Trunnion with Trunnion Feet and
End Cap Foot

(7) Proximity Switches
P – With stroke detecting Proximity
Switches
0 – Without stroke detecting Proximity
Switches

(8) Encoder
E – With Encoder
0 – Without Encoder

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

R 0 7 5 0 6 0 0 P K 0 4 0 0 S T E P 0

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

4. Rolaram® Linear Actuator Range

There are 8 standard Rolaram models, available in 2 standard drive configurations, each with 10 linear speeds and offering a wide range of
load capabilities. The R050, R075, R100 and R125 models are available in a Ball Screw version, for applications where positional accuracy is
less important and a more cost effective solution is desired.

Where the standard range does not meet the application specification, special actuators can be designed to meet customers’ specific
requirements (refer page 9).

Dynamic Load Capacity and Linear Speed
Dynamic load capacity from 4 kN to 400 kN (0.4 to 40 tonnes). A wide choice of linear speeds is available, from less than 250 mm/ minute to
7000 mm/minute. The speed range is achieved by using a combination of gearbox ratios, screw leads and standard motor speeds. The load/
speed curves below illustrate by model how the dynamic load capacity varies with linear speed.

Load/Speed Curves

Drive
The drive is a standard 415v 3ph AC brake motor, mounted either at right angles or parallel to the actuator ram. The motor is fitted with a
brake as standard, to insure that despite the high efficiency screw and gear system, the actuator is self sustaining and will not back drive.
High efficiency helical spur and spiral bevel gearing are used to achieve the choice of reduction ratios and the option of a right angle or
parallel drive.

Stroke
Each model can be provided with a stroke length up to the maximum shown in the Technical Charts. Please note that these strokes allow
for the maximum dynamic load in compression. For a tensile load, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated depending on the
linear speed. Where the stroke required exceeds the maximum shown, or there is a high static load, please contact our Technical Sales
Department.

Standard Features
• Right angle or parallel drive configurations
• Choice of end fittings – clevis, screwed end, top plate
• Trunnion mounting (with or without feet)
• Rear Clevis
• Proximity switches, encoder
• Ball screw version for R075, R100 and R125 models
• Guided ram

400 R

2

50

350

300 R225

250

200 R175

150

R150
100

50

R125
B125

R100
B100

R075
B075
B050

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Dynamic Load
Capacity

(kN)

Linear Speed
(x 103 mm/min)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Operating Life and Duty
The actuator models listed in the Technical Charts are capable of very high operating lives (in excess of 10,000 hours for some high speed
models). The ball screw version may have a lower life expectancy than the equivalent roller screw version. Due to the almost limitless
number of possible configurations, please consult our Technical Sales Department for an estimate of life for individual applications.
Continuous duty applications e.g. reciprocating pumping systems can also be realised.

Efficiency
The inherent high efficiency of the screw and helical spur and spiral bevel gear system combine to give an overall mechanical efficiency of
typically 80%. Power consumption is therefore minimised and a compact actuator is assured.

Synchronisation
Synchronisation of two or more Rolaram actuators can be achieved in one of two ways, depending on the requirements of the application:
• Using encoders, synchronous motors or servo systems (i.e. each unit motorised)
• By linking the units mechanically with drive shafting, driven by one common motor

Positional Accuracy
The inherent accuracy of the roller screw and low backlash gearing provide repeatable positioning to within 0.005mm (5 microns), when the
actuator is combined with a suitable drive and control system. Ball screw models have a positional accuracy of 50 microns.

Guiding the Load
Side loads on the actuator ram should be avoided by ensuring that the load is guided. The load guide mechanism should resist the torque
developed at the ram by the screw mechanism, thus precluding the use of spherical end fittings. The guided ram option, which utilises
rolling element followers, eliminates the need for torsional restraint and therefore allows flexibility in the choice of end fittings.

Mounting Position
The Rolaram actuator can be mounted for operation in any orientation.

Safety Features
• In the event of power failure, the fail-safe brake on the motor will maintain the position

of the actuator

• Totally enclosed and sealed unit
• Built in proximity switches/limit switches
• Guided ram version

Operating Environment
All units are constructed and finished to suit industrial operating conditions. The actuator is sealed at the ram and including the standard
brake motor is protected to IP55 enclosure. Normal operating temperatures are from -10°C to +50°C. However, Power Jacks products have
been proven in very low operating temperatures (-30°C- Arctic) and in very high temperatures (+70°C- steelworks). Please contact our
Technical Sales Department to discuss hostile or hazardous operating environments.

Lubrication and Maintenance
Rolaram actuators require only a minimum of maintenance during the normal operating life. Depending upon the duty, periodic lubrication
should be carried out on the Spiracon roller nut, thrust housing and helical spur/spiral bevel gearbox, according to the application and our
recommended maintenance instructions.

Specials
The Rolaram concept has been successfully applied in many varied “special” applications, requiring for example:
• Very high linear speed (over 50 metres/minute) or acceleration (over 3 metres/sec2)
• Very high dynamic load (over 1000kN)
• In-line drive configuration
• Special drive e.g inverter, servo, DC, stepper
• Temperature extremes or hazardous environment (e.g. subsea)
• Built in load cell
• Special mounting or restricted space
• Very low noise (under 60dB)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Example
Dynamic Load = 50 kN (in compression)
Linear Speed = 900 mm/minute Stroke = 1500 mm
Parallel drive configuration, unguided ram, fitted with a clevis end, trunnion mounting (without feet) and proximity switches.

Step 1
Using load/speed curves on page 8, select model R125.

Step 2
Referring to Technical Chart for Model R125-Parallel Configuration on page 11, select product code R1251040.

Step 3
The required stroke of 1500 mm is less than the maximum shown (1600 mm).

Step 4
The complete product code is therefore R1251040-P-P-1500-C-TN-P-0

5. How to Select a Rolaram® Actuator
There are 4 simple steps as follows :

Step 1
Using the load/speed curves on page 8, select the actuator model
which has an adequate dynamic load capacity for the required
linear speed. Positional accuracy and life considerations may
dictate selection of the roller screw version for models R075, R100
and R125.

Step 2
Referring to the Technical Charts (page 11) for that model, select
the nearest linear speed for the chosen right angle or parallel drive
configuration.

Step 3
Check the required stroke is within the maximum stroke limit.

Step 4
Choose the end fitting, mounting arrangement and other options
required to complete the full product code shown on page 7.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

6. Rolaram® Performance Data
General Rolaram Performance Summary

Model B050/R050
Parallel Configuration

Ball Screw

Product Code Linear Speed
(mm/min)

Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compres

sion �

Basic Weight (kg)
�

Power (kW) Frame
Size

B0500260 260 13 0.18 63 835 46

B0500440 440 11 0.25 63 930 46.5

B0500550 550 10 0.37 63 990 47

B0500700 700 9.5 0.37 80 1025 47

B0501080 1080 8 0.55 80 1140 50

B0501560 1560 7 0.75 80 1250 50

B0502150 2150 6.5 0.75 80 1300 50

B0502750 2750 6 0.75 80 1365 50

B0503600 3600 5.5 1.1 80 1435 55

B0505550 5550 4.5 1.1 80 1620 55

Roller Screw

Product Code Linear Speed
(mm/min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �

Basic Weight (kg)
�
Power (kW) Frame
Size

On Application

Notes 1. Static load capacity = 19kN
2. For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on linear speed.
3. Total weight = basic weight + 2.2 kg (ball screw) per 100 mm stroke.
4. All weights are approximate.

Load Up to 400 kN (40 Te)

Linear Speed Up to 7000 mm/min

Stroke Up to 5000 mm

Efficiency 80% (typical)

Accuracy
Roller Screw Up to within 0.005 mm (5 micron)

Ball Screw Up to within 0.05 mm (50 micron)

Operating Temperature
Normal -10o C → +50o C
Extreme (consult Power Jacks) -30o C → +70o C

Life 10 000 hours typical as standard at full rated load and speed

Enclosure IP55

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B075/R075

Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)

Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �

Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size

B
A

L
L

S
C

R
E

W

B0750280 � 280 21.0 0.18 80 2200 22.5

B0750720 � 720 16.0 0.25 71 2500 22.5

B0750970 � 970 12.0 0.25 71 2900 22.5

B0751270 1270 9.0 0.25 71 3200 22.5

B0751470 1470 7.8 0.25 71 3500 22.5

B0751650 1650 7.0 0.37 71 4000 22.5

B0752560 2560 6.6 0.37 71 4000 22.5

B0754030 4030 6.2 0.55 71 3400 22.5

B0754700 4700 5.3 0.55 71 3100 22.5

B0757130 7130 4.8 0.75 80 2500 36.5

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size

R

O

L
L

E
R

S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 � 240 23.0 0.12 71 400 22.5

R0750620 � 620 19.0 0.25 71 450 22.5

R0750840 � 840 14.0 0.25 71 530 22.5

R0751010 1010 11.5 0.25 71 600 22.5

R0751280 1280 9.0 0.25 71 690 22.5

R0751850 1850 9.3 0.37 71 690 22.5

R0752400 2400 7.2 0.37 71 750 22.5

R0754290 4290 6.0 0.55 71 750 22.5

R0754800 4800 5.4 0.55 71 800 22.5

R0757000 7000 5.0 0.75 80 800 36.5

Notes: � Static load capacity = 36KN

Model B075/R075
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B0750280 250 22.0 0.12 63 2200 29.0

B0750720 670 17.0 0.25 71 2500 29.0

B0750970 1340 12.7 0.37 71 2900 30.0

B0751270 1600 10.5 0.37 71 3200 30.0

B0751470 1960 8.6 0.37 71 3500 30.0

B0751650 2670 6.4 0.37 71 4100 30.0

B0752560 3200 5.3 0.37 71 3800 30.0

B0754030 5400 4.7 0.55 71 2900 30.0

B0754700 6080 4.1 0.55 71 2700 30.0

B0757130 6770 3.1 0.75 71 2600 30.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 220 24.0 0.12 63 400 29.0

R0750620 600 19.0 0.25 63 450 29.0

R0750840 1020 17.0 0.37 71 480 30.0

R0751010 1220 14.3 0.37 71 530 30.0

R0751280 1570 11.2 0.37 71 600 30.0

R0751850 2040 8.5 0.37 71 690 30.0

R0752400 2610 6.7 0.37 71 770 30.0

R0754290 4070 6.5 0.55 71 780 30.0

R0754800 5930 4.4 0.55 71 940 30.0

R0757000 7120 3.7 0.75 71 1000 30.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 36kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 2.4 kg (ball screw) or 1.0 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B100/R100
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1000280 � 280 41.5 0.25 80 2400 40.0

B1000350 � 350 33.0 0.25 80 2700 40.0

B1000970 � 970 26.0 0.55 80 3000 40.0

B1001280 1280 19.5 0.55 80 3500 40.0

B1001660 1660 15.0 0.55 80 4000 40.0

B1002380 2380 14.4 0.75 80 4100 40.0

B1002590 2590 13.2 0.75 80 4200 40.0

B1004100 4100 12.2 1.1 80 3700 40.0

B1004780 4780 10.5 1.1 80 3400 40.0

B1007180 7180 9.6 1.5 90 2800 45.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1000240 � 240 48.0 0.25 80 850 40.0

R1000300 � 300 38.0 0.25 80 900 40.0

R1000840 � 840 30.5 0.55 80 1100 40.0

R1001010 1010 25.5 0.55 80 1200 40.0

R1001280 1280 20.0 0.55 80 1400 40.0

R1001840 1840 19.0 0.75 80 1400 40.0

R1002380 2380 14.8 0.75 80 1500 40.0

R1004410 4410 11.7 1.1 80 1750 40.0

R1004920 4920 10.4 1.1 80 1800 40.0

R1007080 7080 9.9 1.5 90 1800 49.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 75kN

Model B100/R100
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1000270 270 42.0 0.25 71 2400 47.0

B1000530 530 32.0 0.37 71 2700 47.0

B1000930 930 27.0 0.55 80 3000 47.0

B1001260 1260 20.0 0.55 80 3500 47.0

B1001680 1680 15.0 0.55 80 4000 47.0

B1002090 2090 12.0 0.55 80 4500 47.0

B1003060 3060 11.2 0.75 80 4200 50.0

B1004290 4290 8.0 0.75 80 3600 50.0

B1006770 6770 7.4 1.1 80 2800 50.0

B1007580 7580 6.6 1.1 80 2700 50.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)

Dynamic Load capac-
ity (kN) �

Motor Max Stroke (mm)
in Compres-

sion �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1000360 360 50.0 0.37 71 800 47.0

R1000490 490 35.5 0.37 71 900 47.0

R1000930 930 28.0 0.55 71 1100 47.0

R1001140 1140 23.0 0.55 71 1200 47.0

R1001510 1510 16.4 0.55 71 1400 47.0

R1001900 1900 13.7 0.55 71 1500 47.0

R1002880 2880 13.0 0.75 80 1600 50.0

R1003900 3900 9.1 0.75 80 1800 50.0

R1006430 6430 8.1 1.1 80 1800 50.0

R1007200 7200 7.2 1.1 80 1900 50.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 75kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 3.3 kg (ball screw) or 1.6 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model B125/R125
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1250380 � 380 65.0 0.55 80 1900 61.0

B1250630 � 630 54.0 0.75 90 2100 61.0

B1251180 1180 42.5 1.1 90 2300 61.0

B1252030 2030 34.0 1.5 90 2600 61.0

B1252370 2370 29.0 1.5 90 2900 61.0

B1253020 3020 22.8 1.5 90 3200 61.0

B1253380 3380 20.4 1.5 90 3400 61.0

B1254100 4100 16.8 1.5 90 3700 61.0

B1254780 4780 14.4 1.5 90 3400 61.0

B1257130 7130 14.0 2.2 100 2800 68.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1250330 � 330 78.0 0.55 90 1600 61.0

R1250550 � 550 64.0 0.75 90 1800 61.0

R1250890 890 58.0 1.1 90 1900 61.0

R1251390 1390 50.5 1.5 90 2000 61.0

R1251760 1760 40.0 1.5 90 2100 61.0

R1252000 2000 37.0 1.5 90 2200 61.0

R1252450 2450 28.5 1.5 90 2400 61.0

R1254440 4440 23.2 2.2 90 2600 61.0

R1254960 4960 20.7 2.2 90 2600 61.0

R1257180 7180 19.5 3.0 90 2600 72.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 120kN

Model B125/R125
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
B
A
L
L
S
C
R
E
W

B1250390 390 64.0 0.55 80 1900 78.0

B1250620 620 55.5 0.75 80 2000 78.0

B1251090 1090 46.0 1.1 90 2200 82.0

B1251990 1990 34.0 1.5 90 2600 82.0

B1253420 3420 29.0 2.2 90 2900 82.0

B1254040 4040 25.0 2.2 90 3100 82.0

B1255010 5010 20.0 2.2 90 3300 82.0

B1255820 5820 17.0 2.2 90 3100 82.0

B1256860 6860 14.6 2.2 90 2800 82.0

B1258510 8510 11.8 2.2 90 2500 82.0

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R0750240 330 80.0 0.55 80 1500 78.0

R0750620 770 68.0 1.1 80 1600 78.0

R0750840 1040 67.6 1.5 90 1600 82.0

R0751010 1530 46.0 1.5 90 2000 82.0

R0751280 2380 43.6 2.2 90 2040 82.0

R0751850 2980 34.8 2.2 90 2200 82.0

R0752400 3610 28.8 2.2 90 2400 82.0

R0754290 4240 24.5 2.2 90 2500 82.0

R0754800 5130 20.2 2.2 90 2700 82.0

R0757000 6060 17.1 2.2 90 2740 82.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 120kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 4.2 kg (ball screw) or 2.2 kg (roller screw) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis offset)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model R150
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1500440 � 440 118.0 1.1 90 2180 90.0

R1500760 � 760 92.0 1.5 100 2300 100.0

R1501160 � 1160 88.6 2.2 100 2300 100.0

R1501400 1400 73.5 2.2 100 2650 100.0

R1501770 1770 58.2 2.2 100 2800 100.0

R1501910 1910 53.9 2.2 100 3000 100.0

R1503590 3590 39.1 3.0 100 3300 100.0

R1504530 4530 30.9 3.0 100 3600 100.0

R1505060 5060 27.7 3.0 100 3500 100.0

R1507230 7230 25.9 4.0 112 3500 105.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1500420 420 122.0 1.1 90 2000 101.0

R1500680 680 103.8 1.5 90 2180 101.0

R1501070 1070 97.4 2.2 90 2200 101.0

R1501420 1420 73.0 2.2 90 2500 101.0

R1501810 1810 57.4 2.2 90 2800 101.0

R1502260 2260 45.8 2.2 90 3200 101.0

R1502980 2980 34.8 2.2 90 3500 101.0

R1503610 3610 28.8 2.2 90 3600 101.0

R1504240 4240 24.5 2.2 90 3700 101.0

R1506060 6060 17.1 2.2 90 3500 101.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 185kN

Model R175
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1750460 � 460 225.0 2.2 112 2200 165.0

R1750570 � 570 180.0 2.2 112 2400 165.0

R1751160 � 1160 121.0 3.0 100 3000 161.0

R1751810 1810 103.6 4.0 112 3100 165.0

R1752020 2020 92.7 4.0 112 3300 165.0

R1752860 2860 65.4 4.0 112 3800 165.0

R1753610 3610 51.8 4.0 112 4000 165.0

R1754560 4560 41.0 4.0 112 4000 165.0

R1755100 5100 36.7 4.0 112 3800 165.0

R1757230 7230 35.6 5.5 132 3600 210.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R1750220 220 210.0 1.1 90 2200 158.0

R1750650 650 176.0 2.2 100 2400 168.0

R1751120 1120 140.0 3.0 100 2700 168.0

R1751330 1330 117.0 3.0 100 3000 168.0

R1751880 1880 102.8 4.0 112 3100 175.0

R1752140 2140 83.7 4.0 112 3400 175.0

R1752680 2680 67.0 4.0 112 3800 175.0

R1753300 3300 53.4 4.0 112 4000 175.0

R1754760 4760 40.2 4.0 112 4000 175.0

R1755690 5690 32.6 4.0 112 3900 175.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 335kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 2.8 kg (R150) or 3.0 kg (R175) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Model R225
Right Angle Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2250340 � 340 300.0 2.2 132 3000 307.0

R2250580 � 580 240.0 3.0 132 3300 311.0

R2250880 � 880 212.5 4.0 112 3500 285.0

R2251180 � 1180 158.0 4.0 112 3950 285.0

R2251820 1820 141.4 5.5 132 4100 306.0

R2252880 2880 89.3 5.5 132 4800 306.0

R2253610 3610 71.2 5.5 132 4900 306.0

R2254560 4560 56.3 5.5 132 4600 306.0

R2255100 5100 50.4 5.5 132 4600 306.0

R2257230 7230 48.5 7.5 132 4500 316.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2250370 370 280.0 2.2 100 3000 297.0

R2250750 750 246.0 4.0 112 3200 301.0

R2251010 1010 196.5 4.0 112 3500 301.0

R2251250 1250 184.0 4.0 112 3600 301.0

R2251480 1480 174.4 5.5 132 3700 348.0

R2252610 2610 124.7 5.5 132 4200 348.0

R2252860 2860 90.0 5.5 132 4800 348.0

R2253490 3490 73.8 5.5 132 4900 348.0

R2254960 4960 51.9 5.5 132 4700 348.0

R2256720 6720 43.9 5.5 132 4600 348.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 450kN

Model R225
Parallel Configuration

Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2500470 � 470 402.0 4.0 132 3000 405.0

R2500790 � 790 327.0 5.5 132 3200 417.0

R2501190 � 1190 294.0 7.5 132 3500 431.0

R2501440 1440 243.5 7.5 132 3800 431.0

R2501820 1820 192.8 7.5 132 4100 431.0

R2502030 2030 172.5 7.5 132 4300 431.0

R2503000 � 3000 143.4 9.5 132 4500 441.0

R2503630 3630 118.6 9.5 132 4800 431.0

R2505150 5150 99.8 11.0 160 4500 457.0

R2507330 7330 95.7 15.0 160 4500 467.0

Right Angle Configuration
Product Code Linear Speed (mm/
min)
Dynamic Load
capacity (kN) �
Motor Max Stroke (mm) in
Compression �
Basic Weight (kg) �
Power (kW) Frame Size
R
O
L
L
E
R
S
C
R
E
W

R2500670 670 386.0 5.5 132 3000 483.0

R2501140 1140 329.0 7.5 132 3300 483.0

R2501340 1340 262.5 7.5 132 3600 483.0

R2501860 1860 250.5 9.5 132 3750 483.0

R2502350 2350 189.8 9.5 132 4100 483.0

R2502820 2820 165.3 9.5 132 4300 483.0

R2503520 3520 132.3 9.5 132 4700 483.0

R2504080 4080 116.5 9.5 132 4800 483.0

R2504630 4630 95.0 9.5 132 4800 483.0

R2505560 5560 75.3 9.5 132 4600 483.0

Notes: � Static load capacity = 600kN
� For tensile loads, greater maximum strokes can be accommodated, depending on the linear speed
� Total weight = Basic weight + 5.1 kg (R225) or 5.8 kg (R250) per 100 mm stroke. All weights are approximate
� Dimension AB applies (motor axis)

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

7. Rolaram Linear Actuator Dimensions
Rolaram – Parallel Motor Configuration – Trunnion Mount

Rolaram Actuators with Roller Screw

Size
R050 R075 R100 R125 R150 R175 R225 R250

Frame
63

Frame
80

Frame
63

Frame
71

Frame
71
Frame
80
Frame
80

Frame
90

Frame
90
Frame
90

Frame
100

Frame
112

Frame
100
Frame
112

Frame
132

Frame
132

AØ

A
v

a

il
ab

le
o

n
r

eq
u

es
t

A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

102 120 145 175 195 255 275

BØ 40 50 70 90 110 140 150

C 208 248 305 320 385 465 560

D

340 360 385 409 426 463 463 510 545 3568 558 581 660 750

E 158 190 226 226 255 306 350

F 264 272 337 337 385 385 385 454 454 454 522 522 530 586

G 122 147 178 178 206 251 281

HØ 130 145 145 162 162 181 181 181 203 228 203 228 266 266

I 227 248 242 266 266 303 303 310 345 368 345 368 447 443

J 118 143 160 160 200 213 307

K 60 68 68 67 67 75 75 75 90 95 90 95 122 122

L 113 125 125 137 137 147 147 147 158 171 158 171 196 196

M 267 324 387 387 438 527 581

N 77 90 107 107 123 146 172

AE 110 142 160 185 206 270 285

AF 125 110 145 180 165 180 190

Rolaram Actuators with Ball Screw

Size
B050 B075 B100 B125

Frame
63
Frame
80
Frame
63
Frame
71
Frame
71
Frame
80
Frame
80
Frame
90
AØ
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

102 120 145

BØ 75 92 106

C 208 248 305

D 340 360 385 409 426 463

E 158 190 226

F 264 272 337 337 385 385

G 122 147 178

HØ 130 145 145 162 162 181

I 227 248 242 266 266 303

J 118 143 160

K 60 68 68 67 67 75

L 113 125 125 137 137 147

M 267 324 387

N 77 90 107

AE 110 142 160

AF 125 110 145

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimeteres (mm)
unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

J Motor I
Brake K

Motor ØH

Guided Option

C

AF

Ø

B

Ø
A

Ø

A
E

L

N

E

G F M

D

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Rolaram® – Parallel Motor Configuration – Rear Clevis Mount
Rolaram with rear clevis mounting enables the actuator to be configured for double clevis arrangements.
Details below are for the B050 Rolaram Actuator only. For all other sizes contact Power Jacks.

B050 – Rolaram®

Standard Clevis, Top Plate and Threaded Ends are available on request.

Frame 63 71 80
A 432 + Stroke 432 + Stroke 432 + Stroke

B 20 HB 20 HB 20 HB

C 120 120 120

D 50 50 50

E 80 80 80

F 176 176 176

G 88 88 88

H 282 282 282

J 85 85 85

K 197 197 197

L 471 499 543

M 122 137 158

N 160 + Stroke 160 + Stroke 160+ Stroke

P 112 112 112

Q 110 110 110

R 50 50 50

S 25 25 25

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimetres (mm) unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

ØB

C

S

R

F

G

ØM

N

A
L

P

ØB
S

K
H

ØD

ATravel

Q

ØE
J

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Rolaram® – Right Angled Motor Configuration – Trunnion Mount

2.2.7.3.1. Roller Screw and Ball Screw

Size R/B 050 R/B 075 R/B 100 R/B 125 R/B 150
Frame 71 Frame 80 Frame 80 Frame 90 Frame 90 Frame 100 Frame 90 Frame 100 Frame 112

O
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t
A
va
il
ab
le
o
n
r
eq
u
es
t

157.5 190 210 236.5

P 155 max 209 max 233 max 245 max 243 max 255 max 285 max 295 max 292 max

Q 110 140 140 170

R 158 193 193 235

SØ 145 162 162 181 181 203 181 203 228

T 207 232 232 275 275 275 275 305 325

U 68 67 67 75 75 90 75 90 95

V 186 223 223 226 226 261 226 261 273

WØ 160 200 200 200 200 250 200 250 250

X 62 60 72 85

Y 220.5 max 274.5 max 316 max 328 max 326 max 338 max 383 max 393 max 390 max

AB 10 12 12 18

AE 110 142 160 185

AF 125 110 145 180

Size R/B 175 R/B 225 R/B 250
Frame 100 Frame 112 Frame 132 Frame 112 Frame 132 Frame 132 Frame 160

O 300 365 370

P 270 max 343 max 363 max 332 max 427 max 383 max 383 max

Q 210 240 280

R 291 338 406

SØ 203 228 266 228 266 266 326

T 305 325 395 325 395 395 521

U 90 95 122 95 122 122 130

V 261 273 323 273 323 323 380

WØ 250 250 300 250 300 300 350

X 107 128 151

Y 391 max 464 max 484 max 468 max 563 max 546 max 546 max

AB 22 26 32

AE 206 270 285

AF 165 180 190

Notes 1. All dimensions are in millimeteres (mm) unless otherwise stated.
2. “Frame” refers to IEC motor frame size.
3. Dimensions subject to change without notice.

U
(Brake)

T
(Motor)

Y
P

ØS

Guided Option

X

ØB ØA ØAE

Q

AB

R

Motor V

ØW

AFO

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

End Fittings and Mountings

YY

DD

Trunnion

VV

EE

ØCC

Clevis End Screwed End Top Plate

WW

LL + Stroke

ØII JJ

YY

AC

AA

ØZ

BB

Trunnion Feet/End Cap Foot

MM

O
O

Notes 1. Dimensions in brackets refer to Ball Screw Models.

PP
QQ

ZZ + Stroke

SS

TT + Stroke

AG

YY XX

AD

RR

FF

GG

NN

UU
YY

KK

H
H

K
K

Size 075 100 125 150 175 225 250
ZØ (H7) 20 28 35 42 55 70 80

AA 23 32 38 47 62 78 90

BB 25 30 35 40 50 70 80

CCØ 105 (145) 130 (175) 170 (210) 220 270 300 330

DD 14 18 22 26 33 33 39

EE
4 X Ø13.5 X 80

PCD (115)
4 X Ø18 X 100

PCD (140)
4 X Ø22 X 130

PCD (165)
4 X Ø26 X 170

PCD

4 X Ø33 X 205

PCD
6 X Ø33 X 235

PCD
6 X Ø39 X 260

PCD

FF M24 X 3 M36 X 4 M36 X 4 M48 X 5 M68 X 6 M80 X 6 M80 X 6

GG 35 40 50 60 75 90 125

HH 211 290 325 324 355 530 610

IIØ (F7) 35 45 60 70 95 110 125

JJ 32 45 50 60 80 90 105

KK 115 160 175 190 195 260 310

LL 300 305 363 495 750 850 750

MM 85 100 110 120 150 180 195

NN 14 20 25 35 40 45 50

OO 251 350 389 412 453 640 742

PP 100 140 154 238 308 350 400

QQ 60 80 90 150 210 240 268

RR 120 145 180 210 260 280 350

SS 6 X Ø13.5 6 X Ø22 6 X Ø26 6 X Ø33 6 X Ø39 6 X Ø45 6 X Ø52

TT 281 305 407 505 767 903 790

UU 160 205 250 300 370 410 500

VV 20 23 27 32 40 52 60

WW 28 37 45 54 72 90 105

XX 40 45 57 67 85 102 140

YY 50 41 24 50 58 32 60

ZZ 301 335 442 550 822 968 865

AC 20 28 35 45 55 70 80

AD 39 40.5 7.5 35 41 12 35

AG 70 90 85 110 135 155 180

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

8. Rolaram®Accessories and Options
Limit Switches
Standard Rolaram®Actuator Limit Switch
• Inductive proximity switches
• Cylindrical design M18 x 1
• Standard housing made from brass or stainless steel.
• DC-voltage
• Sizes: A = 60 mm, B = 51.5 mm

Rolaram® Limit Switch Technical Data

Parameter Data
Type Four-wire PNP/NPN/NO/NC programmable

Housing Material Brass housing

Nominal Sensing Distance, Sn 5mm

Weight (kg) 0.120

Connecting Cable 4 core x 0.34mm2, 2m long (other lengths available on request)

Degree of Protection IP 68

Sensing Distance, Sr 0 → 4mm
Repeat Accuracy, R 3% of Sr

Diffential Travel, H 1 15% of Sr

Operating Temperature -25 → + 80°C
Output State Indicator LED

Voltage, Uo 12 → 24VDC
Operating Voltage, Ub (including residual ripple) 10 → 38VDC
Switching power, I 0 → 200mA, including overload and short circuit connection
Voltage Drop, Ud (output controlled) 2.6V

Residual Current, Ir (output locked) –

Idle Current, Ia 10mA

Maximum Switching Frequency, f 2000Hz

Delay Times Stand-by delay tv = 5ms, switch-on time ton = 1.15ms, switch-off time toff = 0.35ms

Optional Rolaram®Actuator Limit Switch
Other limit switches can be supplied to suit most applications e.g:
• Different sizes, shape, design and enclosure electro-mechanical limit switches
• Inductive proximity sensor
• Hazardous Area rated electro-mechanical limit switch
• High or low temperature rated limit switches or sensors. For all of these options consult Power Jacks for details

Encoders for Rolaram® Actuators
Encoders for Rolaram linear actuators can be provided fitted to the rear of the electric motor (beneath the cowling). For further details
please consult Power Jacks.

Optional Materials for Rolaram® Actuator Construction
As with all other Power Jacks products these actuators can be manufactured with alternative materials to meet the most demanding
application. Consult Power Jacks for advice.

a
b

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

9. Special Rolaram® Designs and Applications
Actuator
R150 model, roller screw version, in-line drive.

Application
Driving reciprocating, double acting paint pumps in the first all-electric
paint mix facility in Europe.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The dynamic load is 17.9 kN in both directions, at a linear speed of 3
metres/minute

and a continuous duty cycle of 24 hours/day, 365 days/year. Each pump
delivers 40 litres of paint/minute at 12 bar, 12 cycles/minute. The paint
shop output is 30 cars/hour

(Phase 1) and 60 cars/hour (Phase 2).

Solution
Each pump is driven by a special R150 Rolaram actuator and a total of
31 actuator and pump systems are installed.

The actuator’s features are:
• In-line configuration, minimizing the installation footprint
• Completely sealed unit, ensuring no contamination of the pumped medium
• Intrinsically safe, eliminating explosion risk
• Fitted with a keyed screw mechanism

An electro mechanical solution was preferred to pneumatics/hydraulics due to significantly reduced running costs, high
life and reliability, high efficiency, low maintenance, low paint degradation and quiet operation.

Actuator
B100 model, ball screw version, parallel drive.

Application
Full body, multi purpose X ray examination table.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The dynamic load is 65 kN and high positional accuracy is required to achieve a defined
axial play of the ram. Due to the clinical environment, the ability to tilt and elevate at
the same time is unique and no other table on the marketplace is available with this
feature. Operating in a medical environment, a major requirement of the actuators is
low noise and the units cannot exceed 60 dB.

Solution
Two B100 ball screw Rolaram actuators, both parallel drive configurations, are fitted
on each X ray table and they are synchronized for horizontal and vertical positioning
through a complex servo control system. The actuators are tested to withstand 8 times
the maximum load, without catastrophic failure. Due to space constraints, they are of a
compact design and conform to strict aesthetic criteria.

LINEAR ACTUATORS | Rolaram

Actuator
Spring return actuator, ball screw version, in-line drive.

Application
Failsafe operation of ventilation dampers.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The actuator opens and closes the damper and maintains a 3 kN
load to ensure that the damper is sealed. The damper must open
and close in 2 seconds and operate at 250°C for 1 hour. In the
event of power failure, the actuator must failsafe in the closed
position.

Solution
One off ball screw actuator is fitted onto each damper. The actuator contains a pre-
loaded spring and is fitted with a high temperature brake motor. The internal spring
and drive configuration will allow the ram to retract automatically in the event of
power failure. Three adjustable limit switch positions are provided and the stroke can
be set within the allowable 120 mm, by adjusting these switches. All components are
selected for the appropriate approved temperature requirement. The actuator has a
fire test certificate for operation at 250°C for 1 hour.

Actuator
R175 model, roller screw version, right angle drive.

Application
Positioning a weir gate for water level adjustment.

Linear Actuation Requirements
The actuator moves a dynamic load of 150 kN (static load of 330 kN), at a linear speed
of 240 mm/minute, has a stroke of 2700 mm and a life requirement of 40 years.

Solution
One actuator is fitted on each weir gate and has several special
features:
• Universal joint at the ram end to compensate for misalignment and to resist

the load torque

• Geared motor drive with hand wind facility
• Positional indication and end of travel limit switches
• Non contaminating grease
This application is in a remote location and an electro mechanical solution was
preferred over hydraulics due to low power requirements, no expensive hydraulic
power pack, no hydraulic fluid leakage i.e. no water contamination and minimal
maintenance.

Glide Screw

™

Combines the Features of a Linear Bearing and Screw in One Compact Package

www.thomsonlinear.com

2

www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Introduction

What is a Glide Screw™? Part linear bearing, part lead screw; a combination of two
favorites to create something better than both. The patent-pending Glide Screw
brings high performance, fast installation and less complexity in a small package.

Standard Sizes and Configurations Stocked for Immediate Availability
• Metric Series includes 4, 6 and 10 mm nominal diameters
• Inch Series includes 3/16”, 1/4” and 3/8” nominal diameters
• Flanged and cylindrical nut bodies standard

Optional Configurations for Harsh Environments Available
• High temperature resistant – inside ovens or autoclaves (up to 175 °C)
• Clean room – in robot vacuum chambers, laboratories or medical equipment (ISO 6)
• Food grade – in packaging and food processing equipment

Custom Nut Configurations, Screw Diameters and Thread Leads Available
• Don’t see your perfect configuration – call us, we make custom sizes

Easy to Install and Maintenance Free!
• All that is required is a Glide Screw and an anti-rotation feature
• No need for reference surfaces or the pain of “floating” your system into alignment
• Plug and play – install it and forget it
• Integrated Thomson’s patented Lube for Life technology
• Bearing grade plastic and stainless steel construction standard

3

Glide Screw

www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Benefits of the Glide Screw Technology

The Glide Screw combines the features of a linear bearing and a lead screw in one
smooth operating package. Inch and metric sizes are standard. Custom sizes are also
available quickly and to your specification.

Reduced Footprint
• Integrated lead screw / linear bearing
• Side load / moment load capable

Improved Equipment Uptime
• Screw and linear bearing are already aligned
• Component alignment is not critical – smooth and quiet motion
• Integrated lubrication block – Thomson Lube for Life standard

Lower Cost of Ownership
• Less complexity – faster installation
• Less components – simpler bill of material
• Maintenance free – no lubrication required

Glide Nut Housing

Lubrication Block

Radial Bearing

Glide Screw

4 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Typical Application

Every engineer’s objective is to eliminate parts, streamline the design, simplify
installation and reduce the maintenance required – exactly what a Glide Screw™ does.

3D Printing or Engraving
Innovative and portable multi-axis printers / engravers are revolutionizing rapid prototyping and consumer
products. The Glide Screw can reduce the number of components, decrease system complexity, decrease
assembly time and produce a better machine as decribed in the table below. It requires no maintenance, can
shorten overall guided length and has a longer life which makes our Thomson Glide Screw the better design
solution and less expensive overall.

Generic design

Glide Screw design

Generic vs. Glide Srew Design

Generic Glide Screw

X, Y Area Compactness 4100 mm2 1600 mm

2

Z Axis Length 64 mm 46 mm

Approx. Installation Time 45 min 15 min

Number of Parts 74 3

0

Self Aligning No Yes

Maintenance Free No Yes

5

Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Other Application Ideas

Fluid Pumps
Syringe pumps and integrated fluid pumps are a growing segment of the medical
industry. The stringent demands of these customers require smaller, cleaner,
smoother, and quieter products. This is exactly the challenge the Glide Screw
was designed to solve.

Fluid Pipetting / 3-Axis Lab Automation
Lab automation and diagnostics require faster and more accurate systems
in smaller footprints. Optimized for z-axis applications requiring the smallest
footprint, the Glide Screw can replace traditional linear guided products that are
overdesigned and more expensive.

Generic design
Glide Screw design

Other Applications
The Glide Screw
improves performance
in a smaller and lighter
package. It is easier
and faster to install.
Also, it requires less
maintenance compared
to traditional lead
screw and linear guide
solutions. Other great
applications for the
Glide Screw include:

• Test tube handling
• Lab automation
• CD duplication
• Pick & place
• Syringe pumps
• In vitro diagnostics
• Medical imaging

6 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Engineering

The Glide ScrewTM is designed to actuate a moment load or a side load without
additional linear guidance or support. Therefore, the screw deflection is the
determinant feature and the following charts must be used when properly sizing a
Glide Screw for an application.

How the Glide Screw Works
The unique design of Glide Screw allows it to handle
axial, radial and moment loads without additional
guidance. The result is an efficient and space
saving design that is quick and easy to install with
reduced maintenance needs compared to traditional
solutions.

End Support
Decide which type of end support you will use to
enable accurate selection of diameter.

Fixed support – utilizes a support journal length at
least 1.5 × the journal diameter – such as dual ball
bearings.

Simple support – uses a single ball bearing, a plain
bearing, or a bushing.

End support configurations shown at left:
1. Simple / simple
2. Fixed / simple
3. Fixed / fixed

Max. Length

Max. Length
Max. Length

1.

2.

3.

= load lines
= reactionary forces

axial
load

axial
load

radial
load

moment
load

7

Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

20

0
20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

0

25

50

75

100

125

150

175

200

250

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

225

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

500

0
2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
0
100
200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1000

900

Engineering

Moment Load and Radial Load Charts
Determine your end support configuration and then
use the following charts to properly size the nominal
diameter of the Glide Screw. Select a product
diameter that lies above and/or to the right of the
design moment or load.

The lead of a Glide Screw is defined as the axial
distance traveled for one revolution of the screw.
Select the appropriate lead of your screw based on
the desired speed and resolution of travel. Note that
the Glide Screw is limited to 300 RPM.

Inch Diameter Models

Unsupported length [in

]

Screw diameters

= 0.375 inch = 10 mm
= 0.250 inch = 6 mm
= 0.188 inch = 4 mm

End support type

= fixed in both ends
= simple in one end and fixed in other
= simple in both ends

Conversion factors

1.0 in-lb = 0.113 Nm
1.0 lb = 4.448 N

M
om

en
t l

oa
d

[in
-lb

s]

Ra
di

al
lo

ad
[l

bs
]

M
om
en
t l
oa
d

[N
m

]
Ra
di
al
lo

ad
[N

]

Unsupported length

[in]

Unsupported length [mm]Unsupported length

[mm]

Metric Diameter Models

8 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Specifications and Part Numbers
Glide Screw™ configurations
GSF – screw and flanged nut assembly GSC – screw and cylindrical nut assembly

Inch Series Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[in]

Screw
Lead
[in]

Screw and Nut
Assembly
Part No.

Max
Axial
Load
[lbs]

Max
Moment

Load
[in-lbs]

Max
Screw
Length

[in]

Dimensions [in] Effic.
[%]

A B C D E F G H J

BCD

0.188
0.050 GS_18x0050

30.0 20.5 6.000 0.375 0.750 0.281 0.875 0.140 0.125 0.094 0.188 0.177 0.625
46

0.125 GS_18x0125 68

0.250
0.050 GS_25x0050

45.0 47.5 10.000 0.500 1.000 0.313 1.000 0.140 0.150 0.125 0.250 0.237 0.750
40

0.500 GS_25x0500 82

0.375

0.063 GS_37x0063

70.0 137.5 18.000 0.875 1.750 0.563 1.750 0.200 0.300 0.188 0.438 0.406 1.250

36

0.500 GS_37x0500 78

1.000 GS_37x1000 83

Metric Series Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[mm]

Screw
Lead
[mm]

Screw and Nut
Assembly
Part No.

Max
Axial
Load
[N]

Max
Moment

Load
[Nm]

Max
Screw
Length
[mm]

Dimensions [mm] Effic.
[%]

A B C D E F G H J BCD
4

1 GS_4x1M

89.0 2.3 150 10 20 6.5 20 2.5 3 2 5 5 15

45

4 GS_4x4M 75

8 GS_4x8M 82

6

1 GS_6x1M

133.4 5.4 250 13 26 7.75 25 3.5 4 3 7 5.75 1

9

36

6 GS_6x6M 75

12 GS_6x12M 82

10

2 GS_10x2M

311.4 15.5 450 22 44 14 44 5 7 4 10 9.85 32

40

6 GS_10x6M 66

12 GS_10x12M 77

B

F

A h

1

1

C

B

G H11

H

J
D

BCD

E

A h9

Part number example: GSC25x0500 = glide screw assembly, cylindrical nut, 0.250 inch diameter by 0.500 inch lead

Standard Products
• Acetal nut body with all stainless steel internal components
• 303 stainless steel screw
• Integrated Lube for Life lubrication block
• Temperature Rating: -40° to 65°C (-40° to 150°F)
• Clean Room ISO 7 (Class 10000)

9
Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

End Machining

End support type

Recommended end machining

fixed / fixed fixed / simple simple / simple

Inch Series End Machining Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[in]

Screw
Lead
[in]

Screw
Part No.

Root
Diameter

[in]

Recommended Bearing Dimensions [in]

OD
[mm]

ID
[mm]

W
[mm]

Bearing
Trade No.

A B C D E F G H L THD

0.188
0.050 GS18x0050 0.12

7 2,5 2,5 692X 0.197 0.098 N/A 0.098 N/A 0.022 0.120 0.075 0.157 N/A
0.125 GS18x0125 0.13

0.250
0.050 GS25x0050 0.19

13 4 5 624 0.295 0.118 0.610 0.157 0.374 0.020 0.217 0.150 0.256 M4×x0.5
0.500 GS25x0500 0.16

0.375

0.063 GS37x0063 0.30

19 6 6 626 0.394 0.197 0.728 0.236 0.453 0.030 0.266 0.220 0.315 M6×0.750.500 GS37x0500 0.27

1.000 GS37x1000 0.24

Metric Series End Machining Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[mm]

Screw
Lead
[mm]
Screw
Part No.
Root
Diameter
[mm]

Recommended Bearing Dimensions [mm]

OD
[mm]
ID
[mm]
W
[mm]
Bearing
Trade No.
A B C D E F G H L THD
4

1 GS4x1M 2.8

7 2.5 2.5 692X 5.00 2.50 N/A 2.50 N/A 0.55 3.05 1.90 4.00 N/A4 GS4x4M 2.8

8 GS4x8M 2.8

6

1 GS6x1M 4.6

13 4 5 624 7.50 3.00 15.50 4.00 9.50 0.51 5.51 3.81 6.50 M4×x0.56 GS6x6M 4.4

12 GS6x12M 4.4

10

2 GS10x2M 7.3

13 6 6 626 10.00 5.00 18.50 6.00 11.50 0.76 6.76 5.59 8.00 M6×0.756 GS10x6M 8.4

12 GS10x12M 8.4

10 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Installation
Comparing Alternative Technologies
The Glide Screw™ is both drive system and linear guide, so these features are already perfectly aligned
and cannot bind. Therefore, installation is simple and the mating components do not require high tolerance
geometric features.

Drive and Guide Technology Comparison

Feature Lead Screw / Linear Bearings Lead Screw / Profile Rail Glide Screw

Small Footprint Good Better Best

Ease of Installation Better Good Best

Stiffness Better Best Good

Misalignment Tolerant Better Good Best

Lube for Life Lubrication Optional Optional Integrated

Total Cost of Ownership Good Better Best

11
Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Installation
Basic Installation Guidlines
The success of the Glide Screw in an application is primarily dependent on the end support configuration. Since
the Glide Screw is a combination of a lead screw and linear bearing, the ability to handle non-axial loads while
maintaining positional accuracy is the key to a successful installation. The load capacity curves are based on
screw deflection and not the lead nut capacity. Therefore, stiffness of the assembly determines load capacity.

1
2
3
4
5

Installation Step-by-Step

1. Select end support configuration
A fixed bearing support should be selected when possible.
A simple support is typically a single radial bearing that
is allowed to float axially to compensate for misaligments.
Typical methods of attaching end supports is either base
mounting or flange mounting.

2. Select motor and drive configuration
Select a motor and your means for coupling the screw to
the motor. Typically this is done by a belt, gearing or an
in-line coupler. It is also possible to directly integrate
a Glide Screw with a stepper motor, which can reduce
complexity and save space.

3. Select nut mounting interface
The standard configurations for the glide nut are flanged
nuts and cylindrical nuts but are by no means the only
solutions. Custom configurations, custom mounting and
design assistance are available from Thomson.

4. Determine anti-rotation method
The Glide Screw requires an external anti-rotation
feature on the nut housing to function correctly. Two
examples of acceptable methods are the finger / slot
solution or the bushing / linear shaft solution.

5. Mount the assembly into the application
The actual mounting of the Glide Screw is easy once all of
the periphrials have been determined and designed. Just
bolt the assembly in place and fire up the system. No critical
alignment procedures are necessary as the drive system and
linear guidance are already in perfect alignment.

Glide_Screw_BRUK-0002-04 | 20190321SK
Errors and technical alterations reserved. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of this
product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. © 2019 Thomson Industries, Inc.

www.thomsonlinear.com

EUROPE
United Kingdom
Thomson
Office 9, The Barns
Caddsdown Business Park
Bideford, Devon, EX39 3BT
Phone: +44 1271 334 500
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 7022 504 403
Fax: +49 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Via per Cinisello 95/97
20834 Nova Milanese (MB)
Phone: +39 0362 366406
Fax: +39 0362 276790
E-mail: sales.italy@thomsonlinear.com

Spain
Thomson
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

SOUTH AMERICA
Brasil
Thomson
Av. João Paulo Ablas, 2970
Jardim da Glória – Cotia SP – CEP: 06711-250
Phone: +55 11 4615 6300
E-mail: sales.brasil@thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO
Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: +1 540 633 3549
Fax: 1 540 633 0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

ASIA
Asia Pacific
Thomson
E-mail: sales.apac@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 805, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 606 1805
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson
c/o Portescap India Pvt Ltd
1 E, first floor, Arena House
Road no 12, Marol Industrial Area,
Andheri (E), Mumbai 400093 India
E-mail: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Phone: +81 6 6386 8001
Fax: +81 6 6386 5022
E-mail: csjapan@scgap.com

South Korea
Thomson
3033 ASEM Tower (Samsung-dong)
517 Yeongdong-daero
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, South Korea (06164)
Phone: + 82 2 6001 3223 & 3244
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

I

A Road to Scientific Writing

in Engineering and Science

A ROAD TO SCIENTIFIC WRITING

IN ENGINEERING & SCIENCE

Preface

We present this book as a guideline to help the researchers and

graduate students in the science and engineering write research

papers. The guideline provides advice on how to develop and

organize a research paper. Also, it is intended to help students

realize that vigorous writing in concise, a sentence should contain

no unnecessary word, a paragraph no unnecessary sentence, for

the same reason that a drawing should have no unnecessary

lines, and a machine no unnecessary parts.

From our view as researchers in engineering field, this book

emerges like a song that must reach the mind and touch the

strings of the heart before it can be felt and heard.

However,writing a research paper has its own mechanisms and

guidelines unlike writing a novel or short story where you leave

your imagination sup and curl to reach out to a written drama.

Finally, we want students to be patient and not expect to get their

work done from the first draft.

The Authors

III

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

CONTENTS

1 ARAPHRASINGP: 1Chapter

 Paraphrasing 1

 Correct Techniques of Paraphrasing 2

 Change Word Form: 2

 Change the Word Order: 2

 Use Synonyms of Phrases and Words 3

 Recommended Methods of Paraphrasing 3

 Paraphrasing Long Passages 5

 Paraphrase vs. Indirect Quotation 6

 Paraphrase vs. Summery 6

 Examples of Paraphrasing Methods 7

 Change Sentence Structure 7

10 LAGIARISMP :Chapter 2

 What is Plagiarism 11

 How to Avoid Plagiarism 11

 What Plagiarism Means 12

 Forms of Plagiarism 13

 (Word for Word) Quotation without Clear Acknowledgement 13

 Specifically, Using Internet Downloaded Material without Clear

Acknowledgement 13

 Paraphrasing 13

 Collusion 13

 Inaccurate Citation 14

 Failure to Acknowledge Assistance 14

 Use of Professional Agencies Literature 14

I

V

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Auto-Plagiarism 14

 Why Does Plagiarism Matter 14

 Why Should You Avoid Plagiarism 15

 Preventing Plagiarism 15

 Intentional vs Unintentional Plagiarism 16

 Guidelines for Plagiarism Prevention 16

 Avoiding Plagiarism 17

 Copyright Laws 17

 Academic Punishment for Plagiarism 17

 Recommendations for Writing 18

19 UOTATIONQ :3 Chapter

 Quotation 20

 Literal Quotation 20

 Paraphrasing 20

 Shifting Between Literal Quotation and Paraphrasing 21

 Choosing which One to Use 21

 Quotation and Quote 23

 Quoting Word for Word (wfw) 23

 Block Quotation 23

 Direct Quotation in the Sciences 24

 Methods for Introducing a Quotation 25

 Losing Control of Quotes 26

 Examples of Quotations 27

 Common Errors in Using Quotations 28

 Summarizing 28

 Example of Paraphrasing and Summarizing: A Comparison 29

V

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Summary 29

 Paraphrase 29

 Plagiarism 30

 Discussion 30

 Integrating Quotes In Research Papers 30

Chapter 4: HOW TO WRITE A RESEARCH PAPER IN
ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE 34

 Title 35

 Acknowledgments 35

 Abstract 35

 Introduction 36

 Methods 37

 Results 38

 Discussion 39

 Conclusion 39

 Tables and Figures 40

Chapter 5: WRITING AN EFFECTIVE E-MAIL 42

 Write a Meaningful Subject Line 42

 Always Use a Greeting 42

 Identify Yourself Clearly 43

 State the Reason why You are Emailing in a Brief and Polite

Way 43

 Keep the Message Focused 43

 As Possible, Avoid Attachments 43

 Proofread 44

 Distinguish Between Formal and Informal 44

VI

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Make Sure the Email is Ready to Hit ‘Send’ 44

 Respond Promptly 44

Chapter 6: HOW TO WRITE A RESEARCH PROPOSAL 46

 Research Proposal Elements 47

 Introduction 47

 The Research Question 48

 Purpose of the Research 48

 Preliminary Literature Review 49

 Theoretical Framework 49

 Statement of Research Contribution 49

 Proposed Research Methodology 50

 Research Plan 50

 Research Time Table 51

 List of References 51

Chapter 7: VERBS USED IN SCIENTIFIC WRITING 53

 Colloquial vs Formal Words 54

 Words Confused 55

Chapter 8: STYLE FORMAT IN WRITING ENGINEERING &
SCIENCE RESEARCH PAPERS 59

 Handling Numbers 60

Chapter 9: SUBMISSION GUIDELINE 62

 Final Revision 62

 Manuscript Submission 62

 Cover Letters 63

REFERENCES 68

1

Chapter 1

Paraphrasing

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 1

PARAPHRASING

 Paraphrasing



Correct Techniques of Paraphrasing

 Change Word Form:

 Change the Word Order:

 Use Synonyms of Phrases and Words



Recommended Methods of Paraphrasing



Paraphrasing Long Passages

 Paraphrase vs Indirect Quotation

 Paraphrase vs Summery



Examples on Paraphrasing

Methods

Paraphrasing

The prefix “para-” means similar or helping to do a similar thing.

Paraphrasing means expressing an idea using new different

words. That is to redefine some of the words in a sentence or use

their synonyms. The techniques used in paraphrasing do not

usually require changing the structure of the sentences, but they

do require full understanding and comprehensive grasp of the

meaning. Paraphrasing is to keep the original meaning of the text

with new rewording.

When we hear stories and want to tell them to our friends, we use

our own words to recount the storyline, the events, the characters

and the main points. This is “paraphrasing” using our own words to

2

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

express others’ ideas or messages. In paraphrasing, the main

ideas of the text need to come through, but the wording has to be

our own.

Correct Techniques of Paraphrasing

Correct paraphrasing is to focus on the meaning of the text and

not on the words. Paraphrase in your own words to shed traces of

your intellectual personality on them. Some of the following

techniques are used to paraphrase correctly:

Change word form:

Ex. Iraqi news coverage is …… paraphrased to when Iraqi media

covers……

Change the word order:

Ex. Students are admitted to colleges before they graduated from

high school, under the early admission system. paraphrased to

Under the early admission System, universities accept students

before their high school graduation.

Use reversals or negatives that do not change the meaning:

Ex. This unusual species is only found underwater. Paraphrased

to This species is not found on land.

Substitute a word or phrase that conveys similar meaning and

use contrast, cause or effect:

Ex: Lack of money in the state budget resulted in higher university

tuition costs. Paraphrased to Higher tuition costs at universities

are due to budget shortfalls at the state level.

3

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Keep concept words, special terms or proper names without

charge:

Ex: Higher-energy photons that do not have mass or charge form

Gamma rays. Paraphrased to Gamma rays consists of high

energy photons that have neither mass nor charge.

When it is appropriate change passive voice to active and

move phrases and modifiers:

Ex: The entrance exam was failed by over one-fourth of the

students. Paraphrased to Over one-fourth of the students failed

the entrance exam.

Use synonyms of phrases and words

Ex: Original version: At the beginning of the 1970’s the incidence

tuberculosis increased.

Paraphrase version: There was a resurgence of tuberculosis at the

start of the decade.

Recommended Methods of Paraphrasing

The following are some recommended methods of paraphrasing:

1- Use synonyms

Try to make difficult words easier to understand, by using words or

phrases of the same meaning. However, do not change concept

words, technical terms and proper nouns.

Ex: original sentence: Hidden-video cameras are becoming

increasingly popular.

Paraphrasing sentence 1: Hidden-video cameras are becoming

more popular.

4

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Paraphrasing sentence 2: Hidden-video cameras are becoming

more frequently used.

2- Change ideas order

Rearrange ideas in a new different order, still keep them making

sense.

Ex: original sentence: Baghdad is the Capital of Iraq.

Paraphrasing sentence 1: The Capital City of Iraq is Baghdad .

Paraphrasing sentence 2: Iraq’s capital city is Baghdad.

3- Combine and simplify the structure of two sentences

Ex: original sentence: when playing soccer, you can talk to people

you are playing with. Also, you can make friends with them.

Paraphrasing sentence: You can talk and make friends with

people you are playing soccer with.

4. Change word forms

You may change the word forms to vary the sentence structure

a: change the main verb into a noun such as (Improve ———

Improvement)

Ex: original version: One result of playing word puzzle and trivia

games is that, they can improve children’s speech.

Paraphrase version : The improvement of children’s speech is

one result of playing word puzzle and trivia games.

b: change a noun into a verb such as (restriction ——-restrict)

Original version: Parents should put restriction on their children’s

use of computer games.

5

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Paraphrased version: Parents should restrict their children’s use

of computer games.

5- Change transitions

Paraphrase by changing transition tools such as : however,

because, although……..

Ex: Original version: Hidden-video cameras are becoming

increasingly popular because they are effective in recording abuse

by babysitters.

praphrased version: Hidden-video cameras are becoming

increasingly popular due to their effectiveness in monitoring

abusive by babysitters.

6- Change from passive voice to active voice and vice-versa

Ex: original version: The college of engineering adopted new

regulations on the entrance exam.

Paraphrasing version: New regulations were adopted (by the

college of engineering) on the entrance exam.

Paraphrasing Long Passages

To paraphrase a long passage, outline the passage first, then take

notes and finally write your paraphrase from your notes and go

back to the original passage.

The following guidelines can be helpful:

 Read the passage as many times until you are sure you

understand it.

 Write the main ideas in your own words and write what the

source says, no more.

6

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Observe how the writer uses the words in their exact sense.

 Synchronize the main ideas in your work and the original, but

change any word or phrase that match the original.

 Use quotation marks to identify any unique term you have

borrowed from the source.

 Cite the source accurately by including a citation for the source

of

the information.

Using the above guideline, pay attention to the

following:

 Change the words, not the meaning

 Use a good dictionary to find synonyms

 Do not change the tone

 Do not leave anything out

 Do not add information

 Put your own voice in the paraphrasing and try to sound “You”

 Include all the citation information

Paraphrase vs Indirect Quotation

As a matter of fact, paraphrasing is a form of indirect Quotation. It

restates the thoughts you have borrowed from another person in

your own words and style.

Paraphrases are more flexible than quotations and they fit more

smoothly into your text.

Paraphrase vs Summery

The difference between paraphrase and summary is that summary

is a shortened version of the original text while paraphrase is

7

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

approximately the same length as the original and involves a text

in your own

words.

Examples on Paraphrasing Methods

Use of

Synonyms

Ex1: Original: My car needs gasoline

Synonyms: My automobile needs fuel.

Ex2: Original: The Iraqi government has an enormous debt.

Synonyms: The federal government has a huge debt.

Ex3: Original: Overuse of ground water would lead to pervasive

drought.

Synonyms: Overuse of ground water would cause widespread

dryness.

Change Sentence Structure

1- Use: There+verb to be+noun phrase

Ex: Original: The number of hungry people has increased in the

last decade.

Synonyms: There has been a growing number of starving

population in the last decade.

Note: “has” in the original becomes “There has been ” in the

Synonyms

2- Use: It is+adjective +to+infinitive

Ex: original: You need the most up to date antivirus programs to

ensure your hard drive and e-mail are not infected

Synonyms: It is important that you must have the most modern

antivirus programs to protect your hard drive and e-mail.

8

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Note: After “it is” choose an adjective from “important, essential,

necessary, difficult, easy, common, usual, possible, likely…..”as

appropriately fit into the meaning.

3- Reduce a clause to a phrase with appropriate changes

Ex: Original: Technology is now so potent and pervasive that it

seems to be the main driver of social change.

Synonyms: At present, powerful and widely used technology

appears to be the main driving force of social change.

4- Use a participle phrase to combine two clauses(sentences)

that have the same subject

a- The Verb must be put in the correct participial form. Delete the

relative pronoun (who,which, that…..) and change the verb to a

participle form.

Ex: Original: Police held back protesters who attempted to

break through the barricades.

Synonyms: Police held back demonstrators trying to break

through the barriers.

b- If two clauses (sentences) has a relationship in time, the one

which happens before could be changed into a practical

phrase.

Ex: Original: After Tom bought the famous painting, he

discovered it was a fake.

Synonyms: After paying for the well-known painting Tom

found out it was a reproduction.

c- If sentences imply the cause-result relationship, the one which

indicates the cause could be changed into a participial phrase.

9

Chapter 1
Paraphrasing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Ex: Original: The owner of a petrol station could not verify the

sources of petrol. As a result, he was alleged to illegally stock

up an oil.

Synonyms: failing to verify the petrol sources, the petrol

station owner was charged with illegal stockpile of oil.

5. Use active or passive verb forms

Paraphrasing can be enriched by changing between active and

passive sentences. Although there is a subject shift, the overall

meaning of the sentence remains the same.

Ex1:

Active : I did not kill a snake.

Passive : A snake was not killed by me.

Ex2:

Active : I am not writing a letter.

Passive : A letter is not being written by me.

Ex3:

Active : Has she finished her work?

Passive: Has her work been finished ?

Ex4:

Active: was he driving a car?

Passive: Was a car being driven by him?

01

Chapter 2

Plagiarism

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 2

PLAGIARISM

 What is Plagiarism



How to Avoid Plagiarism

 What Plagiarism Means

 Forms of Plagiarism

 (Word For Word) Quotation Without Clear Acknowledgement

 Specifically, Using Internet Downloaded Material without Clear

Acknowledgements

 Paraphrasing

 Collusion

 Inaccurate Citation

 Failure to Acknowledge Assistance

 Use of Professional Agencies Literature.

 Auto-Plagiarism

 Why Does Plagiarism Matter?

 Why Should You Avoid Plagiarism?



Preventing Plagiarism

 Intentional vs Unintentional Plagiarism



Guidelines for Plagiarism Prevention



Avoiding Plagiarism



Copyright Laws



Academic Punishment for Plagiarism

 Recommendations for Writing

00

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

What is Plagiarism

Plagiarism is using other peoples’ works and incorporating it as

your own without full Acknowledgement. This definition includes all

published and unpublished printed or electronic materials.

Acknowledgement of others’ works must apply not only to text, but

also to computer codes, graphs, illustrations and data drawn from

books and journals or any academic work downloaded from

websites.

Plagiarism may be intentional, unintentional or reckless. Under the

regulations, all these cases are disciplinary offence.

Nevertheless, plagiarism is also defined as :

 Borrowing facts, statistics, or illustrative works.

 Offering materials collected by others without

acknowledgement.

 Adopting or reproducing theories,ideas or graphics of another

person without acknowledgment.

 Not giving credit to the originality of others when directly

quoting,using or paraphrasing another person’s ideas, opinions

or theories.

How to Avoid Plagiarism

● Paraphrase appropriately

● Learn how to write good notes

● Summarize effectively

● Organize your sources

● Use direct quotation appropriately

● Reference your sources correctly

● Use “ common knowledge “

01

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

What Plagiarism Means

According to Merriam-Webster dictionary to “plagiarize” is to :

 steal and pass off the ideas or words of others as one’s own,

 use other’s production without crediting the source

 commit literary theft

 present as new and original an idea or product derived from an

existing source.

It is clear from the above meaning that plagiarism involves stealing

others’ works and lying about it .

Thus, plagiarism is an act of fraud.

Based on the above meaning all of the following cases are

considered plagiarism:

● Submitting other people’s work as your own.

● Copying someone else’s ideas or words without

acknowledgement.

● Failing to do quotation properly.

● Failing to report the source of quotation correctly.

● Copying the sentence structure of a source but changing only

the words without acknowledgement.

● Using others’ works unfairly and overwhelmingly

● Not citing the essential idea of an original source

However, most cases of plagiarism can be avoided by simply

citing, acknowledging the borrowed material and providing

readers with the necessary information to find that source.

02

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Forms of Plagiarism

There are many cases that can be classified as possible

Plagiarism:

1- Word for word (wfw) quotation without clear

acknowledgement.

It must be always clear to the reader concerning the borrowed part

of one’s work.Thus quotations must be identified by quotation

marks or parenthesis with full referencing to the original source.

2- Specifically using internet downloaded material without

clear acknowledgement.

It is important to evaluate carefully , reference adequately and

include in a bibliography information derived from the internet.

3- Paraphrasing

Paraphrasing is not just altering few words and changing their

order to prevent plagiarism. Mere Mentioning of the original author

is not enough to accept the work.You should write a brief

summary of the original argument in your own words to ensure

your firm grasp of the argument.

4- Collusion

Failure to attribute assistance received when working in groups is

plagiarism. It is your responsibility to ensure that you are entirely

clear about which parts of the work is your own and the extent of

collaboration permitted within the group.

03

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

5- Inaccurate citation

It is important to cite sources accurately by using footnotes or in-

text references. Sources must be Indicated and traced to the

primary one.

6- Failure to acknowledge assistance

All assistances received must be acknowledged clearly. This

assistance could come from a fellow student or a lab. Assistant.

Supervisor’s assistance or proofreading are excluded.

7- Use of professional agencies literature

It is vital to the quality and integrity of your academic training and

intellectual development that you should undertake the research

process on your own without any external help.

8- Auto-plagiarism

Making use of a previous work as a fulfillment of new research or

degree course is prohibited. Previous published work must be

referenced clearly.

Why does Plagiarism Matter

Plagiarism is a breach of intellectual honesty. It is unethical and

can have serious consequences on your future career. It means

poor scholarship and failure to complete the learning process.

All members of the academic community should acknowledge the

work they borrow.Passing of other people’s work as yours will

undermine the standards of your own institution and it places a

stigma on the degrees it conferred.

04

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Why should You Avoid Plagiarism

There are many reasons to avoid plagiarism or stealing someone

else’s work and submit a genuine and honest work. To mention a

few :

 You come to school not to reproduce other peoples’ works and

bury yourself in shame.

 You come to university to speak out your own ideas and

thoughts with pride and dignity.

 Expressing your work in your own ideas will help you develop a

distinguished academic road for your own future.

 No matter how difficult it may sound to develop your own ideas,

putting your hands in the hot academic waters will shape-up your

future academic personality.

 Plagiarism will always make you inferior from standing

academically tall and achieving high quality work.

 Steering away from plagiarism will help you demonstrate the

commitment to the principle of Intellectual honesty in

scholarship.

Preventing Plagiarism

Addressing plagiarism is considered an important step to prevent it

among students. As a guideline light must be shed on the

following:

 Rreasons behind plagiarism

 Identifying the different forms of plagiarism

 Educating students about plagiarism and its prevention

techniques.

05

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Intentional vs Unintentional Plagiarism

Intentional plagiarism: There are many reasons why a student

commits plagiarism intentionally. To mention a few:

 Their words are better.

 Searching is easier than researching.

 Making a better grade.

 Everyone else is doing it.

 Poor planning on the side of the student.

 Thrill of deception.

Unitentional plagiarism : unintentional plagiarism can occur and

sometimes even the most well-intentioned writer organizes the

work of others without proper authority. Among the reasons:

 Confusion on how to cite

 Paraphrasing, but actually it is plagiarism

 Copying old notes and research

 Couldn’t find the source

 Ignorance on how to cite facts

Guidelines for Plagiarism Prevention

 Define and explain “plagiarism”.

 Explain the wrong doing behind plagiarism.

 Make the punishment and consequences clear.

 Assign specific question or topics.

 Require students to submit drafts with introductions, themes

and thesis statements.

 Assign oral presentations.

06

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Require a list of all references.

 Assign a paragraph on the composition process.

 Encourage concision.

Avoiding Plagiarism

To avoid plagiarism, you must give credit when:

 Using another person’s theory or ideas.

 Using facts, statistics, graphics or drawings.

 Using quotations of written or spoken words of others.

 Paraphrasing another person’s spoken or written words.

Copyright Laws

Copyright laws make it illegal to reproduce someone else’s ideas,

research or information without permission in order to protect

intellectual property. According to these laws, the copyright is

protected. Thus, anyone who reproduces copyrighted material

improperly can be prosecuted in a court of law. Any borrowed

material that is shown to be substantially similar to the original

one, may be considered a violation of the copyright act.

Academic Punishment for Plagiarism

Academic punishment could mean expulsion from school or at

least failure of the course.

All Iraqi universities have zero tolerance for plagiarism. In fact

academic standards of intellectual dignity are often more serious

than even governmental copyright laws.

Student resources: preventing plagiarism, student must come up

with his/her own genuine work and at the same time make

07

Chapter 2
Plagiarism
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

reference to the works of others. To prevent plagiarism, we

recommend

the following:

 Take effective and comprehensive notes.

 Plan your paper in an orderly manner

 Seek your instructor’s advice

 When necessary, cite sources clearly

 Learn how to paraphrase properly

 Evaluate your references.

Recommedations for Writing

 State your ideas first; then go back to the author’s original work.

 Credit the authors and use quotation marks when you copy exact

wording.

 Paraphrase your own words instead of copying directly.

 Give credit to the author even when you paraphrase.

 Make sure to use citation and references properly, improper use

of style can result in plagiarism.

91

Chapter 3

Quotation

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 3

QUOTATION

 Quotation

 Direct Quotation

 Indirect Quotation

 Shifting Between Direct and Indirect Quotation

 Choosing which One to Use.

 Quotation and Quote



Block Quotation



Direct Quotation in the Scieneces



Methods for Introducing a Quotation

 Examples on Quotations

 Common Errors in Using Quotations



Summarizing

 Example of Paraphrasing and Summarizing: A

comparison



Summary



Paraphrase

 Plagiarism



Discussion

 Do’s and don’ts of Research Writing

 References

02

Chapter 3
Quotation

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Quotation

Quotation is using or restating the exact words of someone else

when those words are powerful or well-said. In general, any time

you use three or more words from an original source, you should

treat it as a quote. A quotation from someone famous or smart can

help make your own point sound better. Just remember, when you

use a quotation put it in quotation marks and give power credit.

There are two types of quotations, direct and indirect.

Literal Quotation

Literal quotes are a borrowed text or passage without any

alteration or change. It is using the exact words of someone else

and weaving them into your writing. Literal quotations can provide

examples that strengthen a thought or idea. It can also, spice up

your written content and tie in what you are writing about for

something specific in your research. Literal quotes are always

offset with quotation

marks.

Paraphrasing

Paraphrasing, in fact, is paraphrase or summary of the word of

someone else included and worked into the text of your writing.

paraphrasing can add information that strengthens your content in

many of the same ways as literal quotations. Basically,

paraphrasing carry the meaning of a writers original words without

using the exact words. Paraphrasing are not offset by quotation

marks.

09

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Ex:

Literal quotation: In the words of George Washington, “when you

do the common things in life in an uncommon way, you will

command the attention of the world”.

Paraphrasing: George Washington believed that the world takes

notes when your everyday actions are done extraordinarily.9

Shifting Between Literal Quotation and Paraphrasing

It is advisable to use a mix both of literal quotation and

paraphrasing when incorporating quotations. Using all literal

quotations or all paraphrasing can create boredom and replition.

With repeated use of both types, you develop a feeling for when it

is better to use one type over the other and makes your content

more enging. Literal quotations are useful for incorporating coined

phrases or flavorful words of someone else.

Paraphrasing are useful when you simply need to summarize

events, processes or details from a source. Without overusing

them, a good mix of both is an effective way to strengthen your

words.

Choosing which One to Use

While both types of quotations are useful to strengthen your words

and adding a colorful flavor in your writing, you might sometimes

struggle which one to use. Sometimes an original author’s words

are so powerful that using a paraphrase quite reduces the

effectiveness or loses conviction or strength. In these cases, stick

to the literal quote to have the maximum effect on your

readers.

Similarly, if you are trying to paraphrase or summarizing

00

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

something that is confusing or that you do not fully understand,

use the literal quote instead, so that the meaning is not lost in your

translation of the words. Also, if you are writing about literature,

literal quotes are often preferred because the exact words are

what you are discussing.

On the other hand, if you are writing something scientific, the

general rule is to use indirect paraphrase quotation through

paraphrasing. Paraphrasing is an excellent way to say what

someone said and avoid the matter of word for word quoting

altogether. Finally, focus on the reason behind your choice to

incorporate certain quotations, that can help you decide which to

use.

In general, you must quote when:

 Citing mathematical, scientific, and other formulas.

 The exact words of a writer seem to be absolutely essential and

important for the point you are trying to make.

 You want to highlight your agreement with the author’s words

and those words lend credibility to your paper

 You want to highlight your disagreement with the author’s words

and indicate exactly what it is you disagree about.

 The statement is hypothetical and subject to confirmation

 Giving the exact wording of laws and official rules.

 You want to illuminate the meaning and support the argument of

your work

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Quotation and Quote

In formal English, quotation is a noun and quote is a verb and a

noun.

Ex: * “a quotation from Hemingway”

*”she likes to quote Hemingway”

Quoting Word for Word (wfw)

Never alter quotations, even when there exists a minor

grammatical errors or word usage in them. Casual minor errors or

tongue slips may be removed by using ellipses. Ellipsis is a set of

three spaced dots… that is used when you omit words from a

quote, in which case you must replace the omitted words with an

ellipsis.

Block Quotation

A block quotation-in general-is any direct quote that is four or more

lines-is any direct quotation when you wish to directly quote a long

passage that when shortened loses its meaning or effectiveness.

When block quoting, the following is a good guideline to use:

 When a

block quotation

is introduced by a word or phrase like

thus or the following, that word or phrase should be followed by

a colon (:).

 When a verb of saying introduces the block quotations a comma

(,) is used.

 When it is introduced by a complete a period should be used (.).

 When a reference is included, it is added as the last line of the

block quotation

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Consider the following example:

Ex: one of the most famous speeches in history is Martin Luther

King’s” I have a Dream ” speech. Below is an excerpt from that

speech that is full of passion and prose power in asking for

peaceful approaches in the struggle for quality.

“The whirlwinds of the revolt will continue to shake the foundations

of our nation until the bright day of justice emerges. But there is

something that I must say to my people who stand on the warm

threshold which leads into the palace of justice. In the process of

gaining our rightful place we must not to be quilty of wrongful

deeds. Let us not seek to satisfy our thirst for freedom by drinking

from the cup of bitterness and hatred.” (Martin Luther King. “I have

Dream” speech,1963)

Direct Quotation in the Scieneces

The general convention in the sciences is that we use indirect

quotation, that is, to paraphrase your sources and to use direct

quotation as little as possible. When you do quote directly, you still

need to discuss the quotation and not ask it to stand on its own.

Also, when you direct quote, pay attention to

the following:

 Direct quotes are often offset by commas following that last

word that precedes the quotation mark. Likewise, a comma

follows when the sentence continues after the direct quotation

has ended.

Ex: Sun-Tze said long ago,”keep your friends close and your

enemies closer,” which means that staying aware of your enemies

can give you a distinct advantage during time of war.

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 When a direct quote is a complete sentence,the first word of the

quote is always CAPITALIZED.

Ex: Winston Churchill stated, ” A lie gets halfway around the world

before the truth has a chance to get its pants on”.

 When a direct quote is a portion of a sentence, a comma is not

necessary to offset the quote and the first word of the quotation

is not capitalized.

Ex: Anyone who has recently fallen in love probably agrees with

Dr. Suess that “reality is better that your dreams” when sleeping

proves difficult.

 When a direct quote has a grammatical error, you should use

the quote exactly as is. Use the Latin expression [Sic] within

brackets to show your reader that the mistake is part of the

original text and not your own.

Ex: According to Emmitt Smith, “the Packers don’t has [Sic] a

running game.”

Note: “has” should be “have” in the quote

Methods for Introducing a Quotation

Although each method for introducing quotation can be modified

and altered infinitely, there are basically three methods to use:

1-

Method one

 Introducing a phrase + comma

In this method use an introductory phrase through signal words

plus a comma to introduce a quotation. You need to signal the

reader that a quote is to be used. The following are some signal

verbs you could use to integrate quotes into your text.

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Say, reply, state, declare, agree, describe, remark, conclude,

claim, emphasize, suggest, think, argue, maintain.

Ex: Brett says,” He wanted to grow my hair out. Me, with long

hair. I’d look so like hell”Hemingway246)

2-

Method two

 Complete sentence+colon

In this method use a complete sentence plus a colon to introduce

a quotation. With this method, the quotation is usually a complete

sentence so retain the capitalization of the first word.

Ex: Brett reveals to Jake that she rejected the bullfighter because

she could predict his controlling tendencies:”He really wanted to

marry me. So I couldn’t go away from him.”(Hemingway 246)

3-

Method three

 Make a short part of the quotation a part of your own

sentence.

In this method integrate a sentence fragment or just a portion of a

complete sentence into your own sentence. There is no special

punctuation required. Sometimes, the word”that” will help the

sentence sound smoother.

Ex: Anyone who has recently fallen in love probably agrees with

Dr. Suess that “reality is better than your dreams” when sleeping

proves difficult.

Losing Control of Quotes

Quotes should be a vital part of the text and an integral part of the

discussion. The following are examples of a writer losing control of

quotes:

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 If the reader can remove the quotes from the paper and still

understand the essay, then the quotes are not an integral part

of the essay

 If the reader sees only traces of a writer’s voice in long

quotations from others, he/she will assume the writer has lost

control over the text.

 If each quotation is introduced using the same sentence

structure and the same verb, readers will quickly become bored

with the presentation and turn out the writer’s message.

Examples of Quotations

Example Method used

According to James
Banks,”cheese is the most stolen
food in the world

Method one: introductory
phrase, comma

Jane Smith states, in her article
about the sun, that “only 55% of all
Americans know that the sun is a
star.”

Method three:
A short part of the quotation
is part of your own
sentence.

Gary Wade suggests that there are
many good reasons for consuming
dark chocolate: “dark chocolate
contains antioxidants, lower blood
pressure, and high in vitamins.”

Method two:
Complete sentence+colon

As professor Stone explains, “A
duck’s quack doesn’t echo.”

Method one

In his book about animals, Dr Rose
emphasizes the benefits of having
a cat: “Cat owners are less likely to
suffer from depression.”

Method two

In the interest of animal sleeping
aims habits,Jane Smith claims that
“Dolphins sleep with one eye
open.”

Method three

02

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Common Errors in Using Quotations

When using quotations, be sure to avoid the following common

errors.

 Make sure that the name of the author is part of the subject and

avoid putting it in an introductory phrase.

Ex:

Correct: in his book about animals, Dr. Rose claims that “cat

owners are less likely to suffer from depression”.

Incorrect: In Dr. Rose’s book about animals, he claims that “cat

owners are less likely to suffer from depression”.

 There should be no sentences composed entirely of a quotation,

or the reader might not be able to follow the paragraph more

easily.

Ex:

Correct: Gary Wade suggests that there are many good reasons

to eat dark chocolate, including that “dark chocolate contains

many

antioxidants.”

Incorrect: Gary Wade suggests that there are many good

reasons to eat dark chocolate. “dark chocolate contains many

antioxidants.”
Summarizing

Summarizing is explaining the main idea of material briefly by

considering that material. The length of a summary depends on

your topic and purpose, but summaries are usually short because

they include only the main points of the passage. Although the

01

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

words in a summary are yours, the ideas are not and thus the

source must be cited to avoid plagiarizing.

In general, to summarize is to:

 Avoid unnecessary details when the main point of a passage is

all you need.

 Show that you understand what the source is saying.

 Give the reader a general introduction to the source.

Example of Paraphrasing and Summarizing: A

Comparison

Original text:

“Students frequently overuse direct quotation in taking notes, and

as a result, they overuse quotations in the final paper. Probably

only about 10% of your final manuscript should appear as directly

quoted matter. Therefore, you should strive to limit the amount of

exact transcribing of source materials while taking notes.” Lester,

James D. Writing Research Papers. 2
nd

Ed. (1962):46-49

Summary

Students should take just a few notes in direct quotations from

sources to help minimize the amount of quoted material in a

research paper

(Lester, 46-47).

Paraphrase

In research papers, students often quote excessively, failing to

keep quoted material down to the desirable level of 10% of the

final draft. Since the problem usually originates during note taking,

22

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

it is essential to minimize the material recorded word for word

(Lester, 46-47).
Plagiarism

Students often use too many direct quotations when they take

notes, resulting in too many of them in the final research paper. In

fact, probably only about 10% of the final copy should consist of

directly quoted material. So it is important to limit the amount of

source material copied while taking notes.

Discussion

In the summary above, just the main idea was covered, that is the

need to reduce direct quotations in notes. Everything else was

dropped including the 10% level. While in the paraphrase more

than just the main idea was covered, including the desired level.

Also, the length of the summary is shorter that that of the

paraphrase. Looking at the plagiarized version, we notice no

citation is given for this restatement of the original passage and

that the structure and vocabulary choice of this passage is very

similar to the original. This version is plagiarized.

Integrating Quotes In Research Papers

Effective writers blend or integrate quotations of a source with their

own writing so readers can see how the same information

connects with the writer’s thesis.

The following is a useful guideline to ensure smooth integration of

quotes in your own writing:

 Read the source many times until you understand it before you

start quoting.

29

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Copy passage word for word with quotation marks in direct

quotation.

 Make long quotes shorter by cutting out everything you don’t

absolutely need. Put ellipses (…) where you took out the words.

 Partial quotes must fit the grammar of the sentence into which it

is integrated.

 Give credit to the original source if you quote a source from

another source give credit to the original source and then add

qtd [“quoted] to the writing.

 provide the content in which a quote appears and explain how

the quote ties in with your point.

 Mark the beginning of each paraphrase by mentioning the

author’s name and/or provide the context for the information you

borrow.

 When you mention an author for the first time, give his/her full

name and his/her credentials.

 Mix paraphrase and short quotations to show your readers that

you have done your research without long quotes.

 Document summaries the same way you would with

paraphrases.

Do’s and don’t’s of Research Writing

There is no universal template that can solve every research

trouble. However, the following rules of writing are standard and

applicable to all types of academic

research.

The Title

 Do include the keywords that describe the work.

20

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Do make the title appropriate for the intended readers.

 Do not use long title that is more than 12 words.

 Do not use abbreviations.

The Abstaract

 Do shorten background information.

 Do not abbreviate vague or confusing terms.

 Do not show illustrations or figures.

The

Introduction

 Do include a thesis statement that reveals the main idea of the

text in a concise format.

 Do use prose instead of a list of points.

 Do make it easy to read.

 Do not cite unpublished reports.

 Do not explain what can be found in any textbook.

 Do not include data or conclusions from the work being

reported.

The Methods

 Do cite examples that you have read and reference the source

of the information.

 Do use simple sentences. Complicated sentences could be

confusing and increase the risk of grammatical errors.

 Do not use ambiguous terms.

 Do not use non-technical usages of technical terms such as

“random” “significant”…..

 Do not put results in this section. You may include preliminary

results.

22

Chapter 3
Quotation
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

The

Results

 Do present some data either in a table or a figure

 Do summarize raw data values as a means, percents, etc.

 Do not support the hypothesis for all results.

 Do not discuss the results. That goes in the discussion

 Do not necessarily have to include all the data you ‘ve gotten

 Do not try to mainupulate the data to make it looks like you did

more than you actually did.

The Discussion

 Do correlate between the results and the discussion.

 Do use the right language to indicate your ability to research

and analyze the topic.

 Do explain your points clearly and vividly.

 Do not introduce new results in the discussion.

 Do not repeat detailed descriptions of the results.

 Do not leave the reader without conclusion. End the discussion

with a short summary

regarding the significance of the work.

The Tables and Figures

 Do include a table only if it is presents new information.

 Do write captions when you organize your results section.

 Do not use sentences that give no information other than

directing the reader to the figure or

table.

 Do not use any format other than EPS,PDF,TIFF or JPES in

electronic artwork.

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in

Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 4

HOW TO WRITE A RESEARCH PAPER IN
ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE

Writing a research paper is not an easy job, however, dividing it

into a smaller, workable minijobs makes that job easier and more

manageable. These manageable tasks are the essential elements

that when put together produce the desired result: a research

paper.

Your work should begin with writing ideas to create a general

outline for the paper. Then, arrange these thoughts into a

summary of points that will at the end become complete

paragraphs. Organize these thoughts into a structure that logically

make sense and forward them in a mold of main sentences. Many

science or engineering papers are formatted in a well –accepted

way which contains the sections that follow:

 Title



Abstract

 Introduction

 Methods

 Results

 Discussion

 Summery and

Conclusion

 Acknowledgment



Tables and Figures

Understanding how each section functions together with the whole

will help the writer minimize overlap and repetition.

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Title

Titles should not be too general, nor should they be too detailed. A

poor title may result in immediate prejudice against the author. A

title can be descriptive and tell only what the article is about or

declarative that suggests the outcome of the paper. Still avoid the

following:

 Do not use along title that is more than 12 words.

 Do not use abbreviations.

Acknowledgments

Place this section as a final note of the paper to thank the people

who supported and contributed to your work or any data appears

in the article. An acknowledgement is a formal printed statement

that recognizes individuals who contributed to your work. Those

individuals are usually persons who gave scientific guidance,

participate in a discussion or who provided sample or equipment.

In writing this section avoid the following:

 Do not use titles, positions. Acknowledge people by name only.

 Do not acknowledge non-science contributions.

Abstract

The abstract should tell the reader in a clearly expressed manner

as to what the paper is about and what the necessary or major

contributions that are discussed. In general, it is one paragraph

that goes before the article and summarize the content. Thus, it is

a critical element of the research paper. In writing abstract, avoid

the following:

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Do not lengthen background information, just summarize the

important contribution.

 Do not give detailed quantitative results.

 Do not abbreviate terms that may be vague or confusing to

readers.

 Do not show figures, tables, or references to them.

Introduction

The introduction is an extremely important section in a research

paper. The first paragraph should start with a sentence that is

clear and wide in its scope and catches the reader’s attention and

then flow into details until ultimately identify the problem of the

research specifically. The goal and aim of the first paragraph is to

make the reader consider and know what the research is going to

address in a clear fashion.

Here are four examples of opening sentences:

 “Breaking waves at the sea surface promote vigorous mixing of

mountain, energy, and scalars, and thus are a key process in

upper ocean dynamics and air-sea integration.”(Sullivan et.al

2004).

 There is a long-standing interest in flow over isolated

topography, such as sea mounts, with regards to both theoretical

and practical issues.” (Nycarder&Lacase 2004).

 “Shallow flows are ubiquitous in nature.” (Jirka 2001).

 “The convection currents which rise from heated bodies have

been discussed previously, but in most cases attention has been

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

directed towards finding the distribution of field velocity and

temperature near such bodies.” (Morton et. al.1956).

Then come the middle paragraphs which follow the introductory

paragraph. They should cite the most important historical

contributions that build the foundation to the topic of the paper.

Also, they should focus on the knowledge base and the significant

difference between what has already been published and the new

contribution that your paper is presenting.

And at last comes the final paragraph which outlines the remaining

sections of the paper. The purpose of this paragraph is to fulfill two

important steps. The first is to mold the entire contribution of the

paper in line with earlier contributions, thus putting strongly

forward the extent of the current contributions. The second is to

pave the road to the reader to the section that interests him/her.

This paragraph should be clear so as to help organize your logic

and build the rest of the paper on a strong foundation.

In writing the introduction avoid the following:

 Do not mention actual techniques used in your study.

 Do not use a list of points; use prose.

 Do not explain what can be found in any textbook in the field.

 Do not include data or conclusions from the work being done.

 Do not cite unpublished reports.
Methods

The methods: this section should declare the mechanism in

obtaining the results. That is to explain in vivid details the methods

used with adequate comparison. Also, that explanation should

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

include a description of techniques used in an independent

section. In addition, the reader should be able to comprehend and

digest the results quality. In the methods sections pay attention to

the following:

 Do cite examples that you have read and reference the source of

the information.
 Do use simple sentences. Complicated sentences could be

confusing and increasing the risk of grammatical errors.

 Do not use vague and ambiguous terms to identify study

parameters.

 Do not imitate procedures you might see in your lab manual.

 Do not use non-technical usages of technical terms such as
“random” “significant”…..

 Do not put results in this section.

 Do not report the data and locations of the study.

Results

The results should show the statistical significance of your

findings. The obtained results must show the original data after

applying the techniques outlined in the methods section. An ideal

section of results can be shown through clear-cat figures with

powerful text. In writing the results, avoid the following:

 Do not present the same data in both a table and

figure.

 Do not support the hypothesis for all results.

 Do not discuss the results.

 Do not necessarily have to include all the data you have gotten.

43

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Do not try to manipulate the data to make it looks like you did

more than you actually did.

 Do not report raw data when they can summarized as means or

a percent.

Discussion

In this section, the author’s opinion enters the pictures through the

interpretation of the results to eventually reach their intended

purpose and conclusions. The discussion is where the arguments

over the results are made.

A discussion section feature that is common is to compare the

results with earlier works to see what is new and significant that

the paper comes up with. Also, the discussion uses the obtained

results to give an appropriate solution to an engineering problem

or to a specific science one. In writing the discussion avoid the

following:

 Do not introduce new results.

 Do not leave the discussion open. End it with a short summary

regarding the significance of the work.

 Do not amplify between the discussion and the results.

 Do not present extensive discussion of published work.

 Do not use a hard to understand language to indicate your ability

to research and analyze the topic.

Conclusion

The conclusion’s job is to summarize the paper for a reader who

had read the introduction and the body of the paper already. Your

34

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

conclusion, then, should look quite different than the introduction.

However, this section usually includes many specific outcomes

and also larger and longer than the section of the abstract.

Most researchers write this section in two paragraphs. In the first

one concludes the various sections of the paper focusing on the

important results. While the second paragraph draws the important

conclusions. In writing the conclusion, avoid the following

 Do not present new information.

 Do not present information that is hard to find from the other

sections.

 Do not write or list equations or citations.

Tables and Figures

In preparing tables and figures, it is recommended to use only

EPS, PDF or JPG formats for electronic artwork. Also, use a

telegraphic title style without verbs or articles. Use tall and narrow

tables instead of wide and flat. Number all figures and tables in the

order of their appearance in the text. Most readers study tables

and figure first. Thus, explain each term and abbreviation in a

footnote to save readers from searching through the text to

understand each term or abbreviation. In writing this section, avoid

the following:

 Do not repeat information in a table that you depict already in a

figure.

 Do not use sentences that, just direct reader to use figures or

table.

 Do not use vertical lines to separate tables.

34

Chapter 4
How to Write a Research Paper in
Engineering and Science

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Do not use a table for fewer than eight figures. Few data need no

table.

24

Chpter 5
Writing an Effective E-mail

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 5

WRITING AN EFFECTIVE E-MAIL



Write a Meaningful Subject Line



Always Use a Greeting

 Identify Yourself Clearly

 State the Reason why You are Emailing in a Brief and Polite

Way

 Keep the Message Focused



As Possible, Avoid Attachments

 Proofread

 Distinguish Between Formal and Informal

 Make Sure Email is Ready to Hit ‘Send’



Respond Promptly

The way you communicate with professors or other executive

people is extremely as a student (or person). Professors, usually

have an impression on what kind of message they receive from

their students or any other student. Thus, when writing an email,

use a professional tone and be very respectful in every detail in

your letter.

Write a Meaningful Subject Line

Write a subject line that accurately describes the content, giving

your reader a concrete reason to open your message.

Always Use a Greeting

Generally speaking, if you are addressing a professor, use “Dr.

Last name” or “Professor. Last name”. Taking a chance with Mr,

24

Chpter 5
Writing an Effective E-mail
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Mrs and not Dr. or Professor may result in a feeling of insult by

the professor.

Ex: Dear Dr. Fayadh

Dear Professor Fayadh

Identify Yourself Clearly

When contacting someone new, always include your name,

occupation, and any other important identification information in

the first few sentences.

State the Reason why You are Emailing in a Brief and
Polite Way

Don’t flood your letter with irrelevant information to your situation.

Provide only what is likely to matter to the professor.

Keep the Message Focused

Write short paragraphs separated by blank lines. Most people find

unbroken blocks of text boring. Take the time to format your

message to help your reader focus on it.

As Possible, Avoid Attachments

Rather than focusing your reader to download an attachment and

open it in a separate program, you will probably get faster results if

you just copy-paste the most important part of the document into

the body of your message.

22

Chpter 5
Writing an Effective E-mail
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Proofread

When writing a text, take your time to make your message look

professional. Check spelling and look for typos. Before you hit

“send”. Make sure the message makes sense.

Distinguish Between Formal and Informal

Don’t use informal language when your reader expects a more

formal approach. Informal language may be used between friends,

but not with a dignitary or a professor far away.

Make Sure Email is Ready to Hit ‘Send’

Don’t send an email and soon you realize that you need to add

more information and send a follow-up. Make sure the message

covers it all.

Respond Promptly

After receiving a reply, answer it to acknowledge it. A simple

saying “I am grateful” is quite enough. If you see it necessary, you

may extend your thank you note to achieve a professional effect.

EX:

Mechanical Drawing Professional@gmail.com

Mechanical Drawing Question

Dear Professor Fayadh,

This is Ali Jasim from your Mechanical Drawing class 101. I’m

sorry for missing class last Monday, I had a family emergency that

I needed to attend to. I’m hoping that you might be able to give me

the notes for the material that I missed.

Sincerely,

mailto:Professional@gmail.com

24

Chpter 5
Writing an Effective E-mail
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Ali Jasim

Mechanical Drawing 101

Section 3

EX:
Mechanical Drawing Professional@gmail.com
Mechanical Drawing Question
Dear Professor Fayadh,

Thank you for your help, I greatly appreciate it.

Sincerely,

Ali Jasim
Mechanical Drawing 101
Section 3

mailto:Professional@gmail.com

64

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 6

HOW TO WRITE A RESEARCH PROPOSAL

The elements of the research proposal

 Introduction



The Research Question



Purpose of the Research

 Preliminary Literature Review



Theoretical Framework



Statement of Research Contribution



Proposed Research Methodology



Research Plan



Research Time Table



List of References

Usually, a research proposal in science or engineering is a written

text four to ten pages long. A proposal gives a description of the

problem, its purpose, the importance of the research question and

hypothesis.

It must show that the candidate is prepared and armed with the

reading required in his discipline. And that he/she has the grasp

on the issues that formed the study and is capable to give more

beyond the scope of the topic which he/she is planning to

research.

Writing a good research proposal can help the research in later

times. If well written and organized, the proposal can serve as a

guideline of the thesis to follow and can be depicted onto different

sections of the thesis.

64

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Research Proposal Elements

In most cases, your research will need to include the following:

 Introduction to the research problem to identify the gap in the

current research.

 Research Questions that ask what relationships exist between

different variables in the study and the hypothesis that predicts

the relationship between

variables.

 The Purpose of the research to address the need for the

research and justify the proposal.

 Preliminary literature review that covers what other researchers

have already done in the area.

 Theoretical framework that details the theory that is guiding the

proposed study.

 Statements of the contribution of the research that makes a

change to the general area.

 Research methodology that explains each step you will take in

order to conduct the research.

 Research plan to cover the contents of each paper.

 Research timetable to cover how time is divided over the various

sections of the work.

 List of references used.

Introduction

The introduction should be as brief as possible (a paragraph or

two). You need to make this part clear and focused. You should be

able to characterize what research has already been done in this

64

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

area, explaining how and in what respects the research would

contribute to it and why it would be important to do.

This should lead logically to the gap in the research that you intend

to fill. When the gap is identified, a research question can then be

raised. The answer to this question is called “the thesis

statement”.

The thesis statement is your tentative or proposed answer to this

question. But, it is not expected that, at this stage-you have an

answer to your research question. This is what the thesis provides.

A hypothesis is useful for this purpose.

The introduction must narrow down, not get wider. You must

demonstrate that you have command of the issues in the area and

that you are focusing on a particular issue.

The Research Question

Research question may be a question as such, but rather a

statement of a problem to be investigated. However, it could be

also phrased in the form of a question or formal hypothesis. The

question asks what relationships exist between different variables

in the study while the hypothesis predicts the relationship between

variables.
Purpose of the Research

In this section clearly identify the goal of the study in one precise

sentence. Then you need to tell the reader that the research can

justify along the size of the area involved, the gap in the literature

that demands attention, the improved methodology used and the

benefits in terms of practice.

64

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Preliminary Literature Review

Provide a summary of previous related researches on the research

problem and their strength and weakness and a justification of

your research. Also, it addresses what is known, what have been

done, and, why your research is still necessary. You need to write

a short and precise overview to cover the following:

 The most important contributions of other scientists.

 Logical discussion of the theoretical scope of the framework of

ideas to back the research.

 Show that you are fully conversant with the ideas you are dealing

with and that you grasp the methodological implications.

 Indicate an open problem which then will be the motive for your

project.

Theoretical Framework

This section usually formed the last part of the literature review.

The main aim of a theoretical framework is to define the

dependent variable and independent variable and the possible

relationship between the variables for the purpose of research.

Thus, the framework represents the beliefs on how certain

variables (components) are related to one another and an

explanation of why we believe that these variables are associated

with one another.

Statement of Research Contribution

The contribution of your research should be addressed clearly in

this section. You should explain the change your research will

05

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

make in the field of your study. The statement should explain

how/what you will do will lead to certain outcomes. The statement

is an extremely important part of the proposal. You must notice

and address a problem in the existing literature that has not been

previously addressed in order to conduct the research.

In this section, outline the following points:

 The fruits of the research and its importance.

 Nature of the research outcome, practical or theoretical.

Proposed Research Methodology

This part of research outline should consist of a detailed

description of your intention to address and answer all the

questions that arise in the research. Remember that the following

points should be explained to your readers:

 What information you will be collecting and how.

 The sources and quality of the evidence you will consult.

 The analytical technique you will employ.

 The timetable you will follow.

You should indicate why you think that data collection and

analysis methods are appropriate for your research. Also, all other

issues that hinder gathering data and pose difficulties in the way of

collecting other material could be discussed.

Research Plan

This is where you list material x covered in each chapter or section

of the thesis. For this reason, the plan together with the research

05

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

timetable can be discussed, although the research plan has a

different function than research time tables.

 Gives you through the direction you planned for your thesis.

 Gives the impression that the thesis is so well-prepared that it

will be achieved in time.

 Shows that the project is well-organized and achievable in the

time available.

Research Time Table

This section explains in an orderly manner the sequence of

research phases and the weighing in percentage terms of parts or

section of the thesis, the approximate limit of words, the covered

topic and the time approximately they take. Note that the timetable

in approximate, it can help if followed, but doesn’t commit you to

anything.

Ex:

Chapter Topic % Words Months

1 Introduction 5 3000 3

2 Literature Review 30 20000 6

3 Methodology 20 15000 4

4 Data Analysis 25 18000 5

5 Conclusion 20 15000 6

Total 100 71000 24

List of References

References must be scholarly acceptable, such as using APA

(American Psychological Association) format. List the academic

05

Chapter 6
How to Write a Research Proposal
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

works which you have mentioned in your research outline. At least

some of them should be recent publications. List only publications

which you have actually used for the preparation of the research

outline.

35

Chapter 7

Verbs Used in Scientific Writing

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 7

VERBS USED IN SCIENTIFIC WRITING

In scientific writing you need a greater stock of verbs than the

verbs available in your own research field. Since verbs move ideas

along, they must be chosen carefully to suit and express ideas

accurately. The following are lists of verbs used by professional

writers.

To look at To find out To balance To show

abserve learn evaluate indicate
perceive search consider suggest
approach survey speculate define
study inquire decide approximate
regard investigate conclude display
identify demonstrate
detect reveal
assess affirm
analyze
derermine

To decrease To Increase

reduce raise
degrade amplify
lessen arouse
weaken elevate
restrict enhance
limit enlarge
curtail enrich
minimize heighten
diminish improve

magnify
strength
promote

35

Chapter 7
Verbs Used in Scientific Writing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Colloquial vs Formal Words

In writing a research paper colloquial (spoken) words should be

avoided; use formal words instead. Below are examples of such

situations:

Avoid Choose

So Thus, therefore

A couple Two, a pair,

Though Even though, although

Try to Attempt to

Turnout Prove, prove to be

Way Means, methods, procedure

Work out Resolve, determine, devise

A lot, a lot of Several, many

Anyhow In any case, nevertheless

Anyway Although, however

Fix Arrange, manage

Enough Sufficient (insufficient)

Besides, too Also, likewise, moreover

Give Supply, furnish, provide

Gone, none Lacking, absent, missing

Hard Difficult, demanding

Let Allow, permit

Little Few, insufficient, rare, scarce

33

Chapter 7
Verbs Used in Scientific Writing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Words Confused

English has a lot of commonly confused words. They either look

alike, sound like, but have completely different meanings. The

Following are commonly confused words.

 Accept x Except

Accept (v) : to receive

Except (n) : apart from

 Affect x Effect

Affect (v) : influence

Effect (n) : result

 All intensive purpose x all purposes and intents

(All intensive purposes) is incorrect to use

All purposes and intent : for all practical purposes

 Allusion x illusion

Allusion (n) : an indirect reference

Illusion (n) : a false idea

 Borrow x lend

Borrow (v) : to take or accept something for a short time

Lend (v) : to give something for a short time

 Complement x compliment

Complement (n) : that which complete

Complement (v) : to make complete

Compliment (n) : something said in praise

Compliment (v) : to congratulate

 Comprise x compose

Comprise (v) : to include; to consist of

35

Chapter 7
Verbs Used in Scientific Writing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Compose(v): make up

 Elicit x illicit

Ellicit (v) : evoke

Illicit (v) : illegal

 Imitated x intimated

Imitated (v) : past tense of imitate which means to seek to follow

the example of

Intimated (v ): to hint

 In a sense x in Essence

In a sense (idiom ): in a way

In essence (idiom) : essentially

 Its x it’s

Its (possessive (pronoun) : of

It’s : it + is

 I should of x I should have

I should of : incorrect to use

I should have : the past perfect of (shall)

 Lose x loose

Lose (v) : to fail to gain

Loose (adj ): not tight

 Passed x past

Passed (v) : past tense of pass

Past (adj) : the time that has gone by

 Precede x proceed

Precede (v) : to come before

Proceed (v) : to advance

35

Chapter 7
Verbs Used in Scientific Writing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Principal x principle

Principal (n ): presiding officer

Principle (n ): a fundamental truth

 Than x Then

Than (conjunction) : used to introduce the second element in

comparison

Then (adverb ): at that time

 Their x There

Their (adj ): of. Belong to

There (n) that place

 Advice x Advise

Advice (n) : recommendation

Advise (v ): to recommend

 Already x all ready

Already (adv) : by this time

All ready (adj) : fully prepared

 Altogether x all together

Altogether (adv ): thoroughly

All together (n ): everything in one place

 Beside x Besides

Beside (adv) : next to

Besides (adv) : in addition

 Device x devise

Device (n ): a plan

Devise (v) : to create

 Dominant x dominate

Dominant (adj ): controlling

35

Chapter 7
Verbs Used in Scientific Writing
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Dominate (v) : to control

 Farther x further

Farther (adj ): at a greater distance

Further more (adv) : in greater depth

95

Chapter 8
Style Format in Writing Engineering &

Science Research Papers

A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Chapter 8

STYLE FORMAT IN WRITING ENGINEERING
&

SCIENCE RESEARCH PAPERS

Engineering and the sciences disciplines do not all follow one

citation nor one writing style format. There are many different ways

of citing resources for your research. The citation style depends on

the academic discipline involved. Among these formats are:

 APA (American psychological Association): Used by Education,

psychology and the sciences.

 MLA (Modern language Association): Used by Humanities.

 Chicago/Turabian: Used by Business and Fine Arts.

The following is a comparison between the major two styles APA

and MLA

Item APA MLA

Author Lists all authors. Uses last
name and first initial

Writes available names. If
more than 3 list first name
and “et al”

Title Capitalizes first word Capitalizes every important
word

Publisher Uses full name Shortens name

Dates Follows author’s name Placed at end of citation

Indentions First line entry is intended,
second and subsequent lines
are flush with the left margin

First line is flush with left
margin, second and
subsequent lines are
indented

Paranthetical
citation in
text

Uses author name, date of
publication and page number

Uses author name and page

Book Smith, J. (2003) MLA
handbook for writers of
research papers. 6th ed New
York:MLA

Smith, Joseph. MLA
handbook for writers of
research papers. 6th ed.
New York:MLA 2003

06

Chapter 8
Style Format in Writing Engineering &
Science Research Papers
A Road to Scientific Writing

in Engineering and Science

Journal
article

Jackson, S. (1996). Producing
a new generation of
computers. The Science
Review,15, 87-93

Jackson, Scott. “Producing a
new generation of
computers.” The science
review 15 (1996): 87-93

Quotes You must cite the author and
date properly within the text or
at the end of the sentence.
e.g. Jefferson (1978) urges
rivals to settle differences.
e.g. In his letter to urge rivals
to settle differences
(Jefferson, 1976)

You must cite the author in
parantheses with the
author’s last name and page
number of the source at the
end of the page.”you will
gain skills that will prepare
you to do research in your
career within the business.”
(Gibaldis)

Citation list This page must be titled
references

This page must be titled
works cited.

Handling Numbers

Following is a guideline on how to handle numbers and use

numerals

 Never add a space between number and percentage sign.

6% never 6 %

 Never add an article with figures or tables

Figure 3 is attached never use the (a) figure 3 is attached

 As dates write 14 May 2004 or 5/14/2004

In Germany use 14.05.2004

 Never start a sentence with a numeral; Of the 45 students, 32

passed the exam.

 Never say 32 of the 45 students passed the exam.

 Group large numbers in trios (3’s) with spaces and no period.

12 345 000 or 12,345,000

 Never use plural percent, use percentages (percentages never

use percents).

 Write ratios as 3:1 or 3 to 1

06

Chapter 8
Style Format in Writing Engineering &
Science Research Papers
A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

 Never separate a percentage from its figure; Of the 60/45(75%)

died never; 45 of the 60(75%) died.

 Prepositions before the numerical figure require (and); between

two and ten men

86

References A Road to Scientific Writing

in Engineering and Science

REFERENCES

AlAltman, D. G., Schulz, K. F., Moher, D., Egger, M., Davidoff, F., Elbourne,
D., . . . Lang, T. (2001). The revised CONSORT statement for
reporting randomized trials: explanation and elaboration. Annals of
internal medicine, 134(8), 663-694.

Bazerman, C., Russell, D. R., Bean, J., Behrens, L., Rosen, L. J., Fulwiler,
T., . . . McLeod, S. (1998). Writing across the Curriculum. College
English, 50, 383-389.

Behrens, L., Rosen, L. J., & Beedles, B. (2005). A sequence for academic
writing: Pearson/Longman.

Benwell, B. ENGLISH HISTORICAL LINGUISTICS: THEORIES AND
MODELS OF LANGUAGE CHANGE [subject to availability]
Professor Suzanne Romaine (suzanne. romaine@ merton. ox. ac.
uk). M. St./M. Phil. English, 29, 148.

Bhagat, R. (2009). Learning paraphrases from text. University of Southern
California.

Biggam, J. (2015). Succeeding with your master’s dissertation: a step-by-
step handbook: McGraw-Hill Education (UK).

Biros, M. Advice to authors: getting published in Academic Emergency
Medicine, 2000.

Blancett, S. S., Flanagin, A., & Young, R. K. (1995). Duplicate publication in
the nursing literature. Image: The Journal of Nursing Scholarship,
27(1), 51-56.

Brendel, E., Meibauer, J., & Steinbach, M. (2011). Understanding quotation
(Vol. 7): Walter de Gruyter.

Bretag, T., & Mahmud, S. (2009). A model for determining student
plagiarism: Electronic detection and academic judgement. Journal
of University Teaching & Learning Practice, 6(1), 6.

Buenker, J. (2008). LibGuides: Academic Integrity: Books & Book Chapters.
Buranen, L., & Roy, A. M. (1999). Perspectives on plagiarism and

intellectual property in a postmodern world: SUNY Press.
Campbell, C. (1987). Writing with Others’ Words: Native and Non-Native

University Students’ Use of Information from a Background Reading
Text in Academic Compositions.

Cardoso, M. The American Philosophy of Incarceration.
Chanock, K. (2008). When students reference plagiarised material–what

can we learn (and what can we do) about their understanding of
attribution? International Journal for Educational Integrity, 4(1).

Driscoll, D. L., & Brizee, A. (2006). Quoting, paraphrasing, and
summarizing. The OWL at Purdue, 10.

Goodman, N. (1998). Human albumin administration in critically ill patients.
Paper failed to mention earlier review. BMJ (Clinical research ed.),
317(7162), 884.

Harrington, S. (2009). Librarians and undergraduate thesis support: An
annotated bibliography. The Reference Librarian, 50(4), 397-412.

86

References A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Hexham, I. (1999). The plague of plagiarism. Department of Religious

Studies, The University of Calgary. Fecha de consulta, 20.
Hirvela, A., & Du, Q. (2013). “Why am I paraphrasing?”: Undergraduate ESL

writers’ engagement with source-based academic writing and
reading. Journal of English for Academic Purposes, 12(2), 87-98.

Howard, R. M. (2002). The Fraud of Composition Pedagogy: What I
Learned from Writing a Handbook.

Howard, R. M., Serviss, T., & Rodrigue, T. K. (2010). Writing from sources,
writing from sentences. Writing and Pedagogy, 2(2), 177-192.

Hudson, R., & Hudson, B. (2004). The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style:
HarperCollins Christian Publishing.

Johnson, W. B., & Kaslow, N. J. (2014). 1 On Developing Professional
Psychologists: The State of the Art and a Look Ahead. The Oxford
Handbook of Education and Training in Professional Psychology, 7,
1.

Jones, L. R. (2001). Academic integrity and academic dishonesty: A
handbook about cheating and plagiarism. Revised and Expanded
edition of Florida institute of technology.

Jordan, R. R. (1997). English for academic purposes: A guide and resource
book for teachers: Cambridge University Press.

Kennedy, M. L., & Smith, H. M. (2005). Reading and writing in the academic
community: Prentice Hall.

Mencher, M., & Shilton, W. P. (1997). News reporting and writing: Brown &
Benchmark Publishers.

Nathan, M. H. (1994). Variations of plagiarism. AJR. American journal of
roentgenology, 163(3), 727-727.

Ngai, S., Gold, J. L., Gill, S. S., & Rochon, P. A. (2005). Haunted
manuscripts: ghost authorship in the medical literature.
Accountability in research, 12(2), 103-114.

Office, C. (2012). The Copyright Law of the United States and Related Laws
Contained in Title 17 of the United States Code: Government
Printing Office.

Pears, R., & Shields, G. J. (2013). Cite them right: the essential referencing
guide: Palgrave Macmillan.

Purdue, O. (1995). Paraphrase: Write it in Your Own Words.
Rodriguez, V. (2013). Plagiarism, its consequences, and how to avoid it.
Roig, M. (2005). Re-using text from one’s own previously published papers:

an exploratory study of potential self-plagiarism. Psychological
reports, 97(1), 43-49.

Roig, M. (2011). Avoiding plagiarism, self-plagiarism, and other
questionable writing practices: A guide to ethical writing.

Salazar, M. K. (1993). Using the words and works of others: a commentary.
AAOHN journal: official journal of the American Association of
Occupational Health Nurses, 41(1), 46-49.

Schein, M. (2001). Redundant publications: From self-plagiarism to” Salami-
Slicing. New Surgery, 1, 139-140.

07

References A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Snow, E. (2006). Teaching students about plagiarism: An internet solution to

an internet problem. Innovate: Journal of Online Education, 2(5), 5.
Soto, J. G., Anand, S., & McGee, E. (2004). Plagiarism avoidance. Journal

of College Science Teaching, 33(7), 42.
Standler, R. (2000). Plagiarism in colleges in USA. Retrieved August 9,

2004.
Standler, R. B. (2000). Plagiarism in Colleges in USA. Retrieved February,

7, 2002.
Stott, B. (1991). Write to the Point: New York: Columbia.
Tarnow, E. (1999). The authorship list in science: Junior physicists’

perceptions of who appears and why. Science and Engineering
Ethics, 5(1), 73-88.

Taylor, D. McD (2002) The appropriate use of references in a scientific
research paper. Emerg Med, 14(2), 166-170.

Taylor, D. M. (2002). The appropriate use of references in a scientific
research paper. Emergency Medicine, 14(2), 166-170.

Trimmer, J. F. (2012). A guide to MLA documentation: Cengage Learning.
Turabian, K. L. (2013). A manual for writers of research papers, theses, and

dissertations: Chicago style for students and researchers: University
of Chicago Press.

Turner, E. H., Matthews, A. M., Linardatos, E., Tell, R. A., & Rosenthal, R.
(2008). Selective publication of antidepressant trials and its
influence on apparent efficacy. New England Journal of Medicine,
358(3), 252-260.

Wachal, R. S. (2002). Taboo or not taboo: That is the question. American
Speech, 77(2), 195-206.

Watson, R. (2016). The Value of Trusting No One and Using Similarity
Checkers. Nurse Author & Editor, 26(2), 3.

Wilde, O. (2012). Plagiarism: The bete noire of scientific communication.
Indian J Chest Dis Allied Sci, 54, 87-89.

Zigmond, M. J., & Fischer, B. A. (2002). Beyond fabrication and plagiarism:
The little murders of everyday science. Science and Engineering
Ethics, 8(2), 229-234.

Dillman, D. A. (1978). Mail and telephone surveys (Vol. 3): Wiley
Interscience.

Geever, J. C., & McNeill, P. (1997). Foundation Center’s guide to proposal
writing: Foundation Center.

Hall, M. S. (1988). Getting funded: A complete guide to proposal writing :
ERIC.

Johnson-Sheehan, R. (2008). Writing proposals: Pearson Longman.
Kline, W. B., & Farrell, C. A. (2005). Recurring manuscript problems:

Recommendations for writing, training, and research. Counselor
Education and Supervision, 44(3), 166-174 .

Li, C .N. (1975). Word order and word order change .
Li, C. N., & Thompson, S. A. (1974). An explanation of word order change

SVO→ SOV. Foundations of Language, 12(2), 201-214 .

07

References A Road to Scientific Writing
in Engineering and Science

Lloyd, M. E. (1990). Gender factors in reviewer recommendations for

manuscript publication. Journal of applied behavior analysis, 23(4),
539-543 .

Rubinstein, R. L. (1994). Proposal writing. SAGE FOCUS EDITIONS, 168,
67-67 .

Smulders, Y. M. (2013). A two-step manuscript submission process can
reduce publication bias. Journal of clinical epidemiology, 66(9), 946-
947 .

Swazey, J. P., Anderson, M. S., Lewis, K. S., & Louis, K. S. (1993). Ethical
problems in academic research. American Scientist, 81(6), 542-553 .

View publication statsView publication stats

https://www.researchgate.net/publication/320433839

• د. فياض نهائي
• الصفحه باللغه العربيه فقط

د. فياض نهائي
د.فياض
د.فياض
chapter 6
FAYADH M. ABED A ROAD TO SCIENTIFIC WRITING

Product Overview
Linear Motion Products

Actuator Overview
SureMotion linear motion offers both
motor-ready actuator assemblies, and a
versatile assortment of sliding components
and accessories to provide a wide variety
of motion control solutions.

Available Multi-Axis Configurations

Linear Slide Actuator Comparisons

X-Y Axis Configurations

B

A

A. (2) LACP2-16Txxxx
B. (1) LACPACC-004

B
A

A. (2) LAVL2-60Txxxx
B. (1) LAVLACC-004

A

C

D

B

A. (2) LACP2-16Txxxx
B. (1) LARSB1-xxxx
C. (1) LACPACC-004
D. (1) LACPACC-005

X-Z Axis Configuration X-Y-Z Axis Configuration

A
B

A. (2) LAVL2-60Txxxx
B. (1)

LAVLACC-005

A
C

B

A. (3) LAVL2-60Txxxx
B. (1) LAVLACC-004
C. (1) LAVLACC-005

Actuator Series Comparisons

Actuator
Series

Actuator
Type

Drive
Type

Max
Load

Capacity
(lb)

Max
Speed
(in/s)

Travel
(in)

Relative
Price

LARSD2 Twin Round Shaft
Ball

Screw 920 6 12, 24 $$

LACP2 Compact Slide Lead Screw 125 20 6, 12, 24, 36 $

LAVL2 Value Slide Lead Screw 110 15 6, 12, 18, 24 $

Click on the above video link for a short visual
example of how our products can be used.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-22

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

https://www.automationdirect.com/VID-MC-0015

https://www.automationdirect.com/VID-MC-0015

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-005

Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuators
Linear Motion Products

LARSD2-08T12BP2C

Description
Continuously-supported round rail slide with ball screw
actuation provides a very robust precision linear motion. Units
are complete except for a drive motor.

Features
• High-accuracy ball screw
• Continuously-supported guide rails
• Replacement components available
• Ready for NEMA 23 motor
• AISI 1566 Carbon Steel, 60 RC Round Shafts
• AISI 1045 Carbon Steel , 56 RC Ball Screw

Applications
• Positioning systems
• Heavy loads

Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuator Load/Moment Ratings

Part Number

Load (lb) Moment (lb·in)

Actuator
Thrust

Normal – LN Transverse Roll Pitch Yaw

Down Up LT MR MP MY
LARSD2-08TxxBP2C 200 920 644 920 1046 1210 1730

Load rating diagram

System Inertia Calculation:
To calculate the inertia reflected to the motor in a particular actuator, multiply the carriage payload by the payload inertia factor and then add
the constant system inertia value for that actuator. The constant system inertia value for each system includes the inertia of the shaft coupler,
carriage, and lead/ball screw.
• The payload must be in units of lbm.

Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuator Specifications

Part Number Price Drive Type
Drive
Pitch

Drive Screw
Efficiency (%)

Payload Inertia
Factor (in2)

Constant System
Inertia (lbm-in

2) Travel Weight (lb) Fits Motor

LARSD2-08T12BP2C $2,399.00
Ball screw 0.2 in 83 0.001

0.11 12in 10.5
NEMA 23

LARSD2-08T24BP2C $2,589.00 0.16 24in 14.0

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-23

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSD2-08T12BP2C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSD2-08T12BP2C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSD2-08T24BP2C

Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuators
Linear Motion Products

LARSD2-08TxxBP2C

Dimensions (in [mm])

LARSACC-013(014)

LARSACC-015(16)

Accessories

See our website www.AutomationDirect.com for complete Engineering drawings.

Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuator Accessories
Part Number Price Description Weight (lb)

LARSACC-010 $24.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, open type, 1/2 inch inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.5

LARSACC-013* $639.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LARSD2-08T12BP2C actuators. Ballscrew, ballnut, end bearings and grease tube included. 3.0

LARSACC-014* $849.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LARSD2-08T24BP2C actuators. Ballscrew, ballnut, end bearings and grease tube included. 5.0

LARSACC-015* $239.00 SureMotion motor adapter, NEMA 23 frame. For use with LARSD2-08 series actuators. 1/4 x 1/4 inch coupler included. 1.0

LARSACC-016* $289.00 SureMotion motor adapter, NEMA 34 frame. For use with LARSD2-08 series actuators. 1/2 x 1/4 inch coupler included. 1.0

* Repair kits and NEMA 23/34 motor adapter contain replacement components that are the same as the original components in the actuator assemblies.

Some accessories not shown see www.AutomationDirect.com for additional product photos.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-24

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSD2-08T12BP2C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSD2-08T24BP2C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-013

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-015

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-010

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-013

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-014

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-015

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-016

Compact Slide Actuators – Generation 2
Linear Motion Products

LACP2-16T06LP5

Description
Self-contained linear actuator designed for light loads in
harsh or wet conditions in a very small package. The base is a
single piece design with integrated slide surfaces, and is hard
anodized all over.

Generation 2 actuators have a reduced part count for more
reliable operation, integral wireway through the body and
more robust motor mount that fits both NEMA 17 and 23
motors.

Features
• Compact design
• Replacement components available
• Ready for NEMA 17 motor (NEMA 23 motor requires new

coupling)
• End-of-travel switch mounts
• AISI 6061-T6 Aluminum Alloy base, Hard Anodized on all

surfaces to a depth of 0.0005 to 0.0015”
• AISI 303 Stainless Steel Lead Screw

Applications
• Space-limiting applications
• Harsh or wet environments
• Light loads
• Speeds up to 20 inches per second

Compact Slide Actuator Load/Moment Ratings

Part Number

Load (lb)* Moment (lb·in)**

Actuator
Thrust
Normal – LN Transverse Roll Pitch Yaw

Down Up LT MR MP MY
LACP2-16TxxLP5 51 125 60 125 12 15 33

LACP2-16TxxL1 28 125 60 125 12 15 33

Load rating diagram
System Inertia Calculation:
To calculate the inertia reflected to the motor in a particular actuator, multiply the carriage payload by the payload inertia factor and then add
the constant system inertia value for that actuator. The constant system inertia value for each system includes the inertia of the shaft coupler,
carriage, and lead/ball screw.
• The payload must be in units of lbm.

Compact Slide Actuator Specifications

Part Number Price Drive Type
Drive
Pitch
Drive Screw
Efficiency (%)
Payload Inertia
Factor (in2)
Constant System
Inertia (lbm-in
2) Travel Weight (lb) Fits Motor

LACP2-16T06LP5 $1,129.00

Lead screw

0.5 in 52 0.0063

0.016 6in 1.8

NEMA 17

LACP2-16T12LP5 $1,189.00 0.017 12in 2.3
LACP2-16T24LP5 $1,569.00 0.020 24in 3.5
LACP2-16T36LP5 $1,869.00 0.024 36in 4.5
LACP2-16T06L1 $1,129.00

1in 44 0.025

0.022 6in 1.8
LACP2-16T12L1 $1,189.00 0.023 12in 2.3
LACP2-16T24L1 $1,569.00 0.026 24in 3.5
LACP2-16T36L1 $1,869.00 0.030 36in 4.5

* 30lb is the recommended maximum load capacity if the carriage is not externally supported against
rolling. The higher load capacities are possible if the carriage is externally supported.

** It is recommended that offset loads be located 5 inches or less from the center of the carriage.
When the loads are offset at greater distances, the carriage can vibrate during travel.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-25

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T06LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T06LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T12LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T24LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T36LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T06L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T12L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T24L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T36L1

Compact Slide Actuators – Generation 2
Linear Motion Products

LACPACC-002(003) LACPACC-004(005)

Accessories

LACPACC-001

2.28
57.8

2.25
57.2 A

B

2.00
50.8

2.28
57.9

PART NUMBER A B (TRAVEL)
LACP2-16T06LP5 11.57 [293.8] 6.40 [162.6]
LACP2-16T12LP5 17.57 [446.2] 12.40 [315.0]
LACP2-16T24LP5 29.57 [751.0] 24.40 [619.8]
LACP2-16T36LP5 41.57 [1055.8] 36.40 [924.6]
LACP2-16T06L1 11.57 [293.8] 6.40 [162.6]
LACP2-16T12L1 17.57 [446.2] 12.40 [315.0]
LACP2-16T24L1 29.57 [751.0] 24.40 [619.8]
LACP2-16T36L1 41.57 [1055.8] 36.40 [924.6]

LACP2-16TxxLxx

Dimensions (in [mm])
See our website www.AutomationDirect.com for complete Engineering drawings.

Compact Slide Actuator Accessories
Part Number Price Description Weight (lb)

LACPACC-001 $355.00 SureMotion motor adapter, NEMA 23 frame. For use with LACP(2)-16 series actuators. 1/4 inch x 4mm coupler included. 0.5

LACPACC-002* $650.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LACP-16TxxLP5 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 0.5

LACPACC-003* $650.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LACP-16TxxL1 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 0.5

LACPACC-004 $73.00 SureMotion mounting plate, XY type. For use with LACP2-16 series actuators. 0.5

LACPACC-005 $94.00 SureMotion mounting plate, XY type. For use with LACP2-16 and LARSB1 series actuators. 0.5

LACPACC-006* $650.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LACP2-16TxxLP5 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 1.0

LACPACC-007* $650.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LACP2-16TxxL1 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 1.0

* Repair kits contain replacement components that are the same as the original components in the actuator assemblies.

Some accessories not shown see www.AutomationDirect.com for additional product photos.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-26

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T06LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T12LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T24LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T36LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T06L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T12L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T24L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACP2-16T36L1

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-002

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-002

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-003

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-006

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LACPACC-007

Value Linear Slide Actuators – Generation 2
Linear Motion Products

Description
Low-cost linear actuator using the latest in sliding element
technology. The base is a single piece design with integrated slide
surfaces, and is hard anodized all over. This versatile unit can be
mounted horizontally, vertically, or inverted without loss of load
capacity.

Generation 2 actuators have a reduced part count for more reliable
operation, integral sensor mount grooves on both sides and a more
robust motor mount.

Features
• Small footprint
• Adjustable carriage pre-load
• Replacement components available
• Ready for NEMA 17 motor
• T-slots enable limit switches to be positioned anywhere

• AISI 6061-T6 Aluminum Alloy base, hard anodized on all surfaces
to a depth of 0.0005 to 0.0015”

• AISI 304 Stainless Steel Lead Screw

Applications
• Harsh or wet environments
• X-Y-Z positioning systems

Value Linear Slide Actuator Load/Moment Ratings

Part Number
Load (lb) Moment (lb·in)*

Actuator
Thrust

Normal – LN Transverse Roll Pitch Yaw
Down Up LT MR MP MY

LAVL2-60TxxLP2 70 110 110 110 50 32 32
LAVL2-60TxxLP5 50 110 110 110 50 32 32

Load rating diagram
System Inertia Calculation:
To calculate the inertia reflected to the motor in a particular actuator, multiply the carriage payload by the payload inertia factor and then add
the constant system inertia value for that actuator. The constant system inertia value for each system includes the inertia of the shaft coupler,
carriage, and lead/ball screw.
• The payload must be in units of lbm.

Value Linear Slide Actuator Specifications

Part Number Price Drive Type
Drive
Pitch
Drive Screw
Efficiency (%)
Payload Inertia
Factor (in2)
Constant System
Inertia (lbm-in
2) Travel Weight (lb) Fits Motor

LAVL2-60T06LP2 $789.00

Lead
screw

0.2 in 47 0.001

0.017 6in 2.0

NEMA 17

LAVL2-60T12LP2 $989.00 0.020 12in 2.8
LAVL2-60T18LP2 $1,199.00 0.023 18in 3.5
LAVL2-60T24LP2 $1,399.00 0.027 24in 4.2
LAVL2-60T06LP5 $789.00

0.5 in 57 0.0063

0.019 6in 2.0
LAVL2-60T12LP5 $989.00 0.022 12in 2.8
LAVL2-60T18LP5 $1,199.00 0.025 18in 3.5
LAVL2-60T24LP5 $1,399.00 0.028 24in 4.2

LAVL2-60T06LP2

* It is recommended that offset loads be located 5 inches or less from the center of the carriage. When the loads are
offset at greater distances, the carriage can vibrate during travel.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-27

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T06LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T12LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T18LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T24LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T06LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T12LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T18LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T24LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T06LP2

Value Linear Slide Actuators – Generation 2
Linear Motion Products

LAVLACC-001(002) LAVLACC-004

Accessories

LAVLACC-003

1.52
38.6

1.61
40.9

A
B

2.40
61.0

2.30
58.4

2.36
60.0

PART NUMBER A B (TRAVEL)
LAVL2-60T06LP2 11.61 [294.8] 6.03 [153.1]
LAVL2-60T12LP2 17.61 [447.2] 12.03 [305.6]
LAVL2-60T18LP2 23.61 [599.6] 18.03 [458.0]
LAVL2-60T24LP2 29.61 [752.0] 24.03 [610.3]
LAVL2-60T06LP5 11.61 [294.8] 6.03 [153.1]
LAVL2-60T12LP5 17.61 [447.2] 12.03 [305.6]
LAVL2-60T18LP5 23.61 [599.6] 18.03 [458.0]
LAVL2-60T24LP5 29.61 [752.0] 24.03 [610.3]

LAVL2-60TxxLPx

Dimensions (in [mm])
See our website www.AutomationDirect.com for complete Engineering drawings.
LAVLACC-005

Value Linear Slide Actuator Accessories
Part Number Price Description Weight (lb)

LAVLACC-001* $289.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LAVL-60TxxLP2 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 0.5

LAVLACC-002* $289.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LAVL-60TxxLP5 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 0.5

LAVLACC-003 $239.00 SureMotion motor adapter, NEMA 23 frame. For use with LAVL2-60 series actuators. 1/4 inch x 5 mm coupler included. 1.0

LAVLACC-004 $112.00 SureMotion mounting plate, XY type. For use with LAVL2-60 series actuators. 0.5

LAVLACC-005 $252.00 SureMotion mounting plate, XZ type. For use with LAVL2-60 series actuators. 1.0

LAVLACC-006* $289.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LAVL2-60TxxLP2 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 1.0

LAVLACC-007* $289.00 SureMotion repair kit, for use with LAVL2-60TxxLP5 actuators. Nut, bushings, end bearings and oil syringe included. 1.0

* Repair kits contain replacement components that are the same as the original components in the actuator assemblies.
Some accessories not shown see www.AutomationDirect.com for additional product photos.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-28

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T06LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T12LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T18LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T24LP2

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T06LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T12LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T18LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVL2-60T24LP5

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-003

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-002

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-003

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-006

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LAVLACC-007

Round-Shaft Slide Elements
Linear Motion Products

Description
Round-shaft sliding elements can be combined
with other elements to build a huge variety of
machine mechanisms. Available in both end- and
continuously-supported shafts.

Features
• Linear ball bearings
• High quality clear anodized aluminum blocks
• AISI 1566 Carbon Steel, 60 RC Round Shafts

Slide Rail Systems Load Ratings

Part Number
Normal (lb) Transverse

(lb)Down Up
Pillow Blocks / Bushings for LARSA1

LARSACC-001/007 230
LARSACC-002/008 470
LARSACC-003/009 850

LARSA1 Linear Slide Assemblies
LARSA1-08LxxC 460
LARSA1-12LxxC 940
LARSA1-16LxxC 1700

Pillow Blocks / Bushings for LARSB1
LARSACC-004/010 230 161 230
LARSACC-005/011 470 268 470
LARSACC-006/012 850 485 850

LARSB1 Linear Slide Assemblies
LARSB1-08LxxC 460 322 460
LARSB1-12LxxC 940 536 940
LARSB1-16LxxC 1700 970 1700

End-Supported Slide Rail Systems and Accessories
Part Number Price Description Weight (lb)
LARSA1-08L12C $269.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 12 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 1.5
LARSA1-08L24C $279.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 24 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 2.0
LARSA1-08L36C $299.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 36 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 2.7
LARSA1-12L12C $339.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 12 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 3.0
LARSA1-12L24C $359.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 24 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 4.5
LARSA1-12L36C $379.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 36 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 6.0
LARSA1-16L12C $454.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 12 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 6.0
LARSA1-16L24C $484.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 24 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 8.5
LARSA1-16L36C $509.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, end supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 36 inch length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 11.0
LARSACC-001* $55.00 SureMotion single pillow block, closed type, linear ball bushing, 1/2 in inside diameter. 0.3
LARSACC-002* $67.00 SureMotion single pillow block, closed type, linear ball bushing, 3/4 in inside diameter. 0.6
LARSACC-003* $96.00 SureMotion single pillow block, closed type, linear ball bushing, 1 in inside diameter. 1.2
LARSACC-007* $20.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, closed type, 1/2 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.1
LARSACC-008* $24.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, closed type, 3/4 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.2
LARSACC-009* $39.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, closed type, 1 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.3

Continuously-Supported Slide Rail Systems and Accessories
LARSB1-08L12C $279.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 12 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 2.0
LARSB1-08L24C $347.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 24 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 3.0
LARSB1-08L36C $431.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1/2 in diameter, 36 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 4.5
LARSB1-12L12C $348.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 12 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 4.0
LARSB1-12L24C $454.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 24 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 6.2
LARSB1-12L36C $556.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 3/4 in diameter, 36 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 9.0
LARSB1-16L12C $451.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 12 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 6.5
LARSB1-16L24C $583.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 24 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 10.5
LARSB1-16L36C $703.00 SureMotion, linear slide assembly, continuously supported, round shaft, 1 in diameter, 36 in length, carbon steel. (2) single pillow blocks included. 14.5
LARSACC-004* $58.00 SureMotion single pillow block, open type, linear ball bushing, 1/2 in inside diameter. 0.2
LARSACC-005* $74.00 SureMotion single pillow block, open type, linear ball bushing, 3/4 in inside diameter. 0.5
LARSACC-006* $103.00 SureMotion single pillow block, open type, linear ball bushing, 1 in inside diameter. 1.0
LARSACC-010* $24.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, open type, 1/2 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.1
LARSACC-011* $30.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, open type, 3/4 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.1
LARSACC-012* $51.00 SureMotion linear ball bushing, open type, 1 in inside diameter, with seals, self-aligning. 0.2
* Bushings and pillow blocks are replacement components that are the same as the original components in the slide assemblies.

LARSA1-12L12C

LARSB1-12L12C

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-29

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-002

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-003

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-006

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-001

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-002

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-003

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-007

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-008

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-009

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-004

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-005

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-006

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-010

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-011

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSACC-012

Round-Shaft Slide Elements
Linear Motion Products
Dimensions (in [mm])

LARSA1-xxLxxC
& LARSB1-xxLxxC*

PART # A B C ØD E F

LARSA1-08L12C 12.0 [304.8]

2.00 [50.8] 1.70 [42.9] 0.50 [12.7] 2.00 [50.8] 1.69 [42.9]LARSA1-08L24C 24.0 [609.6]

LARSA1-08L36C 36.0 [914.4]

LARSA1-12L12C 12.0 [304.8]

2.50 [63.5] 2.19 [55.6] 0.75 [19.0] 2.75 [69.9] 2.06 [52.4]LARSA1-12L24C 24.0 [609.6]

LARSA1-12L36C 36.0 [914.4]

LARSA1-16L12C 12.0 [304.8]

3.06 [77.8] 2.69 [68.3] 1.00 [25.4] 3.25 [82.6] 2.81 [71.5]LARSA1-16L24C 24.0 [609.6]

LARSA1-16L36C 36.0 [914.4]

LARSB1-08L12C* 12.0 [304.8]

1.50 [38.1] 1.81 [46.0] 0.50 [12.7] 2.00 [50.8] 1.50 [38.1]LARSB1-08L24C* 24.0 [609.6]

LARSB1-08L36C* 36.0 [914.4]

LARSB1-12L12C* 12.0 [304.8]

1.75 [44.5] 2.44 [61.9] 0.75 [19.0] 2.75 [69.9] 1.88 [47.6]LARSB1-12L24C* 24.0 [609.6]

LARSB1-12L36C* 36.0 [914.4]

LARSB1-16L12C* 12.0 [304.8]

2.13 [54.0] 2.94 [74.6] 1.00 [25.4] 3.25 [82.6] 2.63 [66.7]LARSB1-16L24C* 24.0 [609.6]

LARSB1-16L36C* 36.0 [914.4]
* LARSA1-xxLxxC is shown in drawing. LARSB1-xxLxxC has different appearance, but same
dimensions as shown in this table.

See our website www.AutomationDirect.com for complete Engineering drawings.

1 – 8 0 0 – 6 3 3 – 0 4 0 5Motion ControltMNC-30

For the latest prices, please check AutomationDirect.com.

http://www.AutomationDirect.com

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-08L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-12L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSA1-16L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-08L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-12L36C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L12C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L24C

http://www.automationdirect.com/pn/LARSB1-16L36C

• SureMotion Linear Motion Overview
• SureMotion Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuators
• Twin Round Shaft Slide Actuators Dimensions and Accessories
• SureMotion Compact Slide Actuators – Generation 2
• Compact Slide Actuators Dimensions and Accessories – Generation 2
• SureMotion Value Linear Slide Actuators – Generation 2
• Value Linear Slide Actuators Dimensions and Accessories – Generation 2
• SureMotion Round-Shaft Slide Elements
• Round-Shaft Slide Elements Dimensions and Accessories
• Search
• Save File
• Print this PDF
• E-mail this PDF

Linear actuators DFPI

Subject to chan

ge

– 2019/052 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI

Key features

Function

DFPIs are closed-loop controlled

linear actuators. They are available

with integrated displacement

encoder

(DFPI-…-E-…) or fully integrated posi­

tioner (DFPI-…-C1V-…). In the version

DFPI-…-E-…, the potentiometric

displacement encoder supplies an

analogue voltage signal proportional

to the piston position. This can be

used for operation with an external

positioner. In the version

DFPI-…-C1V-…, the integrated posi­

tioner provides the positioning func­

tion. This actuator has a factory-

defined safety position that is as­

sumed if the operating voltage or the

analogue setpoint value fails. The

position is preset via an analogue

setpoint signal in the range of

4 … 20 mA. The position feedback

takes place via an analogue feedback

signal in the range of 4 … 20 mA. The

feedback signal provides the user

with greater reliability and easier

diagnostics. The travel speed can be

adjusted using the integrated flow

control screws. Variants with a

mounting interface to ISO 15552 or

DIN EN ISO 5210 are available. The

sturdy corrosion-resistant design of

the DFPI is ideal for use under harsh

ambient conditions.

Innovative Flexible Design

� Ready-to-install, compact unit for

easy installation

� Sturdy and corrosion-resistant,

ideal for use under harsh ambient

conditions

� Wide range of accessories for

virtually any installation situation

� Suitable for use in potentially

explosive locations

� Additional contactless binary end-

position sensing possible with

proximity sensors

� Suitable for applications with

closed-loop controlled linear and

swivel motion

� Double-acting

� Optionally with integrated displace­

ment encoder or fully integrated

positioner

� Sizes  100,  125,  160,

 200,  250 and  320

� Stroke lengths 40 to 990 mm

� Mounting interfaces to ISO 1555

2

or DIN EN ISO 5210

� IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA

4

� ATEX certification

Configurable product

This product and all its product op­

tions can be ordered using the config­

urator.

The configurator can be found under

Products on the DVD or

� www.festo.com/catalogue/…

Ordering data – Product options

Part no.

Type

5078949 DFPI-100

5087658 DFPI-12

5

5091793 DFPI-160

5092508 DFPI-200

5099770 DFPI-2

50

5106115 DFPI-320

-V- New

www.festo.com/catalogue

2019/05 – Subject to change 3� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Key features

Product options for DFPI-…-NB3P… based on ISO 15552

2 4

3

5

1

6

7

4
5

1 M12x1 plug, 5-pin, A-coded

2 Cable connector M16x1.5

3 Metal flanged socket

4 Push-in fitting QS1)

5 Air duct at the actuator,

stainless steel pipe or plastic

tubing

6 Connecting cable NHSB1),

5-wire, for DFPI-…-C1V-P-

A

7 Connecting cable NHSB1),

3-wire, for DFPI-…-E-P

Product options for DFPI-…-E-… and DFPI-…-C1V-… based on DIN EN ISO 5210

2
4

3
1

5

1 Plastic flanged socket

2 Metal flanged socket

3 Push-in fitting QS1)

4 Connecting cable NHSB1),

5-wire, for DFPI-…-C1V-P-A

5 Connecting cable NHSB1),

3-wire, for DFPI-…-E-P

1) Can be ordered separately as an accessory

-V- New

Subject to change – 2019/054 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI

Product range overview

DFPI-…­E­NB3…

� For operation with an external positioner with analogue voltage input

� Potentiometric displacement encoder integrated into the actuator DFPI

� Sturdy tie rod design

� Double-acting

� Mounting interfaces to ISO 15552 on bearing and end caps

Version Characteristics � Page

DFPI-…­E­NB3… DFPI-…­E­NB3P-…

� Electrical, pneumatic connection using metal flanged socket, pre-assembled connecting cable

NHSB, see

Accessories

chapter

� Air duct on the outside of the actuator via plastic tubing

11

DFPI-…­E­NB3P9B2-…

� Electrical connection using cable connector M16x1.5, screw terminal

� Pneumatic connection G3/

8

� Air duct on the outside of the actuator, either using a stainless steel pipe for variant

DFPI-…-E-NB3P9B2-M or plastic tubing for variant DFPI-…-E-NB3P9B2

11

DFPI-…­E­NB3M12B2-…

� Electrical connection via M12x1 plug,

5-pin

� Pneumatic connection G3/8
� Air duct on the outside of the actuator, either using a stainless steel pipe for variant

DFPI-…-E-NB3M12B2-M or plastic tubing for variant DFPI-…-E-NB3M12B2

11

DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…

� Digital electropneumatic positioner integrated within the drive housing

� Setpoint input 4 … 20 mA

� Position feedback 4 … 20 mA

� Safety position either retracting or advancing piston rod depending on the product version

� Sturdy tie rod design
� Double-acting
� Mounting interfaces to ISO 15552 on bearing and end caps
Version Characteristics � Page

DFPI-…-C1V-NB3 DFPI-…-C1V-NB3P-A

� Electrical, pneumatic connection using metal flanged socket, pre-assembled connecting cable
NHSB, see Accessories chapter
� Air duct on the outside of the actuator via plastic tubing

� Safety position if the operating voltage or setpoint signal fails: retracting piston rod

17

DFPI-…-C1V-NB3P-R-A

� Electrical, pneumatic connection using metal flanged socket, pre-assembled connecting cable
NHSB, see Accessories chapter
� Air duct on the outside of the actuator via plastic tubing

� Safety position if the operating voltage or setpoint signal fails: advancing piston rod

17
-V- New

2019/05 – Subject to change 5� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Product range overview

DFPI-…-E-…

� For operation with an external positioner with analogue voltage input

� Potentiometric displacement encoder integrated into the actuator

� Integrated air duct on the actuator

� Double-acting

� Mounting interfaces for process valves to DIN EN ISO 5210

Version Characteristics � Page

DFPI-…-E-… DFPI-…-E-P-G2

� Electrical, pneumatic connection using metal flanged socket, pre-assembled connecting cable
NHSB, see Accessories chapter

24

DFPI-…-C1V-…

� Digital electropneumatic positioner integrated within the drive housing
� Setpoint input 4 … 20 mA
� Position feedback 4 … 20 mA

� Retracting piston rod safety position

� Integrated air duct on the actuator
� Double-acting
� Mounting interfaces for process valves to DIN EN ISO 5210
Version Characteristics � Page

DFPI-…-C1V-… DFPI-…-C1V-P-A

� Electrical, pneumatic connection using metal flanged socket, pre-assembled connecting cable
NHSB, see Accessories chapter

30

DFPI-…-C1V-A

� Electrical connection using plastic flanged socket, screw terminal

� Pneumatic connection G1/4

30
-V- New

Subject to change – 2019/056 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI

Type codes

DFPI – 100 – 200 – N D2 P – C1 V –

Type

DFPI Closed-loop controlled actuator

for process automation

Piston

diameter

100 100 mm

125 125 mm

160 160 mm

200 200 mm

250 250 mm

320 320 mm

Stroke

x length [40 … 990 mm]

Cushioning

N No cushioning

Displacement encoder

D2 Analogue

Method of measurement

P

Potentiometer

Control unit

– None

C1 Closed-loop controller 1

Closed-loop controller attachment position

– Integrated

E External

Directional control valve

– None

V Integrated

-V- New

2019/05 – Subject to change 7� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Type codes

NB3 P – – – A – –

Standard

– Not according to standard

NB3 Based on ISO 15552

Connection type

– Standard

P Protected

P9 Cable connector

M12 Plug M12x1, A-coded

Connection type material

– Standard

B2 Brass, nickel-plated

Safety position

– Advancing

R Retracting

Additional function

– Standard

A Position feedback 4 … 20 mA

Tubing

– Standard

M Metal

Generation

– First generation

G2 Second generation

-V- New

Subject to change – 2019/058 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-NB3…

Overview of peripherals for DFPI based on ISO 15552

2
5
3

6
1

4
7

8

9

aJ

aA

aA

a

B

aC

aD

aF

9

aE

aG

aE

aH

aI

2
1
4
3

bJ

bA

bB

bC

bD

bE

bF

bG

Mounting components and accessories

Description � Page/Internet

1

Foot

mounting

HNC/CRHNC

For bearing or end caps 38

Foot mounting

HNG

For bearing or end caps, corresponds to MS1 to ISO 15552 38

2

Flange mounting

FNC/CR

FNG

For bearing or end caps 40

Flange mounting
FNG

For bearing or end cap, corresponds to MF1/MF2 to ISO 15552 40

3 Trunnion flange

ZNCF/CRZNG

For bearing or end caps 41

4 Trunnion support

LNZG/CRLNZG

For trunnion flange ZNCF/CRZNG 42

5

Swivel flange

SNC

For end caps

43

Swivel flange

SNG

For end caps 43

6

Clevis foot

LSNG

With spherical bearing 49

2019/05 – Subject to change 9� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-NB3…
Overview of peripherals for DFPI based on ISO 15552
Mounting components and accessories
Description � Page/Internet

7 Clevis foot

LSN

SG

Weld-on, with spherical bearing 49

8 Swivel flange

SNCS

With spherical bearing for end caps 45

9 Clevis foot

LBG

For swivel flange SNCS 49

aJ Swivel flange

SNCL

For end caps 46

Swivel flange

SNGL

For end caps, corresponds to MP2 to ISO 15552 46

aA Swivel flange

SNCB/SNCB-…-R3

For end caps 44

Swivel flange

SNGB

For end caps, corresponds to MP2 to ISO 15552 44

aB Clevis foot

LNG/CRLNG

For swivel flange SNCB 49

Clevis foot

LN/LNG

For swivel flange SNGB 49

aC Clevis foot

LSN

With spherical bearing 49

aD Right-angle clevis foot

LQG

For rod eye SGS 49

aE Rod eye

SGS/CR

SGS

With spherical bearing 50

aF Rod clevis

SGA

With male thread 50

aG Coupling piece

KSG

To compensate for radial deviations 50

aH Rod clevis

SG/

CRSG

Permits a swivel motion of the cylinder in one plane 50

aI Self-aligning rod coupler

FK/CR

FK

To compensate for radial and angular deviations 50

bJ Connecting cable

NHSB

For electrical and pneumatic connection of linear actuator DFPI-…-P-…

� 3-wire, for DFPI-…-E-P

� 5-wire, for DFPI-…-C1V-P-A

36

bA DADG-AK-F6-A2 Mounting bracket for mounting a positioner with interface according to VDI/VDE 3845 or mounting

with a hole spacing of 150 mm

47

bB Connecting cable

NEBU

For proximity sensor 52

bC

Proximity sensor

SMPO-1-H-B

For sensing the piston position 52

bD Mounting kit

SMBS

For proximity sensor SMPO-1-H-B 41 52

bE Proximity sensor

SMT-8M-A

Magnetoresistive, 5 … 30 V DC, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51

Proximity sensor

CRSMT-8

Magnetoresistive, corrosion-resistant, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51

Proximity sensor

SDBT

Magnetoresistive, NAMUR, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51

bF Mounting kit

SMBZ-8- …

For proximity sensor SME/SMT-8M, for piston diameter 100 51

bG Sensor bracket

DASP-M4- …

For proximity sensor SME/SMT-8M, for piston diameters 125, 160, 200, 250, 320 51

Subject to change – 2019/0510 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-… and DFPI-…-C1V-…

Overview of peripherals for DFPI based on DIN EN ISO 5210

2
43

5 6

1
2
7
Mounting components and accessories
Description � Page/Internet

1 Rod clevis

SG

Enables a simple connection between the piston rod and slide gate 50

Rod clevis, stainless

steel

CRSG
50

2 Rod eye

SGS
With spherical bearing 50

Rod eye, stainless steel

CRSGS

50

3 Rod clevis

SGA
With male thread 50

4 Self-aligning rod coupler

FK
To compensate for radial and angular deviations 50

5 Proximity sensor

SMT-8M-A
Magnetoresistive, 5 … 30 V DC, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51
Proximity sensor
CRSMT-8
Magnetoresistive, corrosion-resistant, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51
Proximity sensor
SDBT
Magnetoresistive, NAMUR, to EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX) 51

6 Slot cover

ABP-5-S

To protect the sensor cables and slots from contamination 51

7 Connecting cable

NHSB
For electrical and pneumatic connection of linear actuator DFPI-…-P-…
� 3-wire, for DFPI-…-E-P
� 5-wire, for DFPI-…-C1V-P-A
36

2019/05 – Subject to change 11� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…

Technical data

Function -N-

Piston diameter

100 … 320 mm

-T- Stroke
40 … 990 mm

-O- Force
4417 … 46385 N

General technical data

Stroke [mm] 40 … 990

Mode of operation Double-acting

Based on standard ISO 15552

Cushioning No cushioning

Mounting position Any

Design

Piston

Piston rod

Tie rod

Cylinder barrel

Position sensing With integrated

displacement encoder

Measuring principle of displacement

encoder
Potentiometer

Pneumatic connection

DFPI-… -E-NB3P… With specific accessories, for tubing O.D. of 8 mm

DFPI-…-E-NB3M12B2 G3/8

DFPI-…-E-NB3P9B2 G3/8

Electrical connection

DFPI-… -E-NB3P… With specific accessories, 3-pin, straight plug, screw terminal

DFPI-…-E-NB3M12B2 M12x1, 5-pin, straight plug, A-coded

DFPI-…-E-NB3P9B2 Cable connector M16x1.5, 3-pin, straight plug, screw terminal

General electrical data

Operating voltage range [V DC] 0 … 15

Resistance value of displacement encoder (on the TET) dependent on the stroke length1)

 290 mm [kΩ] 5

 290 … 590 mm [kΩ] 10

 590 … 990 mm [kΩ] 20

Displacement encoder

Recommended loop

current

[μA]  0.1

Max. short-time loop

current

[mA] 10

Independent linearity [%] ±0.04

Repetition accuracy [mm] ±0.12

Hysteresis [mm] 0.33

1) TET = theoretical electrical travel

Subject to change – 2019/0512 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data

Operating and environmental conditions

Operating pressure [bar] 3 … 8

Nominal operating pressure [bar] 6

Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]

Note on operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (in which case lubricated operation will always be required)

Storage temperature [°C] –20 … +80

Ambient temperature [°C] –20 … +80

Relative humidity [%] 5 … 100, condensing

Degree of protection IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA 4

Vibration resistance in accordance

with

DIN/IEC 68, Part 2-6

Tested to severity level 2

Continuous shock resistance in

accordance with DIN/IEC 68, Part 2-82

Tested to severity level 2

CE marking (see declaration of

conformity)1)

To EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX)

1) Additional information www.festo.com/sp � Certificates.

ATEX

ATEX category for gas II 2G

Type of ignition protection for gas c T4

ATEX category for dust II 2D

Type of ignition protection for dust c 120°C

Explosion-proof ambient temperature

rating

–20 °C <= Ta <= +60 °C

Forces [N] and impact energy [J]

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Theoretical force at 6 bar, advancing 4712 7363 12064 18850 29452 48255

Theoretical force at 6 bar, retracting 4417 6881 11581 18080 28274 46385

Max. impact energy in the end positions 1.3 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.9 2.4

vperm.�

�

2�x�Eperm.

m
Intrinsic

� �� m
Load

�

mLoad� �
2�x�Eperm.

v2
� ��mIntrinsicMaximum permissible load:

Permissible impact velocity:
vperm. Permissible impact velocity

Eperm. Maximum impact energy

mIntrinsic Moving mass (actuator)

mLoad Moving payload

Air consumption [l]

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Air consumption, advancing,

per 10 mm

stroke

0.549 0.859 1.407 2.119 3.436 5.63

Air consumption, retracting,

per

1

0 mm stroke

0.515 0.803 1.351 2.111 3.299 5.412

2019/05 – Subject to change 13� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data

Weights

[g]

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Basic weight

with 0 mm stroke

4900 7500 12800 18100 31100 57700

Additional weight

per 10 mm stroke

90 134 200 238 358 582

Moving mass

at 0 mm stroke

1060 1900 3700 4800 9300 16500

Additional moving mass

per 10 mm stroke

28 53 89 89 134 227

Materials

Sectional view

Piston
diameter

1 Piston rod 100 … 320

High-alloy stainless steel

2 Bottom cover 100 … 320 Coated die-cast aluminium

3 Cylinder barrel 100 … 320 Smooth anodised

wrought aluminium alloy

4 End cap 100 … 320 Coated wrought aluminium alloy

– Tie rod 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

– Screws 100 … 320 Coated steel

High-alloy stainless steel

– Piston rod wiper seal 100 TPE-U (PU)

125 … 320 NBR

– M12 plug DFPI­…­E­NB3M12B2 100 … 320 Brass, nickel-plated

– Cable connector DFPI­…­E­NB3P9B2 100 … 320 Brass, nickel-plated

– Air duct for characteristic value M 100 … 320 Stainless steel pipe or plastic tubing

– Static seals 100 … 320 NBR

– Note on materials 100 … 320

RoHS-compliant

Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment

substances)

Max. lateral force as a function of stroke length l

The maximum lateral force (horizontal/vertical) applies to the static application.

In closed-loop operation, the maximum lateral force needs to be adjusted to the

type of control. If necessary, the piston rod must be guided to avoid system

vibration.

Horizontal lateral force Vertical lateral force

Ø 100

Ø 125

Ø 160, 200

Ø 250

Ø 320

Ø 100
Ø 125
Ø 160, 200
Ø 250
Ø 320

1 2 3 4

Subject to change – 2019/0514 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data

Dimensions Download CAD data �

www.festo.com

Piston diameters 100, 125

1 Supply port – tubing 8 mm

+ = plus stroke length

Piston
diameter

[mm]

A

–0.5

B



BA



d11

BG E E1 EA EB G J KK

L1

DFPI-100 40 55 55 17 110 120 155 146 48
48

M20x1.5 179

DFPI-125 54 60 60 20 136 145 180 173 44.7 M27x2 200

Piston
diameter
[mm]

L2 MM



PL RT TG U1 VD VA

–1

WH

ZJ ß1 ß2 ß3

DFPI-100 38 25
26

M10 89 12 19.2 4 51±1.8 229.7 22
4

6

DFPI-125 45.5 32 M12 110 22 20.5 6 65±2.2 264.7 27 8

2019/05 – Subject to change 15� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Piston diameters 160, 200, 250, 320

1 Supply port – tubing 8 mm
+ = plus stroke length
Piston
diameter
[mm]
A
–0.5
B

BA

d11
BG E E1 EA EB G J KK L1

DFPI-160
72

65 65
24

186 186 221 212 51
46 M36x2

219

DFPI-200 75 75 230 230 265 256 47.2 225

DFPI-250 84 90 90 25 284 270 312 312 52 51.5 M42x2 254

DFPI-320 96 110 110 28 347 342 378.5 379 56 58 M48x2 281.2

Piston
diameter
[mm]
L2 MM

PL RT TG U1 VD VA
–1

WH

±2.2

ZJ ß1 ß2 ß3

DFPI-160 60
40 23 M

16

140 13
7.5 6

80 298.6
36

4

24
DFPI-200 70 175 32 95 320

DFPI-250 80 50 29.5 M20 220 47 13.7
10

105 359 46 42

DFPI-320 90 63 36 M24 270 62 10.7 120 401.2 55 50

Subject to change – 2019/0516 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Variants DFPI-…-E-NB3P9B2-… and DFPI-…-E-NB3M12B2…

1 DFPI-…-P9B2-…: electrical connection: cable connector M16x1.5, 3-pin, straight plug, screw terminal

DFPI-…-M12B2-…: electrical connection: M12x1, 5-pin, straight plug, A-coded

2 Pneumatic connection: G3/8

View A

A

Type E1 EA EB PL U1 W1 W2 W3 W4 ß 2

DFPI-100- …-P9
110 157

183.5

16
4

23 17 16 20 4

DFPI-100- …-M12 170

DFPI-125- …-P9
136 183

209.5
6

DFPI-125- …-M12 196

DFPI-160-…-P9
186 231

275.5

14 2
DFPI-160-…-M12 244

DFPI-200- …-P9
230 272

298.5

DFPI-200- …-M12

285

DFPI-250- …-P9
270 322.6

349.1
19.5

11
DFPI-250- …-M12 335.6

DFPI-320- …-P9
340 393.5

420
26

DFPI-320- …-M12 406.5

Ordering data

Piston diameter

Part no. Type

[mm]

� Linear actuators with integrated

displacement encoder

� Based on ISO 15552

100 2185733 DFPI-100- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

125 2207685 DFPI-125- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

160 2208573 DFPI-160- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

200 2209613 DFPI-200- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

250 2210666 DFPI-250- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

320 2186271 DFPI-320- … -ND2P-E-NB3P

2019/05 – Subject to change 17� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…

Technical data

Function -N- Piston diameter
100 … 320 mm

-T- Stroke
40 … 990 mm
-O- Force
4417 … 46385 N
General technical data
Stroke [mm] 40 … 990
Mode of operation Double-acting
Based on standard ISO 15552
Cushioning No cushioning
Mounting position Any

Design Piston

Piston rod
Tie rod
Cylinder barrel

Position sensing With integrated displacement encoder

Measuring principle of displacement
encoder
Potentiometer

Pneumatic connection With specific accessories

For tubing O.D. 8 mm

For tubing O.D. 10 mm

Electrical connection With specific accessories

5-pin

Straight plug

Screw terminal

General electrical data

Operating voltage range [V DC] 21.6 … 26.4

Nominal operating voltage [V DC] 24

Setpoint input [mA] 4 … 20

Analogue output [mA] 4 … 20

Accuracy of analogue output [%FS] 1

Max. current consumption [mA] 220

Reverse polarity protection For operating voltage

For setpoint value

Initialisation connection

Positioning accuracy [%FS] 1

Repetition accuracy [%FS] ±1

Size of dead space [%FS] 1

Hysteresis [%FS] ±1

Subject to change – 2019/0518 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
Operating and environmental conditions
Operating pressure [bar] 3 … 8
Nominal operating pressure [bar] 6
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]
Note on operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (in which case lubricated operation will always be required)

Temperature of medium [°C] –5 … +40

Ambient temperature [°C] –5 … +50

Storage temperature [°C] –5 … +50

Relative humidity [%] 5 … 100, condensing
Degree of protection IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA 4

Vibration resistance in accordance with

DIN/IEC 68, Part 2-6
Tested to severity level 2
Continuous shock resistance in
accordance with DIN/IEC 68, Part 2-82
Tested to severity level 2

Certification RCM compliance mark

CE marking (see declaration of

conformity)1)
To EU EMC Directive

To EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX)
1) Additional information www.festo.com/sp � Certificates.
ATEX

ATEX category for gas II 3G

Type of ignition protection for gas Ex nA IIC T4 Gc

ATEX category for dust II 3D

Type of ignition protection for dust Ex tc IIIC T120°C Dc

Explosion-proof ambient temperature
rating

–5°C <= Ta <= +50°C

2019/05 – Subject to change 19� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data

Forces [N]

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Theoretical force at 6 bar, advancing 4712 7363 12064 18850 29452 48255
Theoretical force at 6 bar, retracting 4417 6881 11581 18080 28274 46385
mLoad� �
2�x�Eperm.
v2
� ��mIntrinsicMaximum permissible load:
mIntrinsic Moving mass (actuator)
mLoad Moving payload
Air consumption [l]
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Air consumption, advancing,
per 10 mm stroke

0.549 0.859 1.407 2.199 3.436 5.63

Air consumption, retracting,
per 10 mm stroke

0.515 0.803 1.351 2.111 3.299 5.412

Weights [g]
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Basic weight with 0 mm stroke 5280 7950 14330 20410 35370 57550

Additional weight per 10 mm stroke 90 134 200 238 358 582

Moving mass with 0 mm stroke 1060 1900 3700 4800 9300 16500

Additional moving mass per 10 mm

stroke
28 53 89 89 134 227

Subject to change – 2019/0520 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
Materials
Sectional view
Piston
diameter

1 Piston rod 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

2 Bottom cover 100 … 320 Coated die-cast aluminium
3 Cylinder barrel 100 … 320 Smooth anodised wrought aluminium alloy
4 End cap 100 … 320 Coated wrought aluminium alloy

– Tie rod 100 … 200 High-alloy stainless steel

– Screws 100 … 320 Coated steel
High-alloy stainless steel
– Piston rod wiper seal 100 TPE-U (PU)
125 … 320 NBR
– Static seals 100 … 320 NBR
– Note on materials 100 … 320 RoHS-compliant
Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment
substances)
Max. lateral force as a function of stroke length l
The maximum lateral force (horizontal/vertical) applies to the static application.
In closed-loop operation, the maximum lateral force needs to be adjusted to the
type of control. If necessary, the piston rod must be guided to avoid system
vibration.
Horizontal lateral force Vertical lateral force
Ø 100
Ø 125
Ø 160, 200
Ø 250
Ø 320
Ø 100
Ø 125
Ø 160, 200
Ø 250
Ø 320
1 2 3 4

2019/05 – Subject to change 21� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com
Piston diameters 100, 125
1 Supply port – tubing 8 mm

2 Exhaust air – tubing 10 mm

+ = plus stroke length
Piston
diameter
[mm]
A
–0.5
B

BA

d11
BG E E1 EA EB G J KK L1

DFPI-100 40 55 55 17 110 120 155 146 48
44

M20x1.5 258.9

DFPI-125 54 60 60 20 136 145 180 173 44.7 M27x2 254.4

Piston
diameter
[mm]
L2 MM

PL RT TG U1 VD VA
–1

WH ZJ ß1 ß2 ß3

DFPI-100 38 25
22

M10 89 12 19.2 4 51±1.8 309.9 22
4

6

DFPI-125 45.5 32 M12 110 2 20.5 6 65±2.2 319.4 27 8

Subject to change – 2019/0522 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com
Piston diameters 160, 200, 250, 320
1 Supply port – tubing 8 mm
2 Exhaust air – tubing 10 mm
+ = plus stroke length
Piston
diameter
[mm]
A
–0.5
B

BA

d11
BG E E1 EA EB G J KK L1
DFPI-160
72
65 65
24
186 186 221 212 51
46 M36x2

291.8

DFPI-200 75 75 230 230 265 256 47.2 297

DFPI-250 84 90 90 25 284 270 312 312 52 48.5 M42x2 324.4

DFPI-320 96 110 110 28 347 342 378.5 379 56 46 M48x2 351.4

Piston
diameter
[mm]
L2 MM

PL RT TG U1 VD VA
–1
WH
±2.2
ZJ ß1 ß2 ß3

DFPI-160 60
40

22
M16

140 12
7.5 6

80 371.8
36

4

24
DFPI-200 70 175 32 95 392

DFPI-250 80 50 M20 220 22 13.7
10

105 429.2 46 42

DFPI-320 90 63 22.5 M24 270 52 10.7 120 471.4 55 50

2019/05 – Subject to change 23� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
Ordering data
Piston diameter
[mm]
Part no. Type

Safety position advancing

� Linear actuators with integrated
positioner
� Based on ISO 15552

100 2184841 DFPI-100-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

125 2180905 DFPI-125-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

160 2201101 DFPI-160-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

200 2206373 DFPI-200-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

250 2200311 DFPI-250-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

320 2185309 DFPI-320-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-A

Safety position retracting

� Linear actuators with integrated
positioner
� Based on ISO 15552

100 4588304 DFPI-100-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

125 4588636 DFPI-125-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

160 4588972 DFPI-160-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

200 4587974 DFPI-200-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

250 4591209 DFPI-250-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

320 4591205 DFPI-320-…-ND2P-C1V-NB3P-R-A

Subject to change – 2019/0524 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2

Technical data

Function -N- Piston diameter
100 … 320 mm
-T- Stroke
40 … 990 mm

-O- Force
4417 … 48255 N

General technical data
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Stroke [mm] 40 … 990

Stroke reserve [mm] 3 4

Mode of operation Double-acting

Connection to process valve to standard DIN EN ISO 5210

Flange hole pattern F07 F10 F10, F14

Cushioning No cushioning
Mounting position Any
Design Piston
Piston rod

Profile barrel Tie rod, cylinder barrel

Position sensing With integrated displacement encoder
Measuring principle of displacement
encoder
Potentiometer
Pneumatic connection With specific accessories

For tubing O.D. of 8 mm

Electrical connection With specific accessories

3-pin

Straight plug
Screw terminal
General electrical data
Operating voltage range [V DC] 0 … 15
Resistance value of displacement encoder (on the TET) dependent on the stroke length1)
 290 mm [kΩ] 5
 290 … 590 mm [kΩ] 10
 590 … 990 mm [kΩ] 20
Displacement encoder
Recommended loop
current
[μA]  0.1
Max. short-time loop
current
[mA] 10
Independent linearity [%] ±0.04
Repetition accuracy [mm] ±0.12
Hysteresis [mm] 0.33
1) TET = theoretical electrical travel

2019/05 – Subject to change 25� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data
Operating and environmental conditions
Operating pressure [bar] 3 … 8
Nominal operating pressure [bar] 6
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]
Note on operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (in which case lubricated operation will always be required)

Ambient temperature [°C] –20 … +60

Storage temperature [°C] –20 … +60

Relative humidity [%] 5 … 100, condensing
Degree of protection IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA 4

Continuous shock resistance to

DIN/IEC 68 Part 2-82

Tested to severity level 2

Vibration resistance to

DIN/IEC 68 Part 2-6

Tested to severity level 2

CE marking (see declaration

of conformity)1)
To EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX)

1) Additional information www.festo.com/sp � Certificates.
ATEX
ATEX category for gas II 2G

Type of ignition protection for gas c T4 X

ATEX category for dust II 2D

Type of ignition protection for dust c 120°C X

Explosion-proof ambient temperature
rating
–20 °C <= Ta <= +60 °C

Subject to change – 2019/0526 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data

Forces [N] and air consumption [l]

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Theoretical force at 6 bar, advancing 4712 7363 12064 18850 29452 48255

Theoretical force at 6 bar, retracting 4417 6881 11581 18080 28698 47501

Air consumption, advancing,
per 10 mm stroke

0.5498 0.859 1.4074 2.119 3.4361 5.6297

Air consumption, retracting,
per 10 mm stroke

0.5153 0.8027 1.3511 2.111 3.3482 5.5418

Weights

Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Basic weight with 0 mm stroke [g] 3476 5530 6529 13946 22569 35359

Additional moving mass per

10 mm stroke

[g] 27 52 52 87 87 87

Moving mass with

0 mm stroke

[g] 1228 1944 2250 4722 7059 11417

Additional weight per 10 mm

stroke

[g] 80 145 159 187 325 399

Additional weight of displace­

ment encoder per 10 mm

[g] 2

Materials
Sectional view
Piston diameter
1 Piston rod 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

2 Bottom cover 100, 125, 250, 320 Anodised wrought aluminium alloy

160, 200 Coated die-cast aluminium

3 Cylinder barrel 100 … 200 Smooth anodised wrought aluminium alloy

250 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

4 End cap 100, 125, 250, 320 Anodised wrought aluminium alloy

160, 200 Coated die-cast aluminium

– Tie rod 200 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

– Screws 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

– Piston rod wiper seal 100 TPE­U (PU)

125 … 320 NBR
– Static seals 100 … 320 NBR
– Note on materials 100 … 320 RoHS-compliant
Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment
substances)
1 2 3 4

2019/05 – Subject to change 27� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Piston diameter 100 … 160

1 Sealing plug

+ = plus stroke length
Piston
diameter
[mm]

AM

–2

D1



D2



D3



D4

D5



H1 KK L1+

DFPI-100 32 109 119 70 M8 25 131 M16x1.5 118.5

DFPI-125
54

135 147
102 M10 32

163
M27x2

119

DFPI-160 170 182 199 126.5

Piston
diameter
[mm]

L5 L8 L9 W1 W2 WH ZB+ ß1

DFPI-100 15 48.8 1 45° 90° 16 134.5 22

DFPI-125
18 48.8 – 45° 90° 24

143
27

DFPI-160 150.5

Subject to change – 2019/0528 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Piston diameter 200 … 320

1 Sealing plug
+ = plus stroke length
Piston
diameter
[mm]
AM
–2

B1 B2 B3 D1


D2

D3

D4 D5


D6 D7



min.

H1

H2

DFPI-200 72 63 25.6 6.5 216 140 102 M10 40 M16 210 270 232

DFPI-250
72

82
25.6 6.5

260
140 102 M10 40 M16

254 308 268

DFPI-320 126 332 325 378 338

Piston
diameter
[mm]

KK L1+ L5 L6

min.

L8 L9 WH W1 W2 W3 ZB+ ß1

DFPI-200 M36x2 152.5 20 24 48.8 10 30 45 90 30 182.5 36

DFPI-250
M36x2

152.2
20

25
48.8 25 30 45 90 30

182.2
36

DFPI-320 160 24 190

2019/05 – Subject to change 29� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data
Ordering data

Piston diameter Part no. Type

[mm]
� Linear actuators with integrated
displacement encoder

� Based on DIN EN ISO 5210

100 1808236 DFPI-100-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

125 1808239 DFPI-125-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

160 1808242 DFPI-160-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

200 1808245 DFPI-200-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

250 1808253 DFPI-250-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

320 1808263 DFPI-320-…-ND2P-E-P-G2

-H- Note
Stroke length of the actuator

The stroke length of the actuator

should generally at least correspond

to the nominal diameter of the

process valve so that the process

valve can be fully opened and closed.

The

system tolerances can lead to a

greater stroke range than the

specified nominal stroke range of the

linear actuator. The adjustable rod

clevis enables adjustment of the

system.

Subject to change – 2019/0530 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…

Technical data

Function -N- Piston diameter
100 … 320 mm
-T- Stroke
40 … 990 mm
-O- Force
4417 … 48255 N
General technical data
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Stroke [mm] 40 … 990
Stroke reserve [mm] 3 4
Mode of operation Double-acting
Connection to process valve to standard DIN EN ISO 5210
Flange hole pattern F07 F10 F10, F14
Cushioning No cushioning
Mounting position Any
Design Piston
Piston rod
Profile barrel Tie rod, cylinder barrel
Position sensing With integrated displacement encoder
Measuring principle of displacement
encoder
Potentiometer
Pneumatic connection

DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-A G1/4

DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A With specific accessories, for tubing O.D. of 8 mm and 10 mm

Electrical connection
5-pin
Straight plug
Screw terminal
DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-A G1/4
DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A With specific accessories, for tubing O.D. of 8 mm and 10 mm
General electrical data
Operating voltage range [V DC] 21.6 … 26.4
Nominal operating voltage [V DC] 24
Setpoint input [mA] 4 … 20
Analogue output [mA] 4 … 20
Accuracy of analogue output [%FS] 1
Max. current consumption [mA] 220
Reverse polarity protection For operating voltage
For setpoint value
Initialisation connection

Positioning accuracy [%FS] 1

Repetition accuracy [%FS] ±1
Size of dead space [%FS] 1
Hysteresis [%FS] ±1

2019/05 – Subject to change 31� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
Operating and environmental conditions
Operating pressure [bar] 3 … 8
Nominal operating pressure [bar] 6
Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]
Note on operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible (in which case lubricated operation will always be required)
Temperature of medium [°C] –5 … +40
Storage temperature [°C] –5 … +50
Ambient temperature [°C] –5 … +50
Relative humidity [%] 5 … 100, condensing
Degree of protection IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA 4
Continuous shock resistance to
DIN/IEC 68 Part 2-82
Tested to severity level 2
Vibration resistance to
DIN/IEC 68 Part 2-6
Tested to severity level 2
Certification RCM compliance mark
CE marking (see declaration

of conformity)1)
To EU EMC Directive2)

To EU Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX)
1) Additional information www.festo.com/sp � Certificates.

2) For information about the applicability of the component see the manufacturer’s EC declaration of conformity at: www.festo.com/sp � User documentation.

If the component is subject to restrictions on usage in residential, office or commercial environments or small businesses, further measures to reduce the emitted interference may be necessary.

ATEX
ATEX category for gas II 3G

Type of ignition protection for gas Ex nA IIC T4 X Gc

ATEX category for dust II 3D

Type of ignition protection for dust Ex tc IIIC T120°C X Dc

Explosion-proof ambient temperature
rating

–5°C <= Ta <= +50°C

Forces [N] and air consumption [l]
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320
Theoretical force at 6 bar, advancing 4712 7363 12064 18850 29452 48255
Theoretical force at 6 bar, retracting 4417 6881 11581 18080 28698 47501
Air consumption, retracting,
per 10 mm stroke
0.5153 0.8027 1.3511 2.111 3.3482 5.5418

Air consumption, advancing,

per 10 mm stroke
0.5498 0.859 1.4074 2.119 3.4361 5.6297

Subject to change – 2019/0532 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
Weights
Piston diameter 100 125 160 200 250 320

Basic weight with 0 mm stroke

DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-A [g] 4671 7693 9099 18358 29956 45200

DFPI-…-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A [g] 5237 8259 9665 18924 30522 45766

Moving mass
with 0 mm stroke
[g] 1228 1944 2250 4722 7059 11417
Additional weight
per 10 mm stroke
[g] 80 145 159 187 325 399

Additional weight of moving

mass per 10 mm stroke

[g] 27 52 87

Additional weight of displace­
ment encoder per 10 mm
[g] 2
Materials
Sectional view
Piston diameter
1 Piston rod 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel
2 Bottom cover 100, 125, 250, 320 Anodised wrought aluminium alloy
160, 200 Coated die-cast aluminium
3 Cylinder barrel 100 … 200 Smooth anodised wrought aluminium alloy
250 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel

4 End cap 100 … 320 Anodised wrought aluminium alloy

– Tie rod 200 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel
– Screws 100 … 320 High-alloy stainless steel
– Piston rod wiper seal 100 TPE-U (PU)
125 … 320 NBR
– Static seals 100 … 320 NBR
– Note on materials 100 … 320 RoHS-compliant
Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment
substances)
1 2 3 4

2019/05 – Subject to change 33� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com
Piston diameter 100 … 160
1 Sealing plug
+ = plus stroke length

DFPI- … -ND2P-C1V-P-A

DFPI- … -ND2P-C1V-AShown without adhesive seals

Piston diameter
[mm]
AM
–2

B1 D1


D2

D3

D4 D5


D6



H1

±2

H2

DFPI-100- … -C1V-A 32 131 109 G1/4 70 M8 25 119 79 18.3

DFPI-125- … -C1V-A
54

163 135
G1/4 102 M10 32

147
79 18.3

DFPI-160- … -C1V-A 199 170 182

Piston diameter
[mm]

H3 KK L1+ L5 L8 L9 WH ZB+ ß1

DFPI-100- … -C1V-A 21.2 M16x1.5 218.5 15 28.8 1 16 234.5 22

DFPI-125- … -C1V-A
21.2 M27x2

221
18 28.8 – 24

245
27

DFPI-160- … -C1V-A 227.5 251.5

Piston diameter
[mm]
AM
–2
B1 D1

D2

D3

D4 D5

D6


H1 H2

DFPI-100- … -C1V-P-A 32 131 109 G1/4 70 M8 25 119 – 18.3

DFPI-125- … -C1V-P-A
54

163 135
G1/4 102 M10 32

147
– 18.3

DFPI-160- … -C1V-P-A 199 170 182

Piston diameter
[mm]
H3 KK L1+ L5 L8 L9 WH ZB+ ß1

DFPI-100- … -C1V-P-A 21.2 M16x1.5 218.5 15 48.8 1 16 234.5 22

DFPI-125- … -C1V-P-A
21.2 M27x2

221
18 48.8 – 24

245
27

DFPI-160- … -C1V-P-A 227.5 251.5

Subject to change – 2019/0534 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com
Piston diameter 200 … 320

DFPI- … -ND2P-C1V-A

DFPI- … -ND2P-C1V-P-A
1 Sealing plug
+ = plus stroke length
Piston diameter
[mm]
AM
–2

B1 B2 B3 B4 D1



D2 D3


D4 D5

D6 D7

min.

D8


H1
±2
H2

DFPI-200- … -C1V-A 72 270 232 24.5 6.5 216 G1/4 102 M10 40 M16 210 140 79 18.3

DFPI-250- … -C1V-A
72

308 268
24.5 6.5

260
G1/4 102 M10 40 M16

254
140 79 18.3

DFPI-320- … -C1V-A 378 338 332 325

Piston diameter
[mm]

H3

H4 KK L1+ L5 L6

min.

L8 L9 ß1 WH W1 W2 W3 ZB+

DFPI-200- … -C1V-A 21.2 63 M36x2 255.5 20 24 28.8 10 36 30 45° 90° 30° 285.5

DFPI-250- … -C1V-A
21.2

82
M36x2

255
20 25 28.8

25
36 30 45° 90° 30°

285

DFPI-320- … -C1V-A 126 262 – 292

Piston diameter
[mm]
AM
–2
B1 B2 B3 B4 D1

D2 D3

D4 D5

D6 D7

min.
D8


H2 H3

DFPI-200- … -C1V-P-A 72 270 232 24.5 6.5 216 G1/4 102 M10 40 M16 210 140 18.3 21.2

DFPI-250- … -C1V-P-A
72

308 268
24.5 6.5
260
G1/4 102 M10 40 M16

254
140 18.3 21.2

DFPI-320- … -C1V-P-A 378 338 332 325

Piston diameter
[mm]
H4 KK L1+ L5 L6
min.
L8 L9 ß1 WH W1 W2 W3 ZB+

DFPI-200- … -C1V-P-A 63 M36x2 255.5 20 24 48.8 10 36 30 45° 90° 30° 285.5

DFPI-250- … -C1V-P-A 82
M36x2

255
20 25 48.8

25
36 30 45° 90° 30°
285

DFPI-320- … -C1V-P-A 126 262 – 292

2019/05 – Subject to change 35� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
Ordering data
Piston diameter Part no. Type
[mm]
� Linear actuators with integrated
positioner
� Based on DIN EN ISO 5210

100 1548004 DFPI-100-…-ND2P-C1V-A

125 1548020 DFPI-125-…-ND2P-C1V-A

160 1548026 DFPI-160-…-ND2P-C1V-A

200 1548030 DFPI-200-…-ND2P-C1V-A

250 1548037 DFPI-250-…-ND2P-C1V-A

320 1548041 DFPI-320-…-ND2P-C1V-A

Variant with protected pneumatic and electrical connections

� Linear actuators with integrated
positioner
� Based on DIN EN ISO 5210

100 1548005 DFPI-100-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

125 1548021 DFPI-125-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

160 1548028 DFPI-160-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

200 1548032 DFPI-200-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

250 1548039 DFPI-250-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

320 1548044 DFPI-320-…-ND2P-C1V-P-A

-H- Note
Stroke length of the actuator

The stroke length of the actu­

ator should generally at least

correspond to the nominal dia­

meter of the process valve so

that the process valve can be

fully opened and closed. The

system tolerances can lead to a
greater stroke range than the

specified nominal stroke range

of the linear actuator. During

initialisation, the integrated

positioner learns the stroke

length used and ensures that

the slide gate moves to the re­

quired positions in a controlled

way – at most to the end

positions learned during

initialisation.

Subject to change – 2019/0536 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Connecting cable NHSB � Pre-assembled connecting cable

� Suitable for linear actuators

DFPI-…-E-P-… and DFPI-…-C1V-P-…

� Cable lengths 5, 10 and 15 m

General technical data

Connecting cable [mm²] 3x 0.75 5x 0.75

Mounting position Any

Electrical connection 1 Straight plug connector, 3-pin Straight plug, 5-pin

Electrical connection 2 Open end, 3-wire Open end,

5-wire

Min. cable bending radius [mm] 100

Pneumatic connection For tubing O.D. 8 mm

– For tubing O.D. 10 mm

Operating and environmental conditions
Ambient temperature [°C] –20 … +60

Ambient temperature with

flexible cable installation

[°C] –5 … +60

Operating voltage range [V DC] 0 … 30

Operating medium Compressed air to ISO 8573-1:2010 [7:4:4]

Note on operating/pilot medium Lubricated operation possible

Degree of protection IP65, IP67, IP69K, NEMA 4
Relative humidity [%] 5 … 100, condensing
Materials

Protective conduit PA

Protective conduit fitting PA

Cable sheath PVC

Seals TPE

Note on materials RoHS-compliant

Operating pressure [bar] as a function of operating temperature [°C]

NHSB-A1-…

2019/05 – Subject to change 37� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

3-wire

1 Tubing for exhaust

2 Tubing for pressurisation

Type D1 D2


D3


D4


D5

L1

±25

L2

±25

L3 ß 1 ß 2 ß 3

NHSB-A1-0.6-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2xBB

M32x1.5 37 28.5 8 8

1400 600

82 36 34 41
NHSB-A1-5-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2xBB

6100 5000

NHSB-A1-10-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2xBB 11100 10000

NHSB-A1-15-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2xBB 16100 15000

Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com
5-wire
1 Tubing for exhaust
2 Tubing for pressurisation
Type D1 D2

D3

D4

D5

L1
±25
L2
±25
L3 ß 1 ß 2 ß 3

NHSB-A1-5-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2xBB

M32x1.5 37 28.5 10 8

6100 5000

82 36 34 41NHSB-A1-10-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2xBB 11100 10000

NHSB-A1-15-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2xBB 16100 15000

Ordering data – Connecting cable Technical data � Internet: nhsb

Electrical

connection 1

Electrical

connection 2

Length Cable

composition

Weight Part no. Type

[m] [mm²] [g]

3-wire, for DFPI- … -E-P-…

Straight plug,

3-pin

Open end, 3-wire 0.6 3x 0.75 280 3673475 NHSB-A1-0,6-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2XBB

5 1250 1686608 NHSB-A1-5-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2XBB

10 2500 1686609 NHSB-A1-10-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2XBB

15 3750 1686610 NHSB-A1-15-BLG3-LE3-PU8-2XBB

5-wire, for DFPI- … -C1V-P-…

Straight plug,
5-pin

Open end, 5-wire 5 5x 0.75 1250 1585793 NHSB-A1-5-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2XBB

10 2500 1585794 NHSB-A1-10-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2XBB

15 3750 1585795 NHSB-A1-15-BLG5-LE5-PU8-2XBB

Subject to change – 2019/0538 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Foot mounting HNC/CRHNC

Material:

HNC:

Galvanised steel

CRHNC:

High-alloy steel

Free of copper and PTFE

+ = plus stroke length

Dimensions

For  AB



AH AO AT AU SA TR US XA XS

[mm]

100 14.5 71 17.5 6 41 261 75 110 270.7 86

125 16.5 90 22 8 45 290 90 131 309.7 102

Ordering data

For  Basic design High corrosion protection

[mm]

CRC1) Weight

[g]

Part no. Type2) CRC1) Weight

[g]

Part no. Type2)

100 2 1009 174374 HNC-100 4 990 176942 CRHNC-100

125 2 1902 174375 HNC-125 4 1920 176943 CRHNC-125

1)

Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070

Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­

sphere typical for industrial applications.

Corrosion resistance class CRC 4 to Festo standard FN 940070

Particularly high corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under extreme corrosive conditions. Parts exposed to aggressive media, for instance in the chemical or food industries. These applications may need to be suppor­

ted by special tests (� also FN 940082) using appropriate media.

2) Suitable for ATEX

Foot mounting HNG

Material:
Galvanised steel
Free of copper and PTFE
+ = plus stroke length

Dimensions and ordering data

For  AB


AH AO AT AU SA TR US XA XS CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] [g]

160 18.5 115 20 10 60 339 115 169 358.6 130 2 3931 34476 HNG-160

200 24 135 30 12 70 365 135 214 390 153 2 6896 34477 HNG-200

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070

Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­

sphere typical for industrial applications.

2019/05 – Subject to change 39� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories
Foot mounting HNG
Material:
Galvanised steel
Free of copper and PTFE
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data
For  AB


AH AO AT AU D1



SA T1 TR US XA XS CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] [g]

250 28 165 35 20 75 – 404 – 165 270 434 160 2 17084 157510 HNG-250

320 35 200 40 25 85 60 451.2 23 200 340 486.2 180 2 29968 157511 HNG-320

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.

Subject to change – 2019/0540 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Flange mounting FNC/CRFNG

Material:

FNC: Galvanised steel

CRFNG: High-alloy steel

Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions

For  E FB



MF R TF UF W ZF

[mm]

100 110 14 16 75 150 175 35 245.7

125 132 16 20 90 180 210 45 284.7

Ordering data
For  Basic design High corrosion protection
[mm]
CRC1) Weight
[g]
Part no. Type2) CRC1) Weight
[g]
Part no. Type2)

100 1 2041 174381 FNC-100 4 2054 161851 CRFNG-100

125 1 3775 174382 FNC-125 4 3787 185363 CRFNG-125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070

Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive

trunnions).

Corrosion resistance class CRC 4 to Festo standard FN 940070
Particularly high corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under extreme corrosive conditions. Parts exposed to aggressive media, for instance in the chemical or food industries. These applications may need to be suppor­
ted by special tests (� also FN 940082) using appropriate media.

2) Suitable for ATEX

Flange mounting FNG

Material:

Painted spheroidal graphite cast iron

Free of copper and PTFE
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data
For  E FB


MF R TF UF W ZF CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] [g]

160 180 18 20 115 230 280 60 318.6 1 3550 34478 FNG-160

200 220 22 25 135 270 320 70 345 1 5321 34479 FNG-200

250 270 26 25 165 330 390 80 384 1 8657 157508 FNG-250

320 340 33 30 200 400 470 90 431.2 1 15109 157509 FNG-320

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070
Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive

trunnions).

2019/05 – Subject to change 41� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Trunnion flange ZNCF/CRZNG

Material:

ZNCF: Stainless steel

casting

CRZNG: Electropolished stainless steel

casting
Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions

For  C2 C3 TD



TL TM US XL

[mm] e9

100 164 189
25 24.5

132 110 248.7

125 192 217 160 131 289.7

Ordering data
For  Basic design High corrosion protection
[mm]
CRC1) Weight
[g]
Part no. Type2) CRC1) Weight
[g]
Part no. Type2)

100 2 2254 174416 ZNCF-100 4 2254 161857 CRZNG-100

125 2 3484 174417 ZNCF-125 4 3484 185362 CRZNG-125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.
Corrosion resistance class CRC 4 to Festo standard FN 940070
Particularly high corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under extreme corrosive conditions. Parts exposed to aggressive media, for instance in the chemical or food industries. These applications may need to be suppor­
ted by special tests (� also FN 940082) using appropriate media.
2) Suitable for ATEX

Subject to change – 2019/0542 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Trunnion support LNZG

Mounting material:

Diameter 100, 125: Anodised

wrought aluminium alloy

Diameter 160 … 320: Galvanised

steel

Material of bearing:

Diameter 100 … 200: Plastic

Diameter 250, 320: Bronze

Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
Dimensions and ordering data

For  CR



DA



FK FN FS H1 HB



KE

NH TH UL CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] H13 H13 [g]

100, 125 25D11 20 25±01 50 16 24.5 14 13 28.5 50 ±0.2 75 2 306 32962 LNZG-100/125

160, 200 32D11 26 30 ±0.2 60 22.5 36 18 17 40 60 ±0.3 92 2 659 35780 LNZG-160/200

250 40G7 33 35 ±0.2 70 27.5 45 22 21.5 50 90 ±0.3 140 2 2218 157516 LNZG-250

320 50G7 40 40 ±0.2 80 32.5 55 26 25.5 60 100 ±0.3 150 2 2934 157517 LNZG-320

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.

Trunnion support CRLNZG

Material:
High-alloy steel
Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
Dimensions and ordering data
For  CR

FK FN FS H1 HB

NH TH UL CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] D11 ±0.1 H13 ±0.2 [g]

100, 125 25 25 50 16 24.5 14 28.5 50 75 4 739 161877 CRLNZG-100/125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 4 to Festo standard FN 940070

Particularly high corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under extreme corrosive conditions. Parts exposed to aggressive media, for instance in the chemical or food industries. These applications may need to be suppor­
ted by special tests (� also FN 940082) using appropriate media.

2019/05 – Subject to change 43� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Swivel flange SNC

Material:

Die-cast aluminium

RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data

For  CG CP E EK



FL L SR TG XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type2)

[mm] H14 h14 H9 ±0.2 [g]

100 25 75 110+0.3/–0.8 20 41 27 20 89 270.7 1 895 174388 SNC-100

125 37 97 131–0.8 30 50 30 25 110 334.7 1 1740 174389 SNC-125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070
Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive
trunnions).
2) Suitable for ATEX

Swivel flange SNG

Material:
Die-cast aluminium
RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data
For  CG CP E EK

FL L SR TG XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type2)

[mm] H14 d12 max. F7/h9 ±0.2 min. max. ±0.3 [g]

160
43 122

186
35

55
35 32

140 353.6 2 3577 152597 SNG-160

200 230 60 175 380 2 5160 152598 SNG-200

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.
2) Suitable for ATEX

Subject to change – 2019/0544 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Swivel flange

SNCB/SNCB-…-R3
Material:

SNCB: Die-cast aluminium

SNCB-…-R3: Die-cast aluminium with

protective coating,

high corrosion protection

Free of copper and PTFE

RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length

Dimensions

For  CB E EK



FL L MR TG UB XC

[mm] H14 H9/e8 ±0.2 –0.5

100 60 110+0.3/–0.8 20 41 27 20 89 110 270.7

125 70 131–0.8 25 50 30 25 110 130 314.7

Ordering data

For  Basic design Variant R3 – High corrosion protection

[mm]
CRC1) Weight
[g]

Part no. Type CRC1) Weight

[g]
Part no. Type

100 1 1035 174395 SNCB-100 3 986 176949 SNCB-100-R3

125 1 1860 174396 SNCB-125 3 1776 176950 SNCB-125-R3

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070
Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive
trunnions).

Corrosion resistance class CRC 3 to Festo standard FN 940070

High corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under moderate corrosive conditions. External visible parts with primarily functional requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with a normal industrial

environment.

Swivel flange SNGB

for clevis foot LN/LSN

Material:
Die-cast aluminium
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data
For  CB E EK


FL L MR TG UB XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] H14 ±0.2 ±0.2 h14 [g]

160
90

183.5
30 H9

55 37 30 140
170

353.6 2 3445 34547 SNGB-160

200 220 60 40 25 175 380 2 10020 562455 SNGB-200-B

250 110 268 40 E10 70 47 40 220 200 426 1 16141 157512 SNGB-250

320 120 338 45 H9 80 52 45 270 220 481.2 1 26636 157513 SNGB-320

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070
Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive
trunnions).
Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.

2019/05 – Subject to change 45� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Swivel flange SNCS

Material:

Wrought aluminium alloy

Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data

For  CN



E EP EX FL LT MS TG XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] +1/–0.7 ±0.2 [g]

100 20 109 18 25 41 27 30 89 270.7 2 683 174402 SNCS-100

125 30 132 25 37 50 30 39 110 314.7 2 1369 174403 SNCS-125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.

Subject to change – 2019/0546 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Swivel flange SNCL

Material:
Die-cast aluminium
Free of copper and PTFE
RoHS-compliant
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data

For  CD



E EW FL L MS TG XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] H9 –0.2/–0.6 +0.2 [g]

100 20 110+0.3/–0.8 60 41 27 20 72 270.7 1 606 174409 SNCL-100

125 25 131–0.8 70 50 30 25 89 314.7 1 1135 174410 SNCL-125

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 1 to Festo standard FN 940070
Low corrosion stress. For dry indoor applications or transport and storage protection. Also applies to parts behind covers, in the non-visible interior area, and parts which are covered in the application (e.g. drive
trunnions).

Swivel flange SNGL

Material:
Die-cast aluminium
Free of copper and PTFE
+ = plus stroke length
Dimensions and ordering data
For  CD

E EW FL L MS TG XC CRC1) Weight Part no. Type

[mm] H9 ±0.5 –0.5/–1.2 +0.2 [g]

160
30

179.5
90

55
35 25

140 353.6 2 2358 151534 SNGL-160

200 219.5 60 175 380 2 3713 151535 SNGL-200

1) Corrosion resistance class CRC 2 to Festo standard FN 940070
Moderate corrosion stress. Indoor applications in which condensation may occur. External visible parts with primarily decorative requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with the ambient atmo­
sphere typical for industrial applications.

2019/05 – Subject to change 47� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Adapter kit DADG-AK-F6-A2

For direct mounting of a positioner on

the linear actuator DFPI-ND2P-E-NB3P

General technical data

Ambient temperature1) [°C] –20 … +80

Corrosion resistance class CRC2) 3

1) Note operating range of proximity sensors and cylinder

2) Corrosion resistance class CRC 3 to Festo standard FN 940070

High corrosion stress. Outdoor exposure under moderate corrosive conditions. External visible parts with primarily functional requirements for the surface and which are in direct contact with a normal industrial
environment.
Materials

Mounting bracket High-alloy stainless steel

Screws High-alloy stainless steel

Note on materials Contains PWIS (paint-wetting impairment substances)

RoHS-compliant
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Mounting bracket for mounting a positioner with interface according to VDI/VDE 3845 sheet 1:2010-09

1 Socket head screw DIN 912-M6x10-A2-70

2 The adapter can also be turned 180° during

mounting
Dimensions

Type B1 B2 B3 D1


D2

D3

D4


H1 L1 L2 L3

DADG-1 96 32 3 50 7 6 6.3 48 140 24 12

Subject to change – 2019/0548 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories
Dimensions Download CAD data � www.festo.com

Mounting bracket for mounting a positioner with hole spacing of 150 mm

1 Socket head screw DIN 912-M5x10-A2-70

2 The adapter can also be turned 180° during
mounting
Dimensions
Type B1 B2 B3 D1

D2


H1 H2 L1 L2 L3

DADG-2 165 150 32 M5 M6 20 3 60 24 13

Ordering data – Adapter kit Technical data � Internet: smbs

For  Description Part no. Type

100 … 320 mm For direct mounting of an external positioner on the actuator 3179433 DADG-AK-F6-A2

2019/05 – Subject to change 49� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Ordering data – Mounting components Technical data � Internet: clevis foot

Designation For  Part no. Type

Designation For  Part no. Type

Clevis foot LN/LNG Clevis foot LSN

100 33895 LNG-100 100 5566 LSN-100

125 33896 LNG-125 125 6987 LSN-125

160 9037 LN-160 160 6988 LSN-160

200 33898 LNG-200 200 6989 LSN-200

250 9039 LN-250 250 6990 LSN-250

320 9040 LN-320 320 6991 LSN-320

Clevis foot LSNG Clevis foot LSNSG

100 31745 LSNG-100 100 31752 LSNSG-100

125 31746 LSNG-125 125 31753 LSNSG-125

160 152599 LSNG-160

200 152600 LSNG-200

Clevis foot LBG1) Right-angle clevis foot LQG1)

100 31766 LBG-100 100 31773 LQG-100

125 31767 LBG-125 125 31774 LQG-125

1) Suitable for ATEX

Ordering data – Mounting components, corrosion-resistant Technical data � Internet: crlng

Designation For  Part no. Type

Clevis foot CRLNG

100 161845 CRLNG-100

125 176951 CRLNG-125

Subject to change – 2019/0550 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Ordering data – Piston-rod attachments Technical data � Internet: piston-rod attachment

Designation For  Part no. Type Designation For  Part no. Type

Rod eye SGS Rod clevis SGA1)

100 9264 SGS-M20x1,5 100 10769 SGA-M20x1,5

125 10774 SGS-M27x2 125 10770 SGA-M27x2

160, 200 10775 SGS-M36x2 160, 200 10771 SGA-M36x2

250 10776 SGS-M42x2

320 10777 SGS-M48x2 Self-aligning rod coupler FK1)

100 6143 FK-M20x1,5

Rod clevis SG1) 125 10485 FK-M27x2

100 6147 SG-M20x1,5 160, 200 10746 FK-M36x2

125 14987 SG-M27x2-B

160, 200 9581 SG-M36x2 Coupling piece KSG1)

250 9582 SG-M42x2 100 32966 KSG-M20x1,5

320 9583 SG-M48x2 125 32967 KSG-M27x2

1) Suitable for ATEX

Ordering data – Piston-rod attachments, corrosion-resistant Technical data � Internet: piston-rod attachment

Designation For  Part no. Type Designation For  Part no. Type

Rod eye CRSGS Rod clevis CRSG1)

100 195585 CRSGS-M20x1,5 100 13572 CRSG-M20x1,5

125 195586 CRSGS-M27x2 125 185361 CRSG-M27x2

Self-aligning rod coupler CRFK

100 2545677 CRFK-M20x1,5

1) Suitable for ATEX

2019/05 – Subject to change 51� Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Ordering data – Proximity sensor for T-slot, magnetoresistive Technical data � Internet: smt-8

Switching output Electrical connection Cable length Part no. Type

Cable Plug M8x1

[m]

N/O contact

Contactless 2-wire – 5 574341 SMT-8M-A-ZS-24V-E-5,0-OE-EX2

PNP – 3-pin 0.3 574342 SMT-8M-A-PS-24V-E-0,3-M8D-EX2

Ordering data – Proximity sensor for T-slot, corrosion-resistant Technical data � Internet: crsmt

Switching output Electrical connection Cable length Part no. Type
[m]
N/O contact

PNP Cable, 3-wire 5 574380 CRSMT-8M-PS-24V-K-5,0-OE

Ordering data – Proximity sensor for T-slot, NAMUR Technical data � Internet: sdbt

Switching output Electrical connection Cable length Part no. Type
[m]
N/O contact

NAMUR Cable, 2-wire 5 579071 SDBT-MS-20NL-ZN-E-5-LE-EX6

10 579072 SDBT-MS-20NL-ZN-E-10-LE-EX6

Ordering data – Slot cover for T-slot Technical data � Internet: abp

Assembly Length Part no. Type

[m]

Insertable 2x 0.5 151680 ABP-5-S

Ordering data – Mounting kits for proximity sensors SMT/CRSMT/SDBT Technical data � Internet: smbz, dasp

For  Materials Part no. Type

100 Rail: anodised wrought aluminium alloy

Screws: high-alloy stainless steel

Free of copper and PTFE

537806 SMBZ-8-32/100

125 1451483 DASP-M4-125-A

160, 200 1553813 DASP-M4-160-A

250 1456781 DASP-M4-250-A

320 3015256 DASP-M4-320-A

Subject to change – 2019/0552 � Internet: www.festo.com/catalog/…

Linear actuators DFPI
Accessories

Ordering data – Connecting cables Technical data � Internet: nebu

Electrical connection, left Electrical connection, right Cable length Part no. Type

[m]

Straight socket, M8x1, 3-pin Cable, open end, 3-wire 2.5 541333 NEBU-M8G3-K-2.5-LE3

5 541334 NEBU-M8G3-K-5-LE3

Straight socket, M12x1, 5-pin Cable, open end, 3-wire 2.5 541363 NEBU-M12G5-K-2.5-LE3

5 541364 NEBU-M12G5-K-5-LE3

Angled socket, M8x1, 3-pin Cable, open end, 3-wire 2.5 541338 NEBU-M8W3-K-2.5-LE3

5 541341 NEBU-M8W3-K-5-LE3

Angled socket, M12x1, 5-pin Cable, open end, 3-wire 2.5 541367 NEBU-M12W5-K-2.5-LE3

5 541370 NEBU-M12W5-K-5-LE3

Ordering data – Rectangular proximity sensor, pneumatic Technical data � Internet: smpo

Assembly Pneumatic connection Part no. Type

3/2-way valve, normally closed

With accessories Barbed fitting for tubing I.D. 3 mm 31008 SMPO-1-H-B

Ordering data – Mounting kit for proximity sensor SMPO-1 Technical data � Internet: smbs

For  Assembly Part no. Type

32 … 100 mm On the cylinder barrel using clamping strap 151226 SMBS-2

Festo – Your Partner in Automation

www.festo.com

Connect with us

www.festo.com/socialmedia

1 Festo Inc. 2 Festo Pneumatic 3 Festo Corporation 4 Regional Service Center

5300 Explorer Drive
Mississauga, ON L4W 5G4
Canada

Av. Ceylán 3,
Col. Tequesquináhuac
54020 Tlalnepantla,
Estado de México

1377 Motor Parkway
Suite 310
Islandia, NY 11749

7777 Columbia Road
Mason, OH 45040

Festo Customer Interaction Center
Tel: 1 877 463 3786
Fax: 1 877 393 3786
Email: customer.service.ca@festo.com

Multinational Contact Center
01 800 337 8669

ventas.mexico@festo.com

Festo Customer Interaction Center
1 800 993 3786
1 800 963 3786

customer.service.us@festo.com

S
u

b
je

ct
t

o
c

h
an

ge

Linear actuators DFPI
Key features
Product range overview
Type codes
Overview of peripherals for DFPI based on ISO 15552
Overview of peripherals for DFPI based on DIN EN ISO 5210
Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-NB3…
Technical data
technical data
Sectional view
Dimensions
Ordering data

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-NB3…
Technical data
technical data
Sectional view
Dimensions
Ordering data

Linear actuators DFPI-…-E-…-G2
Technical data
technical data
Sectional view
Dimensions
Ordering data

Linear actuators DFPI-…-C1V-…
Technical data
technical data
Sectional view
Dimensions
Ordering data

Accessories
Connecting cable NHSB
Foot mounting HNC/CRHNC
Foot mounting HNG
Foot mounting HNG
Flange mounting FNC/CRFNG
Flange mounting FNG
Trunnion flange ZNCF/CRZNG
Trunnion support LNZG
Trunnion support CRLNZG
Swivel flange SNC
Swivel flange SNG
Swivel flange SNCB/SNCB-…-R3
Swivel flange SNGB
Swivel flange SNCS
Swivel flange SNCL
Swivel flange SNGL
Adapter kit DADG-AK-F6-A2
Clevis foot LN/LNG
Clevis foot LSN
Clevis foot LSNG
Clevis foot LSNSG
Clevis foot LBG
Right-angle clevis foot LQG
Clevis foot CRLNG
Piston-rod attachments
Rod eye SGS
Rod clevis SGA
Self-aligning rod coupler FK
Rod clevis SG
Coupling piece KSG
Rod eye CRSGS
Rod clevis CRSG
Self-aligning rod coupler CRFK
Proximity sensor
Slot cover for T-slot
Mounting kits for proximity sensors
Connecting cables

<< /ASCII85EncodePages false /AllowTransparency false /AutoPositionEPSFiles true /AutoRotatePages /None /Binding /Left /CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 2.2) /CalRGBProfile (Apple RGB) /CalCMYKProfile (U.S. Web Coated \050SWOP\051 v2) /sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /CannotEmbedFontPolicy /Warning /CompatibilityLevel 1.5 /CompressObjects /Off /CompressPages true /ConvertImagesToIndexed true /PassThroughJPEGImages false /CreateJobTicket false /DefaultRenderingIntent /Default /DetectBlends true /DetectCurves 0.1000 /ColorConversionStrategy /LeaveColorUnchanged /DoThumbnails true /EmbedAllFonts true /EmbedOpenType false /ParseICCProfilesInComments true /EmbedJobOptions true /DSCReportingLevel 0 /EmitDSCWarnings false /EndPage -1 /ImageMemory 1048576 /LockDistillerParams true /MaxSubsetPct 100 /Optimize true /OPM 1 /ParseDSCComments false /ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false /PreserveCopyPage true /PreserveDICMYKValues true /PreserveEPSInfo false /PreserveFlatness false /PreserveHalftoneInfo false /PreserveOPIComments false /PreserveOverprintSettings true /StartPage 1 /SubsetFonts true /TransferFunctionInfo /Apply /UCRandBGInfo /Remove /UsePrologue false /ColorSettingsFile () /AlwaysEmbed [ true ] /NeverEmbed [ true ] /AntiAliasColorImages false /CropColorImages false /ColorImageMinResolution 100 /ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleColorImages true /ColorImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /ColorImageResolution 300 /ColorImageDepth -1 /ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 /ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000 /EncodeColorImages true /ColorImageFilter /DCTEncode /AutoFilterColorImages true /ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG /ColorACSImageDict << /QFactor 2.40 /HSamples [2 1 1 2] /VSamples [2 1 1 2] >>
/ColorImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >>
/JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >>
/JPEG2000ColorImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >>
/AntiAliasGrayImages false
/CropGrayImages false
/GrayImageMinResolution 150
/GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK
/DownsampleGrayImages true
/GrayImageDownsampleType /Bicubic
/GrayImageResolution 300
/GrayImageDepth -1
/GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2
/GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000
/EncodeGrayImages true
/GrayImageFilter /DCTEncode
/AutoFilterGrayImages true
/GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG
/GrayACSImageDict << /QFactor 2.40 /HSamples [2 1 1 2] /VSamples [2 1 1 2] >>
/GrayImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >>
/JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >>
/JPEG2000GrayImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >>
/AntiAliasMonoImages false
/CropMonoImages false
/MonoImageMinResolution 300
/MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK
/DownsampleMonoImages true
/MonoImageDownsampleType /Bicubic
/MonoImageResolution 1200
/MonoImageDepth -1
/MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000
/EncodeMonoImages true
/MonoImageFilter /CCITTFaxEncode
/MonoImageDict << /K -1 >>
/AllowPSXObjects false
/CheckCompliance [
/None
]
/PDFX1aCheck false
/PDFX3Check false
/PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false
/PDFXNoTrimBoxError true
/PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
]
/PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true
/PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
]
/PDFXOutputIntentProfile (U.S. Web Coated \050SWOP\051 v2)
/PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier (CGATS TR 001)
/PDFXOutputCondition ()
/PDFXRegistryName (http://www.color.org)
/PDFXTrapped /False
/CreateJDFFile false
/Description << /DEU (Setting for Screen-PDFs in standard quality >>> for use in internet, e-mail, …)
>>
/Namespace [
(Adobe)
(Common)
(1.0)
]
/OtherNamespaces [
<< /AsReaderSpreads false /CropImagesToFrames true /ErrorControl /WarnAndContinue /FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false /IncludeGuidesGrids false /IncludeNonPrinting false /IncludeSlug false /Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (4.0) ] /OmitPlacedBitmaps false /OmitPlacedEPS false /OmitPlacedPDF false /SimulateOverprint /Legacy >>
<< /AddBleedMarks false /AddColorBars false /AddCropMarks false /AddPageInfo false /AddRegMarks false /BleedOffset [ 0 0 0 0 ] /ConvertColors /NoConversion /DestinationProfileName (U.S. Web Coated \(SWOP\) v2) /DestinationProfileSelector /UseName /Downsample16BitImages true /FlattenerPreset << /PresetSelector /MediumResolution >>
/FormElements false
/GenerateStructure false
/IncludeBookmarks false
/IncludeHyperlinks true
/IncludeInteractive false
/IncludeLayers false
/IncludeProfiles true
/MarksOffset 6
/MarksWeight 0.250000
/MultimediaHandling /UseObjectSettings
/Namespace [
(Adobe)
(CreativeSuite)
(2.0)
]
/PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector /UseName
/PageMarksFile /RomanDefault
/PreserveEditing false
/UntaggedCMYKHandling /LeaveUntagged
/UntaggedRGBHandling /LeaveUntagged
/UseDocumentBleed false
>>
<< /AllowImageBreaks true /AllowTableBreaks true /ExpandPage false /HonorBaseURL true /HonorRolloverEffect false /IgnoreHTMLPageBreaks false /IncludeHeaderFooter false /MarginOffset [ 0 0 0 0 ] /MetadataAuthor () /MetadataKeywords () /MetadataSubject () /MetadataTitle () /MetricPageSize [ 0 0 ] /MetricUnit /inch /MobileCompatible 0 /Namespace [ (Adobe) (GoLive) (8.0) ] /OpenZoomToHTMLFontSize false /PageOrientation /Portrait /RemoveBackground false /ShrinkContent true /TreatColorsAs /MainMonitorColors /UseEmbeddedProfiles false /UseHTMLTitleAsMetadata true >>
]
>> setdistillerparams
<< /HWResolution [1200 1200] /PageSize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice

Precision Linear Actuators

www.thomsonlinear.com

New! T Series with RediMount™ motor mounting adapter kit

available as standard

2

www.thomsonlinear.com

Thomson – the Choice for Optimized Motion Solutions

Often the ideal design solution is not about finding the fastest, sturdiest, most
accurate or even the least expensive option. Rather, the ideal solution is the optimal
balance of performance, life and cost.

The Best Positioned Supplier of Mechanical Motion Technology
Thomson has several advantages that make us the supplier of choice for motion control technology.
• Thomson owns the broadest standard product offering of mechanical motion technologies in the industry.
• Modified versions of standard product or white sheet design solutions are routine for us.
• Choose Thomson and gain access to over 70 years of global application experience in industries including

packaging, factory automation, material handling, medical, clean energy, printing, automotive, machine tool,
aerospace and defense.

• As part of Altra Industrial Motion, we are financially strong and unique in our ability to bring together
control, drive, motor, power transmission and precision linear motion technologies.

A Name You Can Trust
A wealth of product and application information as well as 3D models, software tools, our distributor locator
and global contact information is available at www.thomsonlinear.com. For assistance in Europe, contact us at
+44 1271 334 500 or e-mail us at sales.europe@thomsonlinear.com.
Talk to us early in the design process to see how Thomson can help identify the optimal balance of performance,
life and cost for your next application. And, call us or any of our 2000+ distribution partners around the world
for fast delivery of replacement parts.

Local Support Around the Globe

Application Centers Global Design & Engineering CentersGlobal Manufacturing Operations

Precision Linear Actuators

3www.thomsonlinear.com

Table of Contents ………………………………………………………………………. 3

Introduction

………………………………………………………………………………. 4

Applications ……………………………………………………………………………… 6

The Benefits of Electrification ………………………………………………….. 7

Performance Overview……………………………………………………………… 8
Precision Linear Actuator Range – T Series ……………………….8 – 9
Precision Linear Actuator Range – ECT Series ……………….10 – 11

T Series……………………………………………………………………………………. 12
Introduction ………………………………………………………………………….. 12
Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 13
T60 ………………………………………………………………………………….14 – 15
T90 ………………………………………………………………………………….16 – 17
T130 ………………………………………………………………………………..18 – 19

ECT Series ……………………………………………………………………………….. 20
Introduction ………………………………………………………………………….. 20
Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 21
ECT90 – Parallel IEC90 AC motor ……………………………………..22 – 23
ECT90 – Parallel B43 AC Servo Motor ……………………………..24 – 25
ECT90 – Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor ……………………………..26 – 27
ECT90 – Direct Drive, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor ……………28 – 29
ECT90 – Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor ……………30 – 31
ECT90 – Planetary Gear, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor …………32 – 33
ECT90 – Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor …………34 – 35
ECT130 – Parallel IEC100 AC Motor …………………………………36 – 37
ECT130 – Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor ……………………………38 – 39
ECT130 – Parallel B63 AC Servo Motor ……………………………40 – 41
ECT130 – Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor ………….42 – 43
ECT130 – Direct Drive, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor ………….44 – 45
ECT130 – Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor ………….46 – 47
ECT130 – Planetary Gear, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor ………….48 – 49

Options and Accessories ………………………………………………………… 50
Mounting …………………………………………………………………………50 – 53
Adapters …………………………………………………………………………54 – 57
Flanges and Gears ………………………………………………………….58 – 67
Motors …………………………………………………………………………….68 – 69
Sensors ………………………………………………………………………………… 70
Environmental Protection …………………………………………………….. 71
Shafts and Flanges for Non-RediMount Units ………………………. 72

Ordering Keys ………………………………………………………………………….. 75
How to Order ………………………………………………………………………… 75
T60, T90 and T130 …………………………………………………………………. 75
ECT90 ………………………………………………………………………………76 – 77
ECT130 …………………………………………………………………………….78 – 79

Table of Contents

Glossary…………………………………………………………………………………… 80
A – Ce ………………………………………………………………………………………. 80
Co – Du…………………………………………………………………………………….. 81
Dy – Lif …………………………………………………………………………………….. 82
Lin – Po ……………………………………………………………………………………. 83
Pr – Sta ……………………………………………………………………………………. 85
Str – Th…………………………………………………………………………………….. 87

Application Data Form Worksheet ………………………………………….. 86
Drawing/Notes ……………………………………………………………………… 87

4 www.thomsonlinear.com

Thomson is one of the leading suppliers of motion control products in the
world, offering a complete product portfolio. Actuators, servo motors,
lead screws, servo drives and controls are just some of the products
manufactured by Thomson. The precision linear actuator range is a result
of more than 40 years of actuator development and represents the state of
the art in linear actuator design.

The precision linear actuators in this catalog represent
the experience gained during decades of actuator
development. The result is design concepts that will
work in the most demanding applications imaginable and
unique product features unavailable anywhere else.

Worldwide representation
Thomson has plants, support centers and sales offices
all around the globe. In addition, we have a large
network of distributors and system houses that all are
ready to support you throughout the entire
lifecycle of the product.

Thomson – a complete supplier
Thomson develops, produces and sells
motion control products of all types. If you
need a servo drive, programmable control or

linear guide to match your precision linear actuator, you
can rest assured that Thomson has the ideal choice for
your application. Please visit www.thomsonlinear.com for
more information.

Online resources
You can find online resources, such as CAD models,
literature and product data, for the precision linear
actuator range at www.thomsonlinear.com/pla.

Introduction

Precision Linear Actuators

5www.thomsonlinear.com

Introduction

The hallmark for Thomson precision linear actuators is
the ability to work hard, fast and accurately, day in and
day out, under the toughest conditions. All precision
linear actuators are designed to require a minimum
of maintenance. There are no parts that need to be
replaced due to wear, and regular lubrication is needed
only in applications where the actuator works hard and
frequently.

Hydraulics and pneumatics replacement
Precision linear actuators are direct descendants of
hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders. Possessing many
of the same unique design characteristics that made
hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders popular, actuators
benefit from cleaner, simpler and more energy-efficient
power transmission. They are also much easier to
integrate with modern programmable controls, have
greater accuracy and are less noisy.

Harsh environments
Chemical plants, paper mills, welding operations and
outdoor applications are all suitable for precision linear
actuators. IP65 protection as standard or an option, a
robust design and the use of high-quality components
make them suitable for virtually every location.

Customized units
Customization is one of our strengths, and we have built
hundreds of one-of-a-kind units. If you need a special
stroke, a unique mounting bracket, or some other
adaptation of the standard product, our engineers will
help you find the perfect solution for your application.
Please contact customer service for more information.

Precision linear actuators are used in handling, machining and manufacturing
applications. Another suitable area is in the replacement of hydraulic or
pneumatic cylinders where they bring many benefits compared to these
traditional technologies. A broad range of options and accessories, and our
vast experience in building customized units makes it easy to find the perfect
actuator for almost any application.

Example of a custom made unit:
• Custom motor
• Custom stroke
• Encoder shaft in the rear

6 www.thomsonlinear.com

Precision linear actuators can fit a wide variety of applications within many
motion industries. In combination with high-performance drives and controls
from Thomson, designing these actuators into linear motion equipment is
made simple. Some common applications are described below.

Applications

Valve Control
• Process industry
• Ventilation equipment
• Vehicle applications
• Packaging industry

Edge Guide Control
• Paper mills
• Print shop equipment
• Textile industry

Drilling, Welding, Gluing or
Thermo-forming
• Machine tools
• Plastic industry
• Metal industry
• Woodworking industry
• Electronic industry
• Packaging industry

Backstop Adjust
• Woodworking industry
• Machine tools
• Metal industry

Pressing and Clamping
• Machine tools
• Electronic industry
• Plastic industry
• Metal industry
• Woodworking industry

Loading or Unloading
• Handling equipment
• Packaging industry
• Medical industry
• Electronic industry

Precision Linear Actuators

7www.thomsonlinear.com

Precision linear actuators are often a better choice than hydraulic or
pneumatic alternatives due to simpler installation, easier control, lower
energy costs, higher accuracy, less maintenance and noise, and a cleaner,
healthier environment.

The Benefits of Electrification

Electric Actuators vs. Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinders
Electric Linear Actuators Hydraulic Cylinders Pneumatic Cylinders

Installation All electric operation requires
simple wiring.

Requires expensive plumbing,
filtering, pumps, etc.

Requires expensive plumbing,
filtering, pumps, etc.

Accuracy Very repeatable (to ± 0,013 mm)
and rigid, multi-stop capabilities.

Requires expensive position
sensing and precise electro-
hydraulic valving to implement.
Has tendency to creep.

Difficult to achieve. Requires
expensive position sensing and
precise valving to implement. Has
tendency to creep.

Control Directly compatible with standard
programmable controls, allowing
easy, automatic operation of
complex motion sequences.

Requires electronic/fluid
interfaces and exotic valve
designs. Hysteresis, dead zone,
supply pressure and temperature
changes complicate control.

Inherently non-linear,
compressible power source
severely complicates servo
control.

Speed Smooth, variable speed from
0 to 2 m/s with controlled
acceleration.

Difficult to control accurately.
Varies with temperature and wear.
Stick slip can be a problem.

More susceptible to stick slip and
varying load. Well-suited for light,
high-speed applications.

Reliability Repeatable, reproducible
performance during the
entire product life. Very little
maintenance required.

Very contamination sensitive.
Require regular maintenance.
Seals are prone to leak. Reliable
with diligent maintenance.

Very contamination sensitive. Air
sources require proper filtration.
Good reliability, but usually many
system components are involved.

Power Up to 40 000 N Virtually unlimited force. Most
powerful.

Up to 25 000 N. Typically used
below 6 000 N.

Life expectancy Up to millions of cycles at rated
load. Easy to predict.

Dependent on design and seal
wear, usually good.

Dependent on design and seal
wear, usually good.

Environment Standard models rated for -30
to +70°C. Inherently clean and
energy efficient.

Temperature extremes can be
a major problem. Seals are
prone to leak. Waste disposal
is increasingly problematic.

Temperature extremes can be a
major problem. Seals prone to
leak. Airborne oil can be a
problem.

Load holding Acme screw units are self-locking
if power fails. Fail-safe brakes
available for ball screw models.

Complex backup safety devices
must be used.

Complex backup safety devices
must be used.

Cost Moderate initial cost, very low
operating cost.

Components often cost less, but
installation and maintenance are
increased.

Hydraulic power unit
cost is high if not pre-existing.

Components often cost less, but
installation and maintenance are
increased.

8 www.thomsonlinear.com

Performance Overview
Precision Linear Actuators – T Series

Load

Maximum load, Fx [N] 10 000 20 000 60 000

Maximum load, Fy [N] 100 500 800

Maximum load, Fz [N] 100 500 800

Maximum load torque, Mx [Nm] – – –

Maximum load torque, My [Nm] 50 150 300

Maximum load torque, Mz [Nm] 50 150 300

Stroke

Maximum standard stroke [mm] 1500 1500 2000

Speed

Maximum speed [m/s] 2,5 2,0 2,0

Accuracy

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05 0,05 0,05

Backlash [mm] 0,11 0,11 (0,18) 1 0,21

General data

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 75 × 60 90 × 92 130 × 130

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – +70 -20 – +70 -20 – +70

Maximum duty cycle [%] 100 100 100

Screw diameter [mm] 25 25, 32 40, 50

Screw type ball screw ball screw ball screw

Protection class – standard / optional IP65 IP65 IP65

Features

RediMount motor mounting system • • •

Single point lubrication • • •

Mounting options

Magnetic position sensors • • •

Mounting feet kit on request • •

Trunnion mounting kit • • •

Clevis mounting kit • • •

Tube end – inside thread / outside thread / spherical joint • / • / • • / • / • • / • / •

1 Depending on the screw diameter used in the actuator.

T60 T90 T130

Precision Linear Actuators

9www.thomsonlinear.com

Load
Maximum load, Fx [N] 10 000 20 000 60 000
Maximum load, Fy [N] 100 500 800
Maximum load, Fz [N] 100 500 800
Maximum load torque, Mx [Nm] – – –
Maximum load torque, My [Nm] 50 150 300
Maximum load torque, Mz [Nm] 50 150 300
Stroke
Maximum standard stroke [mm] 1500 1500 2000
Speed
Maximum speed [m/s] 2,5 2,0 2,0
Accuracy
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05 0,05 0,05
Backlash [mm] 0,11 0,11 (0,18) 1 0,21
General data
Profile size (width × height) [mm] 75 × 60 90 × 92 130 × 130
Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – +70 -20 – +70 -20 – +70
Maximum duty cycle [%] 100 100 100
Screw diameter [mm] 25 25, 32 40, 50
Screw type ball screw ball screw ball screw
Protection class – standard / optional IP65 IP65 IP65
Features
RediMount motor mounting system • • •
Single point lubrication • • •
Mounting options
Magnetic position sensors • • •
Mounting feet kit on request • •
Trunnion mounting kit • • •
Clevis mounting kit • • •
Tube end – inside thread / outside thread / spherical joint • / • / • • / • / • • / • / •
T60 T90

T130

10 www.thomsonlinear.com

Performance Overview
Packaged Precision Linear Actuators – ECT Series

Load

Maximum load, Fx [N] 20 000 38 000

Maximum load, Fy [N] 500 800

Maximum load, Fz [N] 500 800

Maximum load torque, Mx [Nm] – –

Maximum load torque, My [Nm] 150 300

Maximum load torque, Mz [Nm] 150 300

Stroke

Maximum standard stroke [mm] 1500 2000

Speed

Maximum speed [m/s] 1,6 2,0

Accuracy

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05 0,05

Backlash [mm] 0,11 (0,18) 1 0,21

General data

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 90 × 92 130 × 130

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – +70 -20 – +70

Maximum duty cycle [%] 100 100

Screw diameter [mm] 25, 32 40

Screw type ball screw ball screw

Protection class – standard / optional IP65 IP65

Features

Brushless AC servo motor / Three phase AC motor • / • • / •

Single point lubrication • •

Mounting options

Magnetic position sensors • •

Mounting feet kit • •

Trunnion mounting kit • •

Clevis mounting kit • •

Tube end – inside thread / outside thread / spherical joint • / • / • • / • / •

1 Depending on the screw diameter used in the actuator.

ECT90 ECT130

Precision Linear Actuators

11www.thomsonlinear.com

Load
Maximum load, Fx [N] 20 000 38 000
Maximum load, Fy [N] 500 800
Maximum load, Fz [N] 500 800
Maximum load torque, Mx [Nm] – –
Maximum load torque, My [Nm] 150 300
Maximum load torque, Mz [Nm] 150 300
Stroke
Maximum standard stroke [mm] 1500 2000
Speed
Maximum speed [m/s] 1,6 2,0
Accuracy
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05 0,05
Backlash [mm] 0,11 (0,18) 1 0,21
General data
Profile size (width × height) [mm] 90 × 92 130 × 130
Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – +70 -20 – +70
Maximum duty cycle [%] 100 100
Screw diameter [mm] 25, 32 40
Screw type ball screw ball screw
Protection class – standard / optional IP65 IP65
Features
Brushless AC servo motor / Three phase AC motor • / • • / •
Single point lubrication • •
Mounting options
Magnetic position sensors • •
Mounting feet kit • •
Trunnion mounting kit • •
Clevis mounting kit • •
Tube end – inside thread / outside thread / spherical joint • / • / • • / • / •
ECT90 ECT130

12 www.thomsonlinear.com

T Series
Introduction

The proven design of the T Series precision linear actuators has found
its way into thousands of applications throughout the world. Precision-
rolled ball screws provide smooth motion, accurate positioning and quiet
operation, while the slide guide bushings and the rugged exterior design
allow it to be used in the toughest applications. The T Series combines
durability, performance and ease of use with a large selection of factory
engineered options and accessories. The RediMount™ motor mounting
adapter kit is available as a standard feature, making it easy to find a
suitable motor as well as making the installation of it simple, quick and
accurate. Regardless of the environment or requirement, we can customize
our standard models to fit just about any application.

Precision Linear Actuators

13www.thomsonlinear.com

Parameter T60 T90 T130

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 75 × 60 90 × 92 130 × 130

Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500 1500 2000

Speed, maximum [m/s] 2,5 2,0 2,0

Dynamic Load (Fx), maximum [N] 10 000 20 000 60 000

Page 14 16 18

Features
• Thomson RediMount™ motor mounting adapter kit available as standard
• Extruded, anodized aluminum cover tube
• Anodized aluminum housing
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• Can be installed in all directions
• Ball screw drive
• Slide guides
• Load up to 60 000 N
• IP65 protection class
• Washdown-protected versions
• Mounting accessories according to hydraulic cylinder
standards available

T Series
Overview

Definition of Forces

14 www.thomsonlinear.com

Standard Features and Benefits

T60

Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

• Compact, robust and reliable
• High-accuracy ball screw drive
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 10 000 N
• Speed up to 2,5 m/s
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Mounting accessories according to hydraulic cylinder
standards available

» Ordering Key – see page 75
» Mounting Options – see page 50

» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80

General Specifications
Parameter T60

Profile size (w × h) [mm] 75 × 60

Type of screw ball screw with single nut

Protection class IP65

Lubrication one point lubrication of ballscrew

Included accessories –

Rod Idle Torque (M idle) [Nm]
Input speed [rpm] Screw lead (p) [mm]

p = 5 p = 10 p = 25 p = 50

500 1,5 1,5 2 3,5

M idle = the input torque needed to move the rod with no load on it.

Performance Specifications
Parameter T60

Stroke length (S max), maximum [mm] 1500

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 2,5

Acceleration, maximum [m/s2] 20

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Input speed, maximum
screw diameter/lead 25/10, 25/25
screw diameter/lead 25/05, 25/50

[rpm]
4000
3000

Operation temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70

Dynamic load (Fx), maximum [N] 10000

Dynamic load (Fy), maximum [N] 100

Dynamic load (Fz), maximum [N] 100

Dynamic load torque (Mz, My), max. [Nm] 50

Drive shaft force (Frd), maximum [N] 1000

Drive shaft torque/input torque (Mta), max.
T06-B25
T06-G25
T06-H25

[Nm]
48
40
48

Screw versions, diameter (d0) / lead (p) [mm] 25/05, 25/10,
25/25, 25/50

Weight of units
of unit with zero stroke
of every 100 mm of stroke

[kg]

5,20
0,95

1 Value for the complete unit

Precision Linear Actuators

15www.thomsonlinear.com

T60
Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

A1: screw 25/05 and 25/25
A2: screw 25/10 and 25/50
A3: depth 10
A4: outside thread
A5: inside thread

RediMount Flange Specifications
Parameter Min Max

Flange length (Lrm) [mm] 81 143

Flange square (Srm) [mm] 90 200

Flange weight * [kg] 5,60

* Max. weight including coupling and fastening screws

Dimensions Projection

METRIC

16 www.thomsonlinear.com

Standard Features and Benefits

T90

Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

• Compact, robust and reliable
• High-accuracy ball screw drive
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 20000 N
• Speed up to 2 m/s
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Mounting accessories according to hydraulic cylinder
standards available.

» Ordering Key – see page 75
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80

General Specifications
Parameter T90

Profile size (w × h) [mm] 90 × 92

Type of screw ball screw with single nut
Protection class IP65
Lubrication one point lubrication of ballscrew
Included accessories –
Rod Idle Torque (M idle) [Nm]
Input speed [rpm] Screw lead (p) [mm]

p = 5 p = 10 p = 20 p = 25 p = 32

500 1,5 1,5 3,0 2,0 3,5

M idle = the input torque needed to move the rod with no load on it.

Performance Specifications
Parameter T90

Stroke length (S max), maximum [mm] 1500

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 2,0

Acceleration, maximum [m/s2] 8

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Input speed, maximum
screw diam./lead 25/05 mm
screw diam./lead 25/10, 25/25 mm
screw diam./lead 32/10, 32/20, 32/32 mm

[rpm]
3000
4000
3750

Operation temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70

Dynamic load (Fx), maximum
screw diameter 25 mm
screw diameter 32 mm

[N]
10000
20000

Dynamic load (Fy), maximum
screw diameter 25 mm
screw diameter 32 mm

[N]
3001
5001

Dynamic load (Fz), maximum
screw diameter 25 mm
screw diameter 32 mm

[N]
3001
5001

Dynamic load torque (Mz, My), max. [Nm] 1501

Drive shaft force (Frd), maximum
screw diameter 25 mm
screw diameter 32 mm

[N]
1000
1300

Drive shaft torque/input torque (Mta), max.
screw diameter 25 mm
screw diameter 32 mm

[Nm]
48
93

Screw versions, diameter (d0) / lead (p) [mm] 25/05, 25/10,
25/25, 32/10,
32/20, 32/32

Weight of units
with screw diameter 25 mm
of unit with zero stroke
of every 100 mm of stroke

[kg]

8,16
1,62

Weight of units
with screw diameter 32 mm
of unit with zero stroke
of every 100 mm of stroke

[kg]

10,64
1,80

1 Value for the complete unit

Precision Linear Actuators

17www.thomsonlinear.com

T90
Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

T09-x25
screw ø25 mm

T09-x32
screw ø32 mm

A1: depth 43
A2: outside thread

A1: depth 33
A2: outside thread

A3: inside thread
A4: T-slot

A3: inside thread
A4: T-slot
RediMount Flange Specifications
Parameter Min Max
Flange length (Lrm) [mm] 81 143
Flange square (Srm) [mm] 90 200

Flange weight * [kg] 6,00

* Max. weight including coupling and fastening screws
RediMount Flange Specifications
Parameter Min Max
Flange length (Lrm) [mm] 81 143
Flange square (Srm) [mm] 90 200
Flange weight * [kg] 5,60
* Max. weight including coupling and fastening screws
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

18 www.thomsonlinear.com

Performance Specifications
Parameter T130

Stroke length (S max), maximum [mm] 2000

Linear speed, maximum [m/s] 2,0
Acceleration, maximum [m/s2] 8
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Input speed, maximum
screw diameter/lead 40/10 mm
screw diameter/lead 40/20, 40/40 mm
screw diameter/lead 50/10 mm

[rpm]
2500
3000
2000

Operation temperature limits [°C] – 20 – 70

Dynamic load (Fx), maximum
screw diameter/lead 50/10 mm
screw diameter/lead 40/10 mm
screw diameter/lead 40/20 mm
screw diameter/lead 40/40 mm

[N]
60000
40000
35000
15000

Dynamic load (Fy), maximum [N] 8001

Dynamic load (Fz), maximum [N] 8001

Dynamic load torque (My, Mz), max. [Nm] 3001

Drive shaft force (Frd), maximum [N] 3000

Drive shaft torque/input torque (Mta), max.
T13-x40
T13-B50
T13-K50

[Nm]
140
200
140

Screw versions, diameter (d0) / lead (p) [mm] 40/10, 40/20,
40/40, 50/10

Weight of units
with screw diameter 40 mm
of unit with zero stroke
of every 100 mm of stroke

[kg]

18,50
3,00

Weight of units
with screw diameter 50 mm
of unit with zero stroke
of every 100 mm of stroke

[kg]

25,40
3,60

1 Value for the complete unit
Standard Features and Benefits

T130
Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

• Compact, robust and reliable
• High-accuracy ball screw drive
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 60000 N
• Speed up to 2 m/s
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Mounting accessories according to hydraulic cylinder
standards available.

» Ordering Key – see page 75
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80

General Specifications
Parameter T130

Profile size (w × h) [mm] 130 × 130

Type of screw ball screw with single nut
Protection class IP65
Lubrication one point lubrication of ballscrew
Included accessories –

Rod Idle Torque (M idle) [Nm]
Input speed [rpm] Screw diameter (do) [mm] / lead (p) [mm]

do = 40 do = 50

p = 10 p = 20 p = 40 p = 10

500 4,5 4,5 5,5 5,5

M idle = the input torque needed to move the rod with no load on it.

Precision Linear Actuators

19www.thomsonlinear.com

A1: depth 28
A2: outside thread

A1: depth 28
A2: outside thread

A3: T-slot

A4: inside thread

A3: T-slot
T130
Ball Screw Drive, Slide Guide

T13-x50
screw ø50 mm

T13-x40
screw ø40 mm

RediMount Flange Specifications
Parameter Min Max

Flange length (Lrm) [mm] 106 154

Flange square (Srm) [mm] 110 200

Flange weight * [kg] 7,13

* Max. weight including coupling and fastening screws
RediMount Flange Specifications
Parameter Min Max
Flange length (Lrm) [mm] 81 143
Flange square (Srm) [mm] 90 200

Flange weight * [kg] 6,50

* Max. weight including coupling and fastening screws
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

20 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT Series
Introduction

The ECT Series is our line of packaged precision linear actuators. They are
based on the proven T Series and equipped with a high-quality selection
of motors and gears that make them ready to take on the most demanding
applications. The ECT Series is ideal when short design times, maximum
performance and the longest lifecycle are required. And if you can‘t find
a standard unit that fits, our engineers can build you a customized unit to
suit your needs.

Precision Linear Actuators

21www.thomsonlinear.com

Parameter ECT90 ECT130

Profile size (width × height) [mm] 90 × 92 130 × 130

Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500 2000

Speed, maximum [mm/s] 1600 2000

Dynamic load (Fx), maximum [N] 20 000 38 000

Page 22 – 35 36 – 49

ECT Series
Overview

Features
• Extruded, anodized aluminum cover tube
• Anodized aluminum housing
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• Can be installed in all directions
• Ball screw drive
• Slide guides
• Load up to 38000 N
• Asynchronous, three-phase AC motor or brushless AC servo motor
• Parallel or inline motor
• Belt gear, planetary gear or direct drive
• IP65 as standard
• Large range of options and accessories
• Wash-down-protected versions
• Mounting accessories according to hydraulic cylinder standards available

Definition of Forces

22 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel IEC90 AC Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 76
» Mounting Options – see page 50

» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Three-phase, asynchronous AC motor with brake
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 9750 N
• Speed up to 1520 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90

Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm

Screw type ball screw

Gear box belt gear

Motor type asynchronous AC motor

Motor voltage 3 × 400 Vac

Motor power 2,2 kW

Motor current, nominal 4,7 A

Motor feedback no

Motor connection terminal box

Motor brake yes (230 Vac)

Lubrication single point lubrication

Certificates CE

Options • mounting options
• adapter options

Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90

Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-I09B03PB-2510
ECT09-I09B02PB-2510
ECT09-I09B03PB-3220
ECT09-I09B02PB-3220
ECT09-I09B01PB-3220
ECT09-I09B01PB-3232

[N]
9750
6500
4800
3100
1600
900

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500

Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed3
ECT09-I09B03PB-2510
ECT09-I09B02PB-2510
ECT09-I09B03PB-3220
ECT09-I09B02PB-3220
ECT09-I09B01PB-3220
ECT09-I09B01PB-3232

[mm/s]
160
240
320
480
960
1520

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70

Screw diameters [mm] 25, 32

Screw leads4 [mm] 10, 20, 32

Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm

[mm]
0,11
0,18

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.
3 The maximum speed is based on a max. input frequency to the motor of 50 Hz.
Frequency inverters can provide higher frequencies thus higher speeds but that
may damage the actuator.
4 10 mm lead = diameter 25 mm. 20 and 32 mm leads = diameter 32 mm.

Precision Linear Actuators

23www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel IEC90 AC Motor

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) L tot: retracted length
L: cover tube length A1: ECT09-I09B • • PB-25 = 15 mm, ECT09-I09B • • PB-32 = 12 mm

Cover tube length (L) [mm] ECT09-I09BxxPB-25: L = S max + 195
ECT09-I09BxxPB-32: L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] ECT09-I09BxxPB-25: L tot = S max + 280
ECT09-I09BxxPB-32: L tot = S max + 312

Weight of unit [kg] ECT09-I09BxxPB-25: kg = 30,8 + 0,016 × S max
ECT09-I09BxxPB-32: kg = 33,2 + 0,018 kg × S max

Performance Diagrams

V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-I09B03PB-2510
2: ECT09-I09B02PB-2510
3: ECT09-I09B03PB-3220

Speed vs. Load

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke

v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-I09B0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-I09B0 x PB-3220
3: ECT09-I09B0 x PB-3232

F: load S: stroke length

1: ECT09-I09B0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-I09B0 x PB-32 xx

4: ECT09-I09B02PB-3220
5: ECT09-I09B01PB-3220
6: ECT09-I09B01PB-3232

= Overheating of the motor may occur if running at this speed continuously!

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

24 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel B43 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 76
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 5800 N
• Speed up to 420 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box belt gear

Motor type brushless AC servo motor

Motor designation AKM43E-ANCNR-00

Motor feedback resolver

Motor connection connector

Motor brake no, optional

Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE

Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options

Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B43R03PB-2510
ECT09-B43R02PB-2510
ECT09-B43R03PB-3220
ECT09-B43R02PB-3220

[N]
5800
3800
2800
1800

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B43R03PB-2510
ECT09-B43R02PB-2510
ECT09-B43R03PB-3220
ECT09-B43R02PB-3220

[mm/s]
140
210
270
420

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 25, 32

Screw leads3 [mm] 10, 20

Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.
3 10 mm lead = diameter 25 mm. 20 mm lead = diameter 32 mm.

Precision Linear Actuators

25www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel B43 AC Servo Motor

Performance Diagrams

Speed vs. Load

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B43R0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-B43R0 x PB-3220

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT09-B43R0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-B43R0 x PB-3220

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector A5: ECT09-B43 • • • PB-25 = 15 mm, ECT09-B43 • • • PB-32 = 12 mm
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake

V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-B43R03PB-2510
2: ECT09-B43R02PB-2510
3: ECT09-B43R03PB-3220
4: ECT09-B43R02PB-3220

Cover tube length (L) [mm] ECT09-B43 xxx PB-25: L = S max + 195
ECT09-B43 xxx PB-32: L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] ECT09-B43 xxx PB-25: L tot = S max + 280
ECT09-B43 xxx PB-32: L tot = S max + 312

Weight of unit [kg] ECT09-B43 xx PB-25: kg = 17,2 + 0,016 × S max
ECT09-B43 xx PB-32: kg = 19,6 + 0,018 × S max

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

26 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 76
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 9800 N
• Speed up to 670 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box belt gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor

Motor designation AKM53K-CNCNR-00

Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B53R03PB-2510
ECT09-B53R02PB-2510
ECT09-B53R03PB-3220
ECT09-B53R02PB-3220

[N]
9800
8000
5900
3900

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B53R03PB-2510
ECT09-B53R02PB-2510
ECT09-B53R03PB-3220
ECT09-B53R02PB-3220

[mm/s]
220
330
440
670

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 25, 32
Screw leads3 [mm] 10, 20
Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.
3 10 mm lead = diameter 25 mm. 20 mm lead = diameter 32 mm.

Precision Linear Actuators

27www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Speed vs. Load

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B53R0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-B53R0 x PB-3220

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT09-B53R0 x PB-2510
2: ECT09-B53R0 x PB-3220

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector A5: ECT09-B53 • • • PB-25 = 15 mm, ECT09-B53 • • • PB-32 = 12 mm
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake

V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-B53R03PB-2510
2: ECT09-B53R02PB-2510
3: ECT09-B53R03PB-3220
4: ECT09-B53R02PB-3220

Cover tube length (L) [mm] ECT09-B53 xxx PB-25: L = S max + 195
ECT09-B53 xxx PB-32: L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] ECT09-B53 xxx PB-25: L tot = S max + 280
ECT09-B53 xxx PB-32: L tot = S max + 312

Weight of unit [kg] ECT09-B53 xx PB-25: kg = 20,2 + 0,016 × S max
ECT09-B53 xx PB-32: kg = 22,6 + 0,018 × S max

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

28 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Direct Drive, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 77
» Mounting Options – see page 50

» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Direct drive
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 5300 N
• Speed up to 1600 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw

Gear box no, direct drive

Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM43E-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B43R01LD-2510
ECT09-B43R01LD-3220

[N]
2000
900

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B43R01LD-2510
ECT09-B43R01LD-3220

[mm/s]
410
820

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 25, 32
Screw leads3 [mm] 10, 20
Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

3 10 mm lead = diameter 25 mm. 20 mm lead = diameter 32 mm.

Precision Linear Actuators

29www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Direct Drive, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor

Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector A5: ECT09-B43 • 01LD-25 = 15 mm, ECT09-B43 • 01LD-32 = 12 mm
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake A6: ECT09-B43 • 01LD-25 = 93 mm, ECT09-B43 • 01LD-32 = 103 mm

v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B43R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B43R01LD-3220

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT09-B43R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B43R01LD-3220

Speed vs. Load
V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-B43R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B43R01LD-3220

Cover tube length (L) [mm]
ECT09-B43 x-B43 • 01LD-32: L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] ECT09-B43 x 01LD-25: L tot = S max + 303
ECT09-B43 x 01LD-32: L tot = S max + 345

Weight of unit [kg] ECT09-B43 xx 01LD-25: kg = 13,7 + 0,016 × S max
ECT09-B43 xx 01LD-32: kg = 16,2 + 0,018 × S max

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

30 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 77
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits
• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Direct drive
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 5300 N
• Speed up to 1600 mm/s
General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box no, direct drive
Motor type brushless AC servo motor

Motor designation AKM53K-ANCNR-00

Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B53R01LD-2510
ECT09-B53R01LD-3220
ECT09-B53R01LD-3232

[N]
5300
2600
1500

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B53R01LD-2510
ECT09-B53R01LD-3220
ECT09-B53R01LD-3232

[mm/s]
450
1000
1600

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 25, 32

Screw leads3 [mm] 10, 20, 32

Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.
3 10 mm lead = diameter 25 mm. 20 and 32 mm leads = diameter 32 mm.

Precision Linear Actuators

31www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Speed vs. Load

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B53R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B53R01LD-3220
3: ECT09-B53R01LD-3232

F: load S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B53R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B53R01LD-32 x x

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector A5: ECT09-B53 • 01LD-25 = 15 mm, ECT09-B53 • 01LD-32 = 12 mm
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake

V: speed F: load
1: ECT09-B53R01LD-2510
2: ECT09-B53R01LD-3220
3: ECT09-B53R01LD-3232

Cover tube length (L) [mm] ECT09-B53 x 01LD-25: L = S max + 195
ECT09-B53 x 01LD-32: L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] ECT09-B53 x 01LD-25: L tot = S max + 303
ECT09-B53 x 01LD-32: L tot = S max + 344

Weight of unit [kg] ECT09-B53 xx 01LD-25: kg = 17,2 + 0,016 × S max
ECT09-B53 xx 01LD-32: kg = 19,6 + 0,018 × S max

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

32 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Planetary Gear, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 77
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Planetary gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 10000 N
• Speed up to 160 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw

Gear box planetary gear

Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM43E-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B43R10LP-3220
ECT09-B43R05LP-3220

[N]
10000
5000

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B43R10LP-3220
ECT09-B43R05LP-3220

[mm/s]
80
160

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70

Screw diameters [mm] 32

Screw leads [mm] 20

Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

33www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Planetary Gear, Inline B43 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B43R xx LP-3220

F: load S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B43R xx LP-3220

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake

Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 456

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 19,2 + 0,018 × S max

V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-B43R10LP-3220
2: ECT09-B43R05LP-3220

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

34 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 77
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Planetary gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 1500 mm
• Load up to 20000 N
• Speed up to 270 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Profile size (w × h) 90 × 92 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box planetary gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM53K-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT90
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 1500

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT09-B53R10LP-3220
ECT09-B53R05LP-3220

[N]
20000
13000

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT09-B53R10LP-3220
ECT09-B53R05LP-3220

[mm/s]
130
270

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 32
Screw leads [mm] 20
Backlash
Screw diameter = 25 mm
Screw diameter = 32 mm
[mm]
0,11
0,18
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

35www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT90
Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B53R xx LP-3220

F: load S: stroke length

1: ECT09-B53R xx LP-3220

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 230

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 486

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 24,8 + 0,018 × S max

V: speed F: load

1: ECT09-B53R10LP-3220
2: ECT09-B53R05LP-3220

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

36 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel IEC100 AC Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 78
» Mounting Options – see page 50

» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Three-phase, asynchronous AC motor with brake
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 13300 N
• Speed up to 1900 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130

Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm

Screw type ball screw
Gear box belt gear
Motor type asynchronous AC motor
Motor voltage 3 × 400 Vac

Motor power 3,0 kW

Motor current, nominal 6,1 A

Motor feedback no
Motor connection terminal box
Motor brake yes (230 Vac)
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • mounting options
• adapter options

Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130

Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-I10B03PB-4010
ECT13-I10B02PB-4010
ECT13-I10B03PB-4020
ECT13-I10B02PB-4020
ECT13-I10B01PB-4020
ECT13-I10B01PB-4040

[N]
13300
9400
6200
4200
1800
600

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed3
ECT13-I10B03PB-4010
ECT13-I10B02PB-4010
ECT13-I10B03PB-4020
ECT13-I10B02PB-4020
ECT13-I10B01PB-4020
ECT13-I10B01PB-4040

[mm/s]
175
210
300
420
950
1900

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70

Screw diameters [mm] 40

Screw leads [mm] 10, 20, 40

Backlash [mm] 0,21

Repeatability [± mm] 0,05

Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.
3 The maximum speed is based on a max. input frequency to the motor of 50 Hz.
Frequency inverters can provide higher frequencies thus higher speeds but that
may damage the actuator.

Precision Linear Actuators

37www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel IEC100 AC Motor

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm)
L: cover tube length
L tot: retracted length

Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4010
2: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4020
3: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4040

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4010
2: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4020
3: ECT13-I10B0 x PB-4040

Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 378

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 63,5 + 0,03 × S max

Speed vs. Load
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-I10B03PB-4010
2: ECT13-I10B02PB-4010
3: ECT13-I10B03PB-4020

= Overheating of the motor may occur if running at this speed continuously!

4: ECT13-I10B02PB-4020
5: ECT13-I10B01PB-4020
6: ECT13-I10B01PB-4040

Dimensions Projection
METRIC

38 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 78
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 15000 N
• Speed up to 440 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box belt gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM53K-CNCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B53R03PB-4010
ECT13-B53R02PB-4010
ECT13-B53R03PB-4020
ECT13-B53R02PB-4020

[N]
15000
10500
7000
5000

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B53R03PB-4010
ECT13-B53R02PB-4010
ECT13-B53R03PB-4020
ECT13-B53R02PB-4020

[mm/s]
160
220
320
440

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40

Screw leads [mm] 10, 20

Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

39www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B53R x 3PB-4010
2: ECT13-B53R x 3PB-4020

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-B53R x 3PB-4010
2: ECT13-B53R x 3PB-4020
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293
Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 378

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 39,9 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B53R03PB-4010
2: ECT13-B53R02PB-4010
3: ECT13-B53R03PB-4020
4: ECT13-B53R02PB-4020

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

40 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel B63 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 78
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Belt gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 21500 N
• Speed up to 440 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box belt gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor

Motor designation AKM63K-ANCNR-00

Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B63R03PB-4010
ECT13-B63R02PB-4010
ECT13-B63R03PB-4020
ECT13-B63R02PB-4020

[N]
21500
15500
10500
7500

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B63R03PB-4010
ECT13-B63R02PB-4010
ECT13-B63R03PB-4020
ECT13-B63R02PB-4020

[mm/s]
160
220
320
440
Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40
Screw leads [mm] 10, 20
Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

41www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Parallel B63 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B63R x 3PB-4010
2: ECT13-B63R x 3PB-4020

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-B63R x 3PB-4010
2: ECT13-B63R x 3PB-4020
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293
Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 378

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 43,6 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B63R03PB-4010
2: ECT13-B63R02PB-4010
3: ECT13-B63R03PB-4020
4: ECT13-B63R02PB-4020

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

42 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 79
» Mounting Options – see page 50

» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Direct drive
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 4900 N
• Speed up to 2000 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box no, direct drive
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM53K-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B53R01LD-4010
ECT13-B53R01LD-4020
ECT13-B53R01LD-4040

[N]
4900
2250
700

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B53R01LD-4010
ECT13-B53R01LD-4020
ECT13-B53R01LD-4040

[mm/s]
400
1000
2000

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40
Screw leads [mm] 10, 20, 40
Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

43www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Direct Drive, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B53R01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B53R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B53R01LD-4040

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-B53R01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B53R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B53R01LD-4040
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 420

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 28,7 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B53R01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B53R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B53R01LD-4040

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

44 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Direct Drive, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 79
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Direct drive
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 7400 N
• Speed up to 2000 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box no, direct drive
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM63K-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B63R01LD-4010
ECT13-B63R01LD-4020
ECT13-B63R01LD-4040

[N]
7400
3400
1400

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B63R01LD-4010
ECT13-B63R01LD-4020
ECT13-B63R01LD-4040

[mm/s]
400
1000
2000
Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40
Screw leads [mm] 10, 20, 40
Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

45www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Direct Drive, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B63S(R)01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B63R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B63R01LD-4040

F: load S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B63R01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B63R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B63R01LD-4040

Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 430

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 32,8 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B63R01LD-4010
2: ECT13-B63R01LD-4020
3: ECT13-B63R01LD-4040

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

46 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 79
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Planetary gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 38000 N
• Speed up to 200 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box planetary gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM53K-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B53R10LP-4010
ECT13-B53R05LP-4010
ECT13-B53R05LP-4020

[N]
38000
22500
11000

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B53R10LP-4010
ECT13-B53R05LP-4010
ECT13-B53R05LP-4020

[mm/s]
50
100
200

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40
Screw leads [mm] 10, 20
Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

47www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Planetary Gear, Inline B53 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B53R xx LP-4010
2: ECT13-B53R xx LP-4020

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-B53R xx LP-4010
2: ECT13-B53R xx LP-4020
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 557

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 33,9 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B53R10LP-4010
2: ECT13-B53R05LP-4010
3: ECT13-B53R05LP-4020

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

48 www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Planetary Gear, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor

» Ordering Key – see page 79
» Mounting Options – see page 50
» Adapter Options – see page 54
» Glossary – see page 80
Standard Features and Benefits

• Robust and reliable
• Brushless AC servo motor
• Planetary gear
• Ball screw
• Hard-chromed steel extension tube
• IP65 as standard
• Stroke up to 2000 mm
• Load up to 33000 N
• Speed up to 200 mm/s

General Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Profile size (w × h) 130 × 130 mm
Screw type ball screw
Gear box planetary gear
Motor type brushless AC servo motor
Motor designation AKM63K-ANCNR-00
Motor feedback resolver
Motor connection connector
Motor brake no, optional
Lubrication single point lubrication
Certificates CE
Options • motor brake (24 Vdc)
• mounting options
• adapter options
Performance Specifications
Parameter ECT130
Stroke length (S), maximum [mm] 2000

Maximum dynamic load (Fx)1
ECT13-B63R05LP-4010
ECT13-B63R05LP-4020

[N]
33000
16000

Maximum load (Fy, Fz)2 [N] 500
Maximum load torque (My, Mz) [Nm] 150

Maximum speed
ECT13-B63R05LP-4010
ECT13-B63R05LP-4020

[mm/s]
100
200

Operating temperature limits [°C] -20 – 70
Screw diameters [mm] 40
Screw leads [mm] 10, 20
Backlash [mm] 0,21
Repeatability [± mm] 0,05
Protection class, standard IP65
1 At a 100% duty cycle.
2 Value at full retraction – decreases as the actuator extends.

Precision Linear Actuators

49www.thomsonlinear.com

ECT130
Planetary Gear, Inline B63 AC Servo Motor
Performance Diagrams

Critical Speed vs. Stroke

Column Load Limit vs. Stroke
v: speed S: stroke length

1: ECT13-B63R xx LP-4010
2: ECT13-B63R xx LP-4020

F: load S: stroke length
1: ECT13-B63R xx LP-4010
2: ECT13-B63R xx LP-4020
Cover tube length (L) [mm] L = S max + 293

Retracted length (L tot) [mm] L tot = S max + 662

Weight of unit [kg] kg = 46,8 + 0,03 × S max

S max: maximum stroke (ordering stroke in mm) A1: power connector A4: with brake
L: cover tube length A2: resolver connector
L tot: retracted length A3: without brake
V: speed F: load

1: ECT13-B63R05LP-4010
2: ECT13-B63R05LP-4020

Speed vs. Load
Dimensions Projection
METRIC

50 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Mounting

Mounting Holes – Standard Feature on All Units (ordering code X)

All T and ECT models have mounting holes as standard.
However, if mounting feet type F are used, these holes
will be occupied by the attachment screws for the
feet. Note: The distances “B” and “D” can be different
depending on the diameter or lead of the unit screw.

A B C D E

T60 46 34,5 14 124,5 1 / 146,5 2 M8 × 10

T90 / ECT90 45 391 / 482 15 141 3 / 167 4 M12 × 18

T130 / ECT130 60 54 23 216 M16 × 28
1 T06-B2505, T06-B2525 2 T06-B2510, T06-B2550 3 T09-B25, ECT09-B x x x x x x x 25 4 T09-B32, ECT09-B x x x x x x x 32

T-slots and T-slot Bolts – Standard Feature on All Units

The T60, T90, T130, ECT90 and ECT130 models all have
T-slots running along the entire profile. T60 has two
T-slots (one on each side), while the other models have
four (two on each side). Suitable T-slot bolts can be
ordered using the part numbers in the table below.

A B C D

T60 21,8 26,4 2,55 3,4

T90 / ECT90 6,4 10,5 3,5 4,5

T130 / ECT130 10,5 16,5 6,0 9,0

ø D H

p/n

T60 M5 14 D312 221

T90 / ECT90 M6 18 D310 314

T90 / ECT90 M6 26 D310 311

T130 / ECT130 M10 28 D800 089

Precision Linear Actuators

51www.thomsonlinear.com

Fixed Mounting Feet (ordering code F)

Movable Mounting Feet Clamps (ordering code F)

The fixed mounting feet are available for units type
T90, ECT90, T130 and ECT 130 only. This option can be
mounted on the unit from the factory if stated in the
ordering key at order, or can be ordered separately using
the part number. When ordered separately, all necessary
screws to attach the feet are included. Note: The
distance “G” can be different depending on the screw
diameter of the unit.

The movable mounting feet clamp accessory is only
available for T60 units. This option can be mounted on
the unit from the factory if stated in the ordering key at
order, in which case you get four clamps, or they can
be ordered as separate pieces using the part number.
Normally you would need four clamps per unit. The
clamps fit into the T-slot running along each side of the
unit.

A B C D E F G p/n

T90 / ECT90 155 125 15 40 20 13 1411 / 1622 D606 225

T130 / ECT130 220 176 22 60 30 17 216 / D606 157

A B C D E F p/n

T60 109 87 9,7 25 20,8 6,5 D313 618

1 T09-B25, ECT09-B x x x x x x x 25 2 T09-B32, ECT09-B x x x x x x x 32

Options and Accessories
Mounting

52 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Mounting

Front Mounting Plates type (ordering code G)

The front mounting plates must be mounted from the
factory as a part of the assembly of the unit and cannot
be mounted afterwards by the customer.

A B C D E F G p/n

T60 120 100 10 56 14 7 75 D606 359

T90 / ECT90 150 126 12 72 16 9 95 D606 360

T130 / ECT130 205 180 12,5 110 20 11 140 D606 361

Precision Linear Actuators

53www.thomsonlinear.com

p/n

T60 trunnion kit D603 022

T60 trunnion bracket kit D603 030

T90 / ECT90 trunnion kit D606 030

T130 / ECT130 trunnion kit D606 155

The trunnion option can be mounted on the unit from the
factory if this is stated in the ordering key at order, or be
ordered separately using the part number. When ordered
separately, all necessary screws to attach the trunnions
to the unit are included. The position along the profile can
be adjusted freely by the customer. A trunnion bracket kit
is available for T60, which is ordered separately.

Trunnion type (ordering code T)

A B C D E F G H

T90 / ECT90 150 45 240 20f8 25 75 130 80

T130 / ECT130 210 53 316 35f8 30 93 180 110

Options and Accessories
Mounting

Trunnion kit for T60

Trunnion kit for T90, T130, ECT90, ECT130

Trunnion bracket kit for T60

54 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Adapters

Inside Thread (ordering code P and R)

Inside Thread (ordering code T, V and X)

The inside thread option comes mounted from factory if
this is stated in the ordering key at order. Possible types for
the different unit sizes depend on the ball screw diameter
of the unit, see “Ball screw diameter” in the table.

Ball screw diameter Type A B

T60 25 mm P 22 M16 × 2

T90 / ECT90 25 mm P 22 M16 × 2

T90 / ECT90 25, 32 mm R 24 M20 × 1,5

The inside thread option comes mounted from factory if
this is stated in the ordering key at order. Possible types for
the different unit sizes depend on the ball screw diameter
of the unit, see “Ball screw diameter” in the table.
Ball screw diameter Type A B

T130 / ECT130 40 mm T 45 M27 × 2

T130 / ECT130 40, 50 mm V 45 M33 × 2

T130 / ECT130 40 mm X 45 M30 × 2

Precision Linear Actuators

55www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Adapters

Outside Thread (ordering code N and Q)

The outside thread option comes mounted from factory if
this is stated in the ordering key at order. Possible types for
the different unit sizes depend on the ball screw diameter
of the unit, see “Ball screw diameter” in the table.

Ball screw diameter Type A B

T60 / T90 / ECT90 25 mm N 32 M16 × 1,5

T90 / ECT90 25, 32 mm Q 40 M20 × 1,5

Outside Thread (ordering code S and U)

The outside thread option comes mounted from factory if
this is stated in the ordering key at order. Possible types for
the different unit sizes depend on the ball screw diameter
of the unit, see “Ball screw diameter” in the table.

Ball screw diameter Type A B C

T130 / ECT130 40 mm S 54 M27 × 2 66

T130 / ECT130 40, 50 mm U 45 M33 × 2 57

56 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Adapters

Spherical Joint (ordering code J and K)

The spherical joint option can be mounted on the unit
from the factory if this is stated in the ordering key
at order, or can be ordered separately using the part
numbers. When ordered separately, all necessary
components to attach the spherical joints to the unit
are included. Note: When ordering a spherical joint
separately, make sure that the extension tube end has an
outside thread adapter to be able to mount it.

Type A B C D E F p/n

T60 / T90 / ECT90 1 J 76 97 42 16 15 21 D606 193 + D290 286

T90 / ECT90 2 K 90 115 50 20 18 25 D606 192 + D290 281
1 Only fits T60, T90 and ECT90 units with diameter 25 mm screw (T06xxxxxx25, T09xxxxxxx25 and ECT09-xxxxxxxx25)
2 Only fits T90 and ECT90 units with diameter 32 mm screw (T09xxxxxxx32 and ECT09-xxxxxxxx32)

Precision Linear Actuators

57www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Adapters

Spherical Joint (ordering code L and M)

The spherical joint option can be mounted on the unit
from the factory if this is stated in the ordering key
at order, or can be ordered separately using the part
number(s). When ordered separately, all necessary
components to attach the spherical joints to the unit
are included. Type M joints include a grease nipple.
Note: When ordering a spherical joint separately, make
sure that the extension tube end has an outside thread
adapter to be able to mount it.

Type L

Type M

Type A B C D E F p/n

T130 / ECT130 L 1 137 172 70 30 25 37 D606 191 + D290 287

T130 / ECT130 M 2 115 164 97 40 32 40 D606 159
1 To be able to mount a type L joint, the actuator must be equipped with a type S adapter (see page 55). This joint is not possible to mount on a T13xxxxxx50 type of actuator.
2 To be able to mount a type M joint, the actuator must be equipped with a type U adapter (see page 55).

58 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears

BS40 / BS50 Worm Gears

Dimensions

Gear A B C D E F

BS40 54 40 46 10 100 92

BS50 57 50 48 10 124 98

Compatibility

Unit BS40 BS50 IEC71B14 IEC80B14 IEC90B14 A L

T90 (T09xxxxxB32) • • 17 58

T90 (T09xxxxxB32) • • 17 68

T130 • • 17 78

T130 • • 17 88

T130 • • 17 98

The worm gear includes a gear, bell house and matching
coupling but no adaptor flange. The worm gear is ordered using
the ordering keys on the right page. The adaptor flange is ordered
separately using the part numbers below as there are different
adaptor flanges depending on the type of unit being used.

Adaptor flange

Adaptor Flanges

Unit p/n

T90 (T09xxxxxB32) D606 227

T130 D606 187

Precision Linear Actuators

59www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
BS40 / BS50 Worm Gears
Dimensions
Gear A B C D E F
BS40 54 40 46 10 100 92
BS50 57 50 48 10 124 98
Compatibility
Unit BS40 BS50 IEC71B14 IEC80B14 IEC90B14 A L
T90 (T09xxxxxB32) • • 17 58
T90 (T09xxxxxB32) • • 17 68
T130 • • 17 78
T130 • • 17 88
T130 • • 17 98

BS40

Ordering Key

1 2 3

BS40 -10 -71

1. Type and size of worm gear
BS40 = BS40 worm gear

2. Gear ratio
-3 = 3:1
-5,5 = 5,5:1
-7,5 = 7,5:1
-10 = 10:1
-15 = 15:1
-20 = 20:1
-24 = 24:1
-30 = 30:1
-40 = 40:1
-48 = 48:1
-60 = 60:1

6. Motor size
-71 = IEC71B14
-80 = IEC80B14

1. Type and size of worm gear
BS50 = BS50 worm gear

2. Gear ratio
-8 = 8:1
-10,5 = 10,5:1
-14 = 14:1
-21 = 21:1
-24 = 24:1
-32 = 32:1
-37 = 37:1
-42 = 42:1
-54 = 54:1
-64 = 64:1
-81 = 81:1

6. Motor size
-71 = IEC71B14
-80 = IEC80B14
-90 = IEC90B14

BS50 Ordering Key

1 2 3

BS50 -37 -90

60 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears

TBS40 Worm

Gear

Dimensions

Gear A B C D E F øG H øI J K

TBS40 54 40 46 10 100 125 14j6 45 65 M8 (4×) 25

Compatibility

Unit TBS40 IEC71B14 IEC80B14 A L

T60 / T90 (T09xxxxxB25) • • 32 58

T60 / T90 (T09xxxxxB25) • • 32 68

The worm gear is installed directly to the unit and requires no
intermediate coupling between the two. To install the gear to
the motor, a bell house flange must be used between the gear
and the motor. The bell house flange, which includes a matching
coupling, is ordered separately. A shaft cover can be ordered
to cover the second primary shaft on the gear in case it is not
being used.

Bell house flange
Shaft cover

Bell House Flange

Motor size p/n

IEC71B14 D701 011

IEC80B14 D701 015

Shaft Cover
Gear type p/n

TBS40 D701 020

Precision Linear Actuators

61www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
TBS40 Worm Gear
Ordering Key
1 2 3

TBS40 -3 -216

1. Type and size of worm gear
TBS40 = TBS40 worm gear

2. Gear ratio
-3 = 3:1
-5,5 = 5,5:1
-7,5 = 7,5:1
-10 = 10:1
-15 = 15:1
-20 = 20:1
-24 = 24:1
-30 = 30:1
-40 = 40:1
-48 = 48:1
-60 = 60:1

3. Fixed code
-216

62 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears

SB Worm Gear

Dimensions

Gear size A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U

SB030 40 55 81 54 5.5 M6 × 11 65 75 63 58 97 40 57 27 44 6.5 30 55h8 32 44 56

SB040 50 70 101 70 6.5 M6 × 8 75 87 78 73 121.5 50 71.5 35 55 6.5 40 60h8 43 60 71

SB050 60 80 121 80 7 M8 × 10 85 100 92 87 144 60 84 40 64 8.5 50 70h8 49 70 85

SB063 72 95 146 100 8 M8 × 14 95 110 112 106 174 72 102 50 80 8.5 63 80h8 67 85 103

SB075 86 112.5 174 120 10 M8 × 14 115 140 120 114 205 86 119 60 93 11.5 75 95h8 72 90 112

Unit and Gear Compatibility

Gear

Unit type SB030 SB040 SB050 SB063 SB075

T60 (T06SXXXXG25) •

T60 (T06SXXXXH25) •

T90 (T09SXXXXH25) •

T90 (T09SXXXXL32) • •

T130 (T13SXXXXL40) •

T130 (T13SXXXXK50) •

The worm gear is installed to the unit using a unit type and
gear-size-specific adapter flange. No intermediate coupling is
needed. The gear mounts directly to the motor and no coupling,
bell house or adaptor flange is required. An optional rear clevis
can be mounted to the gear by using a rear clevis adaptor flange.
This can be ordered as a package either unmounted or mounted
to the unit, or as separate items.

SB030 SB040, SB050, SB063, SB075

Precision Linear Actuators

63www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
SB Worm Gear

Gear, Gear Ratio and Motor Compatibility

Gear Ratio [ i ]

Gear size Motor size 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100

SB030 IEC56B14 • • • • • • • • • • •

IEC63B14 • • • • • • • • •

SB040 IEC63B14 • • • • • • • • • • • •

IEC71B14 • • • • • • • •

SB050 IEC71B14 • • • • • • • • • • •

IEC80B14 • • • • • • •

SB063 IEC71B14 • • • • •

IEC80B14 • • • • • • • • •

IEC90B14 • • • • • •

SB075 IEC80B14 • • • • • • • •

IEC90B14 • • • • • • •

IEC100/112B14 • • •

Ordering Key

1 2 3 4 5

SB030-06G -7.5 -63 -M -C
1. Worm gear type, size and unit compatibility
SB030-06G = SB030, T06SXXXXG25
SB040-06H = SB040, T06SXXXXH25
SB040-09H = SB040, T09SXXXXH25
SB050-09L = SB050, T09SXXXXL32
SB063-09L = SB063, T09SXXXXL32
SB063-13L = SB063, T13SXXXXL40
SB075-13K = SB075, T13SXXXXK50

2. Gear ratio
-5 = 5:1
-7.5 = 7.5:1
-10 = 10:1
-15 = 15:1
-20 = 20:1
-25 = 25:1
-30 = 30:1
-40 = 40:1
-50 = 50:1
-60 = 60:1
-80 = 80:1
-100 = 100:1

3. Motor size
-56 = IEC56B14
-63 = IEC63B14
-71 = IEC71B14
-80 = IEC80B14
-90 = IEC90B14
-100 = IEC100/112B14

4. Mounting type
-M = gear mounted
to unit
-N = gear not
mounted to unit

5. Rear mounting
option
-X = no rear mounting
-C = rear clevis

64 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
SB Worm Gear

Gear to unit
adaptor flange

Gear to clevis
adaptor flange

Rear clevis

Gear to Unit Adaptor Flanges

Unit type Gear size p/n A [mm]

T60 (T06SXXXXG25 ) SB030 D321823 22

T60 (T06SXXXXH25) SB040 D321978 25

T90 (T09SXXXXH25) SB040 D321978 25

T90 (T09SXXXXL32) SB050 D322130 56

T90 (T09SXXXXL32) SB063 D322050 56

T130 (T13SXXXXL40) SB063 D322135 56

T130 (T13SXXXXK50) SB075 D322118 56

Gear to Rear Clevis Adaptor Flanges

Gear size p/n B [mm]

SB030 D390075 14

SB040 D322132 14

SB050 D322124 15

SB063 D322125 15

SB075 D322119 25

Precision Linear Actuators

65www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
SB Worm Gear

Rear Clevis

Gear size p/n CB [mm] ØCD [mm] E [mm] FL [mm] L [mm] MR [mm] S TG [mm]

SB030 D701982 40 16 75 32 ± 0.2 21 16 M8 × 20 56.5 ± 0.2

SB040 D702169 50 16 95 36 ± 0.2 22 16 M10 × 25 72 ± 0.2

SB050, SB063 D702170 70 25 140 50 ± 0.3 30 25 M12 × 25 110 ± 0.3

SB075 D606576 90 30 180 55 ± 0.2 35 25 M16 × 30 140 ± 0.2

66 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears

BGM Belt Gear

Dimensions

Gear A B C D øE F G H I J

BGM06 72,5 50 152 95 16 H9 82 98 – 40 70

BGM09 118,7 52 255 140 20 H9 95 115 60 – –

BGM41 155,2 70 305 165 25 H9 122 147 70 – –

BGM81 200 73 399 224 30 H9 134 159 90 90H14 170

BGM06/09/41/81 – NO CLEVIS OPTION BGM09/41/81 – CLEVIS OPTION TYPE S BGM06/81 – CLEVIS OPTION TYPE R

The belt gear comes in parts and is assembled and mounted to
the unit and motor by the customer.

Technical Data

Gear i nmax [rpm] Mmax [Nm] h J [kgm2] Weight [kg]
BGM06 1:1 4000 2,1 0,85 0,000076 1,6

BGM06 2:1 4000 3,4 0,85 0,000100 1,7

BGM09 1,04:1 4000 3,3 0,85 0,000102 2

BGM09 1,85:1 4000 3,3 0,85 0,000112 2,1

BGM09 2,85:1 4000 3,3 0,85 0,000213 2,5

BGM41 1:1 4000 16,6 0,85 0,000438 3,4

BGM41 2:1 4000 9,7 0,85 0,000342 3,7

BGM41 3:1 4000 9,7 0,85 0,000583 4,6

BGM81 1:1 4000 32 0,85 0,000836 12,1

BGM81 2,25:1 4000 30 0,85 0,001051 12,9

BGM81 3,13:1 4000 28 0,85 0,001439 14
i = gear ratio, nmax = max. input speed, Mmax = max. input torque, h = efficiency factor, J = inertia

Precision Linear Actuators

67www.thomsonlinear.com

Dimensions
Gear A B C D øE F G H I J
BGM06 72,5 50 152 95 16 H9 82 98 – 40 70
BGM09 118,7 52 255 140 20 H9 95 115 60 – –
BGM41 155,2 70 305 165 25 H9 122 147 70 – –
BGM81 200 73 399 224 30 H9 134 159 90 90H14 170
Options and Accessories
Flanges and Gears
BGM Belt Gear

BGM Compatibility
Gear T60 T90 (T09-B25) T90 (T09-B32) T130

BGM06 •

BGM09 • •

BGM41 • • •

BGM81 •

BGM Ordering Key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BGM09 -2 -CC 063 P 09A X +XX

1. Type and size of belt gear
BGM06 = BGM belt gear size 06
BGM09 = BGM belt gear size 09
BGM41 = BGM belt gear size 41
BGM81 = BGM belt gear size 81

2. Gear ratio
-1 = see table below
-2 = see table below
-3 = see table below

3. Type of couplings
-CC = conical couplings

4. Motor size compatibility 1

063 = IEC 63 B14
071 = IEC 71 B14
080 = IEC 80 B14
090 = IEC 90 B14
100 = IEC 100/121 B14
S80 = servo motor size 80
S95 = servo motor size 95
A20 = servo motor size A200
AK3 = servo motor type AKM 3
AK4 = servo motor type AKM 4
AK5 = servo motor type AKM 5
AK6 = servo motor type AKM 6

5. Type of mounting
P = standard

6. Compatible unit
T06 = T60
09A = T90 (T09-B25)
09B = T90 (T09-B32)
130 = T130

7. Clevis option compatibility
X = no clevis option
S = clevis option type S
R = clevis option type R

8. Protection
+XX = standard
+S1 = wash down protection

(1) This is only a selection of all motors that fit the gears. Please contact customer support to see if your preferred motor fits the gear.

Gear
ratio
code

Belt gear type

BGM06 BGM09 BGM41 BGM81

-1 1:1 1,04:1 1:1 1:1

-2 2:1 1,85:1 2:1 2,25:1

-3 – 2,85:1 3:1 3,13:1

Motor
code

Belt gear type
BGM06 BGM09 BGM41 BGM81

063 •

071 • •

080 •

090 • •

100 •

S80 • •

S95

A20 • •

AK3 •

AK4 • •

AK5 •

AK6 •

Unit
code

Belt gear type
BGM06 BGM09 BGM41 BGM81

T06 • •

09A • •

09B •

130 • •

Clevis
code

Belt gear typ

BGM06 BGM09 BGM41 BGM81

X • • • •

S • • •

R • •

68 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Motors

Three-Phase AC Induction Motor without Brake

Dimensions

Motor L AC HD M N P S T TBH TBS TBW D E F G DH KK

MS56B-x 196 117 100 65 50 80 M5 2.5 94 12 94 9 20 3 7.2 M3 1 × M16

MS63B-x 220 130 108 75 60 90 M5 2.5 80 22.5 80 11 23 4 8.5 M4 1 × M16

MS71B-x 241 147 115 85 70 105 M6 2.5 80 28 80 14 30 5 11 M5 1 × M20

T3A80B-x 277 158 129 100 80 120 M6 3.0 97 20.5 105 19 40 6 15.5 M6 1 × M20

T3A90L-x 337 177 138 115 95 140 M8 3.0 97 22.5 105 24 50 8 20 M8 1 × M20

T3A100LA-x 380 200 158 130 110 160 M8 3.5 118 32 112 28 60 8 24 M10 1 × M20

T3A112M-x 405 220 168 130 110 160 M8 3.5 118 32 112 28 60 8 24 M10 2 × M25

Performance

Motor IEC Size (poles) p/n
Power
[kW]

Speed
[rpm]

Current @
400 VAC [A]

Torque
[Nm]

Inertia
[kgm²]

Weight
[kg]

MS56B-2 IEC56B14 (2) D700656 0.12 2730 0.4 0.42 0.00012 3.2

MS63B-2 IEC63B14 (2) D700640 0.25 2750 0.71 0.88 0.00016 4.4

MS71B-2 IEC71B14 (2) D700645 0.55 2760 1.42 1.9 0.00042 6.1

T3A80B-2 IEC80B14 (2) D700667 1.1 2890 2.4 3.6 0.0011 10

T3A90L-2 IEC90B14 (2) D700668 2.2 2910 4.4 7.3 0.0027 16

T3A100LA-2 IEC100B14 (2) D700669 3 2910 5.7 9.8 0.0047 24

T3A112M-2 IEC112B14 (2) D700670 4 2920 7.3 13.1 0.0066 30

MS56B-4 IEC56B14 (2) D700671 0.09 1320 0.43 0.64 0.00020 3.3

MS63B-4 IEC63B14 (4) D700637 0.18 1350 0.68 1.3 0.00032 4.3

MS71B-4 IEC71B14 (4) D700639 0.37 1370 1.11 2.6 0.00081 6.2

T3A80B-4 IEC80B14 (4) D700672 0.75 1430 1.9 5.0 0.0023 11

T3A90L-4 IEC90B14 (4) D700673 1.5 1440 3.6 9.9 0.0042 18

T3A100LB-4 IEC100B14 (4) D700674 3 1450 6.3 19.8 0.0096 28

T3A112M-4 B14 IEC112B14 (4) D700620 4 1450 7.9 26.3 0.0126 32

Precision Linear Actuators

69www.thomsonlinear.com

Dimensions
Motor L AC HD M N P S T TBH TBS TBW D E F G DH KK
MS56B-x 196 117 100 65 50 80 M5 2.5 94 12 94 9 20 3 7.2 M3 1 × M16
MS63B-x 220 130 108 75 60 90 M5 2.5 80 22.5 80 11 23 4 8.5 M4 1 × M16
MS71B-x 241 147 115 85 70 105 M6 2.5 80 28 80 14 30 5 11 M5 1 × M20
T3A80B-x 277 158 129 100 80 120 M6 3.0 97 20.5 105 19 40 6 15.5 M6 1 × M20
T3A90L-x 337 177 138 115 95 140 M8 3.0 97 22.5 105 24 50 8 20 M8 1 × M20
T3A100LA-x 380 200 158 130 110 160 M8 3.5 118 32 112 28 60 8 24 M10 1 × M20
T3A112M-x 405 220 168 130 110 160 M8 3.5 118 32 112 28 60 8 24 M10 2 × M25
Performance
Motor IEC Size (poles) p/n
Power
[kW]
Speed
[rpm]
Current @
400 VAC [A]
Torque
[Nm]
Inertia
[kgm²]
Weight
[kg]
MS56B-2 IEC56B14 (2) D700656 0.12 2730 0.4 0.42 0.00012 3.2
MS63B-2 IEC63B14 (2) D700640 0.25 2750 0.71 0.88 0.00016 4.4
MS71B-2 IEC71B14 (2) D700645 0.55 2760 1.42 1.9 0.00042 6.1
T3A80B-2 IEC80B14 (2) D700667 1.1 2890 2.4 3.6 0.0011 10
T3A90L-2 IEC90B14 (2) D700668 2.2 2910 4.4 7.3 0.0027 16
T3A100LA-2 IEC100B14 (2) D700669 3 2910 5.7 9.8 0.0047 24
T3A112M-2 IEC112B14 (2) D700670 4 2920 7.3 13.1 0.0066 30
MS56B-4 IEC56B14 (2) D700671 0.09 1320 0.43 0.64 0.00020 3.3
MS63B-4 IEC63B14 (4) D700637 0.18 1350 0.68 1.3 0.00032 4.3
MS71B-4 IEC71B14 (4) D700639 0.37 1370 1.11 2.6 0.00081 6.2
T3A80B-4 IEC80B14 (4) D700672 0.75 1430 1.9 5.0 0.0023 11
T3A90L-4 IEC90B14 (4) D700673 1.5 1440 3.6 9.9 0.0042 18
T3A100LB-4 IEC100B14 (4) D700674 3 1450 6.3 19.8 0.0096 28

T3A112M-4 B14 IEC112B14 (4) D700620 4 1450 7.9 26.3 0.0126 32

Options and Accessories
Motors

Three-Phase AC Induction Motor with Brake

Dimensions

Motor L AC HD M N P S T TBH TBS TBW D E F G KK

MSBCCL63B-x 265 121 106 75 60 90 M5 2.5 94 14 94 11 23 4 8.5 1 × M16

MSBCCL71B-x 287 139 113 85 70 105 M6 2.5 94 20 94 14 30 5 11 1 × M20

MSBCCL80B-x 340 156 131 100 80 120 M6 3.0 105 27 105 19 40 6 15.5 1 × M20

MSBCCL90L-x 381 175 138 115 95 140 M8 3.0 105 30 105 24 50 8 20 1 × M20

MSBCCL100L-x 434 196 148 130 110 160 M8 3.5 105 26 105 28 60 8 24 2 × M20

MSBCCL112M-x 465 221 166 130 110 160 M8 3.5 112 32 112 28 60 8 24 2 × M25

Performance

Motor IEC Size (poles) p/n
Power
[kW]

Speed
[rpm]
Current @
400 VAC [A]
Torque
[Nm]

Holding
brake

torque [Nm]

Inertia
[kgm²]
Weight
[kg]

MSBCCL63B-2 IEC63B14 (2) D700643 0.25 2710 0.71 0.88 4 0.00021 5.5

MSBCCL71B-2 IEC71B14 (2) D700627 0.55 2760 1.42 1.9 4 0.00056 7.1

MSBCCL80B-2 IEC80B14 (2) D700634 1.1 2770 2.51 3.6 8 0.00131 12

MSBCCL90L-2 IEC90B14 (2) D700649 2.2 2840 4.61 7.3 14 0.00309 18

MSBCCL100L-2 IEC100B14 (2) D700650 3 2840 6.03 9.8 23 0.00574 27

MSBCCL112M-2 IEC112B14 (2) D700675 4 2880 7.88 13.1 60 0.00795 33

MSBCCL63B-4 IEC63B14 (2) D700654 0.18 1350 0.68 1.3 4 0.00037 5.3

MSBCCL71B-4 IEC71B14 (2) D700614 0.37 1370 1.11 2.6 6 0.00095 7.2

MSBCCL80B-4 IEC80B14 (4) D700676 0.75 1380 1.9 5.0 12 0.00251 11.8

MSBCCL90L-4 IEC90B14 (4) D700619 1.5 1400 3.45 9.9 23 0.00459 17.3

MSBCCL100LB-4 IEC100B14 (4) D700677 3 1420 6.5 19.8 46 0.01064 29

MSBCCL112M-4 IEC112B14 (4) D700678 4 1430 8.3 26.3 60 0.01395 37

70 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Sensors

Magnetic Sensors Option

The magnetic sensors are mounted directly in the sensor slots on
both sides of the profile of the units. They require no additional
mounting bracket. The sensor is fixed in position by two M3 size
locking screws (A1). The cable (A2) is molded into the sensor. Up
to nine normally open and nine normally closed sensors can be
ordered to the unit using the ordering key. These sensors will be
shipped with the unit but not mounted to the unit. Extra sensors
can be ordered using the part numbers.

Technical Specifications
Parameter

Max. power [W] 10

Max. voltage [Vdc] 100

Max. current [A] 0,5

LED indicator for switch no

Protection class IP67

Cable length [m] 3

Cable cross section [mm2] 2 × 0,15

Operating temperature limits [°C] -25 – 65

Weight [kg] 0,050

Part Numbers
Sensor type Suitable units p/n

Normally closed T60, T90, T130, ECT90,
ECT130

D535 071

Normally open T60, T90, T130, ECT90,
ECT130

D535 070

black

blue

black
blue

Precision Linear Actuators

71www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Environmental Protection

Environment Protection Option S1

The S1 environment protection option will enhance the unit’s
ability to withstand harsh environments where water, acids
and basic agents are present. All performance data and life
expectancy are the same as for standard units.

S1 – Washdown protection
Typical places where S1 is used include slaughter houses, dairy
and food plants, or in any other light washdown application.

Technical Specifications
Item S1

External screws, bolts,
nuts and washers

stainless class A2

Extension tube rod end standard class A2

72 www.thomsonlinear.com

Options and Accessories
Shafts and Flanges for Non-RediMount™ Units

T60
T90

T06SXXXXB25

T06SXXXXB/G/H25

T06SXXXXG25

T06SXXXXH25

A1: depth 20

A1: depth 18

T09SXXXXH25 T09SXXXXL32T09SXXXXB25

T09SXXXXB/H25 T09SXXXXB/L32

T09SXXXXB32

Precision Linear Actuators

73www.thomsonlinear.com

T130
Options and Accessories
Shafts and Flanges for Non-RediMount™ Units

A1: depth 20 * no key way on T13xxxxxB50

T13SXXXXL40 T13SXXXXK50T13SXXXXB40

T13SXXXXB/L40 T13SXXXXB/K50*

T13SXXXXB50

74 www.thomsonlinear.com

Ordering Keys
How to Order

When ordering a Thomson precision linear actuator, it is necessary to first
make sure that the proper sizing and selection has been done. The demand
on your system will impact your choice of stroke length, profile size, belt or
screw drive, environmental protection demands, etc.

The load and speed demand will tell you the configuration of gearboxes,
drive shafts and motor attachment accessories that are necessary. You will
also need to evaluate what accessories and options are necessary.

Thomson will assist you in the sizing and selection work and determining of
part numbers, but it is important that you are aware of the demands of your
specific application in order to enable us to supply you with the correct unit.

On the following pages you will find the ordering keys for the different T and
ECT Series precision linear actuators shown in earlier pages. These keys are
self-explanatory and by following the examples, you can quickly and easily
learn about the different options and versions available. Please also visit
www.thomsonlinear.com where you can find information and CAD drawings
that make the selection, ordering and design process much easier. Please
contact us for further support.

Precision Linear Actuators

75www.thomsonlinear.com

T60, T90 and T130
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

T09 LX GB8 B 3210 -00750 X R XX

1. Type of unit
T06 = T60 unit
T09 = T90 unit
T13 = T130 unit

2. Transmission type
LX = inline style, directly coupled, RediMount flange
SX = inline style, directly coupled, no RediMount flange

3. RediMount motor ID code
XXX = for units without RediMount flange
v v w = alphanumeric motor code for suitable RediMount flange when
motor is known ??
9 9 9 = code used when motor is unknown

4. Drive shaft type
B = standard (for SX units with standard shaft and all LX units)
G = shaft for SB030 worm gear (only possible on T06SXXXXx25xx units)
H = shaft for SB040 worm gear (only possible on T06SXXXXx25xx and
T09SXXXXx25xx units)
K = shaft for SB075 worm gear (only possible on T13SXXXXx5010 units)
L = shaft for SB050 (only possible on T09SXXXXx32xx) and SB063 (only
possible on T09SXXXXx32xx and T13SXXXXx40xx)

5. Screw type, diameter, lead
2505 = ballscrew, 25 mm, 5 mm (only possible for T06 and T09 units)
2510 = ballscrew, 25 mm, 10 mm (only possible for T06 and T09 units)
2525 = ballscrew, 25 mm, 25 mm (only possible for T06 and T09 units)
2550 = ballscrew, 25 mm, 50 mm (only possible for T06 units)
3210 = ballscrew, 32 mm, 10 mm (only possible for T09 units)
3220 = ballscrew, 32 mm, 20 mm (only possible for T09 units)
3232 = ballscrew, 32 mm, 32 mm (only possible for T09 units)
4010 = ballscrew, 40 mm, 10 mm (only possible for T13 units)
4020 = ballscrew, 40 mm, 20 mm (only possible for T13 units)
4040 = ballscrew, 40 mm, 40 mm (only possible for T13 units)
5010 = ballscrew, 50 mm, 10 mm (only possible for T13 units)

6. Maximum stroke (Smax)
– x x x x x = distance in mm

7. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
F = mounting feet (movable for T60 and fixed for T90 and T130)
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

8. Adapter options
J = spherical joint ø16 mm (only possible for T06xxxxxx25 and
T09xxxxxx25)
K = spherical joint ø20 mm (only possible for T09xxxxxx32)
L = spherical joint ø30 mm (only possible for T13xxxxxx40)
M = spherical joint ø40 mm (only possible for T13xxxxxx50)
N = M16 × 1,5 outside thread (only possible for T06xxxxxx25 and
T09xxxxxx25)
P = M16 × 2 inside thread (only possible for T06xxxxxx25 and
T09xxxxxx25)
Q = M20 × 1,5 outside thread (only possible for T09xxxxxx32)
R = M20 × 1,5 inside thread (only possible for T09xxxxxx32)
S = M27 × 2 outside thread (only possible for T13xxxxxx40)
T = M27 × 2 inside thread (only possible for T13xxxxxx40)
U = M33 × 2 outside thread (only possible for T13xxxxxx40 and
T13xxxxxx50)
V = M33 × 2 inside thread (only possible for T13xxxxxx40 and
T13xxxxxx50)
X = M30 × 2 inside thread (only possible for T13xxxxxx40)

9. Protection option
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection

1 See below for the definition of drive flange type.

With RediMount (LX) Without RediMount (SX)

Ordering Keys
T60, T90 and T130

76 www.thomsonlinear.com

Ordering Keys
ECT90

ECT90 – Parallel IEC90 AC Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT09-I 09B02PB2510 -1500 X J 0 2 XX

1. Model and motor type
ECT09-I = ECT90 with IEC90 three phase AC motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
09B03PB2510 = 9750 N, 160 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

09B02PB2510 = 6500 N, 240 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

09B03PB3220 = 4800 N, 320 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

09B02PB3220 = 3100 N, 480 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

09B01PB3220 = 1600 N, 960 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

09B01PB3232 = 900 N, 1520 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm

4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
S = clevis
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

5. Adapter options
J = spherical joint ø16 mm
K = spherical joint ø20 mm
N = outside thread M16 × 1,5
P = inside thread M16 × 2
Q = outside thread M20 × 1,5
R = inside thread M20 × 1,5

6. Magnetic sensors N.C 3

y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)

7. Magnetic sensors N.O 3

z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)

8. Protection options 4

XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection

1 These models are only compatible with
adapter options J, N and P.

2 These models are only compatible with
adapter options K, Q and R.

3 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.

4 See page 73 for more information.

ECT90 – Parallel B43 or B53 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT09-B 53R03PB3220 -1340 S Q 3 0 S1

1. Model and motor type
ECT09-B = ECT90 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
53R03PB2510 = 9800 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 1

53R02PB2510 = 8000 N, 330 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 1

53R03PB3220 = 5900 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 2

43R03PB2510 = 5800 N, 140 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 1

53R02PB3220 = 3900 N, 670 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 2

43R02PB2510 = 3800 N, 210 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 1

43R03PB3220 = 2800 N, 270 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 2

43R02PB3220 = 1800 N, 420 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel 2

53S03PB2510 = 9800 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

53S02PB2510 = 8000 N, 330 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

53S03PB3220 = 5900 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

43S03PB2510 = 5800 N, 140 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

53S02PB3220 = 3900 N, 670 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

43S02PB2510 = 3800 N, 210 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 1

43S03PB3220 = 2800 N, 270 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

43S02PB3220 = 1800 N, 420 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel 2

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm
4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
S = clevis
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate
5. Adapter options
J = spherical joint ø16 mm
K = spherical joint ø20 mm
N = outside thread M16 × 1,5
P = inside thread M16 × 2
Q = outside thread M20 × 1,5
R = inside thread M20 × 1,5
6. Magnetic sensors N.C 3
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 3
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 4
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 These models are only compatible with
adapter options J, N and P.
2 These models are only compatible with
adapter options K, Q and R.
3 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.

4 See page 73 for more information.

Precision Linear Actuators

77www.thomsonlinear.com

Ordering Keys
ECT90

ECT90 – Direct Drive, Inline B43 or B53 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT09-B 53R01LD2510 -0800 T P 0 0 S1

1. Model and motor type
ECT09-B = ECT90 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
53R01LD2510 = 5300 N, 450 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline 1

53R01LD3220 = 2600 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline 2

43R01LD2510 = 2000 N, 410 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline 1

53R01LD3232 = 1500 N, 1600 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline 2

43R01LD3220 = 900 N, 820 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline 2

53S01LD2510 = 5300 N, 450 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline 1

53S01LD3220 = 2600 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline 2

43S01LD2510 = 2000 N, 410 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline 1

53S01LD3232 = 1500 N, 1600 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline 2

43S01LD3220 = 900 N, 820 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline 2

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm

4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

5. Adapter options
J = spherical joint ø16 mm
K = spherical joint ø20 mm
N = outside thread M16 × 1,5
P = inside thread M16 × 2
Q = outside thread M20 × 1,5
R = inside thread M20 × 1,5
6. Magnetic sensors N.C 3
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 3
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 4
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 These models are only compatible with
adapter options J, N and P.
2 These models are only compatible with
adapter options K, Q and R.
3 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.
4 See page 73 for more information.

ECT90 – Planetary Gear, Inline B43 or B53 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT09-B 43R10LP3220 -1205 X R 9 2 XX

1. Model and motor type
ECT09-B = ECT90 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
53R10LP3220 = 20000 N, 130 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
53R05LP3220 = 13000 N, 270 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
43R10LP3220 = 10000 N, 80 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
43R05LP3220 = 5000 N, 160 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
53S10LP3220 = 20000 N, 130 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
53S05LP3220 = 13000 N, 270 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
43S10LP3220 = 10000 N, 80 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
43S05LP3220 = 5000 N, 160 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm
4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

5. Adapter options
K = spherical joint ø20 mm
Q = outside thread M20 × 1,5
R = inside thread M20 × 1,5

6. Magnetic sensors N.C 1

y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)

7. Magnetic sensors N.O 1

z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)

8. Protection options 2

XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection

1 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.

2 See page 73 for more information.

78 www.thomsonlinear.com

Ordering Keys
ECT130

ECT130 – Parallel IEC100 AC Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT13-I 10B03PB4010 -1850 R V 1 0 S1

1. Model and motor type
ECT13-I = ECT130 with IEC100 three phase AC motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
10B03PB4010 = 13300 N, 175 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
10B02PB4010 = 9400 N, 210 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
10B03PB4020 = 6200 N, 300 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
10B02PB4020 = 4200 N, 420 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
10B01PB4020 = 1800 N, 950 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
10B01PB4040 = 600 N, 1900 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm

4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
R = clevis
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

5. Adapter options
L = spherical joint ø30 mm
M = spherical joint ø40 mm
S = outside thread M27 × 2
T = inside thread M27 × 2
U = outside thread M33 × 2
V = inside thread M33 × 2
X = inside thread M30 × 2

6. Magnetic sensors N.C 1
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 1
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 2
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.

2 See page 73 for more information.

ECT130 – Parallel B53 or B63 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT13-B 53R02PB4020 -2000 X U 0 0 XX

1. Model and motor type
ECT13-B = ECT130 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
63R03PB4010 = 21500 N, 160 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
63R02PB4010 = 15500 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
53R03PB4010 = 15000 N, 160 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
63R03PB4020 = 10500 N, 320 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
53R02PB4010 = 10500 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
63R02PB4020 = 7500 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
53R03PB4020 = 7000 N, 320 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
53R02PB4020 = 5000 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, no brake, parallel
63S03PB4010 = 21500 N, 160 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
63S02PB4010 = 15500 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
53S03PB4010 = 15000 N, 160 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
63S03PB4020 = 10500 N, 320 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
53S02PB4010 = 10500 N, 220 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
63S02PB4020 = 7500 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
53S03PB4020 = 7000 N, 320 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel
53S02PB4020 = 5000 N, 440 mm/s, belt gear, brake, parallel

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm

4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
R = clevis
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate

5. Adapter options
L = spherical joint ø30 mm
M = spherical joint ø40 mm
S = outside thread M27 × 2
T = inside thread M27 × 2
U = outside thread M33 × 2
V = inside thread M33 × 2
X = inside thread M30 × 2
6. Magnetic sensors N.C 1
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 1
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 2
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.
2 See page 73 for more information.

Precision Linear Actuators

79www.thomsonlinear.com

Ordering Keys
ECT130

ECT130 – Direct Drive, Inline B53 or B63 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT13-B 53R01LD4040 -1850 X S 1 1 S1

1. Model and motor type
ECT13-B = ECT130 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
63R01LD4010 = 7400 N, 400 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
53R01LD4010 = 4900 N, 400 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
63R01LD4020 = 3400 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
53R01LD4020 = 2250 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
63R01LD4040 = 1400 N, 2000 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
53R01LD4040 = 700 N, 2000 mm/s, direct drive, no brake, inline
63S01LD4010 = 7400 N, 400 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline
53S01LD4010 = 4900 N, 400 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline
63S01LD4020 = 3400 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline
53S01LD4020 = 2250 N, 1000 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline
63S01LD4040 = 1400 N, 2000 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline
53S01LD4040 = 700 N, 2000 mm/s, direct drive, brake, inline

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm
4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate
5. Adapter options
L = spherical joint ø30 mm
M = spherical joint ø40 mm
S = outside thread M27 × 2
T = inside thread M27 × 2
U = outside thread M33 × 2
V = inside thread M33 × 2
X = inside thread M30 × 2
6. Magnetic sensors N.C 1
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 1
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 2
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.
2 See page 73 for more information.

ECT130 – Planetary Gear, Inline B53 or B63 AC Servo Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ECT13-B 63R05LP4010 -0600 F L 0 5 XX

1. Model and motor type
ECT13-B = ECT130 with AC servo motor

2. Max. load, speed, gear type, brake and motor style
53R10LP4010 = 38000 N, 50 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
63R05LP4010 = 33000 N, 100 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
53R05LP4010 = 22500 N, 100 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
63R05LP4020 = 16000 N, 200 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
53R05LP4020 = 11000 N, 200 mm/s, planetary gear, no brake, inline
53S10LP4010 = 38000 N, 50 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
63S05LP4010 = 33000 N, 100 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
53S05LP4010 = 22500 N, 100 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
63S05LP4020 = 16000 N, 200 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline
53S05LP4020 = 11000 N, 200 mm/s, planetary gear, brake, inline

3. Stroke (S max)
– xxxx = distance in mm
4. Mounting options
X = no mounting option
F = mounting feet
T = trunnion
G = front mounting plate
5. Adapter options
L = spherical joint ø30 mm
M = spherical joint ø40 mm
S = outside thread M27 × 2
T = inside thread M27 × 2
U = outside thread M33 × 2
V = inside thread M33 × 2
X = inside thread M30 × 2
6. Magnetic sensors N.C 1
y = number of normally closed sensors (0 – 9)
7. Magnetic sensors N.O 1
z = number of normally open sensors (0 – 9)
8. Protection options 2
XX = standard
S1 = wash down protection
1 The sensors are shipped unmounted with
the unit.
2 See page 73 for more information.

80 www.thomsonlinear.com

Acceleration
Acceleration is a measure of the rate of speed change going from
standstill (or a lower speed) to a higher speed. The calculations,
which are used to develop the Load versus Speed diagrams for
each actuator, are based on an acceleration rate that is limited
by the maximum speed of the unit. Therefore, this value will be
different for all actuators. Please contact customer service if your
application is critical to which acceleration rate is acceptable or
needed. Also see “Deceleration”.

Accuracy
There are several types of accuracy and many different factors
that will affect the overall accuracy of a system. Also see
“Repeatability”, “Positioning Accuracy”, “Resolution”, “Lead
Accuracy” and “Backlash”.

AC Motor
There are several types of AC motors; all of which run on an applied
alternating current. Also see “Three-Phase AC Motor”.

AC Servo Motor
AC servo motor is an abbreviation for a brushless, synchronous
AC motor design. This type of design requires little mechanical
maintenance since no physical contact (no brushes and bars) is
used to commutate the motor. This extends the life of the motor and
reduces down time. Also see “Brushless AC Servo Motor”.

Adapter
The adapter on T and ECT actuators is the connection point for
the load and is situated at the end of the extension tube. There are
several types of adapters: 1) tapped hole, 2) threaded rod and 3)
spherical joint. Also see “Mounting”.

Anti-rotation Mechanism
An actuator with anti-rotation mechanism has a built-in feature that
prevents the extension tube from rotating if the tube is not attached
to any load. All T and ECT actuators have this feature.

Backlash
Backlash is the stack up of tolerances (play) within the leadscrew
assembly and gearing, which creates a dead band when changing
directions. The result is that the motor can rotate some before any
motion can be seen on the extension tube when reversing the
direction of the motor rotation. The backlash varies depending
of the actuator model, and the amount of backlash for each can
be found in the performance specifications. The backlash for ball
screw models will remain the same during its life time, while it will
increase slightly for acme screws. Direct-driven models normally
have less backlash because they do not incorporate any gearing.

Ball Screw
Ball screws (fig. a) are used on all T and ECT actuators. They are
highly efficient and can run up at 100% duty cycle. Also see “Duty
Cycle”.

Fig. a

Belt Gear
A belt gear consists of a timing belt that runs between two
pulley wheels of different diameter. The difference between the
diameters determines the gear ratio. Belt gears are quiet, have
medium accuracy, and require no maintenance. However, the belt
is susceptible to breakage under overload conditions.

Brake
Acme screws are inherently self-locking, while ball screws
are not. To prevent ball screw actuators from backdriving, the
actuator may need some type of motor brake depending on the
application. A brake can also be used to stop the actuator quickly
and safely in emergency situations. Precision linear actuators with
DC motors do not have optional brakes, so an alternative solution
must be sought. All asynchronous, three-phase AC motors come
equipped with an electrically released, fail-safe brake (optional
for brushless AC servo motors).

Brushless AC Servo Motor
A brushless AC servo motor has many advantages over DC and
asynchronous, three-phase AC motors. For a given power rating,
they are smaller and can typically travel at higher speeds and
acceleration rates (due to a lower rotor inertia). Unlike DC motors,
AC servo motors have no brushes for commutation; therefore,
they are almost maintenance free. Instead, they incorporate a
resolver feedback device that feeds a shaft-position signal to the
drive control for commutation. The drive control also converts the
resolver signal into a simulated encoder pulse train that can be
used to feed a positioning controller. Also see “ Three-Phase AC
Motor”,“Servo Motor” and “Servo Drive”.

Certificates
All T and ECT actuators sold in the EU are CE certified. Please
contact customer service if you need any other type of certificate.

Glossary
A – Ce

Precision Linear Actuators

81www.thomsonlinear.com

Column Load Limit
The column load limit is the maximum compression force that the
lead screw can handle before it becomes damaged (Fig. b). The limit
is a function of the screw diameter and the unsupported length of
the screw, which means that the limit will drop as the extension tube
extends. For some actuators this means that the allowed maximum
dynamic load found in the performance specifications can be higher
than the column load limit when the extension tube travel is beyond
a certain distance. In this case, either the load must be reduced to
the column load limit, the amount of used stroke must be reduced,
or you must select another actuator model that can manage the
column load at that stroke. The column load force limits can be
found in the “Column Load vs. Stroke” diagram on the product
pages for each actuator. Also see “Dynamic Load Rating”.

Fig. b

Controls
There are many types of programmable controls that can be used
to control the motion of the actuator. PLC, motion controls, robot
controls, CNC controls and industrial computers are just some of
them. Many types of servo drives have built-in (or as an expansion
card option) programmable motion control features. Thomson
offers a variety of combinations to serve your motion control
needs.

Cover Tube
The cover tube provides protection for the ball or acme screw
and provides protection and support for the extension tube. The
cover tube on T and ECT actuators are designed so that magnetic
sensors easily can be mounted to the outside of the tube. Also see
“Extension Tube” and “Magnetic Sensors”.

Critical Speed
All ball screws have a critical speed where the screw starts to
vibrate and eventually bend or warp the screw (Fig. c). The exact
limit is a function of how far out the extension tube is run and speed.
For some actuators this means that the allowed maximum speed
found in the performance specifications can be higher than the
critical speed when the extension tube travel is beyond a certain
distance. In this case, either the speed must be reduced to the
critical speed, the amount of stroke must be reduced, or you must
select another actuator model that can manage the speed at that
stroke. The critical speed limits can be found in the “Critical Speed
vs. Stroke” diagram on the product pages for each actuator. Also
see “Speed Rating”.

Fig. c

Customization
Even the most versatile standard actuator may not always suit
all applications. But whatever your need is, our engineers are
ready to help you to customize the actuators according to your
requirements. We build more exclusive actuators than anyone
in the business and have decades of experience in customizing
actuators to meet special needs.

Cycle
One cycle is one complete extension and retraction of the extension
tube.

Deceleration
Deceleration is a measure of the rate of speed change going from
a higher speed to a lower speed (or standstill). The calculations,
which are used to develop the Load versus Speed diagrams for
each actuator, are based on a deceleration rate that is limited
by the maximum speed of the unit. Therefore, this value will be
different for all actuators. Please contact customer service if your
application is critical to which deceleration rate is acceptable or
needed. Also see “Acceleration”.

Direct Drive
Direct drive means that there is no gearing between the motor and
the lead screw. Instead, the motor is connected to the lead screw
directly via a coupling.

Duty Cycle
on time
Duty cycle =
(on time + off time)

Example: 2,5 minutes on, 7,5 minutes off

2,5 min

(2,5 min + 7,5 min)
= 25% duty cycle

The duty cycle is a function of the load and the ambient
temperature. A higher ambient temperature and/or load will
affect the duty cycle negatively, while a lower temperature and/
or lower load will affect it positively. The duty cycles stated in
this catalog are all valid for a 10-minute period.

Glossary
Co – Du

82 www.thomsonlinear.com

Fig. d

Frequency Inverter
A frequency inverter (also called frequency converter) is a type
of motor drive that is used to control the speed, acceleration and
deceleration of three-phase AC motors. A frequency inverter does
that by changing the input frequency to the motor windings as the
rotational speed of a three-phase AC motor is dependent on the
frequency. Also see “Three-Phase AC Motor”.

Inertia
Inertia is the property of an object to resist speed changes and
is dependent on the shape and mass of the object. The inertia is
important when sizing and selecting and also when tuning a servo
system to optimum performance. Consult customer service for
more information.

Inline Motor
An inline motor is mounted in line with the cover tube.

Installation Instructions
Each actuator has an installation manual to answer typical
questions about mounting and wiring the actuators.

Lead Accuracy
Lead accuracy is a measure of how accurate the lead of a lead
screw is. For a lead screw with a lead of 25 mm, the screw should,
in theory, move the nut 25 mm per each revolution. In reality, there
will be a deviation between the expected traveling distance and
what is actually achieved. The deviation for a ball screw is typically
0,05 mm per 300 mm of stroke. Contact customer service for more
information. Also see “Accuracy”.

Lifetime Expectancy
The life-time expectancy is a function of many important factors,
including load, speed, duty cycle, ambient temperature and screw
type. To be able to accurately estimate the life-time expectancy,
applications must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
However, for most actuators, a travel life of at least 25 km under the
maximum dynamic load can be used as a general approximation.
Contact customer service for more information.

Glossary
Dy – Lif

Dynamic Load Rating
The dynamic load rating (Fx) is the maximum load the actuator can
move at a given speed. The relation between the dynamic load and
the speed can be studied in the Load versus Speed diagrams. For
some actuators, however, the column load limit will be exceeded if
the extension tube extends beyond a certain point. Also see “Load
Rating” “Forces” and “Column Load Limit”.

Encoder
Encoders provide a digital output signal in the form of a square-
shaped pulse train that can be used to determine the position of
the extension tube. The encoder signal in a servo motor system is
connected to the motion control so that it can control the servo
drive and hence close the position feedback loop. The servo
motors used on the precision linear actuators do not have an
encoder. Instead, they incorporate a resolver feedback device
that feeds a shaft-position signal to the drive control. The drive
control also converts the resolver signal into a simulated encoder
pulse train that can be used to feed a positioning controller. Also
see “Resolver”, Servo Motor” and Servo Drive”.

End-of-Stroke Switches
We strongly recommend the use of switches at the ends of
the actuator stroke to prevent the unit from running in to the
mechanical end stops. Keep in mind that the extension tube will
travel some distance (dependent of speed, load and actuator type)
before it comes to a complete stop. This means the end-of-stroke
switches must be placed before the mechanical end of stroke and
will reduce the available stroke length.

Extension Tube
The extension tube slides in and out of the actuator‘s cover tube
and is connected via the front adaptor to the load being moved or
positioned. Also see “Cover Tube”.

Extension Tube Side Load
The extension tube side loads (Fy and Fz) are the forces applied to
the sides of the extension tube. The maximum allowed side loads
can be found in the performance specifications for each actuator.
The stated side loads are only valid for a completely retracted
extension tube and will decrease as the extension tube extends.
Also see “Forces”.

Forces
The below figure (Fig. d) shows the definitions for the forces and
moments used in this catalog. Always use these definitions in any
communication with Thomson.

Precision Linear Actuators

83www.thomsonlinear.com

Linear Actuators
Actuators providing a linear thrust via an extension tube to lift,
lower, push, pull or position a load.

Load Rating
There are many types of load ratings that need to be considered.
Normally when you speak about the load, you refer to the load that
the extension tube will pull or push, which is the dynamic load.
But there may also be static, side, moment and column loads and
forces from acceleration, deceleration, gravity and friction that
are all equally important. Also see “Dynamic Load Rating”, “Static
Load Rating”, “Side Loads”,“Column Load Limit”, “Tension and
Compression Load”, “Acceleration” and “Deceleration”.

Magnetic Sensors
The magnetic sensors used in the precision linear actuators
consist of a reed switch that are molded into a plastic housing. In
the actuator, a magnet is mounted that travels back and forth with
the extension tube. The magnet triggers the magnetic sensors,
which are mounted on the outside of the cover tube. The sensors
come in both normally open and normally closed versions.

Motion Control
A motion control is a control that is dedicated to control the motion
of a servo motor. To be able to do this, the control must have inputs
that can receive the feedback signal, which typically is an encoder
signal (even if other devices such as potentiometers and resolvers,
can be used) and an output which gives the motion commands
to the servo drive. Motion controls can be stand-alone units or
integrated in to other control systems. Also see “Control”, “Servo
Motors and “Servo Drive”.

Motor Type
There are two types of electrical motors in different sizes used on
the precision linear actuators; three phase AC motors and brushless
AC servo motors. Also see Brushless AC Servo Motor” and “Three-
Phase AC motor”.

Mounting
The precision linear actuators can quickly and easily be mounted
using any of the available mounting and adapter options.
However, there are some things to consider when mounting the
actuator. When using the clevis type of mounting, solid mounting
pins should be used (avoid using roll- or spring-type mounting
pins). The mounting pins (or trunnions) should be parallel to each
other as shown below (Fig. e). It is also recommended to attach
the load so that the force acts along the axis of the actuator
(Fig. f). Any actuator using side-angel brackets, tapped holes or
mounting feet should be mounted so that the cover tube or the
extension tube does not bend or is subjected to bending forces
during standstill or operation.

Glossary
Lin – Po

Fig. e Fig. f

Mounting Options
To be able to mount a precision linear actuator, you must
select the appropriate mounting and adapter options for your
application. There are several different options to choose from
and you can define your choice by using the ordering keys or part
numbers. However, T and ECT actuators come with mounting
holes and T-slots that can be used.

Operating and Storage Temperatures
The operating temperature is the range in which the actuator may
be safely operated. All actuators can be stored or transported
at the same temperature as the operating temperature. Contact
customer support if the operating temperature will be exceeded
during storage or transportation.

Parallel Motor
A parallel motor is mounted parallel to the cover tube.

Planetary Gear
A planetary gear is a gear system that consists of one or more outer
gears (planet gears) rotating about a central (sun) gear. Typically,
the planet gears are mounted on a movable arm or carrier, which
itself may rotate relative to the sun gear. As a result, planetary gears
have the input and output shafts in line with each other with rotation
in the same direction. Planetary gears are robust, accurate and
comparably small but are more expensive than belt or helical gears.

Positioning Accuracy
Positioning accuracy is the error between the expected and actual
position and is the sum of all factors that will reduce the accuracy
(i.e. repeatability, backlash, resolution, lead accuracy, and the
accuracy of the motor, drive and motion control system). Some of
these factors, such as backlash and lead accuracy, can sometimes
be compensated for in the software of the motion control system
being used. Also see “Accuracy”.

84 www.thomsonlinear.com

Glossary
Pr – Sta

Servo Drive
A servo drive is an electrical device that controls the commutation
of a servo motor. Different types of servo motors require different
types of drives. To be able to run the system as a servo system, there
must also be a motion control that gives the commands to the servo
drive and some kind of feedback (encoder, potentiometer, etc) to
the control so that it can determine and adjust the speed and the
position of the motor (closed loop feedback). Some servo drives
have built-in motion controls. Also see “Servo Motor”, Brushless
AC Servo Motor” and “Controls”.

Servo Motor
A servo motor is a motor that works with a feedback device in
a closed loop configuration controlled by a motion control. Any
type of motor, can in principal work as a servo motor, but normally
when speaking about servo motors you refer to motors that are
specially designed to work in servo systems. Also see “Servo
Drive”, Brushless AC Servo Motor” and “Controls”.

Side Loads
See “Extension Tube Side Loads”.

Sizing and Selection
This catalog gives you an overview of what Thomson can
offer you and an indication of which products may suit your
applications. But in order to get the best solution, it is necessary
to know your specific application requirements and to carry
out detailed sizing and selection calculations. Please contact
customer service for further help.

Speed Rating
The Speed versus Load diagrams on each product page show the
maximum allowed speed at any given dynamic load, ranging from
no load to maximum allowed dynamic load. For some actuators,
however, the critical speed limit can be a limiting factor for the
maximum allowed speed if the extension tube extends beyond
a certain point. Also see “Load Rating” “Forces” and “Critical
Speed Limit”.

Static Load Rating
The static load rating is how much load the actuator will hold at
standstill. This value can be higher than the dynamic load rating
and depends on factors such as stroke length, column load rating,
gear type, and maximum holding force of the motor brake. Consult
customer service for more information. Also see “Load Rating”.

Protection Class
The protection class refers to the environmental rating of the
enclosure. The first digit applies to airborne contaminants, and
the second digit to water/moisture.
IP65: dust tight and protected against low-pressure water jets
from any direction.

Repeatability
Repeatability is the ability for a positioning system to return to a
location when approaching from the same distance, at the same
speed and deceleration rate. Some of the factors that affect the
repeatability are the angular repeatability of the motor, drive and
motion control system, system friction and changes in load, speed
and deceleration.

Resolution
Resolution is the smallest move increment that the system can
perform. Some of the factors that affect the resolution are the
angular repeatability of the motor, drive and motion control system,
system friction, the drive train reduction, the type and lead of the
lead screw and changes in load, speed and deceleration.

Resolver
A resolver is basically a type of rotary electrical transformer used
for measuring degrees of rotation and is commonly used on AC
servo motors as a feedback device to control the commutation
of the motor windings. The resolver is mounted to the end of a
motor shaft and when the motor rotates, the resolver will transmit
the position and direction of the rotor to the servo drive, which
then can control the motor. Most servo drives for AC servo motors
on the market today can convert the resolver signal in to a pulse
train (encoder signal simulation), which can be used by a motion
control to determine and control the position of the motor. Also see
“Encoder”, “Servo Drive”, “Servo Motor” and “Motion Control”.

RoHS Compliance
The RoHS directive stands for “the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment”.
This directive bans the placing on the EU market of new electrical
and electronic equipment containing more than agreed levels of
lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated
biphenyl (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame
retardants. All precision linear actuators, controls and accesso-
ries sold in the EU are RoHS compliant.

Service and Maintenance
Precision liner actuators only need to be lubricated. The interval
between the lubrications depends on how frequent and hard the
actuator works. The lubrication of the entire actuator is done at
one single point. No other service or maintenance is required.

Precision Linear Actuators

85www.thomsonlinear.com

Glossary
Str – Th

Stroke Length
The maximum stroke length for each actuator type can be found in
the performance specifications. The stroke length is the available
distance the extension tube can move from one mechanical
end to the other. Keep in mind that extra stroke length above
the application requirements will be needed to avoid hitting the
mechanical end stops. We also recommend the use of end of
stroke limit switches (both extension and retraction) to avoiding
running in to the mechanical ends by accident. Using end-of-
stroke limit switches requires some deceleration distance to be
added to the stroke so that the extension tube has time to stop
before running in to the ends. Exactly how much extra stroke you
need depends on many factors and needs to be determined for
each application. Also see “End-of-Stroke Limit Switches”.

Tension and Compression Load
A tension load tries to stretch the actuator, and a compression
load tries to compress the actuator (Fig. g). All precision linear
actuators can manage the same tension and compression loads.
Also see “Dynamic Load Rating”.

Fig. g

Load
Load

Three-Phase AC Motor
The three-phase AC motor is known under many names;
squirrel cage motor, induction motor, asynchronous motor and
asynchronous induction motor are a few. The three-phase AC motor
can be run directly from a three-phase source, in which case its
speed will be determined by the frequency and number of poles. The
typical nominal speed of a 2-pole motor is around 2850 rpm, a 4-pole
has half that speed and a 8-pole half of the 4-pole, etc. However,
when running the motor directly from a three-phase source, there
is no control of the speed, acceleration or deceleration. Instead,
the motor accelerates as fast as it can, depending of the load, to its
nominal speed. This puts stress on the mechanical components, if
they can manage it at all. A precision linear unit with a three-phase
AC motor is not designed to run directly from a three-phase source.
Instead, a frequency inverter must be used that can control speed,
acceleration and deceleration to keep these within the acceptable
limits. A three-phase motor is relatively cheap, very robust and

needs no maintenance. The downside is that even though it can be
controlled from a frequency inverter, it will never be as accurate as a
servo motor system. Especially at low speeds (below approximately
10 Hz), the motor will start to lose torque and may also become
overheated with time, as the internal fan mounted on the rotor will
rotate too slow to be able to cool the motor sufficiently for operation.
Using an external fan mounted to the back of the motor may solve
this problem but is an added cost and will also make the installation
larger. The speed at which overheating caution should be taken is
marked in the “Speed vs. Load” diagrams with a dashed line instead
of a continuous line (Fig. h). Also see “Frequency Inverter” and
“Motor Type”.

Fig. h

86 www.thomsonlinear.com

Application Data Form*
Submitted by: Phone: Date:

1. Company name 20. Do you need any special retracted length (cross hole c/c in mm)?

2. Street address 21. What kind of motor would you prefer?

3. City-state, zip 22. Is a holding brake required?

4. Contact name 23. Do you need any of the optional features of the actuator?

5. Phone 24. Do you need a matching drive to the actuator?

6. Fax 25. What are the accuracy requirements of the application?

7. E-mail 26. What are the environmental conditions (dusty, outdoors, wash down)?

8. What is the estimated annual volume? 27. What is the operation temperature range in Celsius?

9. What is the target price? 28. What is the duty cycle (on-time / on-time + off-time) in seconds?

10. What is the current or alternative solution? 29. Do you need any certificates (UL, CE, etc.)?

11. How much load is moved in Newton? 30. Do you require any print (dwg, dxf, faxed)?

12. How much load do you need to hold in Newton? 31. Describe any additional requirements (packaging, labeling, etc.)

13. How will the actuator be mounted (horizontal/vertical)?

14. Is the load trying to stretch or/and compress the actuator?

15. What speed do you want the actuator to move in mm/s?

16. What is the life of the unit in cycles (one cycle = extend and retract)?

17. What is the stroke length?

18. How will the actuator be mounted to the extension tube?

19. How will the actuator be mounted to the foundation?

* Please enter all fields in the form and send it and any drawings to customer service by mail or fax. See the back of the catalog for the nearest location.

Application Data Form
Worksheet

Precision Linear Actuators

87www.thomsonlinear.com

Application Data Form
Drawing/Notes

www.thomsonlinear.com

www.thomsonlinear.com

Precision_Linear_Actuators_CTUK-0003-07 | 20190402 TJ
Specifications are subject to change without notice. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of
this product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. © 2019 Thomson Industries, Inc.

EUROPE
United Kingdom
Thomson
Office 9, The Barns
Caddsdown Business Park
Bideford, Devon, EX39 3BT
Phone: +44 1271 334 500
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 7022 504 403
Fax: +49 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Via per Cinisello 95/97
20834 Nova Milanese (MB)
Phone: +39 0362 366406
Fax: +39 0362 276790
E-mail: sales.italy@thomsonlinear.com

Spain
Thomson
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

SOUTH AMERICA
Brasil
Thomson
Av. João Paulo Ablas, 2970
Jardim da Glória – Cotia SP – CEP: 06711-250
Phone: +55 11 4615 6300
E-mail: sales.brasil@thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO
Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: +1 540 633 3549
Fax: 1 540 633 0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

ASIA
Asia Pacific
Thomson
E-mail: sales.apac@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 805, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 606 1805
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson
c/o Portescap India Pvt Ltd
1 E, first floor, Arena House
Road no 12, Marol Industrial Area,
Andheri (E), Mumbai 400093 India
E-mail: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Phone: +81 6 6386 8001
Fax: +81 6 6386 5022
E-mail: csjapan@scgap.com

South Korea
Thomson
3033 ASEM Tower (Samsung-dong)
517 Yeongdong-daero
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, South Korea (06164)
Phone: + 82 2 6001 3223 & 3244
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

Electromechanical
Linear Actuator

s

Product Overview

2 1

WARNING — USER RESPONSIBILITY
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR

RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

• This document and other information from Parker-Hannifi n Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized
distributors provide product or system options for further investigation by users having technical expertise.

• The user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the fi nal selection of the system
and components and assuring that all performance, endurance, maintenance, safety and warning requirements of
the application are met. The user must analyze all aspects of the application, follow applicable industry standards,
and follow the information concerning the product in the current product catalog and in any other materials
provided from Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors.

• To the extent that Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors provide component or system options
based upon data or specifi cations provided by the user, the user is responsible for determining that such
data and specifi cations are suitable and suffi cient for all applications and reasonably foreseeable uses of the
components or systems.

3

Table of Contents

Parker Hannifin

………………………………………………………………………

4

Markets and Applications

…………………………………………………………

8

Technical Features

………………………………………………………………..

10

Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators

……………………………………….

13

ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder …………………………………………………………….

14

ETT- Electric Tubular Motor ……………………………………………………………………………….

20

OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide ……………………..

24

OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide …………..

2

7

Rodless Linear Handling Actuators

………………………………………….

31

HPLA – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheated Rollers …………………………………………… 3

2

HLE – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers …………………………………………….

34

OSP-E..B

HD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing and Roller Guide …………….

38

OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide ……………………………………

41

OSP-E..SB – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide………………………..

44

OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide ……………..

4

6

OSP-E..BV – Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide ……………………

48

LCB Compact Linear Actuator with Sliding Bearing ………………………………………………

52

LCR – Light Capacity Rodless Miniature Linear Positioner ……………………………………..

54

HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

……………………………………………………………

56

Precision Positioners

…………………………………………………………….. 6

5

XE – Screw Driven Positioner ………………………………………………………………………………

66

XR – Screw Driven Positioner ……………………………………………………………………………… 6

9

MX – Miniature Positioners ………………………………………………………………………………….

74

MX80M – Free Travel and Micrometer Driven Stages …………………………………………….. 78

4

Parker Hannifin

3

Parker Hannifin
The global leader in motion and control technologies

A world class player on a local stage

Global

Product Design

Parker Hannifin has more than
40 years experience in the design
and manufacturing of drives,
controls, motors and mechanical
products. With dedicated global
product development teams,
Parker draws on industry-leading
technological leadership and
experience from engineering teams
in Europe, North America and Asia.

Local Application Expertise
Parker has local engineering
resources committed to adapting
and applying our current products
and technologies to best fit our
customers’ needs.

Manufacturing to Meet
Our Customers’ Needs
Parker is committed to meeting the
increasing service demands that
our customers require to succeed
in the global industrial market.
Parker’s manufacturing teams
seek continuous improvement
through the implementation of
lean manufacturing methods
throughout the process. We
measure ourselves on meeting our
customers’ expectations of quality
and delivery, not just our own. In
order to meet these expectations,
Parker operates and continues to
invest in our manufacturing facilities
in Europe, North America and Asia.

Electromechanical
Worldwide Manufacturing
Locations
Europe
Littlehampton, United Kingdom
Dijon, France

Offenburg, Germany

Filderstadt, Germany

Milan, Italy

Asia
Wuxi, China
Jangan, Korea
Chennai, India

North America
Rohnert Park, California
Irwin, Pennsylvania
Charlotte, North Carolina
New Ulm, Minnesota

Local Manufacturing
and Support in Europe
Parker provides sales assistance
and local technical support through
a network of dedicated sales
teams and authorized technical
distributors throughout Europe.

For contact information, please
refer to the Sales Offices on the
back cover of this document or visit
www.parker.com

Offenburg, Germany

Littlehampton, UK

Milan, Italy

Dijon, FranceFilderstadt, Germany

2

Global Partnerships
Global Support
Parker is committed to helping
make our customers more
productive and more profitable
through our global offering of
motion and control products
and systems. In an increasingly
competitive global economy,
we seek to develop customer
relationships as technology
partnerships. Working closely with
our customers, we can ensure the
best selection of technologies to
suit the needs of our customers’
applications.

Parker Hannifin
The global leader in motion and control technologies and
systems

Electromechanical
Technologies for High Dynamic
Performance and Precision
Motion
Parker electromechanical
technologies form an important
part of Parker’s global motion and
control offering. Electromechanical
systems combine high
performance speed and position
control with the flexibility to adapt
the systems to the rapidly changing
needs of the industries we serve.

Parker Hannifin Corporation

With annual sales exceeding
$13 billion in fiscal year 2014,
Parker Hannifin is the world’s
leading diversified manufacturer of
motion and control technologies
and systems, providing precision-
engineered solutions for a wide
variety of mobile, industrial
and aerospace markets. The
company employs approximately
57,500 people in 50 countries around
the world.

Parker has increased its annual
dividends paid to shareholders for
58 consecutive fiscal years,
among the top five longest-running
dividend-increase records in the
S&P 500 index.
For more information, visit the
company’s website at
www.parker.com, or its investor
information website at
www.phstock.com.

Issue: 08/2014

53

Parker Hannifin
The global leader in motion and control technologies
A world class player on a local stage
Global Product Design
Parker Hannifin has more than
40 years experience in the design
and manufacturing of drives,
controls, motors and mechanical
products. With dedicated global
product development teams,
Parker draws on industry-leading
technological leadership and
experience from engineering teams
in Europe, North America and Asia.
Local Application Expertise
Parker has local engineering
resources committed to adapting
and applying our current products
and technologies to best fit our
customers’ needs.
Manufacturing to Meet
Our Customers’ Needs
Parker is committed to meeting the
increasing service demands that
our customers require to succeed
in the global industrial market.
Parker’s manufacturing teams
seek continuous improvement
through the implementation of
lean manufacturing methods
throughout the process. We
measure ourselves on meeting our
customers’ expectations of quality
and delivery, not just our own. In
order to meet these expectations,
Parker operates and continues to
invest in our manufacturing facilities
in Europe, North America and Asia.

Electromechanical
Worldwide Manufacturing
Locations
Europe
Littlehampton, United Kingdom
Dijon, France
Offenburg, Germany
Filderstadt, Germany
Milan, Italy

Asia
Wuxi, China
Jangan, Korea
Chennai, India
North America
Rohnert Park, California
Irwin, Pennsylvania
Charlotte, North Carolina
New Ulm, Minnesota
Local Manufacturing
and Support in Europe
Parker provides sales assistance
and local technical support through
a network of dedicated sales
teams and authorized technical
distributors throughout Europe.
For contact information, please
refer to the Sales Offices on the
back cover of this document or visit
www.parker.com
Offenburg, Germany
Littlehampton, UK
Milan, Italy
Dijon, FranceFilderstadt, Germany
2
Global Partnerships
Global Support
Parker is committed to helping
make our customers more
productive and more profitable
through our global offering of
motion and control products
and systems. In an increasingly
competitive global economy,
we seek to develop customer
relationships as technology
partnerships. Working closely with
our customers, we can ensure the
best selection of technologies to
suit the needs of our customers’
applications.
Parker Hannifin
The global leader in motion and control technologies and
systems
Electromechanical
Technologies for High Dynamic
Performance and Precision
Motion
Parker electromechanical
technologies form an important
part of Parker’s global motion and
control offering. Electromechanical
systems combine high
performance speed and position
control with the flexibility to adapt
the systems to the rapidly changing
needs of the industries we serve.
Parker Hannifin Corporation
With annual sales exceeding
$13 billion in fiscal year 2014,
Parker Hannifin is the world’s
leading diversified manufacturer of
motion and control technologies
and systems, providing precision-
engineered solutions for a wide
variety of mobile, industrial
and aerospace markets. The
company employs approximately
57,500 people in 50 countries around
the world.
Parker has increased its annual
dividends paid to shareholders for
58 consecutive fiscal years,
among the top five longest-running
dividend-increase records in the
S&P 500 index.
For more information, visit the
company’s website at
www.parker.com, or its investor
information website at
www.phstock.com.
Issue: 08/2014

64

Parker brings together the
technology and experience
required for continuous process
applications across many
industries. Electromechanical and
drive products combine application
specific functionality to ensure
precise speed control and reliable
performance. Parker combines
more than 30 years of application
experience with a global sales and
support network that help you
increase your machine availability.

Solutions to Improve Productivity, Increase
Flexibility and Save Energy
Process Productivity and Reliability

Converting machinery A
C

–
D

ri
ve

s

D
C

–
D
ri
ve
s

D
ir
e
c
t-

D
ri
ve

M

o
to

rs

S
e
rv

o
D

ri
ve

s

a
n

d
M

o
to
rs

Folding, gluing, stitching and collating   

Coating, laminating and foil stamping    

Slitting, cutting and rewinding    

Plastics processing machinery

Plastic extrusion  

Injection moulding   

Thermal forming   

Wire and cable

Wire and cable manufacturing   

Winding/unwinding   

Extrusion for wire and cable   

Printing Machinery

Web/sheetfed offset   

Flexo printing   

Gravure printing   

Shaftless printing   

Other industries

Paper machinery  

Sugar processing  

Steel production   

Construction materials  

Automotive test rigs   

Energy Efficiency and Clean Power
Parker has developed the technology to maximize the efficient use of energy in industrial, mobile and infrastructure
environments.

Hybrid Vehicle Technology
Now having adapted it’s technology
for use in hybrid and electric vehicles,
Parker offers solutions for:

• Electro Hydraulic Actuation

• Hybrid and Electric Vehicle traction

• Vehicle auxiliary systems

Energy-savings for pumps,
fans and compressors
Parker has the drive technology
to help you make significant
energy savings in the operation of
pumps, fans and compressors in
both industrial and infrastructure
applications, including:

• Commercial refrigeration

• Water and wastewater treatment

• Building automation

• Industrial processes

• Hydraulic systems

Power Generation and Conversion
Using proven inverter technology,
Parker has developed numerous
solutions for the conversion of energy
for commercial use from a variety of
sources, including wind, wave and
energy storage devices.

74
Parker brings together the
technology and experience
required for continuous process
applications across many
industries. Electromechanical and
drive products combine application
specific functionality to ensure
precise speed control and reliable
performance. Parker combines
more than 30 years of application
experience with a global sales and
support network that help you
increase your machine availability.
Solutions to Improve Productivity, Increase
Flexibility and Save Energy
Process Productivity and Reliability
Converting machinery A
C
–
D
ri
ve
s
D
C
–
D
ri
ve
s
D
ir
e
c
t-
D
ri
ve

M
o
to
rs
S
e
rv
o
D
ri
ve
s
a
n
d
M
o
to
rs
Folding, gluing, stitching and collating   
Coating, laminating and foil stamping    
Slitting, cutting and rewinding    
Plastics processing machinery
Plastic extrusion  
Injection moulding   
Thermal forming   
Wire and cable
Wire and cable manufacturing   
Winding/unwinding   
Extrusion for wire and cable   
Printing Machinery
Web/sheetfed offset   
Flexo printing   
Gravure printing   
Shaftless printing   
Other industries
Paper machinery  
Sugar processing  
Steel production   
Construction materials  
Automotive test rigs   
Energy Efficiency and Clean Power
Parker has developed the technology to maximize the efficient use of energy in industrial, mobile and infrastructure
environments.
Hybrid Vehicle Technology
Now having adapted it’s technology
for use in hybrid and electric vehicles,
Parker offers solutions for:
• Electro Hydraulic Actuation
• Hybrid and Electric Vehicle traction
• Vehicle auxiliary systems
Energy-savings for pumps,
fans and compressors
Parker has the drive technology
to help you make significant
energy savings in the operation of
pumps, fans and compressors in
both industrial and infrastructure
applications, including:
• Commercial refrigeration
• Water and wastewater treatment
• Building automation
• Industrial processes
• Hydraulic systems

Power Generation and Conversion
Using proven inverter technology,
Parker has developed numerous
solutions for the conversion of energy
for commercial use from a variety of
sources, including wind, wave and
energy storage devices.

5

Motion Control Systems for Total Production Flexibility

Parker’s electromechanical
automation customers enjoy total
production flexibility in their general
and precision motion control
applications. Complete packaged
linear positioning systems, coupled
to servo and stepper drives and
controls, enable our customers
to develop a complete motion
solution with one partner. Parker
provides the products for a wide
range of motion needs- power,
speed, travel, force-with easy to
use controls designed to work on
multiple control and communication
platforms. Additionally, Parker’s
products can be easily customized
to suit specific applications.

Assembly machinery M
e
c
h

a
n

ic
a
l

A
c
tu

a
to

rs

M
o

to
rs

a
n

d

G
e
a
rh

e
a
d

s
D
ri
ve
s

C
o

n
tr

o
ls

H
M

I

Pick and Place     

Lifting    

Transfer machinery     

Automotive industry
Body shop    

Paintshop applications     

Transfer machinery     

Packaging machinery
Primary, secondary, tertiary     

Handling machinery     

Food and Beverage processing machinery
Processing machinery    

Packaging machinery    

Handling machinery     

Material handling systems
Transfer systems     

Pick and place systems     

Material forming machinery
Presses    

Tube bending     

Die Casting    

Injection Molding / Plastic Extrusion    

Transfer Systems     

ePump (Variable Speed HPU)   

Machine tools
High Speed Servo Spindles 

Loader/Unloader    

Palletizing/Transfer     

Rotary/Tilting Tables 

Door Systems    

Semiconductor machinery
Front end processes     

Inspection machinery     

Packaging machinery     

Lithography    

Medical equipment
Device manufacturing     

Product packaging and dispensing     

Scanning equipment   

Pumps and analyzers  

Entertaiment
Theatre and studio automation    

Simulation and amusement rides   

8

Parker Electromechanical Actuators

Markets and Applications

Markets and Applications

Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Precision Actuators

Product ETH ETT OSP-E..SBR OSP-E..STR HPLA HLE OSP-E..B OSP-E..SB OSP-E..ST OSP-E..BV OSP-E..BHD OSP-E..BHD
(BH2)

LCB LCR HMR-S HMR-B XE XR MX

Description

High Force
Electro Thrust

Cylinder

Electric
Tubular Motor

Ball Screw

Actuator with
Internal Plain

Bearing

Guide

Trapezoidal
Screw

Actuator with
Internal Plain

Bearing Guide

Linear
Actuator

with Plastic-
Sheathed

Rollers

Linear
Actuator

with Plastic-
Sheathed

Rollers

Belt Actuator

with Internal
Plain Bearing

Guide

Ball Screw
Actuator

with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw

Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing

Guide

Vertical Belt
Actuator with
Integrated Ball
Bearing Guide

(z-axis)

Belt Actuator
with

Integrated
Roller Guide

Belt Actuator
with

Integrated
Ball Bearing

Guide

Compact
Linear

Actuator
with Sliding

Bearing

Light
Capacity
Rodless
Miniature

Linear

Positioner

Ball Screw
Actuator with

Integrated
Double

Ball Bearing
Guide

Belt Actuator
with

Integrated
Double

Ball Bearing
Guide

Screw
Driven

Positioner
Screw
Driven
Positioner

Miniature
Positioner

Factory
automation               

Material

handling              
Material
forming      
Machines
tools      
Textile
machines             

Robotics          
Packaging
machines         
Printing
industry        
Automotive
industry / In-plant            
Food, pharma &
beverage          
Life science
(Medical
instruments)

          
Life science
(Diagnostic)        

See details

Product catalogue

192-550017 192-571001 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-580011 192-510011 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-510012 192-510100 P-A4P024GB P-A4P024GB 192-540011 192-540012 192-5900

15

(Page 14) (Page 20) (Page 24) (Page 27) (Page 32) (Page 34) (Page 41) (Page 44) (Page 46) (Page 48) (Page 38) (Page 38) (Page 52) (Page 54) (Page 56) (Page 56) (Page 66) (Page 69) (Page 74)

9
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
Markets and Applications
Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Precision Actuators
Product ETH ETT OSP-E..SBR OSP-E..STR HPLA HLE OSP-E..B OSP-E..SB OSP-E..ST OSP-E..BV OSP-E..BHD OSP-E..BHD
(BH2)
LCB LCR HMR-S HMR-B XE XR MX
Description
High Force
Electro Thrust
Cylinder
Electric
Tubular Motor

Ball Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain

Bearing Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain
Bearing Guide
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers

Belt Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing

Guide
Ball Screw
Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Vertical Belt
Actuator with
Integrated Ball
Bearing Guide
(z-axis)
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Roller Guide
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Ball Bearing
Guide
Compact
Linear
Actuator
with Sliding
Bearing
Light
Capacity
Rodless
Miniature

Linear
Positioner

Ball Screw
Actuator with
Integrated
Double
Ball Bearing
Guide
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Double
Ball Bearing
Guide
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Miniature
Positioner
Factory
automation               
Material
handling              
Material
forming      
Machines
tools      
Textile
machines             
Robotics          
Packaging
machines         
Printing
industry        
Automotive
industry / In-plant            
Food, pharma &
beverage          
Life science
(Medical
instruments)
          
Life science
(Diagnostic)        
See details
Product catalogue
192-550017 192-571001 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-580011 192-510011 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-510012 192-510100 P-A4P024GB P-A4P024GB 192-540011 192-540012 192-590015
(Page 14) (Page 20) (Page 24) (Page 27) (Page 32) (Page 34) (Page 41) (Page 44) (Page 46) (Page 48) (Page 38) (Page 38) (Page 52) (Page 54) (Page 56) (Page 56) (Page 66) (Page 69) (Page 74)

10

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
Technical

Features

Technical Features

Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Precision Linear Actuators

Product ETH ETT OSP-E..SBR OSP-E..STR HPLA HLE OSP-E..B OSP-E..SB OSP-E..ST OSP-E..BV OSP-E..BHD OSP-E..BHD
(BH2)
LCB LCR HMR-S HMR-B XE XR MX
Description
High Force
Electro Thrust
Cylinder
Electric
Tubular Motor
Ball Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain
Bearing Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain
Bearing Guide
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers
Belt Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide

Ball
Screw

Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Vertical Belt
Actuator with
Integrated Ball
Bearing Guide
(z-axis)
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Roller Guide
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Ball Bearing
Guide
Compact
Linear
Actuator
with Sliding
Bearing
Light
Capacity
Rodless
Miniature
Linear
Positioner
Ball Screw
Actuator with

Integrated
Double

Ball Bearing
Guide
Belt Actuator
with

Integrated
Double

Ball Bearing
Guide
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Miniature
Positioner

Size for product
family

5 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 4 2 1 5 5 3 5 2

max. Stroke* [mm] 2000 720 500 500 9560 8230 5000 3200 2500 1500 7000 7000 5500 1000 4000 6000 700 2000 200

max. Thrust force*

[N]

114 000 118,5 1200 3300 5457 1350 425 1500 2500 1490 3120 3120 560 70 5500 4000 686 4510 1

23

max. Load* [N] – – – – 8200 5900 850 3000 1500 3000 15 000 15 000 3850 90 39 900 39 900 1202 14 400 80

max. Speed at
stroke*

[mm/s]

1707 5800 1250 125 5000 5000 5000 1250 150 5000 10 000 5000 8000 900 1600 5000 1500 1344 2000

max.
Acceleration*
[m/s2]

15 339 5 na 10 10 10 5 k.A. 20 40 50 20 20 10 50 20 20

50

min. accuracy*

[mm]

±0,03 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,5 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,5 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,2 ±0,1 ±0,02 ±0,05 ±0,005 ±0,0013 ±0,0004

min.
Repeatability*

[µm]

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 42 8 3

IP Protection
IP54
(IP65

optional)
IP67 IP54 IP54

IP20
(IP30

optional)
IP20 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP20 IP54 IP54 k.A. k.A. IP54 IP54 n.a. n.a. n.a.

See details
Product catalogue
192-550017 192-571001 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-580011 192-510011 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-510012 192-510100 P-A4P024GB P-A4P024GB 192-540011 192-540012 192-590015

* depending on size/option
n.a. not available

(Page 14) (Page 20) (Page 24) (Page 27) (Page 32) (Page 34) (Page 41) (Page 44) (Page 46) (Page 48) (Page 38) (Page 38) (Page 52) (Page 54) (Page 56) (Page 56) (Page 66) (Page 69) (Page 74)

11

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
Technical Features
Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Rodless Linear Handling Actuators Precision Linear Actuators
Product ETH ETT OSP-E..SBR OSP-E..STR HPLA HLE OSP-E..B OSP-E..SB OSP-E..ST OSP-E..BV OSP-E..BHD OSP-E..BHD
(BH2)
LCB LCR HMR-S HMR-B XE XR MX
Description
High Force
Electro Thrust
Cylinder
Electric
Tubular Motor
Ball Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain
Bearing Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator with
Internal Plain
Bearing Guide
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers
Linear
Actuator
with Plastic-
Sheathed
Rollers
Belt Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Ball
Screw
Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Trapezoidal
Screw
Actuator
with Internal
Plain Bearing
Guide
Vertical Belt
Actuator with
Integrated Ball
Bearing Guide
(z-axis)
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Roller Guide
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Ball Bearing
Guide
Compact
Linear
Actuator
with Sliding
Bearing
Light
Capacity
Rodless
Miniature
Linear
Positioner
Ball Screw
Actuator with
Integrated
Double
Ball Bearing
Guide
Belt Actuator
with
Integrated
Double
Ball Bearing
Guide
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Screw
Driven
Positioner
Miniature
Positioner
Size for product
family
5 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 4 2 1 5 5 3 5 2
max. Stroke* [mm] 2000 720 500 500 9560 8230 5000 3200 2500 1500 7000 7000 5500 1000 4000 6000 700 2000 200
max. Thrust force*
[N]
114 000 118,5 1200 3300 5457 1350 425 1500 2500 1490 3120 3120 560 70 5500 4000 686 4510 123
max. Load* [N] – – – – 8200 5900 850 3000 1500 3000 15 000 15 000 3850 90 39 900 39 900 1202 14 400 80
max. Speed at
stroke* [mm/s]
1707 5800 1250 125 5000 5000 5000 1250 150 5000 10 000 5000 8000 900 1600 5000 1500 1344 2000
max.
Acceleration*
[m/s2]
15 339 5 na 10 10 10 5 k.A. 20 40 50 20 20 10 50 20 20 50
min. accuracy*
[mm]
±0,03 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,5 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,5 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,05 ±0,2 ±0,1 ±0,02 ±0,05 ±0,005 ±0,0013 ±0,0004
min.
Repeatability*
[µm]
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 42 8 3
IP Protection
IP54
(IP65
optional)
IP67 IP54 IP54
IP20
(IP30
optional)
IP20 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP20 IP54 IP54 k.A. k.A. IP54 IP54 n.a. n.a. n.a.
See details
Product catalogue
192-550017 192-571001 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-580011 192-510011 P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB P-A4P017GB 192-510012 192-510100 P-A4P024GB P-A4P024GB 192-540011 192-540012 192-590015
* depending on size/option
n.a. not available
(Page 14) (Page 20) (Page 24) (Page 27) (Page 32) (Page 34) (Page 41) (Page 44) (Page 46) (Page 48) (Page 38) (Page 38) (Page 52) (Page 54) (Page 56) (Page 56) (Page 66) (Page 69) (Page 74)

12

Parker Electromechanical Actuators

13

Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators

ETH ETT

OSP-E..STROSP-E..SBR

14

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder – ETH
Overview
Description
The ETH electro cylinder closes the gap between
pneumatic and hydraulic actuators; it can act as a
suitable alternative to both in many applications and
can have the added benefit of increasing the reliability
of the production process. Taking the costs for air
and oil into consideration, you will find that in most
cases an electromechanical system such as the ETH
electro cylinder offers the more economical solution.
Combined with a wide choice of accessories, the ETH
becomes a highly customisable solution, suitable for a
variety of applications.

Typical applications

• Material handling and feed systems
• wood working and plastics industries
• vertical actuators for loading machine tools
• in the textile industry for tensioning / gripping textile fabrics
• in the automotive industry for transporting and feeding

components

• Testing equipment and laboratory applications

• Valve and flap actuation

• Pressing

• Packaging machinery

• Process automation in the food and beverage
industry

Features
• Unrivaled power density – high forces and small

frame sizes

• Cabling can be concealed in the profile

• Accessories with integrated force sensors help
to spread and even to control forces precisely

• Optimized for safe handling and simple cleaning

• High service life

• Reduced maintenance costs thanks to
lubricating access in the cylinder flange

• Easy replacement due to pneumatic ISO flange
norm (DIN ISO 15552:2005-12) conformity

• Integrated anti-rotation device

• Reduced noise emission

• All from one source:
We offer the complete drive train: Drive
controllers, motors and gearboxes to match the
Electro Cylinder

Technical Characteristics – Overview
Type ETH Electro Cylinder

Frame sizes
ETH032 / ETH050 / ETH080 / ETH100 /
ETH1

25

Screw lead 5, 10, 16, 20, 32 mm
Stroke up to 2000 mm
Traction/thrust
force

up to 114 000 N

Speed up to 1.7 m/s
Acceleration up to 15 m/s2

Equivalent dynamic
axial force at a
lifetime of 2500 km

up to 49 600 N

Efficiency up to 90 %
Repeatability up to ± 0.03 mm

Protection classes
IP54
IP54 with stainless screws
IP

65

Drive
Inline: Axial drive or parallel drive with
high performance toothed belt

Directives 2011/65/EC: Conform to RoHS

2014/34/EU (valid from 20. April 2016)
94/9/EC (valid until 19. April 2016)
Equipment group II Category 2,
authorized for gas atmospheres zone 1
and zone 2

Classification

ETH032, 050: II 2G c IIC T4

ETH080, 100, 125: II 2G c IIB T4

Conformity certificate number:
EPS 13 ATEX 2 592 X
(X: there are special specification of use, please
observe the intended use of the ATEX Cylinder)

We also offer customized solutions:
If your application requires a special version of the ETH
cylinder, please contact your local Parker Sales Office.

• Oil splash lubrication

• Customized mountings and rod ends

• Mounting of customer motors

• Preparation of the cylinder for use under aggressive
environmental conditions

• Overlong thrust rod

• Polished thrust rod

• Thrust rod hard-chrome plated

15
Product Design

Permanent magnet

All electro cylinders are equipped with
several permanent magnets integrated
into the screw nut. The permanent
magnets actuate the sensors, which
can be mounted in the longitudinal
grooves of the cylinder body.

Ballscrew

A high-quality precision class 7 ballscrew in accordance with ISO 3408 is used.
The ball bearings between screw and nut ensure a low frictional resistance. This
ensures an especially smooth operation over the entire speed range, high service life
and excellent efficiency.

Toothed belt transmission

The slip and wear free toothed belt
transmission for parallel drive cylinders
(motor mounted parallel to the
cylinder) features a high efficiency and
a transmission ratio of 1:1.

Belt tensioning device

A sophisticated belt tensioning device
for parallel motor mounting allows
the toothed belt to be pre tensioned
precisely.

Piston Rod Support Bearing &
Protection

The extra long cylinder rod bearing
allows high lateral load forces. A
wiper ring prevents the ingress of
external contamination under normal
conditions. In the event of fine dust,
a high amount of dirt as well as muds
and liquids, special sealing is required,
which is available on request.

Screw Support Bearing (motor end)

A double stacked set of angular
contact bearings allows for high thrust
forces in both the extend and retract
directions. The result is a design
with high force density and minimal
clearance when changing directions of
motion.

Screw support bearing (front
end)

The front screw support bearing
is supported by a polymer sliding
bearing. This eliminates vibration
and run-out. The result is quieter,
smoother motion with better
precision, longer screw life, and
increased dynamic performance.

Piston Rod Anti-rotation Guidance

One of the unique design changes
in the ETH is a new anti-rotation
device. The high quality, maintenance
free polymer bushing offers robust
guidance preventing the piston rod
from twisting as the rod extends and
retracts.

Sensors

The sensors are directly integrated into
the profile; avoiding projecting edges.
Cabling is neatly hidden under the
yellow cover (fitting sensors available
as accessories).

Easy Lubrication Port

The integrated lubrication fitting allows
quick, simple and easy access to
regrease the ball screw. In the event
the rear is inaccessible the port can be
located in the center of the extrusion
(optional) The result is reduced down
time for product maintenance yielding
a higher ROI and a longer product life.

Extruded cylinder body

The extrusion design reduces the
number of slots or grooves for a
cleaner overall design. The only slots
are there for sensor mounting and are
easily covered to eliminate any area
for debris to be trapped. The result is a
cleaner, more environmentally friendly
design.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

16

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

Technical Characteristics

Cylinder size
type

Unit ETH032 ETH050 ETH080
M05 M10 M164) M05 M10 M204) M05 M10 M324)

Screw lead [mm] 5 10 16 5 10 20 5 10

32

Screw diameter [mm] 16 20 32

Travels, speeds and accelerations

Available strokes 1) 2) [mm]
continuous from 50-

1000 & standard strokes
continuous from 50-

1200 & standard strokes
continuous from 50-

1600 & standard strokes

Max. permissible speed at stroke =

50-400 mm [mm/s] 333 667 1067 333 667 1333 267 533 1707
600 mm [mm/s] 286 540 855 333 666 1318 267 533 1707
800 mm [mm/s] 196 373 592 238 462 917 267 533 1707
1000 mm [mm/s] 146 277 440 177 345 684 264 501 15

61

1200 mm [mm/s] – – – 139 270 536 207 394 12

33

1400 mm [mm/s] – – – – – – 168 320 1006
1600 mm [mm/s] – – – – – – 140 267 841

Max. Acceleration [m/s2] 4 8 12 4 8 15 4 8 15

Forces
Max. axial traction/thrust force motor inline [N]

3600
3700 2400

9300
7000 4400

17 800
25 100 10 600

Max. axial traction/thrust force 3)

Motor parallel
[N] 3280 2050 4920 2460 11 620 36

30

Equivalent dynamic axial force at a lifetime
of 2500 km

[N] 1130 1700 1610 2910 3250 2740 3140 7500 6050

Max. transmissible torque / force constant
Max. transmissible torque inline motor [Nm] 3.2 6.5 6.8 8.2 12.4 15.6 15.7 44.4 60.0

Max. transmissible torque 3)

Motor parallel
[Nm] 3.5 6.4 9.1 9.3 17.5 22.8

Force constant motor inline 5) [N/Nm] 1131 565 353 1131 565 283 1131 565 1

77

Force constant motor parallel 5) [N/Nm] 1018 509 318 1018 509 254 1018 509 1

59

Weight 6)

Weight of base unit with zero stroke (incl.
Piston rod)

[kg] 1.2 1.2 1.4 2.2 2.2 2.4 7.1 7.5 8.5

Weight of inline unit [kg] 0.7 1.0 3.2
Weigth of parallel unit [kg] 0.8 1.0 3.1
Mass of additional stroke (incl. Cylinder rod) [kg/m] 4.5 8.2 18.2
Weight of cylinder rod with zero stroke [kg] 0.06 0.15 0.59
Weight of cylinder rod – additional length [kg/m] 0.99 1.85 4.93

Mass moments of inertia
Motor parallel without stroke [kgmm2] 8.3 8.8 14.1 30.3 30.6 38.0 215.2 213.6 301.9

Motor inline without stroke [kgmm2] 7.1 7.6 12.9 25.3 25.7 33.1 166.2 164.5 252.9

Parallel/inline motor per meter [kgmm2/m] 41.3 37.6 41.5 97.7 92.4 106.4 527.7 470.0 585.4

Accuracy: Bidirectional Repeatability (ISO230-2)
Motor inline [mm] ±0.03
Motor parallel [mm] ±0.05

Efficiency
Motor inline the efficiency includes

all

friction torques
[%] 90

Motor parallel [%] 81

Ambient conditions
Operating Temperature [°C] -10…+

70

Ambient temperature [°C] -10…+

40

Storage temperature [°C] -20…+40
Humidity [%] 0…95 % (non-condensing)
Location height range [m] max. 3000

1) “Order Code” (page 54), 2) Intermediate stroke lengths may be interpolated.
3) Applies only for motor speed < 100 min-1. Transmissible torque depending on the motor speed n Motor parallel see page 15, 4) ATEX not available, 5) The efficiency factors are included in the force constants. 6) Weight without rod-end and mounting option.

17

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

Technical Data apply under normal conditions and only for the individual operating and load modes. In the case of compound
loads, it is necessary to verify in accordance with normal physical laws and technical standards whether individual ratings
should be reduced. In case of doubt please contact Parker.

Cylinder size
type

Unit ETH100 ETH125
M10 M20 M10 M20

Screw lead [mm] 10 20 10 20
Screw diameter [mm] 50

63

Travels, speeds and accelerations

Available strokes 1) 2) [mm]
continuous from 100-

2000 & standard strokes

continuous from 100-

2000 & standard strokes
Max. permissible speed at stroke =

100-400 mm [mm/s] 400 800 417 833
500 mm [mm/s] 400 747 417 807
600 mm [mm/s] 333 622 395 684
800 mm [mm/s] 241 457 290 514
1000 mm [mm/s] 185 354 224 405
1200 mm [mm/s] 148 284 180 3

29

1400 mm [mm/s] 122 235 148 2

75

1600 mm [mm/s] 102 198 125 234
2000 mm [mm/s] 76 148 94 170

Max. Acceleration [m/s2] 8 10 8 10

Forces
Max. axial traction/thrust force motor inline [N]

54 800
56 000 88 700 114 000

Max. axial traction/thrust. 3)

Motor parallel
[N] 50 800 76 300 81 400

Equivalent dynamic axial force at a lifetime of
2500 km

[N] 18 410 27 100 27 140 49 600

Max. transmissible torque / force constant
Max. transmissible torque inline motor [Nm] 100 200 150 400
Max. transmissible torque. 3)

Motor parallel
[Nm] 108 200 150 320

Force constant motor inline 5) [N/Nm] 565 283 565 283

Force constant motor parallel 5) [N/Nm] 509 254 509 254

Weight 6)

Weight of base unit with zero stroke
(incl. Piston rod)

[kg] 21 24 56 64

Weight of inline unit [kg] 12 27
Weigth of parallel unit [kg] 21

51

Mass of additional stroke (incl. Cylinder rod) [kg/m] 38

62

Weight of cylinder rod with zero stroke [kg] 1.2 2.9
Weight of cylinder rod – additional length [kg/m] 7.7 14.4

Mass moments of inertia
Motor parallel without stroke [kgmm2] 5860 6240 17 050 17 990

Motor inline without stroke [kgmm2] 2240 2620 12 960 13 400

Parallel/inline motor per meter [kgmm2/m] 4270 4710 10 070 10 490

Accuracy: Bidirectional Repeatability (ISO230-2)
Motor inline [mm] ±0.03
Motor parallel [mm] ±0.05

Efficiency
Motor inline the efficiency includes all

friction torques
[%] 90
Motor parallel [%] 81
Ambient conditions
Operating Temperature [°C] -10…+70
Ambient temperature [°C] -10…+40
Storage temperature [°C] -20…+40
Humidity [%] 0…95 % (non-condensing)
Location height range [m] max. 3000

1) “Order Code” (page 54), 2) Intermediate stroke lengths may be interpolated.
3) Applies only for motor speed < 100 min-1. Transmissible torque depending on the motor speed n Motor parallel see page 15, 5) The efficiency factors are included in the force constants, 6) Weight without rod-end and mounting option..

18

Ø

B

Ø
M

M

K
K

AM

KW

WH

DD

C+*

G1+*

VE BG

KV(SW)

A1

B
H

E

TG

JJ

T
GE

F

F

F

L1

L
2

A2 P+*

E
TG

F

T
GEØ
B

Ø
M
M
K
K

KW
WH

DD
C+*

G2+*
VD

VE BG
KV(SW)
Ø
B
B

N
1

JJ
A1
B
H
AM

FB

P
D

3

PD4

P
D
5
A2 P+*

FF

EP

PG

PP 4x

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

Dimensions

Dimensions Standard & ATEX (IP-Version)

Cylinder size Unit ETH032 ETH050 ETH080 ETH100 ETH125
Screw lead M05 M10 M16 M05 M10 M20 M05 M10 M32 M10 M20 M10 M20

C [mm]
93.6
(93.6)

102.6
(102.6)

106.6
(106.6)

99.5
(100.5)

105.5
(106.5)

117.5
(118.5)

141.5
(142.5)

159.5
(160.5)

189.5
(190.5)

– 2) – 2)

G1 [mm]
133

(180.5)
142

(189.5)
146

(193.5)
154

(198.5)
160

(204.5)
172

(216.5)
197

(259.5)
215

(277.5)
245

(307.5)
323

(349.5)
361

(387.5)
461

(487.5)
549

(575.5)

G2 [mm]
180.5
(228.5)

189.5
(237.5)

193.5
(241.5)

194
(239)

200
(245)

212
(257)

257
(320)

275
(338)

305
(368)

451
(478.0)

489
(516.0)

624
(651.0)

712
(739.0)

P [mm] 66 75 79 67 73 85 89 107 137 162 200 192 280
A1 [mm] 14 (60) 15.5 (58.5) 21 (82) – 2) – 2)

A2 [mm] 17 18.5 32 – 2) -2)

AM [mm] 22 32 40 70 96
BG (=BN+BS) [mm] 16 25 26 32 44
BN Usable length of thread [mm] 11 20 20 22 33
BS Depth of width across
flat (without thread)

[mm] 5 5 6 10 11

BH [mm] 9 12.7 18.5 – 2) -2)

DD mount thread 1) [mm] M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M12x1.75 – 2) -2)

E [mm] 46.5 63.5 95 120 150
EP 46.5 63.5 95 175 220
F [mm] 16 24 30 – 2) -2)

FF [mm] 0.5 0.5 1.0 0 0
JJ [mm] M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M16x2 M20x2.5
PP [mm] M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M16x2 M20x2.5
PG (Thread depth on the PA
housing)

[mm] BG (=BN+BS) BG (=BN+BS) BG (=BN+BS) 26

35

KK [mm] M10x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M42x2 M48x2
KV [mm] 10 17 22 46

55

ØMM h9 [mm] 22 28 45 70 85
TG [mm] 32.5 46.5 72 89 105
KW [mm] 5 6.5 10 10 10
N1 [mm] 126 160 233.5 347 450
FB [mm] 47.5 (48) 40 (40.5) 60 (60.5) 128 (128.5) 163 (163.5)
VD [mm] 4 4 4 4 5
ØBB [mm] 30 d11 40 d11 45 d11 90 d9 110 d8
VE [mm] 12 16 20 20 20
WH [mm] 26 37 46 51 53
ØB [mm] 30 d11 40 d11 60 d11 90 d8 110 d8

(1) Thread “DD” is only mandatory for mounting method “F”.
2) ETH100, ETH125 does not have a mounting thread on the underside.

Electro Cylinder
prepared for inline motor
mounting

Electro Cylinder
prepared for parallel motor
mounting

+* =Measure + length of desired stroke

19

Accessories for ETH cylinder

Function of outrigger bearing:

• Additional stability and precision

• Anti-rotation device for higher
torques

• Absorption of lateral forces

Mounting methods

Centre trunnion mountingMounting flangesFoot mounting

Outrigger bearing Initiators / Limit switches

Cylinder rod version

External thread Internal thread Rod clevis Sperical rod eye

Force sensor

Joint head with integrated force sensor Rod clevis with force sensor

Servo amplifier
For additional information please see our website
www.parker.com/eme

Motors and gears
For additional information on motors please see our
website www.parker-eme.com and for gears
www.parker.com/eme/gear

Motor and amplifier

Rear eye mountingRear clevisFront and rear plate

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETH – High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder

20

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETT – Electric Tubular Motor

Description
ETT is a direct thrust linear motor actuator, ideally
suited to all kinds of linear handling and pick & place
applications. It is a cost-effective and energy-efficient
alternative to pneumatic cylinders in applications that
demand greater flexibility and control.
The ETT‘s linear motion is directly generated without
the need for mechanical transmission elements like
ball screws, toothed belts and gearboxes. The tubular
motor has two main components; the rod (shaft) and
the stator with integrated feedback (body). The shaft is
made of a stainless steel tube with built in neodymium
magnets, which thanks to their high performance, are
able to deliver impressive thrust values up to 2083 N.
The main body comprises the stator winding, the
feedback electronics and high performance bearings.
A major benefit of the ETT design is that long and/or
heavy duty cycles are possible without the need for
additional cooling. The IP67 protection class allows the
ETT tubular motor to be used in harsh environmental
conditions.

Features
• Ultra dynamic linear motion and position control

capabilities

• Ideally suited for pneumatic substitution where
greater position control capabilities are required

• Four lengths and four sizes meeting the
requirements of the pneumatic ISO flange
standard (DIN ISO 15552:2005-12) for simplified
mechanical integration

• Swivelling electrical connectors and extensive
accessory options allow flexible mounting

• Reduced mechanical complexity delivers high
energy efficiency and reduces maintenance

• AISI304 stainless steel shaft allows it’s use in
“clean” environments

• High thermal efficiency improves reliability and
increases mechanical life

• Wide choice of rod end mounting options,
including swivel rod eye, increases flexibility

Target markets
• Food, Pharmaceutical & Beverage

• Packaging Machines

• Material Handling

• Factory Automation

Electric Tubular Motor – ETT
Overview

Technical Characteristics – Overview
Motor type Linear tubular servo motor
Rod AISI304 (stainless steel)
Rated force 8…295 N
Peak force 56…2083 N
Speed range up to 8 m/s
Acceleration range up to 350 m/s2

Mounting Screw fixed

Shaft end
Front male thread, Rear cap end
Other options available

Cooling Natural ventilation
Protection level
(IEC60034-5)

IP

67

Feedback sensor
Analog Hall 1Vpp (SinCos 90°)
Other feedback on request

Thermal protection
KTY
PTC or PT1000 as option

Marking CE

Voltage supply
230 VAC (all sizes)
400 VAC (only ETT80)

Temperature class Class F

Connections
Connectors
Flying leads as option

Bi-directional accuracy 0.5 mm

21

Technical Data

ETT025

ETT025 ETT025S1 ETT025S2 ETT025S3
Unit

Power supply 230 VAC
Effective stroke [mm] 30…3

60

Rated force [N] 7.97 11.30 12.

73

Peak force for 10 s 1) [N] 31.86 45.19 50.91
Peak force for 1 s 1) [N] 63.72 90.38 101.83
Maximum speed 2) [m/s] 4.61 5.49 5.83
Peak acceleration 3) [m/s2] 212.40 301.25 339.

42

Coil length [mm] 146
Rod length [mm] 205…5

45

Rod weight [kg] 0.212…0.618
Rod diameter [mm] 12
Pole pitch [mm] 60
Force constant [N/A] 11.80 17.38 22.35
Back EMF [V/(m/s)] 9.63 14.18 18.98
Back EMF (ph-ph,rms) [Vrms/(m/s)] 6.81 10.03 13.42
Phase resistance [ohm] 17.17 25.06 33.40
Phase inductance [mH] 5.42 7.89 10.44
Position repeatability [mm] ±0.05

1) Data valid at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
2) Based on triangular move over maximum stroke with nominal payload
3) Based on a 50 mm stroke, without payload

ETT032

ETT032 ETT032S1 ETT032S2 ETT032S3
Unit

Power supply 230 VAC
Effective stroke [mm] 30…660 30…630 30…600
Rated force [N] 13.18 17.90 22.54
Peak force for 10 s 1) [N] 52.72 71.60 90.14
Peak force for 1 s 1) [N] 105.45 143.20 180.

28

Maximum speed 2) [m/s] 3.72 4.23 4.48
Peak acceleration 3) [m/s2] 138.75 179.00 200.32
Coil length [mm] 179 209 2

39

Rod length [mm] 221…851
Rod weight [kg] 0.389…1.63
Rod diameter [mm] 16
Pole pitch [mm] 60
Force constant [N/A] 21.26 31.96 42.52
Back EMF [V/(m/s)] 17.69 26.04 35.

37

Back EMF (ph-ph,rms) [Vrms/(m/s)] 12.51 18.41 25.01
Phase resistance [ohm] 31.46 43.84 59.

71

Phase inductance [mH] 14.57 21.75 29.20
Position repeatability [mm] ±0.05

1) Data valid at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
2) Based on triangular move over maximum stroke with nominal payload
3) Based on a 50 mm stroke, without payload

These ratings are valid for Parker Hannifin drives. Other drives might not achieve the same ratings

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETT – Electric Tubular Motor

22

ETT050

ETT050 ETT050S1 ETT050S2 ETT050S3
Unit

Power supply 230 VAC
Effective stroke [mm] 30…720 30…690 30…540
Rated force [N] 33.17 45.94 118.55
Peak force for 10 s 1) [N] 132.66 183.77 474.18
Peak force for 1 s 1) [N] 265.32 367.54 948.

36

Maximum speed 2) [m/s] 3.84 4.31 4.87
Peak acceleration 3) [m/s2] 147.73 185.62 237.09
Coil length [mm] 206 236 386
Rod length [mm] 254…944
Rod weight [kg] 0.56…2.12
Rod diameter [mm] 25
Pole pitch [mm] 60
Force constant [N/A] 49.50 70.68 112.90
Back EMF [V/(m/s)] 40.36 64.32 89.36
Back EMF (ph-ph,rms) [Vrms/(m/s)] 28.54 45.48 63.19
Phase resistance [ohm] 42.45 62.97 41.75
Phase inductance [mH] 23.80 35.20 22.42
Position repeatability [mm] ±0.05

1) Data valid at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
2) Based on triangular move over maximum stroke with nominal payload
3) Based on a 50 mm stroke, without payload

These ratings are valid for Parker Hannifin drives. Other drives might not achieve the same ratings
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETT – Electric Tubular Motor

ETT080

ETT080 Power supply 230-400 VAC Unit ETT080S2 ETT080S3* ETT080S4 ETT080S5
Peak force 1) 2) 4) [N] 686 852 1506 2083
Peak current [A] 12.5 11.7 20.5 29.0

Without heatsink plate
Continous stall force duty cycle S1 1) [N] 97 120 213 295
Continous stall current duty cycle S1 1) [A] 1.8 1.7 2.9 4.1
Force @ duty cycle S3 5% 1) [N] 434 539 952 1318
Current @ duty cycle S3 5% 1) [A] 7.9 7.4 13.0 18.3
Force constant [N/A] 54.80 72.57 73.44 71.88
Back EMF (ph-ph,rms) [Vrms/(m/s)] 31.64 59.26 42.4 41.5
Phase resistance [ohm] 11.14 14.81 7.65 5.25
Phase inductance [mH] 12.80 17.06 7.50 5.51
Power supply (drive side) VAC 230/400
Max DC bus voltage VDC 325/566
Pole pitch 60
Maximum stroke 5) [mm] 736 706 586 460
Peak acceleration 3) [m/s2] 238 264 330 352
Position repeatability [mm] 0.05
Accuracy [mm] 0.5

1) Data valid at an ambient temperature of 25 °C; 2) Based on triangular move over maximum stroke with normal payload
3) Based on a 100 mm stroke, without payload; 4) Considering a duty cycle of S3 2%; 5) Other value under request
Manufacturing tolerance ±10%; *Duty cycle S3 compliant to CEI EN60034-1 with max time 5 minutes.

23

Standards and Conformance

Low Voltage Directive

• 2006/95/EC

EMC Directive

• 2004/108/EC

Generic standard – Emission standard for industrial enviroments

• CEI EN 61000-6-4:2007

Generic standard – Immunity for industrial enviroments

• CEI EN 61000-6-2:2006

Marked

Accessories for ETT Electric Tubular Motor

Mounting methods

Mounting flangesFoot mounting Front and rear plate

Cylinder rod version

Plastic rod clevis Plastic swivel rod eye Allignment coupler

For additional information please see our catalogue 192-571001 or www.parker.com/eme/ett

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
ETT – Electric Tubular Motor

24

OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain
Bearing Guide

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Series Total weight
(Mass)

[kg]

Moving mass
[kg]

Inertia
[x 10-6 kgm2]

At stroke 0 m Actuator
head

At stroke
0 m

Add per metre

stro

ke

At Stroke
0 m

Add per
metre stroke

OSP-E25SBR 0.7 3.0 0.2 0.9 1.2 11.3

OSP-E32SBR 1.7 5.6 0.6 1.8 5.9 32.0

OSP-E50SBR 4.5 10.8 1.1 2.6 50.0 225.0

Weight (mass) and Inertia

Standard Versions:
• Standard piston rod with internal plain
bearing guide
• Pitches of Ball Screw Spindle:
Type OSP-E25SBR : 5 mm
Type OSP-E32SBR: 5, 10 mm
Type OSP-E50SBR: 5, 10, 25 mm

Options:
• Keyway version

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the free end cap and a profile
mounting close to the motor end for mounting the
actuator.

The piston rod is locked against rotations, but must not be
used for radial loads Mx, that need to be guided externally.
A compensation part e. g. piston rod eye is recommended.

Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..SBR
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +80 °C
Installation In any position
Encapsulation class IP 54

Material

Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Ball screw Steel
Ball nut Steel
Piston rod Stainless steel
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Maintenance
All moving parts are long-term lubricated for a normal
operational environment. Parker Origa recommends a check
and lubrication of the actuator, and if necessary a change of
wear parts, after an operation time of 12 months or 3000 km
travel of distance. Please refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the actuator.

First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical data sheet for
the different products must not be exceeded. Before taking
the actuator as a machine into service, the user must ensure
the adherence to the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.

Series Total weight
(Mass) [kg]
Moving mass
[kg]
Inertia
[x 10-6 kgm2]
At stroke 0 m Actuator
head
At stroke
0 m

Add per metre
stroke

At Stroke
0 m
Add per
metre stroke
OSP-E25SBR 0.7 3.0 0.2 0.9 1.2 11.3
OSP-E32SBR 1.7 5.6 0.6 1.8 5.9 32.0
OSP-E50SBR 4.5 10.8 1.1 2.6 50.0 225.0
Characteristics Description
Series OSP-E..SBR
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +80 °C
Installation In any position
Encapsulation class IP 54
Material
Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Ball screw Steel
Ball nut Steel
Piston rod Stainless steel
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

25

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Characteristics Unit Description

Series OSP-E25SBR OSP-E32SBR OSP-E50SBR
Pitch [mm] 5 5 10 5 10 25

Max. speed [m/s] 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.5 1.25

Linear motion per revolution [mm] 5 5 10 5 10 25
drive shaft
Max. rpm drive shaft [min-1] 3000 3000 3000

Max. effective action force F
A
[N] 260 900 1200

Corresponding torque [Nm] 0.45 1.1 1.8 1.3 2.8 6.0
drive shaft
No-load torque [Nm] 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5
Max. allowable torque [Nm] 0.6 1.5 2.8 4.2 7.5 20

on drive shaft
Max. allowable acceleration [m/s2] 5 5 5
Typical repeatability [mm/m] ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05
Max.Standard stroke length [mm] 500 500 500

The permissible transverse force is reduced
with increasing stroke length. according to
the adjacent graphs.

Performance Overview

Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Check that the maximum values in the
adjacent chart and transverse force/
stroke graph below are not exceeded.

2. Check the lifetime/travel distance in
graph below.

3. When sizing and specifying the motor,
the RMS-average torque must be
calculated using the cycle time in
application

Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings

Transverse
Force / Stroke

Transverse Force / Stroke

Maximum rpm / Stroke

At longer strokes the speed has to be
redueced according to the adjacent
graphs.

Maximum rpm / Stroke
rpm [1/min]

Stroke [mm]

Force F
t
[N]

Stroke s [mm]

�

�

��

���

���
���
���
���
���
���
���

����

� �� ��� ���

��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ���

�

� �

� �

�

1 = OSP-E25SBR – Pitch 5 mm

4 = OSP-E32SBR – Pitch 5 mm

2 = OSP-E32SBR – Pitch 10 mm

6 = OSP-E50SBR – Pitch 5 mm

5 = OSP-E50SBR – Pitch 10 mm

3 = OSP-E50SBR

– Pitch 25 mm

���
����
����
����
����
����
����
����
����
����
��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ���
� �
�

1 = OSP-E25SBR

2 = OSP-E32SBR

3 = OSP-E50SBR

26

END CAP MOUNTING
For end-mounting the actuator on
the extending rod side.

Flange Mounting C
For end-mounting the actuator on
the extending rod side.

PROFILE MOUNTING
For mounting the actuator on the
dovetail grooves and on the
motor end.

Trunning mounting EN in
combination with pivot mounting
EL.
– steplessly adjustable in axial
direction.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

STANDARD VERSIONS
OSP-E..SBR

Standard piston rod with internal
guidance and integrated magnet
set for contactless position
sensing. Dovetail profile for
mounting of accessories and the
actuator itself.

BALL SCREW PITCH

The ball screws spindles are
available
in various pitches:
OSP-E25SBR: 5 mm
OSP-E32SBR: 5, 10 mm
OSP-E50SBR: 5, 10, 25 mm

ACCESSORIES

MOTOR MOUNTINGS

COMPENSATION
Piston Rod eye

Piston rod Clevis

Piston Rod compensating coupling
For compensating of radial and
angular misaligments

MAGNETIC SWITCHES
SERIES RST AND EST
For contactless position sensing of
end stop and intermediate carrier
positions.

Options and Accessories

OSP-E..SBR
Ball screw actuator with internal plain
bearing guide

27

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain
Bearing Guide

Standard Versions:
• Dovetail profile for mounting of accessories
and the actuator itself

• Pitch of Trapezoidal Spindle:
Type

OSP-E25STR

: 3 mm
Type OSP-E32STR: 4 mm
Type OSP-E50STR: 5 mm

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the free end cap and a profile
mounting close to the motor end for mounting the
actuator.

The piston rod is not locked against rotation and needs to be
guided externally. A compensation part e. g. piston rod eye is
recommended.

Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..STR
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +70 °C
Installation In any position
Encapsulation class IP 54

Material

Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Trapazoidal screw Cold rolled steel
Drive nut Thermoplastic polyester
Piston rod Stainless steel
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Maintenance
All moving parts are long-term lubricated for a normal
operational environment. Parker Origa recommends a check
and lubrication of the actuator, and if necessary a change of
wear parts, after an operation time of 12 months or 3000 km
travel of distance. Please refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the actuator.
First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical data sheet for
the different products must not be exceeded. Before taking
the actuator as a machine into service, the user must ensure
the adherence to the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.
Series Total weight
(Mass) [kg]
Moving mass
[kg]
Inertia
[x 10-6 kgm2]
At stroke 0 m Actuator
head
At stroke
0 m
Add per metre
stroke
At Stroke
0 m
Add per
metre stroke

OSP-E25STR 0.4 2.9 0.1 0.7 1.1 10.3

OSP-E32STR 0.9 5.4 0.2 1.2 3.9 29.6

OSP-E50STR 2.4 10.6 0.8 1.6 24.6 150

Weight (mass) and Inertia

Contactless position sensing
Please use the magnetic switch mentioned below:

P8S-GRFAX (Type: reed, 2-wire, normally open, 3m
flying lead PUR-cable)
P8S-GPCHX (Type: PNP, 3-wire, normally open, M8R
connector 0,3m knurled screw)

28

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator Guide with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Performance Overview

Characteristics Unit Description

Size OSP-E25STR OSP-E32STR

OSP-E50STR

Pitch [mm] 3 4 5
Max. speed [m/s] 0.075 0.1 0.125

Linear motion per revolution, [mm] 3 4 5
drive shaft
Max. rpm, drive shaft [min-1] 1500 2) 1500 1500

Max. effective action force F
A
[N] 800 1600 3300

Corresponding torque [Nm] 1.35 3.4 9.25
on drive shaft

No-load torque [Nm] 0.3 0.4 0.5
Max. allowable torque [Nm] 1.7 4.4 12

on drive shaft
Self-locking force F

L
1) [N] 800 1600 3300

Typical repeatability [mm/m] ±0,5 ±0,5 ±0,5
Max.Standard stroke length [mm] 500 500 500
1) Related to screw types Tr 12×3, Tr 16×4, Tr 24×5

2) from 0,4 m stroke max. 1200 min-1 permissible

The graph is based upon 10% intermittent usage

Load

The graph is based upon 10% intermittent usage
Performance [km]

Action Force [N]

Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :
1. Check that the maximum values in the
adjacent chart and transverse force/
stroke graph below are not exceeded.
2. Check the lifetime/travel distance in
graph below.
3. When sizing and specifying the motor,
the RMS-average torque must be
calculated using the cycle time in
application
Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings

Transverse
Force / Stroke Transverse Force / Stroke

Performance as a function of the action force

The Actuators are designed for a 10%
intermittent usage.
The performance to be expected
depends on the maximum required actions
force of the application.
An increase of the action force will lead to
a reduced performance.

Performance /
Action Force

stroke
�
��
���
���
���
���
���

� ��� ��� ��� ��� ���

�������

�������

OSP-E25STR

OSP-E32STR

OSP-E50STR
OSP-E25STR

OSP-E32STR
OSP-E50STR

�
���

����
����
����
����
����
����
����

� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ����

OSP-E50STR
OSP-E32STR
OSP-E25STR
OSP-E50STR
OSP-E32STR
OSP-E25STR

29
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
END CAP MOUNTING
For end-mounting the actuator on
the extending rod side.

FLANGE MOUNTING C
For end-mounting the actuator on
the extending rod side.

PROFILE MOUNTING
For mounting the actuator on the
dovetail grooves and on the
motor end.

TRUNNING MOUNTING EN in
combination with pivot mounting
EL.
– steplessly adjustable in axial
direction.

STANDARD VERSIONS
OSP-E..STR

Standard piston rod with internal
guidance and integrated magnet
set for contactless position
sensing. Dovetail profile for
mounting of accessories and
the actuator itself.

ACCESSORIES
MOTOR MOUNTINGS

COMPENSATION
PISTON ROD EYE

PISTON ROD CLEVIS

PISTON ROD COMPENSATING
COUPLING
For compensating of radial and
angular misaligments

MAGNETIC SWITCHES
SERIES RST AND EST
For contactless position sensing of
end stop and intermediate carrier
positions.
Options and Accessories

OSP-E..STR
Trapezoidal screw actuator with internal
plain bearing guide

30
Parker Electromechanical Actuators

31

Rodless Linear Handling Actuators

OSP-E..BV

HMR

HPLA

LCB

OSP-E..BHDHLE

OSP-E..SB OSP-E..ST

LCR

OSP-E..B

32

HPLA – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

For guiding, moving and positioning, even over long travels, we offer the HPLA
linear actuator:

• Travels up to 20 meters

• High speeds up to 5 m/s

• High payloads up to 1600 kg

• Nominal drive torque up to 244 Nm

• Nominal thrust force up to 5500 N

• Repeatability up to ±0.05 mm

• High mechanic efficiency

Specifications

Frame sizes HPLA 080 HPLA 120 HPLA 180

Roller guiding system Plastic Steel Plastic Steel Plastic Steel

Weight of base unit without stroke

HPLA with standard carriage [kg] 6.0 6.6 18.6 19.8 49.8 53.4

HPLA with steel strip cover [kg] 6.8 7.5 20.2 21.6 57.2 61.6

HPLA with extended carriage [kg] 7.8 8.6 23.5 25.2 67.4 72.6

HPLA with steel strip cover [kg] 8.6 9.5 25.2 27.1 74.8 80.9

Weight of standard carriage & load attachment
plate

[kg] 1.5 1.6 5.5 5.7 11.4 11.8

HPLA with steel strip cover [kg] 1.7 1.8 5.8 6.0 12.3 12.6

Weight of extended carriage & load attachment
plate

[kg] 2.4 2.6 8.5 8.9 20.3 21.0

HPLA with steel strip cover [kg] 2.6 2.8 8.8 9.2 21.1 21.8

Additional weight per meter of stroke [kg/m] 6.0 7.2 13.5 15.4 29.2 33.4

Weight with steel strip cover [kg/m] 6.1 7.3 13.7 15.5 29.4 33.6

Travel lengths and speeds

Max. travel speed [m/s] 5.0

Max. acceleration [m/s2] 10.0

Max. travel path (standard carriage) [mm] 5610 5590 9560 9530 9440 9400

ditto with steel strip cover [mm] 5540 5520 9470 9440 9240 9200

Max. travel path (extended carriage) [mm] 5460 5440 9360 9330 9140 9100

ditto with steel strip cover [mm] 5390 5370 9270 9240 8940 8900

Overall dimensions and physical data of guiding profile

Section [mm] 80 x 80 120 x 120 180 x 180

Forces and torques

max. drive torque [Nm] 32 96 365

max. Thrust force [N] 1114 2234 54

57

Repeatability up to 3 m (1) [mm] ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05

Repeatability from 3 m (1) [mm] ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1

Toothed pulley and toothed belt data

Travel distance per revolution [mm/U] 180 270 420

Number of teeth of pulley 18 27 21

Toothed belt width / pitch [mm] 25 / 10 32 / 10 56 / 20

(1) at a constant ambient and operating temperature

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HPLA – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

33
Dimensions

HPLA with toothed belt without steel strip cover

B B1 BL H H1 H2 A1 A C C1 Ls Lv St

HPLA 80 80 46 76 100 100 80 144 164 128 108 250 400 10

HPLA 120 120 60 110 135 143 120 185 205 160 140 300 500 13

HPLA 180 180 95 170 213 215 180 265 293 263 235 400 700 20

HPLA with toothed belt and steel strip cover

B B1 BL H H1 H2 A1 Ab Cb C1 Ls Lv Lb St

HPLA 80 80 46 76 100 100 80 144 199 163 108 250 400 40 10

HPLA 120 120 60 110 143 143 120 185 250 205 140 300 500 50 13

HPLA 180 180 95 170 215 215 180 265 393 363 235 400 700 100 20

Advantages of steel roller guiding on an integrated steel strip:

• high load bearing capacity

• high stiffness

HPLA without steel strip cover

HPLA with steel strip cover

Sw = recommended safety travel
Ls = standard carriage
Lv = extended carriage

St = with steel rollers
St = 0 mm with plastic rollers

Sw = recommended safety travel
Ls = standard carriage
Lv = extended carriage
St = with steel rollers
St = 0 mm with plastic rollers

The optional steel strip cover is perfectly integrated into the linear actuator design and protects timing belt, rollers and
the running surfaces of the profile reliably from contamination (protection class IP30).

Advantages of plastic roller guiding:

• clean operation, as the travel surface is free of lubricants

• low maintenance

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HPLA – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

Ste
el s

trip
co

ver

opt
ion

34

For guiding, moving and positioning, even over long travels, we offer the HLE
linear actuator:

• Long strokes up to 20 m

• High speeds up to 5 m/s

• Transmissible drive torque
max. 108 Nm

• High load capacity

• Repeatability up to ±0.05 mm

• High mechanical efficiency of 95 %

• Low abrasion (suitable for clean
room up to class 10)

• Low wear, low maintenance and
low-noise operation

• High dynamics due to low-mass,
backlash-free carriage

The linear actuators are available in two sizes (HLE 100 and HLE 150). They are suitable for fast linear movements over
long travel strokes. The actuators are available in many different configurations with various options and accessories.

Specifications

Frame sizes HLE 100 HLE 150

Standard

Steel strip

cover
Standard

Steel strip
cover

Weight of base unit without stroke

HLE with standard carriage [kg] 11.5 12.7 28.6 31.2

HLE with extended carriage [kg] 14.6 15.8 35.9 38.5

Weight of standard carriage & load attachment plate [kg] 2.5 2.8 6.7 7.3

Weight of extended carriage & load attachment plate [kg] 4.1 4.4 10.9 11.5

Additional weight per meter of stroke [kg/m] 9.9 10.0 21.0 21.1

Travel lengths and speeds

Maximum travel speed [m/s] 5.0 5.0

Maximum Acceleration [m/s2] 10.0 10.0

Maximum travel path, standard carriage with one profile [mm] 6300 6210 9150 9060

Maximum travel path, extended carriage with one profile [mm] 6150 6060 9000 8910

Overall dimensions and physical data of guiding profile

Section [mm] 100 x 100 150 x 150

Forces and torques

Nominal drive torque [Nm] 15.7 51.6

Nominal belt traction force (payload) [N] 580 1350

Repeatability up to 3 m (1) [mm] ±0.05 ±0.05

Repeatability from 3 m (1) [mm] ±0.1 ±0.1

Toothed pulley and toothed belt data

Travel distance per revolution [mm/U] 170 240

Diameter of pulley [mm] 54.113 76.394

Toothed belt width / pitch [mm] 25 / 10 32 / 10

Weight of toothed belt [kg/m] 0.166 0.213

(1) at a constant ambient and operating temperature

HLE – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HLE – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

35

Dimensions

HLE without steel strip cover

HLE with toothed belt without steel strip cover

B B1 BL H H1 H2 A1 A C C1 Ls Lv Sw

HLE 100 100 52 90 132 120 100 150 174 126 102 300 450 125

HLE 150 150 60 140 187 175 150 198 234 146 110 350 500 125

HLE with toothed belt and steel strip cover

B B1 BL H H1 H2 A1 Ab Cb C1 Ls Lv Lb Sw

HLE 100 100 52 90 132 120 100 150 219 171 102 300 450 35 125

HLE 150 150 60 140 187 175 150 198 279 191 110 350 500 35 125

Sw = recommended safety travel
Ls = standard carriage
Lv = extended carriage
Sw = recommended safety travel
Ls = standard carriage
Lv = extended carriage

Steel strip cover option

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HLE – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers

36

Longitudinal flanges
The working stroke can be more than doubled when using
the flange plates. A longitudinal flange is required if the
travel path exceeds the profile length.

Tripping plate
The tripping plate is suitable for all standard load flange
plates.

Accessories for Toothed Belt Actuators

Toe Clamp
The toe clamps are used in conjunction with the standard
load attachment plate to rapidly install and attach various
combinations of linear actuators.

External stop buffer
The external stop buffer is mounted in the grooves of the
profile and can be adjusted infinitely.

T-Nuts and bolts
The T nuts and bolts can be used to attach other
components in the T-slots of the profile, or on the upper
side of the load attachment plate.

Intermediate shaft bearing for double actuators
The intermediate shaft bearing is used to support the
connection shaft of a double actuator in the event of a
long axis distance. The intermediate shaft bearing must be
used if the critical rotational speed is exceeded with the
double actuator connection shaft.

Assembly angle plate isosceles Assembly angle plate scalene

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
Accessories for Toothed Belt Actuators

The assembly angle plates are used to connect linear actuators to the basic structure (as support, you may use a Parker
profile), or with your construction elements.

37

DimAxes
Dimensioning tool for Parker linear actuators, for PC
from Windows version 95
Download free of charge from:
http://www.parker-eme.com/dimaxes

Belt tension measuring device RSM
For accurately setting the toothed belt tension.

Cable carrier
A cable carrier is needed when making power connections
to moving elements. Use only electrical cables which are
suitable for use in cable carriers.

Linear

Encoder

The use of a liner encoder increases the static position
stiffness of the linear actuator as well as the control
properties and positioning accuracy. An additional cable
carrier is required due to the moving sensor.

Mechanical limit switch
Switching button as per DIN EN50047. The contacts
satisfy the safety requirements by forced opening.

Electrical limit switches
The sensor is activated by a tripping plate on the side on
the flange plate.

Servo amplifier
For additional information please see our product
catalog 192-490123 or our website
www.parker.com/eme

Motors and gears
For additional information on motors please see our
website www.parker-eme.com/sm and for gears
www.parker.com/eme/gear

Other accessories / software

Motor and amplifier
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
Accessories for Toothed Belt Actuators

38

OSP-E..BHD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing
and Roller Guide

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BHD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing and Roller Guide

Standard Versions:
• Belt Actuator with integrated
Ball Bearing Guide
• Drive shaft with clamp shaft or
plain shaft
• Choice of motor mounting side
• Dovetail profile for mounting of accessories
and the actuator itself

Options:
• Tandem version for higher moments
• Bi-parting version for synchronised movements
• Integrated planetary gearbox
• Drive shaft with
– clamp shaft and plain shaft
– hollow shaft with keyway
• Special drive shaft versions
on request

Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..BHD
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -30 °C to +80 °C
Installation In any position
Encapsulation class IP 54

Material

Slotted profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Belt Steel-corded polyurethane
Pulley Aluminium
Guide Ball bearing guide
Guide rail Hardened steel rail with high precision, accuracy class N
Guide carrier Steel carrier with integrated wiper system, grease nipples,
preloaded 0.02 x C, accuracy class H
Steel band Hardened, corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the end cap for mounting the
actuator.

Check if profile mountings are needed using the maximum
allowable unsupported length graph.

At least one end cap must be secured to prevent axial sliding
when profile mountings are used.

Maintenance
Depending on operating conditions, inspection of
the actuator is recommended after 12 months or
3000 km operation.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the actuator.

First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical
data sheet for the different products must not be
exceeded. Before taking the actuator as a machine
into service, the user must ensure the adherence to
the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.

Weight (mass) and Inertia
Series Weight (mass)[kg] Inertia [x 10-6 kgm2]
At stroke 0 m Add per metre stroke Moving mass At stroke 0 m Add per metre stroke per kg mass

OSP-E20BHD 2.8 4 0.8 280 41 413

OSP-E25BHD 4.3 4.5 1.5 1229 227 821

OSP-E32BHD 8.8 7.8 2.6 3945 496 1459

OSP-E50BHD 26 17 7.8 25678 1738 3103

OSP-E20BHD* 4.3 4 1.5 540 41 413

OSP-E25BHD* 6.7 4.5 2.8 2353 227 821

OSP-E32BHD* 13.5 7.8 5.2 7733 496 1459

OSP-E50BHD* 40 17 15 49180 1738 3103

* Version: Tandem and Bi-parting (Option)

39
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BHD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing and Roller Guide

Series Max. applied load Max. moments [Nm]
Fy[N]

Fz[N] Mx My Mz

OSP-E20BHD 1600 1600 21 150 150

OSP-E25BHD 2000 3000 50 500 500

OSP-E32BHD 5000 10000 120 1000 1400

OSP-E50BHD 12000 15000 180 1800 2500

Characteristics Unit Description

Series

OSP-E20BHD OSP-E25BHD OSP-E32BHD OSP-E50BHD

Max. speed [m/s] 31) 51) 51) 51)

Linear motion per revolution
of drive shaft

[mm] 125 180 240 350

Max. rpm on drive shaft [min-1] 2000 1700 1250 860

Max. effective
Action force
F

A
at speed

< 1 m/s: [N] 550 1070 1870 3120

1-3 m/s: [N] 450 890 1560 2660

> 3 m/s: [N] – 550 1030 1940
No-load torque [Nm] 0.6 1.2 2.2 3.2
Max. acceleration/deceleration [m/s2] 50 50 50 50
Repeatability [mm/m] ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05
Max. standard stroke length [mm] 57602) 57002) 56002) 55002)
1) up to 10 m/s on request
2) longer strokes on request

Important:
The maximum permissible torque on the drive shaft is the lowest value of the
speed or stroke-dependent torque value.

Example above:
OSP-E25BHD, stroke 5 m, required speed 3 m/s from table T2
speed 3 m/s gives 25 Nm and stroke 5 m gives 21 Nm. Max. torque for this
application is 21 Nm.

Performance Overview
Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Determination of the lever arm
length l

x
, l

y
and l

z
from m

e
to the

centre axis of the actuator.

2. Calculation of the load F

x
or F

y

to the carrier caused by m
e

F = m
e
· g

3. Calculation of the static and
dynamic force F

A
which must be

transmitted by the belt.
F

A(horizontal)
= F

a
+ F

0

= m

g
· a + M

0
· 2π / U

ZR

F

A(vertical)
= F

g
+ F

a
+ F
0

= m
g
· g + m

g
· a + M
0
· 2π / U
ZR

4. Calculation of all static and dynamic
bending moments M

x
, M

y
and M

z

which occur in the application
M = F · l
5. Selection of maximum permissible
loads via Table T3.
6. Calculation and checking of the
combined load, which must not be
higher than 1.
7. Checking of the maximum torque
that occurs at the drive shaft in
Table T2.
8. Checking of the required action
force F

A
with the permissible load

value from Table T1.

For motor sizing, the effective torque must
be determined, taking into account the
cycle time.

Legend

l = distance of a mass in the
x-, y- and z-direction from the
guide [m]
m

e
= external moved mass [kg]

m
LA

= moved mass of actuator [kg]

m

g
= total moved mass

(m
e
+ m

LA
) [kg]

F
x/y

= load excerted on the carrier in
dependence of the installation
position [N]
F

A
= action force [N]

M
0
= no-load torque

[Nm]

U
ZR

= circumference of the pulley
(linear movement per revolution) [m]

g = gravity [m/s²]

a

max.

= maximum acceleration [m/s²]

Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings

Maximum Permissible Loads

Maximum Permissible Torque on Drive Shaft Speed / Stroke

OSP-E20BHD OSP-E25BHD OSP-E32BHD OSP-E50BHD

Speed
[m/s]

Torque
[Nm]

Stroke
[m]

Torque
[Nm]
Speed
[m/s]
Torque
[Nm]
Stroke
[m]
Torque
[Nm]
Speed
[m/s]
Torque
[Nm]
Stroke
[m]
Torque
[Nm]
Speed
[m/s]
Torque
[Nm]
Stroke
[m]
Torque
[Nm]

1 11 1 11 1 31 1 31 1 71 1 71 1 174 1 174

2 10 2 11 2 28 2 31 2 65 2 71 2 159 2 174

3 9 3 8 3 25 3 31 3 59 3 60 3 153 3 138

4 4 7 4 23 4 25 4 56 4 47 4 143 4 108

5 5 5 5 22 5 21 5 52 5 38 5 135 5 89

40
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BHD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing and Roller Guide
ACCESSORIES
MOTOR MOUNTINGS

END CAP MOUNTING
For mounting the actuators on the
end cap.

PROFILE MOUNTING
For supporting long actuators or
mounting the actuators on dovetail
grooves.

MAGNETIC SWITCHES
TYPE RS AND ES
For contactless position sensing of
end stop and intermediate carrier
positions.

MULTI-AXIS SYSTEMS
For modular assembly of actuators
up to multi-axis systems.

STANDARD VERSIONS
OSP-E..BHD

Standard carrier with integrated
guide and magnets for contactless
position sensing. Dovetail profile
for mounting of accessories and
the actuator itself.

DRIVE SHAFT WITH CLAMP
SHAFT

DRIVE SHAFT WITH PLAIN SHAFT

ACTUATING DIRECTION
Important in parallel operations,
e.g. with intermediate drive shaft

OPTIONS

TANDEM
For higher moment support.

BI-PARTING VERSION
For perfectly synchronised
bi-parting movements.

DRIVE SHAFT WITH
CLAMP SHAFT AND PLAIN SHAFT
For connections with intermediate
drive shaft

HOLLOW SHAFT WITH KEYWAY
For close coupling of motors
and external gears.

INTEGRATED PLANETARY
GEARBOX
For compact installation and very
low backlash.

Options and Accessories

OSP-E..BHD
Belt actuator with integrated guide

Standard

Standard –
Bi-Parting
Version

41

Parker Electromechanical Actuators

OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Standard Versions:
• Standard carrier with internal plain bearing guide
• Dovetail profile for mounting of accessories and
the actuator itself
• Position of drive shafts

Options:
• Tandem version
• Bi-parting version for synchronized movements
• Drive shaft with double plain shaft

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the end cap for mounting the
actuator. See if Profile Mountings are needed using the
maximum allowable unsupported length graph.
At least one end cap must be secured to prevent axial sliding
when profile mounting is used.
When the actuator is moving an externally guided load, the
compensation must be used.

The actuators can be fitted with the standard carrier mounting
facing in any direction.
To prevent contamination such as fluid ingress, the actuator
should be fitted with its sealing band facing downwards.
The inversion mounting can be fitted to transfer the driving
force to the opposite side.

Maintenance
All moving parts are long-term lubricated for a normal
operational environment. Parker Origa recommends a check
and lubrication of the actuator, and if necessary a change of
the belt and wear parts, after an operation time of 12 months
of operation or 3 000 km travel of distance.
Additional greasing is easily done by using nipples in the
slotted profile. Please refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the actuator.

First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical data sheet for
the different products must not be exceeded. Before taking
the actuator as a machine into service, the user must ensure
the adherence to the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.
Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..B
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -30 °C to +80 °C
Installation See table
Encapsulation class IP 54

Material

Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Belt Steel-corded polyurethane
Pulley Aluminium
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Weight (mass) and Inertia
Series Weight (mass) [kg] Inertia [x 10-6 kgm2]
at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke moving mass at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke

OSP-E25B 0.9 1.6 0.2 25 6.6

OSP-E32B 1.9 3.2 0.4 43 10

OSP-E50B 5.2 6.2 1.0 312 45

OSP-E25B* 1.2 1.6 0.5 48 6.6

OSP-E32B* 2.3 3.2 0.8 83 10

OSP-E50B* 6.3 6.2 2.1 585 45

* Version: Tandem and Bi-parting (Option)

42

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Characteristics Unit Description

Size OSP-E25B OSP-E32B OSP-E50B
Max. speed [m/s] 2 3 5
Linear motion per revolution, [mm] 60 60 100
drive shaft

Max. rpm drive shaft [min-1] 2 000 3 000 3 000
Max. effective < 1 m/s: [N] 50 150 425

action force 1- 2 m/s: [N] 50 120 375

F
A
at speed > 2 m/s: [N] – 100 300

No-load torque [Nm] 0.4 0.5 0.6

Max. acceleration/deceleration [m/s2] 10 10 10

Repeatability [mm/m] ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05

Max. stroke length OSP-E..B [mm] 3000 5000 5000

Max. stroke length OSP-E..B* [mm] 2 x 1500 2 x 2500 2 x 2500

* Bi-parting version

OSP-E25B OSP-E32B OSP-E50B
Speed Torque Stroke Torque Speed. Torque Stroke Torque Speed. Torque Stroke Torque
[m/s] [Nm] [m] [Nm] [m/s] [Nm] [m] [Nm] [m/s] [Nm] [m] [Nm]

1 0.9 1 0.9 1 2.3 1 2.3 1 10.0 1 10.0
2 0.9 2 0.9 2 2.0 2 2.3 2 9.5 2 10.0
3 0.9 3 1.8 3 2.3 3 9.0 3 9.0
4 2.3 4 8.0 4 7.0
5 1.8 5 7.5 5 6.0

Important:
The maximum permissible torque on the drive shaft is the lowest value of the
speed or stroke-dependent torque value.

Example above:
OSP-E32B stroke 2 m, required speed 3 m/s;
From table T2: speed 3 m/s gives 1.8 Nm and stroke 2 m gives 2.3 Nm.
Max. torque for this application is 1.8 Nm.

Size Max. applied load [N] Max. moments [Nm]

Fz

Mx My

Mz

OSP-E25B 500 2 12 8

OSP-E32B 1200 8 25 16

OSP-E50B 3000 16 80 32

OSP-E..B The maximum load F must be equally distributed among
Bi-partional the two carriers

The distance l (lx, ly, lz)
for calculation of the
bending moments relates
to the centre axis of the
actuator.

M = F · l [Nm]
M

x
= M

x static
+ M

x dynamic
M

y
= M

y static
+ M

y dynamic
M

z
= M

z static
+ M

z dynamic

Fz Mx My Mz
+ + + ≤ 1

Fz (max) Mx (max) My (max) Mz (max)

The total of the loads must not exceed >1 under any circumstances.

Loads, Forces and Moments

Combined loads

If the actuator is subjected to several forces,
loads and moments at the same time,
the maximum load is calculated with the
equation shown here.
The maximum permissible loads must not
be exceeded.

Performance Overview
Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Required acceleration,
2. Required torque is shown
on page 332
3. Check that maximum values in the
table 3 are not exceeded
4. Drive shaft by using table T2.
(Pay attention to note under table)
If value is lower than required,
overview the moving profile or
select if possible a bigger unit.
5. Before sizing and specifying the
motor, the average torque must be
calculated using the cycle time
of the application.
6. Check that the maximum allowable
unsupported length is not exceeded.

Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings

Maximum Permissible Loads

Equation of Combined Loads

T3

Maximum Permissible Torque on Drive Shaft Speed / Stroke T2

43

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

ACCESSORIES

MOTOR MOUNTING

END CAP MOUNTING
For end-mounting of the actuator.

PROFILE MOUNTING
For supporting long actuators or
mounting the actuator on the
dovetail grooves.

CLEVIS MOUNTING
Carrier with tolerance and
parallelism compensation to
drive external linear guides.

INVERSION MOUNTING
The inversion mounting, mounted
on the carrier, transfers the
driving force to the opposite
side, e.g. for dirty environments.

MAGNETIC SWITCHES
SERIES RST AND EST
For contactless position sensing
of end stop and intermediate
carrier positions.

STANDARD VERSIONS
OSP-E..B

Carrier with internal guidance
and magnet packet for
contactless position sensing.
Dovetail profile for mounting of
accessories and the actuator
itself.

DRIVE SHAFT VERSIONS
– Plain shaft or
– double plain shaft (Option)
e.g. to drive two actuators
in parallel.

OPTIONS

TANDEM
For higher moment support.

BI-PARTING
For perfectly synchronised
bi-parting movements.

Standard
Standard

Option

Options and Accessories

OSP-E..B
Belt actuator with internal
plain bearing guide

44

OSP-E..SB – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing
Guide

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..SB – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Standard Versions:
• Standard carrier with internal plain
bearing guide
• Dovetail profile for mounting of accessories
and the actuator itself
• Pitches of Ball Screw Spindle
Type OSP-E25 : 5 mm
Type OSP-E32: 5 , 10 mm
Type OSP-E50: 5 , 10, 25 mm

Options:
• Tandem version
• Clean room-version, according to
DIN EN ISO 14644-1
• Displacement Measuring System SFI-plus

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the end cap for mounting the
actuator. See if Profile Mountings are needed using the
maximum allowable unsupported length graph.
At least one end cap must be secured to prevent axial sliding
when profile mounting is used.
When the actuator is moving an externally guided load, the
compensation must be used.
The actuators can be fitted with the standard carrier mounting
facing in any direction.
To prevent contamination such as fluid ingress, the actuator
should be fitted with its sealing band facing downwards.
The inversion mounting can be fitted to transfer the driving
force to the opposite side.

Maintenance
All moving parts are long-term lubricated for a normal
operational environment. Parker Origa recommends a check
and lubrication of the actuator, and if necessary a change of
the belt and wear parts, after an operation time of 12 months
of operation or 3 000 km travel of distance.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
actuator.

First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical data sheet for
the different products must not be exceeded. Before taking
the actuator as a machine into service, the user must ensure
the adherence to the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.
Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..SB
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +80 °C
Installation In any position
Mounting See drawing
Encapsulation class IP 54

Material

Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Ball screw Hardened steel
Ball screw nut Hardened steel
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Weight (mass) and Inertia
Series Weight (mass) [kg] Inertia [x 10-6 kgm2]
at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke moving mass at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke

OSP-E25SB 0.8 2.3 0.2 2.2 11

OSP-E32SB 2.0 4.4 0.4 8.4 32

OSP-E50SB 5.2 9.4 1.2 84.0 225

45
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..SB – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Recommended maximum
acceleration is shown in graphs
2. Required torque is shown in graphs
3. Check that maximum values in the
adjacent charts are not exceeded.
4. When sizing and specifying the
motor, the RMS-average torque
must be calculated using the cycle
time of the application.
5. Check that the maximum allowable
unsupported length is not exceeded.

Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings
Characteristics Unit Description

Series OSP-E25SB OSP-E32SB OSP-E50SB
Pitch [mm] 5 5 10 5 10 25
Max. speed [m/s] 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.5 1.25

Linear motion per revolution [mm] 5 5 10 5 10 25
drive shaft
Max. rpm, drive shaft [min-1] 3 000 3 000 3 000

Max. effective action force F
A
[N] 250 600 1 500

Corresponding torque [Nm] 0.35 0.75 1.3 1.7 3.1 7.3
on drive shaft
No-load torque [Nm] 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5
Max. allowable torque [Nm] 0.6 1.5 2.8 4.2 7.5 20

on drive shaft
Repeatability [mm/m] ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.05
Max. Standard stroke length [mm] 1100 2000 3200

Performance Overview

46

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain
Bearing Guide

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide

Standard Versions:
• Standard carrier with internal plain
bearing guide
• Dovetail profile for mounting of accessories
and the actuator itself
• Pitch of Trapezoidal Spindle:
Type OSP-E25ST : 4 mm
Type OSP-E32ST: 4 mm
Type OSP-E50ST: 6 mm

Options:
• Displacement Measuring System SFI-plus
• Keyway

Installation Instructions
Use the threaded holes in the free end cap and a profile
mounting close to the motor end for mounting the actuator.
See if profile mountings are needed using the maximum
permissible unsupported length graph.
At least one end cap must be secured to prevent axial sliding
when Profile Mounting is used.
When the actuator is moving an externally guided load, the
compensation must be used.
The actuators can be fitted with the standard carrier mounting
facing in any direction.
To prevent contamination such as fluid ingress, the drive
should be fitted with its sealing band facing
downwards.
The inversion mounting can be fitted to transfer the driving
force to the opposite side.

Maintenance
All moving parts are long-term lubricated for a normal
operational environment. Parker Origa recommends a check
and lubrication of the actuator, and if necessary a change of
the belt and wear parts, after an operation time of 12 months
of operation or 3000 km travel of distance.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
drive

First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical data sheet for
the different products must not be exceeded. Before taking
the actuator as a machine into service, the user must ensure
the adherence to the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.
Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..ST
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +70 °C
Installation In any position

Material

Slotted Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Trapazoidal screw Cold rolled steel
Drive nut Thermoplastic polyester
Guide bearings Low friction plastic
Sealing band Hardened corrosion resistant steel
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel
Mountings Zinc plated steel and aluminium

Weight (mass) and Inertia
Series Weight (mass) [kg] Inertia [x 10-6 kgm2]
at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke moving mass at stroke 0 m ad per meter stroke

OSP-E25ST 0.9 2.8 0.2 6 30

OSP-E32ST 2.1 5.0 0.5 21.7 81

OSP-E50ST 5.1 10.6 1.3 152 400

47

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Check that maximum values in the
table T3 are not exceeded.

2. Check the maximum values in graph
are not exceeded.

3. When sizing and specifying the
motor, the RMS-average torque
must be calculated using the cycle
time of the application.

4. Check that the maximum allowable
unsupported length is not exceeded

Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings Characteristics Unit Description

Size OSP-E25ST OSP-E32ST OSP-E50ST
Pitch [mm] 4 4 6
Max. speed [m/s] 0.1 0.1 0.15
Linear motion per revolution [mm] 4 4 6
drive shaft
Max. rpm, drive shaft [min-1] 1500 1500 1500
Max. effective action force FA [N] 600 1300 2 500
Corresponding torque [Nm] 1.35 3.2 8.8
on drive shaft
No-load torque [Nm] 0.3 0.4 0.5
Max. allowable torque [Nm] 1.55 4.0 9.4
on drive shaft
Self-locking force FL1) [N] 600 1300 2500
Repeatability [mm/m] ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
Max. Standard stroke length [mm] 1100 2000 2500*

1) Related to screw types Tr 16×4, Tr 20×4, TR 30×6
* For strokes longer than 2000 mm in horizontal apllications, please contact our
customer support.

Performance Overview

48

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BV- Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide

OSP-E..BV – Vertical Belt Actuator with
Integrated Ball Bearing Guide

Series Total weight
(Mass) [kg]
Moving mass
[kg]
Inertia
[x 10-6 kgm2]
At stroke 0 m Actuator
head
At stroke
0 m
Add per metre
stroke
At Stroke
0 m
Add per
metre stroke

Add per kg
mass

OSP-E20BV 3.4 1.9 1.6 4.0 486 1144 289

OSP-E25BV 7.7 5.3 2.4 4.4 1695 2668 617

OSP-E20BV* 5.3 2 x 1.9 1.6 4.0 533 1144 289

OSP-E25BV* 13 2 x 5.3 2.4 4.4 1915 2668 617

* Version: Tandem (Option)

Weight (mass) and Inertia

Standard Versions:
• Vertical belt actuator with integrated ball
bearing guide
• Drive shaft with clamp shaft or
plain shaft
• Choice of motor mounting side

Options:
• Tandem version for higher moments
• Drive shaft with
– clamp shaft and plain shaft or double plain shaft
– hollow shaft with keyway
• Special drive shaft versions on request

Installation Instructions
Make sure that the OSP-E..BV is always operated by motor
with holding brake on the actuator side. For the mounting of
the external mass to be moved there are threaded holes in
the end caps. Before mounting, check the correct centre of
gravity distance from the table.
Mount the external mass on the belt fixed end, so that
the belt tension can be checked and adjusted at the belt
tensioning end without dismantling.

Maintenance
Depending on operating conditions, inspection of
the actuator is recommended after 12 months or
3000 km operation.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the actuator.
First service start-up
The maximum values specified in the technical
data sheet for the different products must not be
exceeded. Before taking the actuator as a machine
into service, the user must ensure the adherence to
the EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG.
Characteristics Description

Series OSP-E..BV
Mounting See drawings
Ambient temperature range -30 °C to +80 °C
Installation Vertical
Encapsulation class IP 20

Material

Profile Extruded anodized aluminium
Belt Steel-corded polyurethane
Pulley Aluminium
Guide Ball bearing guide
Guide rail Hardened steel rail with high precision, accuracy class N
Guide carrier Steel carrier with integrated wiper system, grease nipples,
preloaded 0.08 x C, accuracy class N
Screws, nuts Zinc plated steel

49

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BV – Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide

Characteristics Unit Description

Series

OSP-E20BV OSP-E25BV

Max. Speed [m/s] 3.0 5.0

Linear motion per revolution
of drive shaft

[mm/U] 108 160

Max. rpm. drive shaft [min-1] 1700 1875

Max. effective
action force F

A
at speed

1m/s [N] 650 1430

1 – 2 m/s [N] 450 1200

> 3 – 5 m/s [N] – 1050

No-load torque 2) [Nm] 0.6 1.2

Max. acceleration/deceleration [m/s2] 20 20

Repeatability +/-
[mm/m]

0.05 0.05

Max. standard stroke length 1) [mm] 1000 1500

Max. recomended permissible mass 3) [kg] 10 20

1) Longer strokes on request
2) As a result of static friction force
3) vertical

OSP-E-20BV OSP-E-25BV

Speed
[m/s]
Torque
[Nm]
Stroke
[m]
Torque
[Nm]
Speed
[m/s]
Torque
[Nm]
Stroke
[m]
Torque
[Nm]

1 19 1 17 1 36 1 36

2 17 2 11 2 30 2 36

3 16 3 30

4 28

5 27

Important:
The maximum permissible torque on the drive shaft is the lowest value of the
speed or stroke-dependent torque value.

Example above:
OSP-E25BV required speed v = 3 m/s and stroke = 1 m.

Accordingly Table T2 shows permissible moments of 30 Nm for the speed and
36 Nm for the stroke. Therefore the maximum moment at the drive shaft
is determined by the speed and must not exceed 30 Nm.

Performance Overview
Sizing of Actuator
The following steps are recommended for
selection :

1. Determination of the lever arm
length l

x
, l
y
and l
z
from m
e
to the
centre axis of the actuator.

2. Calculation of the static and
dynamic force F

A
which must be
transmitted by the belt.
F

A
= F

g
+ F
a
+ F
0

= m
g
· g + m
g
· a + M
0
· 2π / U
ZR

3. Calculation of all static and
dynamic moments M

x
, M
y
and M

z

which occur in the application.
M = F · l

4. Selection of maximum permissible
loads via Table T3.

5. Calculation and checking of the
combined load, which must not be
higher than 1.

6. Checking of the maximum moment
that occurs at the drive shaft in
Table T2.

7. Checking of the required action
force F

A
with the permissible load
value from Table T1.

For motor sizing, the effective torque must
be determined, taking into account the
cycle time.

Legend

l = distance of a mass in the
x-, y- and z-direction from the
guide [m]

m
e
= external moved mass [kg]

m
LA

= moved mass of actuator [kg]

m
g
= total moved mass

(m
e
+ m
LA
) [kg]

F
A
= action force [N]

M
0
= no-load torque [Nm]

U
ZR

= circumference of the pulley
(linear movement per
revolution) [m]

g = gravity [m/s²]

a
max

= maximum acceleration [m/s²]
Sizing Performance
Overview
Maximum Loadings
Maximum Permissible Torque on Drive Shaft Speed / Stroke

50
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BV- Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide

lever arm l
z

external mass

Mass [kg]

OSP-E20BV OSP-E25BV

Lever arm l
z

[mm]
Max. permissible
acceleration/
deceleration
[m/s2]

Lever arm l
z

[mm]
Max. permissible
acceleration/
deceleration
[m/s2]

> 3 to 5 0 20 50 20

> 5 to 10 0 20 40 20

> 10 to 15 – – 35 20

> 15 to 20 – – 30 15

Size Max. applied load [N] Max. moments [Nm]
Fy [N]

Fz [N] Mx My Mz

OSP-E20BV 1600 1600 20 100 100

OSP-E25BV 2000 3000 50 200 200

The distance l (lx, ly, lz)
for calculation of the
bending moments relates
to the centre axis of the
actuator.
M = F · l [Nm]
M
x
= M
x static
+ M
x dynamic
M
y
= M
y static
+ M
y dynamic
M
z
= M
z static
+ M
z dynamic
Fz Mx My Mz
+ + + ≤ 1
Fz (max) Mx (max) My (max) Mz (max)
The total of the loads must not exceed >1 under any circumstances.
Loads, Forces and Moments
Combined loads
If the actuator is subjected to several forces,
loads and moments at the same time,
the maximum load is calculated with the
equation shown here.
The maximum permissible loads must not
be exceeded.
Maximum Permissible Loads
Equation of Combined Loads

Distance of Centre of Gravity of External Mass from
Mid-Point of Actuator

51
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
OSP-E..BV – Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide

STANDARD VERSION
OSP-E..BV

Standard actuator head with
clamp shaft or plain shaft and
integrated ball bearing guide with
two carriers.
Choice of side on which gearbox
or motor is to be mounted.

OPTIONS

TANDEM
Additional actuator head and two
additional carriers for higher
bending moments.

Drive Shaft with
Clamp Shaft

Drive Shaft with
Plain Shaft

ACCESSORIES

MOTOR MOUNTINGS
For connection of gearbox or
motor direct to drive shaft with
clamp shaft, or with a motor
coupling to drive shaft with plain
shaft.

MAGNETIC SWITCHES SET
Magnetic switches with
connector, mounting rail and
magnets for contactless sensing
of the end positions. Cable
(suitable for cable chain) can
be ordered separately in 5 m,
10 m or 15 m length.

MULTI-AXIS SYSTEMS
For modular assembly of
actuators up to multi-axis
systems.

Magnet

Magnetic Switch

Magnetic Switch
Magnet

DRIVE SHAFT
“CLAMP SHAFT AND PLAIN
SHAFT” OR “DOUBLE PLAIN
SHAFT”
e.g. for parallel operation of two
Z-axes with an intermediate drive
shaft.

HOLLOW SHAFT WITH KEYWAY
For direct connection of gearbox
or motor with keyway.

Drive Shaft with
Clamp Shaft and
Plain Shaft

Drive Shaft with
Double Plain
Shaft

Options and Accessories

OSP-E..BV, Vertical belt

actuator

with integrated ball bearing guide

52

LCB – Compact Linear Actuator with Sliding Bearing
• Robust and compact linear

actuator

• Cost-efficient positioning actuator

• External sliding guide and toothed
belt drive

• Low maintenance and low noise

• Simple mounting

• Clean operation without lubricants

• High resistance to flexing

• Very high torsional rigidity

• Dirt tolerant

• Easy maintenance, robust

The linear actuators are available in two sizes: LCB040 and

LCB060

The modular system allows the combination of actuators including other types of actuator to build complete handling
systems.

Specifications

Frame sizes

LCB040 LCB060

Rating

Maximum thrust force [N] 160 560

Typical payload [kg] 1…6 1…30

Max. static load bearing capacity [N] 1250 3850

Max. Stroke [mm] 2000 5500

Max. Speed [m/s] 5 8

Repeatability [mm] ±0.2 ±0.2

Max. Acceleration [m/s2] 20 20

Travel distance per revolution [mm/U] 125 170

Toothed belt width / pitch [mm] 16 / 5 25 / 10

Maximum drive torque [Nm] 3.2 15.2

Weight of base unit without stroke

LCB with short sliding carriage [kg] 1.47 4.33

LCB with medium sliding carriage [kg] 1.66 4.71

LCB with long sliding carriage [kg] 1.85 5.10

Weight of moved mass with short sliding carriage [kg] 0.39 1.41

Weight of moved mass with medium sliding carriage [kg] 0.46 1.53

Weight of moved mass with long sliding carriage [kg] 0.53 1.66

Additional weight per meter of stroke [kg/m] 2.45 5.21

Overall dimensions & physical data

Length with short sliding carriage, zero stroke [mm] 246 3

78

Length with medium sliding carriage, zero stroke [mm] 296 428

Length with long sliding carriage, zero stroke [mm] 346 478

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
LCB – Compact Linear Actuator with Sliding Bearing

53

LCB040

LCB060
LCB040 LCB060

Short sliding carriage Ls [mm] 100 150

Medium sliding carriage Ls [mm] 150 200

Long sliding carriage Ls [mm] 200 250

Width of sliding carriage Bs [mm] 73 120

Module stop La [mm] 73 114

Total length Lg [mm] stroke + Ls + 2 La stroke + Ls + 2 La

max. Stroke [mm] 2000 5500

Dimensions

Section

Stroke lengths

possible stroke lengths [mm]

Stroke 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000

LCB040 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

LCB060 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Stroke 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4740 5000 5250 5500

LCB060 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

When determining the stroke, a safety travel on both sides of the travel path should be considered.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
LCB – Compact Linear Actuator with Sliding Bearing

54

LCR – Light Capacity Rodless Miniature Linear Positioner

Description
For OEMs looking to automate light payloads, the
LCR (Light Capacity Rodless) linear positioner family
provides the smallest form factor with unmatched,
easy-to-use flexibility.
LCR was developed specifically to provide a high-
quality, easy-to-use, off-the-shelf linear actuator.
Rated for 100 % duty cycle, the LCR offers smooth,
quiet motion ideal for keeping instrument noise to
a minimum. With selectable travel lengths up to
1000 mm and payloads up to 100 N, the ability to
automate laboratory instruments has never been
easier.

Features
• Miniature footprint – 30×40 mm cross-section

• Internal square rail or glider bearing design

• 100 % duty cycle

• IP30 stainless steel strip seal

• Low noise leadscrew drive

• Long travel belt drive

• Travel lengths to 1000 mm

• Attractive black anodize finish

• Extruded aluminum body incorporates dovetail
mounting, T-slots and belt return

• Toe clamp mounting for easy installation

• Dowel pin holes in the LCR30 carriage for
repeatable mounting

• Multiple motor mount options accommodate
NEMA 11, 17 and 23 steppers

• Flush-mounted fully adjustable limit sensors

Application
• Life science

• General-purpose applications

Technical Characteristics – Overview
LCR – Linear Positioner Screw-Driven Belt-Driven

Model LCR30

Width x Height [mm] 30×40
Repeatability [mm] ±0.1 ±0.5
Max. Normal Load [N] 100
Max. Axial Load [N] 60 45
Max. Speed [mm/s] 150 900
Max. Travel Length
[mm]

600 1000

Screw Lead Options
[mm/rev]

2, 10 –

Conformity CE, RoHS

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
LCR – Light Capacity Rodless Miniature Linear Positioner

55

Technical Data – LCR Screw-Driven
LCR Screw-Driven

Type Unit
LCR30

S (Square Rail) B (Bushing)
Bidirectional Repeatability [mm] ±0.1 ±0.2
Duty Cycle [%] 100 100
Max. Acceleration* [m/s2] 20 20
Normal Load 90 45
Moment Load [Nm]

Roll 2.6 0.3
Yaw 6.5 0.8
Pitch 8.2 1.5

Max. Axial Load [N] 70 70
Screw Efficiency

[%]

2.0 mm Lead 50 50
10.0 mm Lead 70 70

Breakaway Torque [mNm]
30 (2 mm lead)

45 (10 mm lead)
40 (2 mm lead)

90 (10 mm lead)
Screw Diameter [mm] 6.4 6.4
Coefficient of Friction – 0.02 0.10
Base Moment of Inertia [mm4]

Ixx 39 778 36 162
Iyy 46 273 42 066

* Do not exceed allowable axial and moment loading.

Technical Data – LCR Belt-Driven
LCR Belt-Driven

Type Unit
LCR30

S (Square Rail) B (Bushing)
Bidirectional Repeatability [mm] ±0.2 ±0.5
Duty Cycle [%] 100 100
Max. Acceleration* [m/s2] 20 20
Max. Linear Speed [mm/s] 870 870
Normal Load [N] 90 45
Moment Load [Nm]

Roll 2.6 0.3
Yaw 6.5 0.8
Pitch 8.2 1.5

Max. Axial Load [N] 45 45
Linear Travel/Rev [mm] 58.0 58.0
Breakaway Torque [mNm] 85.0 85.0
Coefficient of Friction – 0.02 0.10
Base Moment of Inertia [mm4]

Ixx 39 778 36 162
Iyy 46 273 42 066
* Do not exceed allowable axial and moment loading.
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
LCR – Light Capacity Rodless Miniature Linear Positioner

56

Profile designs
• Basic profile for assembling directly to the machine base
• Reinforced profile for self-supporting assembly

Mounting systems
• Integrated T-slots for attaching from below and from the side

Protection classes
• Without cover: Standard
• With cover: IP54

Guide system
• Recirculating ball bearing guide

Lubrication
• Central lubrication via externally accessible lubricating nippels

Position sensing
• Integrated, adjustable position switch for end positions and homing

Impact protection
• Integrated shock absorbers for both end positions

Screw drive
The solution for precise path
and position control for heavy loads

Toothed belt drive
The solution for fast path and position
control for medium loads

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

57
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator
9

Dimensions –

Internal lever arm l
zi

Product size lzi
HMRx085 [mm] 33.0

HMRx110 [mm] 39.5

HMRx150 [mm] 50.0

HMRx180 [mm] 57.5

HMRx240 [mm] 68.0

Internal lever arm l
zi

Combined loads
The maximum permissible
load for linear drives subject
to simultaneous multiple

The sum of all loads must under no circumstance be > 1.

Fy Fz Mx My Mz
L = + + + + ≤1

Fy

(max)

Fz
(max)

Mx

(max)

My

(max)

Mz
(max)

loads, forces and bending
moments are calculated
using the formula below.

Maximum permissible
loads must not be
exceeded.

Loads. forces and bending moments

ORIGA Linear Drives

HMR series
Ball bearing guide
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

Load requirements for guides and installation size.

The occurring loads, forces and bending moments depend on the application. The mass of the construction attached to the
carriage has a center of gravity. This mass creates static forces (F = m · g) and bending moments (M = m · g · l).
Additional dynamic moments (M = m · a · l) arise in dependence of the acceleration during travel.
Care should be taken when selecting suitable guides that the permissible sum of loads does not exceed 1.

Loads, forces and bending moments

Fz
Fy
Mz
My
Mx
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

58

10

Maximum permissible loads based on a performance of 8,000 km

Product Size HMRx08 HMRx11 HMRx15 HMRx18 HMRx24 HMRx08 HMRx11 HMRx15 HMRx18 HMRx24

Carriage Standard Tandem

Max. permissible load

F
z8000

F
y

8000

[N] 1,250 3,000 6,000 11,000 18,200 1,875 4,500 9,000 16,500 27,300

Max. permissible bending moment

M
x8000

[Nm] 30 105 290 640 1,460 45 160 435 960 2,190

M
y8000

M
z8000

[Nm] 55 135 380 840 1,660 80 205 570 1,260 2,490

Maximum permissible loads based on a performance of 2,540 km

Product Size HMRx08 HMRx11 HMRx15 HMRx18 HMRx24 HMRx08 HMRx11 HMRx15 HMRx18 HMRx24
Carriage Standard Tandem
Max. permissible load

F
z2540

F
y2540

[N] 1,800 4,450 8,800 16,200 26,600 2,700 6,700 13,200 24,300 39,900

Max. permissible bending moment

M
x2540

[Nm] 45 155 430 940 2,150 68 235 645 1,410 3,225

M
y2540

M
z2540

[Nm] 80 200 560 1,230 2,430 120 300 840 1,845 3,645

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

59

Series HMRS / Ball Screw / Drive Data

12

ORIGA Linear Drives
Series HMRS / Ball Screw / Drive Data / Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm
Technical Data HMRS

Product Size HMRS08 HMRS11 HMRS15 HMRS18 HMRS24

Type of Screw 12 x 5 12 x 12 16 x 5 16 x 16 20 x 5 20 x 20 25 x 10 25 x 25 32 x 10 32 x 32

Pitch p [mm] 5 12 5 16 5 20 10 25 10 32

Max. speed v
max.

[m/s] 0.25 0.60 0.25 0.80 0.25 1.00 0.50 1.25 0.50 1.60

Max. acceleration a
max.

[m/s2] 10 10 10 10 10

Repeatability [µm] ± 20 ± 20 ± 20 ± 20 ± 20

Max. stroke [mm] 1,200 1,500 2,500 3,400 4,000

Thrust force and torque

Max. thrust force
F

Amax
[N] 820 820 2,200 2,200 2,600 2,600 4,800 4,800 5,500 5,500

F
A2540

[N] 820 650 1,550 1,150 1,800 2,160 3,300 3,960 3,500 4,880

Max. torque at
drive shaft

M
Amax

[Nm] 0.7 1.7 1.9 6.1 2.2 9.0 8.3 20.8 9.5 30.4

M
A2540

[Nm] 0.7 1.3 1.3 3.1 1.6 7.5 5.7 17.1 6.1 27.0

No load torque M
0

[Nm] 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.7 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1

Stroke dependent speed

M
ax

. p
er

m
is

si
bl

e
sp

ee
d

at
o

rd
er

s
tro

ke

200 [mm] 250 600 250 800 250 1,000 500 1,250 500 1,600

400 [mm] 250 600 250 800 250 1,000 500 1,250 500 1,600

600 [mm] 152 366 197 631 250 1,000 500 1,250 500 1,600

800 [mm] 102 245 132 424 169 678 382 956 423 1,354

1000 [mm] 73 176 95 304 122 486 277 694 312 997

1200 [mm] 55 132 71 228 91 366 211 526 239 765

1400 [mm] – – 56 178 71 285 165 413 189 605

1600 [mm] – – 45 143 57 228 133 333 153 491

1800 [mm] – – – – 47 187 109 274 127 406

2000 [mm] – – – – 39 156 92 229 107 342

2200 [mm] – – – – 33 132 78 195 91 291

2400 [mm] – – – – 28 113 67 167 79 251

2600 [mm] – – – – – – 58 145 68 219

2800 [mm] – – – – – – 51 128 60 193

3000 [mm] – – – – – – 45 113 53 171

3200 [mm] – – – – – – 40 100 48 152

3400 [mm] – – – – – – – – 43 137

3600 [mm] – – – – – – – – 39 123

3800 [mm] – – – – – – – – 35 112

4000 [mm] – – – – – – – – 32 102

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

60

Series HMRB / Belt / Drive Data

24
ORIGA Linear Drives

Series HMRB Belt / Drive Data / Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

Description Motor mounting position

horizontal upright

090° / 270° 000° / 180°

BD, DD AP, CP, AD, CD

Type and orientation of the belt is given by the motor mounting position.

Drive data

Technical data HMRB

Production size HMRB08 HMRB11 HMRB15

Motor mounting position 090° / 270° 000° / 180° 090° / 270° 000° / 180° 090° / 270° 000° / 180°

Lead constant s
lin.

[mm] 66 66 90 90 100 125

Max. speed v
max.

[m/s] 2 5

Max. acceleration a
max.

[m/s2] 30 50

Repeatability [µm] ± 50

Max. order stroke [mm] 3,000 4,000 6,000

Thrust force and torque

Max. thrust force F
A max.

[N] 295 295 630 630 1,050 630

Max. torque on drive shaft M
A max.

[Nm] 3.1 3.1 9.0 9.0 17.0 13.0

No load torque M
0

[Nm] 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2

Technical data HMRB

Production size HMRB18 HMRB24

Motor mounting position 090° / 270° 000° / 180° 090° / 270° 000° / 180°

Lead constant s
lin.

[mm] 130 150 160 224

Max. speed v
max.

[m/s] 5

Max. acceleration a
max.

[m/s2] 50

Repeatability [µm] ± 50

Max. order stroke [mm] 6,000

Thrust force and torque
Max. thrust force F
A max.

N 1,300 1,000 4,000 3,750

Max. torque on drive shaft M
A max.

Nm 27 24 101 134

No load torque M
0

Nm 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

61

Series HMRB / Belt / Thrust Force

25
ORIGA Linear Drives

Series HMRB / Belt / Thrust Force / Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

The permissible thrust force from the table is depending on speed level and order stroke length. The minimum thrust force
value must not be exceeded in the application.

Information: Limiting the torque from the motor may avoid exceeding permitted thrust force.

Example:
HMRB18 with motor mounting position 1 (090° front), speed v = 2 m/s (F

A
= 1,300 N)

and order stroke length OS = 2,500 mm (F
A
= 710 N).

The maximum permissible thrust force F
A
= 710 N must not be exceeded.

HMRB thrust force

Product size HMRB08 HMRB11 HMRB15 HMRB18 HMRB24

Motor mounting position

090° /
270°

000° /
180°

090° /
270°
000° /
180°
090° /
270°
000° /
180°
090° /
270°
000° /
180°
090° /
270°
000° /
180°

Thrust force F
A

corresponding
to speed v

F
A(v<1 m/s)

[N] 295 295 630 630 1,050 630 1,300 1,000 4,000 3,750

F
A(v<2 m/s)

[N] 295 295 550 550 990 630 1,300 1,000 4,000 3,380

F
A(v<3 m/s)

[N] – – – – 930 630 1,300 1,000 3,650 3,140

F
A(v<4 m/s)

[N] – – – – 890 630 1,300 1,000 3,370 2,950

F
A(v<5 m/s)

[N] – – – – 840 630 1,300 1,000 3,200 2,800

Thrust force F
A

corresponding
to order stroke
length OS

F
A(OS<1000 mm)

[N] 250 250 630 630 1,050 630 1,300 1,000 4,000 3,750

F
A(OS<2000 mm)

[N] 140 140 550 550 820 490 1,000 775 4,000 3,360

F
A(OS<3000 mm)

[N] 100 100 385 385 570 340 710 550 3,370 2,440

F
A(OS<4000 mm)

[N] – – 295 295 445 265 550 430 2,860 1,880

F
A(OS<5000 mm)

[N] – – – – 365 215 450 350 2,350 1,540

F
A(OS<6000 mm)

[N] – – – – 305 185 380 295 2,000 1,300

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

62
6
ORIGA Linear Drives

HMR Series
Profile Versions
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

Designs

– Basic

– Reinforced

The HMR linear drive system can be equipped with a “basic” or “reinforced” profile as standard. The “basic” profile is suitable
for fitting directly to a machine base that has a corresponding support surface. The “reinforced” profile, on the other hand, is
the preferred choice for self-supporting systems or for use in conjunction with a base surface offering limited support.
The permissible temperature range for both profile versions is -20°C … +80°C.

Profile version

“Basic” profile

T-slot attachment

“Reinforced” profile

Dimensions – Profil design HMR

Product Size K LB LR M MA MB MC N NA NB NC

HMRx085 [mm] 85.0 60.0 71.0 50.0 5.2 4.5 1.5 4.5 3.4 3.0 2.5

HMRx110 [mm] 110.0 69.5 89.5 70.0 5.2 4.5 1.8 4.5 3.4 3.0 2.5

HMRx150 [mm] 150.0 90.0 114.0 96.0 6.2 6.8 3.0 6.5 5.2 4.6 3.5

HMRx180 [mm] 180.0 111.5 134.5 116.0 8.0 7.8 4.5 8.5 5.2 4.5 3.5

HMRx240 [mm] 240.0 125.0 153.0 161.0 10.0 10.2 5.3 8.5 5.2 4.5 3.5

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

63
6
ORIGA Linear Drives
HMR Series
Profile Versions
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm
Designs
– Basic
– Reinforced
The HMR linear drive system can be equipped with a “basic” or “reinforced” profile as standard. The “basic” profile is suitable
for fitting directly to a machine base that has a corresponding support surface. The “reinforced” profile, on the other hand, is
the preferred choice for self-supporting systems or for use in conjunction with a base surface offering limited support.
The permissible temperature range for both profile versions is -20°C … +80°C.
Profile version
“Basic” profile
T-slot attachment
“Reinforced” profile
Dimensions – Profil design HMR
Product Size K LB LR M MA MB MC N NA NB NC
HMRx085 [mm] 85.0 60.0 71.0 50.0 5.2 4.5 1.5 4.5 3.4 3.0 2.5
HMRx110 [mm] 110.0 69.5 89.5 70.0 5.2 4.5 1.8 4.5 3.4 3.0 2.5
HMRx150 [mm] 150.0 90.0 114.0 96.0 6.2 6.8 3.0 6.5 5.2 4.6 3.5
HMRx180 [mm] 180.0 111.5 134.5 116.0 8.0 7.8 4.5 8.5 5.2 4.5 3.5
HMRx240 [mm] 240.0 125.0 153.0 161.0 10.0 10.2 5.3 8.5 5.2 4.5 3.5
7
ORIGA Linear Drives

HMR Series
Profile version „reinforced“
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

Max. admissible loads [N] and supporting distances [mm] (self-supporting)

Example F
z
HMR 11:

For a 2.800 N load the distance „D“ between supporting elements is 720 mm.
Mounting accessories see „Accessories / T-Slot Mounting“

[N]
[mm]

F
z

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

64
8
ORIGA Linear Drives

HMR series
Profile version „reinforced“
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm

Max. admissible loads [N] and supporting distances [mm] (self-supporting)

Example

F
y

HMR 11:

For a 3.160 N load the distance „D“ between supporting elements is 900 mm.
Mounting accessories see „Accessories / T-Slot Mounting“

[N]
[mm]
F
y
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

65

Precision Positioners

XE MXXR

8
ORIGA Linear Drives
HMR series
Profile version „reinforced“
Sizes 85, 110, 150, 180, 240 mm
Max. admissible loads [N] and supporting distances [mm] (self-supporting)

Example F
y
HMR 11:

For a 3.160 N load the distance „D“ between supporting elements is 900 mm.
Mounting accessories see „Accessories / T-Slot Mounting“
[N]
[mm]
F
y

66

[cm]

XE – Screw Driven Positioner
XE Series Functions

Features

• Integrated bearing

• Rigid steel body

• Significant force per dollar value

• Easily integrated into multi-axis
systems

• Without adjustment

• Small package size

Optional hard cover
Clear anodized cover provides
protection from contamination
falling into the positioner.

Flexible motor mounting
options
Provide a variety of motor
drive options, including
servo and stepper motors.

Precision ballscrew drive train
Provides smooth motion
with high accuracy and high
mechanical efficiency.

Integrated precision
screw and guide
The bearing provides a
low profile, high accuracy,
smooth motion, and robust
adjustment free design
over the life of the actuator.

Steel housing (U profile)
Provides structural rigidity for minimal
deflection.

Adjustable limit sensor
package
Provide adjustable travel
lengths, easily connected,
fewer cables to manage, and
no pinch points.

The 402/403XE series of positioners
combines a rugged steel body
construction with an integrated
precision ballscrew and bearing
guide to produce a highly accurate,
cost-effective line of positioners ideal

for applications in the hard disk,
semiconductor, medical, machine
building and many other industries.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XE – Screw Driven Positionier

67

Common performance specifications

Technical data Unit
402XE 403XE

2 mm lead 5 mm lead 5 mm lead 10 mm lead
Repeatability [µm] ± 5 ± 5
Flatness [µm] 15 see below
Straight line accuracy [µm] 15 see below
Breakaway torque [Nm] 0.06 0.15
Maximum input speed [s-1] 90 see below
Maximum normal load [kg] 90 160
Maximum inverted load [kg] 90 160
Static permissible pitch moment [Nm] 46 101
Static permissible roll moment [Nm] 134 260
Static permissible yaw moment [Nm] 51 120
Torsional pitch stiffness [arcsec/Nm] 17.7 9.2
Torsional yaw stiffness [arcsec/Nm] 11.8 6.1
Torsional roll stiffness [arcsec/Nm] 5.9 5.9
Drive screw diameter [mm] 8 10
Drive screw efficiency [%] 90 90
Linear bearing coefficient of friction 0.01 0.01
Running torque [Nm] 0.05 0.10
Maximum axial load [kg] 13 17 31 27
Moment of inertia X of guide rail [mm4] 14 400 38 800
Moment of inertia Y of guide rail [mm4] 137 000 314 000
Carriage mass [kg] 0.26 0.3
Maximum acceleration [m/s2] 19.62 19.62
Allowable duty cycle [%] 100 100

402XE Specifications

Technical data Unit
T01

70 mm
T02

120 mm
T03

170 mm
T04

220 mm
402XE with 2 mm lead
Accuracy [μm] 70 75 85 90
Input inertia [10-6kgm2] 0.615 0.772 0.929 1.09
Weight of total table [kg] 1.19 1.40 1.60 1.81
402XE with 5 mm lead
Accuracy [μm] 70 75 85 90
Input inertia [10-6kgm2] 0.741 0.898 1.06 1.21
Weight of total table [kg] 1.19 1.40 1.60 1.81

403XE Specifications

Technical data Unit
T01

55 mm
T02

105 mm
T03

205 mm
T04

305 mm
T05

405 mm
T06

505 mm
T07

605 mm
T08

655 mm

403XE with 5 mm lead
Accuracy [μm] 70 80 90 95 100 110 120 n/a
Flatness [μm] 15 15 15 15 25 25 25 n/a
Straight line accuracy [μm] 15 15 15 15 25 25 25 n/a
Maximum input speed [s-1] 80 80 80 80 80 80 60 n/a
Input inertia [10-6kgm2] 1.72 2.10 2.87 3.63 4.40 5.17 5.93 n/a
Weight of total table [kg] 1.85 2.25 2.85 3.55 4.25 4.85 5.55 n/a
403XE with 10 mm lead
Accuracy [μm] 70 80 90 95 100 110 120 130
Maximum input speed [s-1] 80 80 80 80 80 80 60 42
Input inertia [10-6kgm2] 2.50 2.88 3.65 4.42 5.18 5.95 6.7 7.10
Weight of total table [kg] 1.85 2.25 2.85 3.55 4.25 4.85 5.55 5.85

XE Series Technical Data

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XE – Screw Driven Positioner

68

Travel dependent characteristics

C
o

d
e

Travel Positional
accuracy (3) (4)

Input inertia
NL carriage units

Input inertia
VL carriage units

Max. screw
speed

Max.
speed

Total weight
of axis

[mm] [µm] [10-5kgm2] [10-5kgm2] [s-1] [m/s] [kg]
NL VL 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm NL VL

T01 25 – 42 0.81 – – – – – 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 1.42 1.70
T02 50 – 50 0.94 0.98 – – – – 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 1.61 1.89
T03 100 33 58 1.19 1.23 1.12 1.21 1.30 1.4 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 1.95 2.23
T04 150 83 66 1.44 1.48 1.32 1.46 1.55 1.6 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 2.35 2.63
T05 200 133 74 1.69 1.73 1.51 1.71 1.80 1.79 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 2.59 2.87
T06 250 183 82 1.94 1.99 1.70 1.96 2.06 1.99 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 2.97 3.25
T07 300 233 90 2.20 2.24 1.90 2.21 2.31 2.18 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 3.34 3.62
T08 350 283 98 2.45 2.49 2.09 2.47 2.56 2.37 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 3.50 3.78
T09 400 333 106 2.70 2.74 2.29 2.72 2.81 2.57 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 3.83 4.11
T10 450 383 114 2.95 2.99 2.48 2.97 3.07 2.76 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 4.09 4.37
T11 500 433 122 3.21 3.25 2.67 3.22 3.32 2.96 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 4.22 4.50
T12 550 483 130 3.46 3.50 2.87 3.48 3.57 3.15 72 0.36 0.73 1.50 4.55 4.83
T13 600 533 138 3.71 3.75 3.06 3.73 3.82 3.34 69 0.34 0.68 1.32 4.87 5.15
T15 700 633 154 4.21 4.25 3.45 4.23 4.33 3.73 52 0.26 0.52 1.00 5.12 5.40

(3) Positioning accuracies refer only to direct motor mounting configurations, position specifications are based on conditions without load
and do apply only to individual axes.

(4) Consult factory for specs with linear feedback.

Common performance specifications

Unit 404XE
Bidirectional repeatability
T01 to T11 models
T12 to T15 models

[µm] ±20
±30

Duty cycle [%] 100
Max acceleration(1) [m/s2] 20
Normal force(2)

NL (short carriage)
VL (long carriage)

[N] 601
1202

Axial force(2)

5 mm lead
10 mm lead
20 mm lead

[N]
588
686
686

Drive screw efficiency [%] 90
Max. breakaway torque [Nm] 0.25
Max running torque (rated @ 2 s-1) [Nm] 0.21
Linear bearing – coefficient of friction 0.01
Ballscrew diameter
5 & 10 mm lead
20 mm lead

[mm] 16
15

Carriage mass
NL (short carriage)
VL (long carriage)

[kg] 0.215
0.495

(1) Applies to units with VL carriage.
(2) Refer to life/load charts.

404XE Series Technical Data

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XE – Screw Driven Positionier

69

Limit/Home

Encoder

401XR 402XR 404XR 406XR

412XR

412XR

406XR

404XR
401XR

402XR

• Pre-engineered package

• Performance matched components

• Environmental protection

• Laser certified precision

XR – Screw Driven Positioner
XR Series Functions

Typical enhancements

• Limit/home position sensors

• Linear encoder

• Cleanroom prep

• Multi-axis brackets & adapters

• Selectable motor mounts

• Servo motors and drives

• Programmable controls

• Cable management system

The „XR“ precision linear positioners
family has achieved global
recognition for consistent accuracy,
reliable performance, high strength,
and unmatched versatility. The XRs
have excelled in industries such
as life sciences, fiber optics and
instrumentation, where the highest
degree of precision is required.
And yet, because of the rugged
construction, strength, and sealed
design, these units have been used
extensively for industrial automation

applications (packaging, automotive,
etc).
The XR family offers an unrivaled
array of features and options
which are easily matched to fit any
application, from the very basic to the
highly complex. Premier performance,
modular compatibility, and quick
delivery have made these tables the
perfect building blocks for precision
multi-axis systems.

Style Unit 401XR 402XR 404XR 406XR 412XR

Stroke [mm] 300 600 600 2000 2000

Load [kg] 50 100 170 630 1470

Acceleration [m/s2] 20 20 20 20 20

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XR – Screw Driven Positioner

70

402XR 401XR

401XR and 402XR Technical Data

401XR (41 mm wide profile)

402XR series (58 mm wide profile)

XR Series Technical Data

The 401XR and 402XR Series
positioners enhance the XR family
of precision linear positioners,
addressing applications which
involve precise positioning of smaller
payloads within a very small space
envelope.
These ballscrew driven positioners
were developed to address the needs
of industries such as photonics,
life sciences, semiconductor, and

Carriage equipped with dowel locating holes
for repeatable positioning of tooling
or payload.

Travel dependent specifications

Travel
[mm]

Positional accuracy*

[µm]

Straightness &
flatness

[µm]

Input moment
of inertia

[10-7kgm2]

Max screw
speed

[s-1]

Weight

[kg]
401XR 402XR 401XR 402XR 401XR 402XR 401XR 402XR 401XR 402XR

Precision Standard Precision Standard 2 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm

50 10 20 – – 20 – 0.6 – – – 100 – 1.0 –
100 10 20 10 20 20 20 0.9 – 12.0 – 100 90 1.2 2.3
150 12 20 12 20 20 20 1.1 – 15.0 – 100 90 1.3 2.6
200 16 30 16 30 25 25 – 4.7 20.0 – 100 90 1.5 2.8
300 18 40 18 40 25 25 – 5.2 – 25.0 100 90 1.7 3.2
400 – – 21 40 – 30 – – – 29.0 – 95 – 3.8
600 – – 25 50 – 30 – – – 39.0 – 50 – 4.8

* Values established at 20 °C ambient temperature utilizing slope correction factor provided.

Common characteristics

Style Unit
Precision* Standard

401XR 402XR 401XR 402XR
Bidirectional repeatability
2 mm lead
5 or 10 mm lead

[µm] ±1.3
±1.3

–
±1.3

±5
±12

–
±12

Duty cycle [%] 100 100 100 100
Maximum acceleration [m/s2] 20 20 20 20
Normal force (1) [N] 490 980 490 980
Axial force (1)

2 mm lead
5 or 10 mm lead

[N]

54
152

–
3

72

54
152
–
372

Drive screw efficiency [%] 80 80 80 80

Maximum breakaway torque [Nm] 0.03 0.086 0.03 0.086

Maximum running torque (2) [Nm] 0.028 0.08 0.028 0.08

Linear bearing friction coefficient – 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Ballscrew diameter
2 mm lead
5 or 10 mm lead

[mm]

6
8

–
12

6
8
–
12

Weight of carriage [kg] 0.045 0.11 0.045 0.11

* Requires linear encoder option E3 or E4. (1) see life load charts. (2) Ratings established at a screw speed of 2 s-1.

instrumentation, where technology
advancements dictate miniaturization
of work envelopes.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XR – Screw Driven Positioner

71

404XR Technical Data

404XR (95 mm wide profile)

Travel dependent specifications

Travel

[mm]

Positional accuracy (4) (5)*

[µm]
Straightness &
flatness
[µm]

Input moment
of inertia
[10-5kgm2]

Max screw
speed (6)

[s-1]

Weight

[kg]
Precision Standard 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm

50 8 12 6 1.68 1.81 2.34 60 2.8
100 8 12 6 1.93 2.07 2.60 60 3.0
150 10 14 9 2.19 2.32 2.85 60 3.3
200 12 20 10 2.44 2.57 3.11 60 3.6
250 12 22 12 2.69 2.83 3.36 60 3.9
300 14 24 13 2.95 3.08 3.61 60 4.2
350 14 26 15 3.20 3.33 3.87 60 4.5
400 16 26 16 3.46 3.59 4.12 60 4.8
450 19 28 18 3.71 3.84 4.37 60 5.1
500 21 34 19 3.96 4.10 4.63 60 5.4
550 23 36 21 4.22 4.35 4.88 60 5.7
600 25 40 22 4.47 4.60 5.14 54 6.0

* Values established at 20 °C ambient temperature utilizing slope correction factor provided.
Common characteristics

Type 404XR Unit Precision Standard
Bidirectional repeatability (5) [µm] ±1.3 ±3
Duty cycle
Ballscrew

[%]
100 100

Maximum acceleration [m/s2] 20 20
Normal force (1) [N] 1667 1667
Axial force (2)

Ballscrew
[N]

882 882
Drive screw efficiency
Ballscrew

[%]
90 90

Maximum breakaway torque [Nm] 0.13 0.18
Maximum running torque (3) [Nm] 0.11 0.17
Linear bearing friction coefficient – 0.01 0.01
Ballscrew diameter [mm] 16 16
Weight of carriage [kg] 0.70 0.70

The 404XR is a slim, compact
positioning stage (47.3 x 95 mm) able
to transport payloads up to 170 kg
over a travel of 700 mm. Its fast and
precise positioning properties are
due to the extremely robust extruded
profile, the ball bearings and the
precision-ground rack-and-pinion
drive.
With its low profile design the
404XR is ideal for height restricted
applications, and its lightweight
construction makes it well suited

as secondary axes on multi-axis
systems.
These units offer a wide array
of easily adapted options and
accessories which permit easy
configuration to specific
requirements.

Parallel Motor Mount
(with limit/home sensor pack
option)

(1) see life load charts.
(2) Axial load for parallel mount is limited

by a maximum input torque of 25 Nm.
(3) Ratings established at a screw speed

of 2 s-1.
(4) Positional accuracy applies to in-line

motor configurations only. Contact
factory for parallel motor specifications.

(5) Consult factory for specifications with
linear encoder.

(6) Consult factory for higher screw
speeds.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XR – Screw DrivenPositioner

72

406XR Technical Data

406XR (150 mm wide profile)

The 406XR can position high loads
(up to 6.2 kN) over distances up
to two meters. Because of its size
and strength (270 Nm moment load
capacity) this table is ideal as the
base unit in a multi-axis system. From
high resolution to high throughput,
selectable ballscrew leads (5, 10, 20,
25 mm) make the desired resolution/

velocity ratio easy to achieve, and
stainless steel seal strips alleviate
environmental concerns.

Parallel Motor Mount
(with limit/home sensor pack option)Common characteristics

Type 406XR Unit Precision Standard
Bidirectional repeatability (5) [µm] ±1.3 ±3
Duty cycle [%] 100 100
Maximum acceleration [m/s2] 20 20
Normal force (1) [N] 6178 6178
Axial force (2)

0 to 600 mm travel
700 to 2000 mm travel

[N] 882
–

882
1961

Drive screw efficiency [%] 90 90
Maximum breakaway torque
0 to 600 mm travel
700 to 2000 mm travel

[Nm] 0.13 (18)
–

0.18
0.39

Maximum running torque (3)

0 to 600 mm travel
700 to 2000 mm travel

[Nm] 0.11
–

0.17
0.34

Linear bearing friction coefficient – 0.01 0.01
Ballscrew diameter
0 to 600 mm travel
700 to 2000 mm travel

[mm] 16
–

16
25

Weight of carriage [kg] 2.7 2.7

Travel dependent specifications

Travel

[mm]

Positional
accuracy (4) (5)*

[µm]
Straightness &
flatness
[µm]

Input moment
of inertia
[10-5kgm2]

Max screw
speed (6)
[s-1]
Weight

[kg]
Präzision Standard 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm 25 mm

100 8 12 6 3.34 3.85 5.90 – 60 8.7
200 12 20 10 3.92 4.43 6.48 – 60 10.0
300 14 24 13 4.50 5.01 7.06 – 60 11.3
400 16 26 16 5.08 5.59 7.64 – 60 12.6
500 21 34 19 5.65 6.17 8.22 – 55 13.9
600 25 40 22 6.23 6.75 8.80 – 44 15.2
700 – 92 25 36.51 37.02 – 40.61 47 19.2
800 – 94 29 39.96 40.47 – 44.07 47 20.7
900 – 103 32 43.41 43.93 – 47.52 47 22.2
1000 – 105 35 46.87 47.38 – 50.97 47 23.7
1250 – 118 42 55.50 56.01 – 59.61 35 27.6
1500 – 134 50 64.14 64.65 – 68.24 26 31.4
1750 – 154 57 72.77 73.28 – 76.88 20 35.2
2000 – 159 65 81.40 81.92 – 85.51 16 39.1

* Values established at 20 °C ambient temperature utilizing slope correction factor provided.

(1) see life load charts.
(2) Axial load for parallel mount is limited

to: 63.5 kg for the 5, 10 and 20 mm
lead drives: 104 kg for 25 mm lead
drives

(3) Ratings established at a screw speed
of 2 s-1.

(4) Positional accuracy applies to in-line
motor configurations only. Contact
factory for parallel motor specifications.

(5) Consult factory for specifications with
linear encoder.

(6) Consult factory for higher screw
speeds.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XR – Screw Driven Positioner

73

412XR Technical Data

412XR (285 mm wide profile)

The 412XR is a rugged heavy duty
linear table (285 mm x 105 mm
profile) that enables massive loads
(up to 14.4 kN) to be precisely
positioned over distances up to two
meters. The lubricating hole for easy
maintenance is a standard feature
of the carriage. The easy to mount
adaptor plate (Art. No. 100-6784-
01) for simple X-Y configuration is
available as an accessory.

An unrivaled
array of options
combined
with mounting
compatibility with
the smaller XR
tables makes the 412XR ideal as the
base unit for multi-axis positioning of
heavier payloads.

Common Characteristics

Type 412XR Unit Standard
Screw Lead [mm] 5, 10, 25 32
Bidirectional repeatability (4) [µm] ±5 ±5
Duty cycle [%] 100 100
Maximum acceleration [m/s2] 20 20
Normal force (1) [kN] 14.4 14.4
Axial force [kN] 1.96 4.51
Drive screw efficiency [%] 90 80
Maximum breakaway torque [Nm] 0.61 0.

76

Maximum running torque (2) [Nm] 0.55 0.69
Linear bearing friction coefficient – 0.01 0.01
Ballscrew diameter [mm] 25 32
Weight of carriage [kg] 12 13

Travel Dependent Specifications

Travel

[mm]

Positional-
accuracy (3 (4)*

[µm]
Straightness &
flatness
[µm]
Input moment
of inertia
[10-5kgm2]

Max screw
speed (5)

[s-1]

Weight

[kg]
5 mm 10 mm 25 mm 32 mm 5. 10. 25 mm 32 mm 5. 10. 25 mm 32 mm

150 64 9 27.20 29.45 46.76 98.20 47 42 39.6 41.5
250 66 12 30.21 32.46 49.78 106.28 47 42 42.9 45.0
350 71 15 33.23 35.48 52.79 114.37 47 42 46.2 48.5
650 91 24 42.27 44.52 61.83 138.63 47 42 56.1 59.0
800 94 29 46.79 49.04 66.35 150.76 47 42 61.0 64.2
1000 105 35 52.81 55.06 72.37 166.94 45 42 67.6 71.2
1250 118 42 58.84 61.09 78.40 183.11 34 41 74.2 78.2
1500 134 50 67.87 70.12 87.44 207.38 24 31 84.1 88.7
1750 154 57 75.41 77.66 94.97 227.59 18 24 92.4 97.5
2000 159 65 82.94 85.19 102.50 247.81 15 19 100.6 106.2

* Values established at 20 °C ambient temperature utilizing slope correction factor provided.

(1) See life load charts.
(2) Ratings established at a screw speed

of 2 s-1.
(3) Positional accuracy applies to in-line

motor configurations only. Contact
factory for parallel motor specifications.

(4) Consult factory for specifications with
linear encoder.

(5) Consult factory for higher screw
speeds.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
XR – Screw DrivenPositioner

74

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
MX – Miniature Positionierer

MX – Miniature Positioners

Description
Life science applications are a good example of how
miniaturization has driven the need for smaller and
more efficient positioners. Parker’s MX series miniature
positioner, the smallest positioner in the industry, is
loaded with high-performance features for both rapid
travel and precise positioning of lighter loads in small
work envelopes.

Designed for today’s 24/7 production demands, the
MX series has redefined “high-throughput automation”
in the world of miniature positioners

Typical areas of application

• Fiber optics

• Photonics

• Electronics and biomedical processes

Features
• Low profile miniature size

• Different technologies available:
• Ballscrew and leadscrew driven stages: MX45S, MX80S
• Linear servo motor driven stages: MX80L
• Free travel and micrometer driven stages: MX80M

• Cross roller bearing (zero cage creep option)

• Optional encoder

• Optional digital limit/home sensors

• Optional cleanroom and low ESD preparation

• Multi-axis platform

Technical Characteristics – Overview
Type: Miniature Positioners

MX45S MX80S MX80L MX80M

Technology screw driven
linear motor

driven
manual
driven

Frame size
height/width
[mm]

25×45 mm 35×80 mm 25×80 mm 25×80 mm

Travel
[mm]

5, 15, 25
25, 50, 100,

150
25, 50, 100,

150, 200
25, 50

Max. Speed
[mm/s]

20…2000

Nominal Load
[kg]

7 8 8 20

Repeatability
[µm]

±1… ±8 ±1.5… ±10 ±0.4… ±10 –

75
Parker Electromechanical Actuators
MX – Miniature Positionierer

Unit
MX45S Leadscrew Drive

(Standard)
MX45S Ballscrew Drive

(Precision)
T01 T02 T03 T01 T02 T03

Travel (1) [mm] 5 15 25 5 15 25
Nominal load [kg] 5 5 7 5 5 7
Thrust Load [N] 40 40
Maximum
velocity (2)

0.5 mm lead
[mm/s]

10 –
1.0 mm lead 20 30

Acceleration/deceleration [m/s2] 20 20
Running torque [Nm] 0.011 0.011
Duty cycle [%] 50 100
Straightness & flatness (3) [µm] 3 5 8 3 5 8

Positional
accuracy (4)

with 2000 count
rotary encoder

[µm]
10 18 30 8 12 15

with 1 or 0.1 μm
linear encoder

6 10 12 6 10 12

Bidirectional
repeatability (4), (5)

with 2000 count
rotary encoder
[µm]

±8 ±3

with 1 μm linear
encoder

±4 ±2

with 0.1 μm linear
encoder

±2 ±1

Input inertia
(without motor)

0.5 mm lead
[10-8kgm2]

2.37 2.76 3.14 – – –
1.0 mm lead 2.58 2.96 3.35 1.41 1.6 1.

79

Screw speed (max) [min-1] 1200 1800
Screw diameter [mm] 4.7 4.0

Screw efficiency
0.5 mm lead

[%]
30 –

1.0 mm lead 47 90
Bearing friction coefficient – 0.003 0.003

Unit weight
Stage only

[kg]
0.177 0.200 0.238 0.182 0.205 0.243

Carriage Only 0.070 0.082 0.100 0.073 0.084 0.104

Additional
mass of
motors&options

NEMA 8 stepper (6)

[kg]

0.095 0.095
Linear encoder
option (7)

0.016 0.016

Limit option sensor
board (7)

0.005 0.005

Notes:
(1) Travel is in the direction of the motor mount only.
(2) See speed/force curve for performance with Parker motor.
(3) Measured at the carriage center, 35 mm above the mounting surface @20 °C with no load. Unit bolted to granite surface, flat

within 1 μm/300 mm.
(4) Total accuracy and bi-directional repeatability over full travel (peak to peak) (with 0.5 or 1 mm leadscrew).
(5) Repeatability valid with NEMA 8 stepper motor and encoder noted.
(6) Includes rotary encoder (part of base)
(7) Part of base

Technical Characteristics MX45S

76

Technical Characteristics MX80S

Unit
MX80S Leadscrew Drive

(Standard)
MX80S Ballscrew Drive

(Precision)
T01 T02 T03 T04 T01 T02 T03 T04

Travel [mm] 25 50 100 150 25 50 100 150

Nominal load [kg] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Axial thrust force [N] 44 44 44 44 123 123 123 123

Breakaway torque [Nm] 0.021 0.021 0.021 0.021 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050

Running torque

1.0 mm lead

[Nm]

0.028 0.028 0.035 0.035 – – – –

2.0 mm lead 0.028 0.028 0.035 0.035 0.085 0.085 0.085 0.085

10.0 mm lead 0.021 0.021 0.021 0.028 – – – –

Inertia
(without motor
and coupling)

1.0 mm lead
[10-7kgm2]

1.47 1.47 2.42 3.06 – – – –

2.0 mm lead 1.62 1.62 2.68 3.42 4.19 4.19 6.08 7.68

10.0 mm lead 6.34 6.34 11.30 14.90 – – – –

Screw speed (max) [min-1] 1200 1200 1200 1200 3000 3000 3000 3000

Screw diameter [mm] 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00

Maximum
speed

1.0 mm lead
[mm/s]

20 20 20 20 – – – –

2.0 mm lead 40 40 40 40 100 100 100 100

10.0 mm lead 200 200 200 200 – – – –

Bidirectional
repeatability*

1.0 mm lead
[µm]

±5.0 ±5.0 ±5.0 ±5.0 – – – –

2.0 mm lead ±5.0 ±5.0 ±5.0 ±5.0 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5

10.0 mm lead ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 – – – –

Positional
accuracy*

1.0 mm lead
[µm]

30 45 75 100 – – – –

2.0 mm lead 30 45 75 100 10 15 18 20

10.0 mm lead 35 50 80 105 – – – –

Straightness & flatness [µm] 8 12 16 20 8 12 16 20

Screw
efficiency

1.0 mm lead
[%]

40 40 40 40 – – – –

2.0 mm lead 59 59 59 59 90 90 90 90

10.0 mm lead 78 78 78 78 – – – –

Bearing friction coefficient – 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003

Duty cycle [%] 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Unit weight
Table only

[kg]
0.597 0.597 1.003 1.268 0.694 0.694 1.114 1.392

with 2-stack
stepper

0.748 0.748 1.154 1.419 0.845 0.845 1.265 1.513

Carriage weight (unloaded) [kg] 0.194 0.194 0.353 0.471 0.291 0.291 0.464 0.595
* Notes: MX80SS (leadscrew drive )
(1) Measured at the carriage

center, 35 mm above the mounting
surface @ 20 °C with no load. Unit
bolted to granite surface, flat to
within 1 µm/300 mm.

(2) Total accuracy and bi-
directional repeatability over full
travel (peak to peak).

* Notes: MX80S (ballscrew drive)
(1) Measured at the carriage

center, 35 mm above the mounting
surface @ 20 °C with no load. Unit
bolted to granite surface, flat to within
1 µm/300 mm.

(2) Total accuracy and bi-
directional repeatability over full travel
(peak to peak).

(3) Repeatability valid with M21
servo motor.

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
MX – Miniature Positionierer

77

Technical Characteristics MX80L

Unit MX80L Precision Grade MX80L Standard Grade

T01 T02 T03 T04 T01 T02 T03 T04 T05
Travel [mm] 25 50 100 150 25 50 100 150 200
Continuous force [N] 4 4 8 8 4 4 8 8 8

Peak force [N] 12 12 24 24 12 12 24 24 24

Continuous current [Arms] 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.6 1.6

Peak current** [A] 2.4 2.4 4.8 4.8 2.4 2.4 4.8 4.8 4.8

Force constant [N/Arms] 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51 5.51

Nominal load [kg] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Max. speed
Encoder
resolution:

5.0 µm

[mm/s]

1100 1500 2000 2000 1100 1500 2000 2000 2000
1.0 µm 1100 1500 2000 2000 1100 1500 2000 2000 2000
0.5 µm 1100 1500 1500 1500 1100 1500 1500 1500 1500
0.1 µm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
0.02 µm 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
0.01 µm 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Sine Cosine 1100 1500 2000 2000 1100 1500 2000 2000 2000

Max. acceleration [m/s2] 40 40 40 30 50 50 50 40 30
Bidirectional
repeatability*
Encoder
resolution:

5.0 µm
[µm]

±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0 ±10.0
1.0 µm ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0 ±2.0
0.5 µm ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±1.0
0.1 µm ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.7
0.02 µm ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.5
0.01 µm ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.5
Sine Cosine ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.5

Positional
accuracy*
Encoder
resolution:

5.0 µm
[µm]

13 14 15 15 25 30 35 35 35
1.0 µm 5 6 7 7 15 20 25 25 25
0.5 µm 4 5 6 6 12 15 20 20 20
0.1 µm 3 4 5 5 12 15 20 20 20
0.02 µm 3 4 5 5 12 15 20 20 20
0.01 µm 3 4 5 5 12 15 20 20 20
Sine Cosine 3 4 5 5 12 15 20 20 20

Straightness & flatness [µm] 4 4 5 6 6 6 10 12 14

Duty cycle [%] 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Unit weight [kg] 0.590 0.590 1.027 1.345 0.475 0.475 0.875 1.125 1.370
Carriage weight
(unloaded)

[kg] 0.282 0.282 0.509 0.676 0.213 0.213 0.405 0.537 0.695

** based on a winding
temperature of up to 60 °C
for a period of
T01, T02: 1.2 s
T03, T04, T05: 5 s

* Notes MX80L (Precision):
(1) Measured at the carriage

center, 35 mm above the mounting
surface @ 20 °C with no load. Unit
bolted to granite surface, flat to
within 1 µm/300 mm.

(2) Total accuracy and bi-
directional repeatability over full
travel (peak to peak).

(3) Precision grade with slope
correction value. Consult factory if
better accuracy is required.

* Notes MX80L (Standard):
(1) Total accuracy and bi-directional

repeatability over full travel (peak to peak).

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
MX – Miniature Positionierer

78

Aerospace
Key Markets
Aftermarket services
Commercial transports
Engines
General & business aviation
Helicopters
Launch vehicles
Military aircraft
Missiles
Power generation
Regional transports
Unmanned aerial vehicles

Key Products
Control systems &
actuation products
Engine systems
& components
Fluid conveyance systems
& components
Fluid metering, delivery
& atomization devices
Fuel systems & components
Fuel tank inerting systems
Hydraulic systems
& components
Thermal management
Wheels & brakes

Electromechanical
Key Markets
Aerospace
Factory automation
Life science & medical
Machine tools
Packaging machinery
Paper machinery
Plastics machinery & converting
Primary metals
Semiconductor & electronics
Textile
Wire & cable

Key Products
AC/DC drives & systems
Electric actuators, gantry robots
& slides
Electrohydrostatic actuation systems
Electromechanical actuation systems
Human machine interface
Linear motors
Stepper motors, servo motors,
drives & controls
Structural extrusions

Pneumatics
Key Markets
Aerospace
Conveyor & material handling
Factory automation
Life science & medical
Machine tools
Packaging machinery
Transportation & automotive

Key Products
Air preparation
Brass fittings & valves
Manifolds
Pneumatic accessories
Pneumatic actuators & grippers
Pneumatic valves & controls
Quick disconnects
Rotary actuators
Rubber & thermoplastic hose
& couplings
Structural extrusions
Thermoplastic tubing & fittings
Vacuum generators, cups & sensors

Fluid & Gas Handling
Key Markets
Aerial lift
Agriculture
Bulk chemical handling
Construction machinery
Food & beverage
Fuel & gas delivery
Industrial machinery
Life sciences
Marine
Mining
Mobile
Oil & gas
Renewable energy
Transportation

Key Products
Check valves
Connectors for low pressure
fluid conveyance
Deep sea umbilicals
Diagnostic equipment
Hose couplings
Industrial hose
Mooring systems &
power cables
PTFE hose & tubing
Quick couplings
Rubber & thermoplastic hose
Tube fittings & adapters
Tubing & plastic fittings

Hydraulics
Key Markets
Aerial lift
Agriculture
Alternative energy
Construction machinery
Forestry
Industrial machinery
Machine tools
Marine
Material handling
Mining
Oil & gas
Power generation
Refuse vehicles
Renewable energy
Truck hydraulics
Turf equipment

Key Products
Accumulators
Cartridge valves
Electrohydraulic actuators
Human machine interfaces
Hybrid drives
Hydraulic cylinders
Hydraulic motors & pumps
Hydraulic systems
Hydraulic valves & controls
Hydrostatic steering
Integrated hydraulic circuits
Power take-offs
Power units
Rotary actuators
Sensors

Process Control
Key Markets
Alternative fuels
Biopharmaceuticals
Chemical & refining
Food & beverage
Marine & shipbuilding
Medical & dental
Microelectronics
Nuclear Power
Offshore oil exploration
Oil & gas
Pharmaceuticals
Power generation
Pulp & paper
Steel
Water/wastewater

Key Products
Analytical Instruments
Analytical sample conditioning
products & systems
Chemical injection fittings
& valves
Fluoropolymer chemical
delivery fittings, valves
& pumps
High purity gas delivery
fittings, valves, regulators
& digital flow controllers
Industrial mass flow meters/
controllers
Permanent no-weld tube fittings
Precision industrial regulators
& flow controllers
Process control double
block & bleeds
Process control fittings, valves,
regulators & manifold valves

Sealing & Shielding
Key Markets
Aerospace
Chemical processing
Consumer
Fluid power
General industrial
Information technology
Life sciences
Microelectronics
Military
Oil & gas
Power generation
Renewable energy
Telecommunications
Transportation

Key Products
Dynamic seals
Elastomeric o-rings
Electro-medical instrument
design & assembly
EMI shielding
Extruded & precision-cut,
fabricated elastomeric seals
High temperature metal seals
Homogeneous & inserted
elastomeric shapes
Medical device fabrication
& assembly
Metal & plastic retained
composite seals
Shielded optical windows
Silicone tubing & extrusions
Thermal management
Vibration dampening

Parker’s Motion & Control Technologies

At Parker, we’re guided by

a relentless drive to help

our customers become more

productive and achieve

higher levels of profitabil-

ity by engineering the best

systems for their require-

ments. It means looking at

customer applications from

many angles to find new

ways to create value. What-

ever the motion and control

technology need, Parker has

the experience, breadth of

product and global reach

to consistently deliver. No

company knows more about

motion and control technol-

ogy than Parker. For further

info call 00800 27 27 5374

Climate Control
Key Markets
Agriculture
Air conditioning
Construction Machinery
Food & beverage
Industrial machinery
Life sciences
Oil & gas
Precision cooling
Process
Refrigeration
Transportation

Key Products
Accumulators
Advanced actuators
CO

2
controls

Electronic controllers
Filter driers
Hand shut-off valves
Heat exchangers
Hose & fittings
Pressure regulating valves
Refrigerant distributors
Safety relief valves
Smart pumps
Solenoid valves
Thermostatic expansion valves

Filtration
Key Markets
Aerospace
Food & beverage
Industrial plant & equipment
Life sciences
Marine
Mobile equipment
Oil & gas
Power generation &
renewable energy
Process
Transportation
Water Purification

Key Products
Analytical gas generators
Compressed air filters & dryers
Engine air, coolant, fuel & oil filtration systems
Fluid condition monitoring systems
Hydraulic & lubrication filters
Hydrogen, nitrogen & zero
air generators
Instrumentation filters
Membrane & fiber filters
Microfiltration
Sterile air filtration
Water desalination & purification filters &
systems

Description
The MX80M stages are offered as free travel or
micrometer driven units with 25 mm or 50 mm travel.
They include innovative tooling features to make
mounting and precision alignment quicker and easier.
A hardened steel master reference surface is provided
along the side of the stage to allow fixturing or other
tooling elements to be precisely aligned with the
actual travel path. Dowel pin holes are provided on the
carriage top for repeatable mounting or tooling. Also
available are custom features such as a steel body
design, vacuum prepped units, and anti cage creep
bearings for high dynamic applications up to 150 mm
travel.

Features
• Precision cross roller bearings

• Clean room preparation (option)

• Low ESD coating (option)

• Dowel holes in top & base

• Interchangable mounting with motorized
MX80 models

• Positive position lock

MX80M – Free Travel and Micrometer Driven Stages

Unit MX80M free travel MX80M micrometer driven
T01 T02 T01 T02

Travel [mm] 25 50 25 50
Nominal load [kg] 20 20 20 20
Axial force (1)

[N]Fa – – 44.1 44.1
Fb – – 5.9 9.8
Straight line accuracy
(per 25 mm travel)

[µm] 2 2 2 2

Micrometer resolution
-0.001 in – – Yes Yes

0.01 mm – – Yes Yes

Digital micrometer

-0.00005 in – – Yes Yes

0.001 mm – – Yes Yes

(1) Fa (Force acting against micrometer)
Fb (Force acting against spring)

Parker Electromechanical Actuators
MX – Free Travel and Micrometer Driven Stages

Technical Characteristics MX80M

79
Aerospace
Key Markets
Aftermarket services
Commercial transports
Engines
General & business aviation
Helicopters
Launch vehicles
Military aircraft
Missiles
Power generation
Regional transports
Unmanned aerial vehicles
Key Products
Control systems &
actuation products
Engine systems
& components
Fluid conveyance systems
& components
Fluid metering, delivery
& atomization devices
Fuel systems & components
Fuel tank inerting systems
Hydraulic systems
& components
Thermal management
Wheels & brakes
Electromechanical
Key Markets
Aerospace
Factory automation
Life science & medical
Machine tools
Packaging machinery
Paper machinery
Plastics machinery & converting
Primary metals
Semiconductor & electronics
Textile
Wire & cable
Key Products
AC/DC drives & systems
Electric actuators, gantry robots
& slides
Electrohydrostatic actuation systems
Electromechanical actuation systems
Human machine interface
Linear motors
Stepper motors, servo motors,
drives & controls
Structural extrusions
Pneumatics
Key Markets
Aerospace
Conveyor & material handling
Factory automation
Life science & medical
Machine tools
Packaging machinery
Transportation & automotive
Key Products
Air preparation
Brass fittings & valves
Manifolds
Pneumatic accessories
Pneumatic actuators & grippers
Pneumatic valves & controls
Quick disconnects
Rotary actuators
Rubber & thermoplastic hose
& couplings
Structural extrusions
Thermoplastic tubing & fittings
Vacuum generators, cups & sensors
Fluid & Gas Handling
Key Markets
Aerial lift
Agriculture
Bulk chemical handling
Construction machinery
Food & beverage
Fuel & gas delivery
Industrial machinery
Life sciences
Marine
Mining
Mobile
Oil & gas
Renewable energy
Transportation
Key Products
Check valves
Connectors for low pressure
fluid conveyance
Deep sea umbilicals
Diagnostic equipment
Hose couplings
Industrial hose
Mooring systems &
power cables
PTFE hose & tubing
Quick couplings
Rubber & thermoplastic hose
Tube fittings & adapters
Tubing & plastic fittings
Hydraulics
Key Markets
Aerial lift
Agriculture
Alternative energy
Construction machinery
Forestry
Industrial machinery
Machine tools
Marine
Material handling
Mining
Oil & gas
Power generation
Refuse vehicles
Renewable energy
Truck hydraulics
Turf equipment
Key Products
Accumulators
Cartridge valves
Electrohydraulic actuators
Human machine interfaces
Hybrid drives
Hydraulic cylinders
Hydraulic motors & pumps
Hydraulic systems
Hydraulic valves & controls
Hydrostatic steering
Integrated hydraulic circuits
Power take-offs
Power units
Rotary actuators
Sensors
Process Control
Key Markets
Alternative fuels
Biopharmaceuticals
Chemical & refining
Food & beverage
Marine & shipbuilding
Medical & dental
Microelectronics
Nuclear Power
Offshore oil exploration
Oil & gas
Pharmaceuticals
Power generation
Pulp & paper
Steel
Water/wastewater
Key Products
Analytical Instruments
Analytical sample conditioning
products & systems
Chemical injection fittings
& valves
Fluoropolymer chemical
delivery fittings, valves
& pumps
High purity gas delivery
fittings, valves, regulators
& digital flow controllers
Industrial mass flow meters/
controllers
Permanent no-weld tube fittings
Precision industrial regulators
& flow controllers
Process control double
block & bleeds
Process control fittings, valves,
regulators & manifold valves
Sealing & Shielding
Key Markets
Aerospace
Chemical processing
Consumer
Fluid power
General industrial
Information technology
Life sciences
Microelectronics
Military
Oil & gas
Power generation
Renewable energy
Telecommunications
Transportation
Key Products
Dynamic seals
Elastomeric o-rings
Electro-medical instrument
design & assembly
EMI shielding
Extruded & precision-cut,
fabricated elastomeric seals
High temperature metal seals
Homogeneous & inserted
elastomeric shapes
Medical device fabrication
& assembly
Metal & plastic retained
composite seals
Shielded optical windows
Silicone tubing & extrusions
Thermal management
Vibration dampening
Parker’s Motion & Control Technologies
At Parker, we’re guided by
a relentless drive to help
our customers become more
productive and achieve
higher levels of profitabil-
ity by engineering the best
systems for their require-
ments. It means looking at
customer applications from
many angles to find new
ways to create value. What-
ever the motion and control
technology need, Parker has
the experience, breadth of
product and global reach
to consistently deliver. No
company knows more about
motion and control technol-
ogy than Parker. For further
info call 00800 27 27 5374
Climate Control
Key Markets
Agriculture
Air conditioning
Construction Machinery
Food & beverage
Industrial machinery
Life sciences
Oil & gas
Precision cooling
Process
Refrigeration
Transportation
Key Products
Accumulators
Advanced actuators
CO
2
controls
Electronic controllers
Filter driers
Hand shut-off valves
Heat exchangers
Hose & fittings
Pressure regulating valves
Refrigerant distributors
Safety relief valves
Smart pumps
Solenoid valves
Thermostatic expansion valves
Filtration
Key Markets
Aerospace
Food & beverage
Industrial plant & equipment
Life sciences
Marine
Mobile equipment
Oil & gas
Power generation &
renewable energy
Process
Transportation
Water Purification
Key Products
Analytical gas generators
Compressed air filters & dryers
Engine air, coolant, fuel & oil filtration systems
Fluid condition monitoring systems
Hydraulic & lubrication filters
Hydrogen, nitrogen & zero
air generators
Instrumentation filters
Membrane & fiber filters
Microfiltration
Sterile air filtration
Water desalination & purification filters &
systems

We reserve the right to make technical changes. The data correspond to the technical state at the time of printing.
© 2016 Parker Hannifi n Corporation.
All rights reserved.

Your local authorized Parker distributor

Parker Worldwide
Europe, Middle East, Africa
AE – United Arab Emirates, Dubai
Tel: +971 4 8127100
parker.me@parker.com

AT – Austria, Wiener Neustadt
Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501-0
parker.austria@parker.com

AT – Eastern Europe,
Wiener Neustadt
Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 900
parker.easteurope@parker.com

AZ – Azerbaijan, Baku
Tel: +994 50 2233 458
parker.azerbaijan@parker.com

BE/LU – Belgium, Nivelles
Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900
parker.belgium@parker.com

BG – Bulgaria, Sofi a
Tel: +359 2 980 1344
parker.bulgaria@parker.com

BY – Belarus, Minsk
Tel: +48 (0)22 573 24 00
parker.poland@parker.com

CH – Switzerland, Etoy
Tel: +41 (0)21 821 87 00
parker.switzerland@parker.com

CZ – Czech Republic, Klecany
Tel: +420 284 083 111
parker.czechrepublic@parker.com

DE – Germany, Kaarst
Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0
parker.germany@parker.com

DK – Denmark, Ballerup
Tel: +45 43 56 04 00
parker.denmark@parker.com

ES – Spain, Madrid
Tel: +34 902 330 001
parker.spain@parker.com

FI – Finland, Vantaa
Tel: +358 (0)20 753 2500
parker.fi nland@parker.com

FR – France, Contamine s/Arve
Tel: +33 (0)4 50 25 80 25
parker.france@parker.com

GR – Greece, Athens
Tel: +30 210 933 6450
parker.greece@parker.com

HU – Hungary, Budaörs
Tel: +36 23 885 470
parker.hungary@parker.com

IE – Ireland, Dublin
Tel: +353 (0)1 466 6370
parker.ireland@parker.com

IT – Italy, Corsico (MI)
Tel: +39 02 45 19 21
parker.italy@parker.com

KZ – Kazakhstan, Almaty
Tel: +7 7273 561 000
parker.easteurope@parker.com

NL – The Netherlands, Oldenzaal
Tel: +31 (0)541 585 000
parker.nl@parker.com

NO – Norway, Asker
Tel: +47 66 75 34 00
parker.norway@parker.com

PL – Poland, Warsaw
Tel: +48 (0)22 573 24 00
parker.poland@parker.com

PT – Portugal, Leca da Palmeira
Tel: +351 22 999 7360
parker.portugal@parker.com

RO – Romania, Bucharest
Tel: +40 21 252 1382
parker.romania@parker.com

RU – Russia, Moscow
Tel: +7 495 645-2156
parker.russia@parker.com

SE – Sweden, Spånga
Tel: +46 (0)8 59 79 50 00
parker.sweden@parker.com

SK – Slovakia, Banská Bystrica
Tel: +421 484 162 252
parker.slovakia@parker.com

SL – Slovenia, Novo Mesto
Tel: +386 7 337 6650
parker.slovenia@parker.com

TR – Turkey, Istanbul
Tel: +90 216 4997081
parker.turkey@parker.com

UA – Ukraine, Kiev
Tel: +48 (0)22 573 24 00
parker.poland@parker.com

UK – United Kingdom, Warwick
Tel: +44 (0)1926 317 878
parker.uk@parker.com

ZA – South Africa, Kempton Park
Tel: +27 (0)11 961 0700
parker.southafrica@parker.com

North America
CA – Canada, Milton, Ontario
Tel: +1 905 693 3000

US – USA, Cleveland
Tel: +1 216 896 3000

Asia Pacifi c
AU – Australia, Castle Hill
Tel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777

CN – China, Shanghai
Tel: +86 21 2899 5000

HK – Hong Kong
Tel: +852 2428 8008

IN – India, Mumbai
Tel: +91 22 6513 7081-85

JP – Japan, Tokyo
Tel: +81 (0)3 6408 3901

KR – South Korea, Seoul
Tel: +82 2 559 0400

MY – Malaysia, Shah Alam
Tel: +60 3 7849 0800

NZ – New Zealand, Mt Wellington
Tel: +64 9 574 1744

SG – Singapore
Tel: +65 6887 6300

TH – Thailand, Bangkok
Tel: +662 186 7000

TW – Taiwan, Taipei
Tel: +886 2 2298 8987

South America
AR – Argentina, Buenos Aires
Tel: +54 3327 44 4129

BR – Brazil, Sao Jose dos Campos
Tel: +55 800 727 5374

CL – Chile, Santiago
Tel: +56 2 623 1216

MX – Mexico, Toluca
Tel: +52 72 2275 4200

EMEA Product Information Centre
Free phone: 00 800 27 27 5374
(from AT, BE, CH, CZ, DE, DK, EE, ES, FI, FR, IE, IL,
IS, IT, LU, MT, NL, NO, PL, PT, RU, SE, SK, UK, ZA)
US Product Information Centre
Toll-free number: 1-800-27 27 537
www.parker.com

192-490023N9 January 2016

Parker Hannifin
Markets and Applications
Technical Features
Rod-Style Linear Handling Actuators
High Force Electro Thrust Cylinder – ETH
OSP-E..STR – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
Electric Tubular Motor – ETT
OSP-E..SBR – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
Rodless Linear Handling Actuators
HPLA – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheated Rollers
HLE – Linear Actuator with Plastic-Sheathed Rollers
OSP-E..BHD – Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing and Roller Guiding
OSP-E..B – Belt Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
OSP-E..SB – Ball Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
OSP-E..ST – Trapezoidal Screw Actuator with Internal Plain Bearing Guide
OSP-E..BV – Vertical Belt Actuator with Integrated Ball Bearing Guide
LCB Compact Linear Actuator with Sliding Bearing
LCR – Light Capacity Rodless Miniature Linear Positioner
HMR – Electromechanical Linear Actuator

Precision Positioners
XE – Screw Driven Positioner
XR – Precision Screw Driven Positioner
MX – Miniature Positioners
MX80M – Free Travel and Micrometer Driven Stages

GlideScrew

™

Combines the Features of a Linear Bearing and Screw in One Compact Package

www.thomsonlinear.com

2

www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Introduction

What is a Glide Screw™? Part linear bearing, part lead screw; a combination of two
favorites to create something better than both. The patent-pending Glide Screw
brings high performance, fast installation and less complexity in a small package.

Standard Sizes and Configurations Stocked for Immediate Availability
• Metric Series includes 4, 6 and 10 mm nominal diameters
• Inch Series includes 3/16”, 1/4” and 3/8” nominal diameters
• Flanged and cylindrical nut bodies standard

Optional Configurations for Harsh Environments Available
• High temperature resistant – inside ovens or autoclaves (up to 175 °C)
• Clean room – in robot vacuum chambers, laboratories or medical equipment (ISO 6)
• Food grade – in packaging and food processing equipment

Custom Nut Configurations, Screw Diameters and Thread Leads Available
• Don’t see your perfect configuration – call us, we make custom sizes

Easy to Install and Maintenance Free!
• All that is required is a Glide Screw and an anti-rotation feature
• No need for reference surfaces or the pain of “floating” your system into alignment
• Plug and play – install it and forget it
• Integrated Thomson’s patented Lube for Life technology
• Bearing grade plastic and stainless steel construction standard

3

Glide Screw

www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Benefits of the Glide Screw Technology

The Glide Screw combines the features of a linear bearing and a lead screw in one
smooth operating package. Inch and metric sizes are standard. Custom sizes are also
available quickly and to your specification.

Reduced Footprint
• Integrated lead screw / linear bearing
• Side load / moment load capable

Improved Equipment Uptime
• Screw and linear bearing are already aligned
• Component alignment is not critical – smooth and quiet motion
• Integrated lubrication block – Thomson Lube for Life standard

Lower Cost of Ownership
• Less complexity – faster installation
• Less components – simpler bill of material
• Maintenance free – no lubrication required

Glide Nut Housing

Lubrication Block

Radial Bearing

Glide Screw

4 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Typical Application

Every engineer’s objective is to eliminate parts, streamline the design, simplify
installation and reduce the maintenance required – exactly what a Glide Screw™ does.

3D Printing or Engraving
Innovative and portable multi-axis printers / engravers are revolutionizing rapid prototyping and consumer
products. The Glide Screw can reduce the number of components, decrease system complexity, decrease
assembly time and produce a better machine as decribed in the table below. It requires no maintenance, can
shorten overall guided length and has a longer life which makes our Thomson Glide Screw the better design
solution and less expensive overall.

Generic design

Glide Screw design

Generic vs. Glide Srew Design

Generic Glide Screw

X, Y Area Compactness 4100 mm2 1600 mm

2

Z Axis Length 64 mm 46 mm

Approx. Installation Time 45 min 15 min

Number of Parts 74 3

0

Self Aligning No Yes

Maintenance Free No Yes

5

Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Other Application Ideas

Fluid Pumps
Syringe pumps and integrated fluid pumps are a growing segment of the medical
industry. The stringent demands of these customers require smaller, cleaner,
smoother, and quieter products. This is exactly the challenge the Glide Screw
was designed to solve.

Fluid Pipetting / 3-Axis Lab Automation
Lab automation and diagnostics require faster and more accurate systems
in smaller footprints. Optimized for z-axis applications requiring the smallest
footprint, the Glide Screw can replace traditional linear guided products that are
overdesigned and more expensive.

Generic design
Glide Screw design

Other Applications
The Glide Screw
improves performance
in a smaller and lighter
package. It is easier
and faster to install.
Also, it requires less
maintenance compared
to traditional lead
screw and linear guide
solutions. Other great
applications for the
Glide Screw include:

• Test tube handling
• Lab automation
• CD duplication
• Pick & place
• Syringe pumps
• In vitro diagnostics
• Medical imaging

6 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Engineering

The Glide ScrewTM is designed to actuate a moment load or a side load without
additional linear guidance or support. Therefore, the screw deflection is the
determinant feature and the following charts must be used when properly sizing a
Glide Screw for an application.

How the Glide Screw Works
The unique design of Glide Screw allows it to handle
axial, radial and moment loads without additional
guidance. The result is an efficient and space
saving design that is quick and easy to install with
reduced maintenance needs compared to traditional
solutions.

End Support
Decide which type of end support you will use to
enable accurate selection of diameter.

Fixed support – utilizes a support journal length at
least 1.5 × the journal diameter – such as dual ball
bearings.

Simple support – uses a single ball bearing, a plain
bearing, or a bushing.

End support configurations shown at left:
1. Simple / simple
2. Fixed / simple
3. Fixed / fixed

Max. Length

Max. Length
Max. Length

1.

2.

3.

= load lines
= reactionary forces

axial
load

axial
load

radial
load

moment
load

7

Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

20

0
20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

0

25

50

75

100

125

150

175

200

250

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

225

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

500

0
2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
0
100
200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1000

900

Engineering

Moment Load and Radial Load Charts
Determine your end support configuration and then
use the following charts to properly size the nominal
diameter of the Glide Screw. Select a product
diameter that lies above and/or to the right of the
design moment or load.

The lead of a Glide Screw is defined as the axial
distance traveled for one revolution of the screw.
Select the appropriate lead of your screw based on
the desired speed and resolution of travel. Note that
the Glide Screw is limited to 300 RPM.

Inch Diameter Models

Unsupported length [in

]

Screw diameters

= 0.375 inch = 10 mm
= 0.250 inch = 6 mm
= 0.188 inch = 4 mm

End support type

= fixed in both ends
= simple in one end and fixed in other
= simple in both ends

Conversion factors

1.0 in-lb = 0.113 Nm
1.0 lb = 4.448 N

M
om

en
t l

oa
d

[in
-lb

s]

Ra
di

al
lo

ad
[l

bs
]

M
om
en
t l
oa
d

[N
m

]
Ra
di
al
lo

ad
[N

]

Unsupported length

[in]

Unsupported length [mm]Unsupported length

[mm]

Metric Diameter Models

8 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Specifications and Part Numbers
Glide Screw™ configurations
GSF – screw and flanged nut assembly GSC – screw and cylindrical nut assembly

Inch Series Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[in]

Screw
Lead
[in]

Screw and Nut
Assembly
Part No.

Max
Axial
Load
[lbs]

Max
Moment

Load
[in-lbs]

Max
Screw
Length

[in]

Dimensions [in] Effic.
[%]

A B C D E F G H J

BCD

0.188
0.050 GS_18x0050

30.0 20.5 6.000 0.375 0.750 0.281 0.875 0.140 0.125 0.094 0.188 0.177 0.625
46

0.125 GS_18x0125 68

0.250
0.050 GS_25x0050

45.0 47.5 10.000 0.500 1.000 0.313 1.000 0.140 0.150 0.125 0.250 0.237 0.750
40

0.500 GS_25x0500 82

0.375

0.063 GS_37x0063

70.0 137.5 18.000 0.875 1.750 0.563 1.750 0.200 0.300 0.188 0.438 0.406 1.250

36

0.500 GS_37x0500 78

1.000 GS_37x1000 83

Metric Series Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[mm]

Screw
Lead
[mm]

Screw and Nut
Assembly
Part No.

Max
Axial
Load
[N]

Max
Moment

Load
[Nm]

Max
Screw
Length
[mm]

Dimensions [mm] Effic.
[%]

A B C D E F G H J BCD
4

1 GS_4x1M

89.0 2.3 150 10 20 6.5 20 2.5 3 2 5 5 15

45

4 GS_4x4M 75

8 GS_4x8M 82

6

1 GS_6x1M

133.4 5.4 250 13 26 7.75 25 3.5 4 3 7 5.75 1

9

36

6 GS_6x6M 75

12 GS_6x12M 82

10

2 GS_10x2M

311.4 15.5 450 22 44 14 44 5 7 4 10 9.85 32

40

6 GS_10x6M 66

12 GS_10x12M 77

B

F

A h

1

1

C

B

G H11

H

J
D

BCD

E

A h9

Part number example: GSC25x0500 = glide screw assembly, cylindrical nut, 0.250 inch diameter by 0.500 inch lead

Standard Products
• Acetal nut body with all stainless steel internal components
• 303 stainless steel screw
• Integrated Lube for Life lubrication block
• Temperature Rating: -40° to 65°C (-40° to 150°F)
• Clean Room ISO 7 (Class 10000)

9
Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

End Machining

End support type

Recommended end machining

fixed / fixed fixed / simple simple / simple

Inch Series End Machining Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[in]

Screw
Lead
[in]

Screw
Part No.

Root
Diameter

[in]

Recommended Bearing Dimensions [in]

OD
[mm]

ID
[mm]

W
[mm]

Bearing
Trade No.

A B C D E F G H L THD

0.188
0.050 GS18x0050 0.12

7 2,5 2,5 692X 0.197 0.098 N/A 0.098 N/A 0.022 0.120 0.075 0.157 N/A
0.125 GS18x0125 0.13

0.250
0.050 GS25x0050 0.19

13 4 5 624 0.295 0.118 0.610 0.157 0.374 0.020 0.217 0.150 0.256 M4×x0.5
0.500 GS25x0500 0.16

0.375

0.063 GS37x0063 0.30

19 6 6 626 0.394 0.197 0.728 0.236 0.453 0.030 0.266 0.220 0.315 M6×0.750.500 GS37x0500 0.27

1.000 GS37x1000 0.24

Metric Series End Machining Dimensions
Screw
Diam.
[mm]

Screw
Lead
[mm]
Screw
Part No.
Root
Diameter
[mm]

Recommended Bearing Dimensions [mm]

OD
[mm]
ID
[mm]
W
[mm]
Bearing
Trade No.
A B C D E F G H L THD
4

1 GS4x1M 2.8

7 2.5 2.5 692X 5.00 2.50 N/A 2.50 N/A 0.55 3.05 1.90 4.00 N/A4 GS4x4M 2.8

8 GS4x8M 2.8

6

1 GS6x1M 4.6

13 4 5 624 7.50 3.00 15.50 4.00 9.50 0.51 5.51 3.81 6.50 M4×x0.56 GS6x6M 4.4

12 GS6x12M 4.4

10

2 GS10x2M 7.3

13 6 6 626 10.00 5.00 18.50 6.00 11.50 0.76 6.76 5.59 8.00 M6×0.756 GS10x6M 8.4

12 GS10x12M 8.4

10 www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Installation
Comparing Alternative Technologies
The Glide Screw™ is both drive system and linear guide, so these features are already perfectly aligned
and cannot bind. Therefore, installation is simple and the mating components do not require high tolerance
geometric features.

Drive and Guide Technology Comparison

Feature Lead Screw / Linear Bearings Lead Screw / Profile Rail Glide Screw

Small Footprint Good Better Best

Ease of Installation Better Good Best

Stiffness Better Best Good

Misalignment Tolerant Better Good Best

Lube for Life Lubrication Optional Optional Integrated

Total Cost of Ownership Good Better Best

11
Glide Screw
www.thomsonlinear.com/glidescrew

Installation
Basic Installation Guidlines
The success of the Glide Screw in an application is primarily dependent on the end support configuration. Since
the Glide Screw is a combination of a lead screw and linear bearing, the ability to handle non-axial loads while
maintaining positional accuracy is the key to a successful installation. The load capacity curves are based on
screw deflection and not the lead nut capacity. Therefore, stiffness of the assembly determines load capacity.

1
2
3
4
5

Installation Step-by-Step

1. Select end support configuration
A fixed bearing support should be selected when possible.
A simple support is typically a single radial bearing that
is allowed to float axially to compensate for misaligments.
Typical methods of attaching end supports is either base
mounting or flange mounting.

2. Select motor and drive configuration
Select a motor and your means for coupling the screw to
the motor. Typically this is done by a belt, gearing or an
in-line coupler. It is also possible to directly integrate
a Glide Screw with a stepper motor, which can reduce
complexity and save space.

3. Select nut mounting interface
The standard configurations for the glide nut are flanged
nuts and cylindrical nuts but are by no means the only
solutions. Custom configurations, custom mounting and
design assistance are available from Thomson.

4. Determine anti-rotation method
The Glide Screw requires an external anti-rotation
feature on the nut housing to function correctly. Two
examples of acceptable methods are the finger / slot
solution or the bushing / linear shaft solution.

5. Mount the assembly into the application
The actual mounting of the Glide Screw is easy once all of
the periphrials have been determined and designed. Just
bolt the assembly in place and fire up the system. No critical
alignment procedures are necessary as the drive system and
linear guidance are already in perfect alignment.

Glide_Screw_BREN-0002-04 | 20180412KB
Specifications are subject to change without notice. It is the responsibility of the product user to determine the suitability of
this product for a specific application. All trademarks property of their respective owners. ©2018 Thomson Industries, Inc.

www.thomsonlinear.com

USA, CANADA and MEXICO
Thomson
203A West Rock Road
Radford, VA 24141, USA
Phone: 1-540-633-3549
Fax: 1-540-633-0294
E-mail: thomson@thomsonlinear.com
Literature: literature.thomsonlinear.com

EUROPE
United Kingdom
Thomson
Office 9, The Barns
Caddsdown Business Park
Bideford, Devon, EX39 3BT
Phone: +44 (0) 1271 334 500
E-mail: sales.uk@thomsonlinear.com

Germany
Thomson
Nürtinger Straße 70
72649 Wolfschlugen
Phone: +49 (0) 7022 504 0
Fax: +49 (0) 7022 504 405
E-mail: sales.germany@thomsonlinear.com

France
Thomson
Phone: +33 (0) 243 50 03 30
Fax: +33 (0) 243 50 03 39
E-mail: sales.france@thomsonlinear.com

Italy
Thomson
Largo Brughetti
20030 Bovisio Masciago
Phone: +39 0362 594260
Fax: +39 0362 594263
E-mail: sales.italy@thomsonlinear.com

Spain
Thomson
E-mail: sales.esm@thomsonlinear.com

Sweden
Thomson
Estridsväg 10
29109 Kristianstad
Phone: +46 (0) 44 24 67 00
Fax: +46 (0) 44 24 40 85
E-mail: sales.scandinavia@thomsonlinear.com

ASIA
Asia Pacific
Thomson
E-mail: sales.apac@thomsonlinear.com

China
Thomson
Rm 2205, Scitech Tower
22 Jianguomen Wai Street
Beijing 100004
Phone: +86 400 6661 802
Fax: +86 10 6515 0263
E-mail: sales.china@thomsonlinear.com

India
Thomson
c/o CNRG Energy India Pvt. Ltd.
Unit No. FF A 07
Art Guild House, A Wing, 1st Floor, L.B.S Marg
Kurla – West, Mumbai – 400070 India
Phone: +0091 22 6249 5043
Email: sales.india@thomsonlinear.com

Japan
Thomson
Minami-Kaneden 2-12-23, Suita
Osaka 564-0044 Japan
Phone: +81-6-6386-8001
Fax: +81-6-6386-5022
E-mail: csjapan@scgap.com

South Korea
Thomson ROA
704 ASEM Tower (Samsung-dong)
517 Yeongdong-daero, Gangnam-gu
Seoul, S. Korea, Zip Code: 06164
Phone: +82 2 6917 5048 & 5049
Fax: +82 2 528 1456 & 1457
E-mail: sales.korea@thomsonlinear.com

SOUTH AMERICA
Brazil
Thomson
Av. Tamboré, 1077
Barueri, SP – 06460-000
Phone: +55 11 3616-0191
Fax: +55 11 3611 1982
E-mail: sales.brasil@thomsonlinear.com

Digital Ebook

A
RESOURCE

ON
ELECTRIC

LINEAR
ACTUATORS
What a machine designer needs to know

http://tolomatic.com

Contents

2

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Table of Contents

I. WHY ELECTRIC ACTUATORS? EVALUATING
THE BASICS
a. What is a linear actuator?
b. Electric linear actuator advantages

II. ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY: CRITICAL

CONCEPTS

III. SELECTING THE RIGHT ACTUATOR: ROD OR
RODLESS

a. Rod

actuators

b. Rodless electromechanical actuators
c. Screw selection
d. Consider the environment
e. Comparing manufacturers’ specs
f. Calculating actuator life

IV. MOTOR SELECTION: STEPPER OR SERVO?
a. Stepper motors
b. Servo motors
c. Motor mounting

V. SYSTEM INSTALLATION: CONSIDERATIONS
a. Optimizing actuator alignment
b. Minimizing electrical noise

VI. ELECTRIC ACTUATOR APPLICATIONS:
IMPROVED EFFICIENCY

a. Automotive manufacturing
b. Process industries
c. Food and beverage processing
d. Material handling

VII. CONCLUSION: TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP

CONTRIBUTOR CREDITS

There were many talented Tolomatic

contributors responsible for the contents of this

ebook. Thank you to:

GARY ROSENGREN, director of engineering;

IGOR GLIKIN, senior mechanical engineer;

PATRICK HOBART, senior software

development engineer;

SCOTT KLAR, electrical engineer;

AARON DIETRICH, director of marketing;

RYAN KLEMETSON, target markets manager;

DAN CASS, director of business development;

RYAN BOURGOINE, engineering supervisor;

and all the support staff that helped produce

the materials contained in this e-book. We hope

you find the contents informative.

P.

3

P.

4

P.

5

P.

11

P.

13

P.

14

P.16

http://tolomatic.com

Why electric actuators? Evaluating the basics
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

I.

3

WHAT IS A LINEAR ACTUATOR?
A linear actuator is defined as a device that creates motion in a
straight line. These devices are used in automotive manufacturing,
process industries, food and beverage processing, material handling,
robotics, and in other places where linear motion is required.

Industrial applications use pneumatic-, hydraulic- and electric-
powered linear actuators. Pneumatic and hydraulic power
produce linear motion naturally so pneumatic and hydraulic
linear actuators (often called cylinders) can be fairly simple
devices. However, in electric-powered linear actuators an electric
motor’s rotary motion must be converted to linear motion
through a screw/nut system or a belt. This means electric linear
actuators are somewhat more complex devices than pneumatic
or hydraulic actuators but can offer significant advantages in
many applications.

ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATOR ADVANTAGES
The decision of whether to use an electric, pneumatic
or hydraulic linear actuator is a crucial one for engineers
when specifying a linear actuator. A pneumatic cylinder has
advantages — ease-of-use, lower cost — but carries with it

inefficiencies in operation with potential compressed air
leaks. A hydraulic cylinder can provide high-thrust

capabilities in a variety of environments, but
they can be prone to fluid leaks which are not

environmentally friendly.

An electric linear actuator can offer distinct benefits:

• Able to handle complex motion profiles — Motion
control systems have become more complicated. Electric
linear actuators can provide precise control of speed,
acceleration, deceleration and force, outperforming fluid
power technologies. They offer accuracy/repeatability, infinite
positioning capabilities with data feedback and are able to
handle complex motion profiles.

• Able to adapt to changing needs — An electric actuator’s
programming can be changed. If parameters change, the
actuator can be adjusted to meet new specifications with
minimal downtime and loss of productivity.

• Lower lifetime cost with highest efficiency and lowest
energy use — Electric-powered systems operate at 70-80%
total system efficiency, compared to 40-55% for hydraulic and
10-15% for pneumatic systems. In fact, savings over the total life
cycle cost of the actuator—including the savings in efficiency,
energy use and reduced maintenance—can far outweigh the
initial acquisition cost.

• Readily integrate into other electric production systems —
Electric actuators are easily integrated into motion control
systems with the use of PLCs, HMIs and other devices to offer
enhanced motion control, data collection and diagnostics.

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 1 Why electric actuators? Evaluating the basics

BLOG

Subscribe to Tolomatic’s
blog to learn more

about actuators and
linear motion.

http://tolomatic.com

http://blog.tolomatic.com/bid/60410/What-is-a-linear-actuator

http://blog.tolomatic.com/what-you-need-to-know-about-electric-actuators

https://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Educational/Converting-Hydraulic-Systems-to-Electric

http://blog.tolomatic.com/?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=eBook&utm_content=blog&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://blog.tolomatic.com/?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=eBook&utm_content=blog&utm_campaign=Dwebook

Accuracy and repeatability: Critical concepts
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

II.

4

When discussing a linear motion application, many users
ask “How accurate is this actuator?” The answer is more
involved than simply stating a number.

Accuracy and repeatability are related but not the same.
Accuracy refers to the ability of an actuator to achieve a
commanded position. Repeatability refers to the ability of
the actuator to achieve a position time after time.

The relative importance of the two qualities depends on
a thorough understanding of your application. Positional
errors can come from several sources: the actuator itself,
the motor and its encoder, and the motor driver. Also,
the way an actuator is deployed has significant influence
on the results.

There are numerous actuator styles/types manufactured
to various degrees of precision and subsequent cost.
There are also models that have high repeatability
without high accuracy. In the right application these less
accurate and lower-priced models can deliver excellent
performance.

The key to success is understanding what is
required in your application and choosing
the actuator accordingly. By doing so,
you can avoid excess costs and design a
system with the best overall value.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Download our whitepaper,
Introduction to accuracy
and repeatability in linear

motion systems, for a
thorough explanation.

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 2 Accuracy and repeatabiity: Critical concepts

http://tolomatic.com

https://www.tolomatic.com/info-center/resource-details/infographic-accuracy-repeatability-in-linear-actuators

https://www.tolomatic.com/info-center/resource-details/accuracy-repeatability-linear-motion-systems

III.

5

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

When you need to specify an electric linear actuator,
begin by answering these simple questions:

• What needs to be moved?
• How far and fast does it have to move?
• How much does the load weigh?
• How much space is available for the system?
• What are the force requirements?

The answers will make actuator selection easier
and lead you to the initial decision of whether
to specify an electric rod actuator or a rodless
electromechanical actuator.

The pushing action of an electric rod actuator
works well in many applications. However, this type
of actuator may not be suitable if the item is heavy
and must be supported or if the distance traveled
is long. Rod-style actuators do not provide support
to a load. The weight of the load can deflect the
rod, causing wear on seals and bearings and even
triggering major positioning problems.

Rodless actuators guide and support the load
throughout the stroke length. They also have a
size advantage because their entire stroke length
is contained in their body rather than having a rod
that extends out from the body. However, these
actuators may not stand up to harsh environments
without shielding.

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

http://tolomatic.com

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
(CONTINUED)

ROD ACTUATORS

6

SELECTION TIPS
Factory automation applications are requiring faster speeds and
greater precision, so machine designers are changing to electric
linear actuators. Electric rod actuators can deliver speed, control and
precision but may come with a higher initial cost and a more complex
design than fluid power cylinders (either pneumatic or hydraulic).
Given the growing demand for cost control, engineering and analysis
at the front end of an application can reduce overall costs and result
in automation systems with higher reliability, better performance,
lower energy expenditures and less maintenance.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Download our white paper,
Top ten tips: How to specify
electric rod-style actuators
for optimal performance,
reliability and efficiency,
for the full explanation.

TRADITIONAL AND INTEGRATED ELECTRIC LINEAR
ACTUATORS
A trend in electric linear motion is to integrate the control, drive,
motor and other components with the actuator. This has created a
new category: integrated actuators.

Pneumatic cylinders have been used widely because they are
inexpensive to buy and simple to apply. Electric rod-style actuators
are gaining popularity due to their flexibility and energy efficiency.
However, electric rod actuators have been perceived as a more
expensive and complex solution.

An integrated electric actuator offers advantages over both
pneumatic and traditional electric actuator solutions. Compared to
a pneumatic cylinder an integrated electric actuator will save energy.
Compared to a traditional electric actuator an integrated solution
will save purchase, installation, and assembly costs, while reducing
the overall footprint of the machine.

VIEW OUR WEBINAR
Learn about electric rod actuator selection at our webinar.

INFOGRAPHIC
10 tips for

specifying electric
rod actuators

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/778?utm_source=DW&utm_medium=eBook&utm_content=10TipsInfographic&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/441?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=eBook&utm_content=10tipselectricrodwp&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://info.tolomatic.com/webinar-tips-on-selecting-electric-rod-style-actuators-0?utm_source=DW&utm_medium=eBook&utm_content=Tipselectricrodwebinar&utm_campaign=Dwebook

7

SELECTION TIPS
Rodless electro-mechanical actuators have an
advantage over electric rod actuators, as many
have the ability to support and carry loads.
This can reduce costs and design time
by eliminating the need for other load-
bearing and guiding elements. In contrast
to rod-style actuators, a rodless actuator’s
stroke lies completely within the length
of its body, resulting in a smaller working
footprint. In addition, rodless actuators can
be either screw- or belt-driven, with each drive
type having its own advantages depending on the
application.

VIEW OUR WEBINAR
Learn about rodless electromechanical actuator
selection at our webinar

RODLESS ELECTROMECHANICAL ACTUATORS

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Download our white paper,
Specifying electric rodless

actuators: Ten tips for
maximizing actuator life

and system performance,
for the full explanation.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

To learn more about drive
train selection, download our
white paper, Screw-driven vs.
belt-driven rodless actuators:
How to select drive trains for

reliability, efficiency and long
service life.

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
(CONTINUED)
A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

BELT DRIVE OR SCREW DRIVE?
Rodless electromechanical actuators commonly use

one of two main drive train types to convert a motor’s
rotary motion to linear motion: a power screw drive or a
timing belt drive. While both offer efficiency, reliability and long life,
each has its limitations.

Power screw drives and timing belts carry a dual function. They are used
for linear positioning, and they transmit power. A screw mechanism

produces linear motion by rotating either the screw or the nut in an
assembly. Similarly, timing belt drives transmit torque and linear motion

from a driving pulley via the belt, which in turn moves the actuator’s carriage.

The specifics of a motion control application determine which drive
train to select. Key factors in drive train selection are length of stroke,
linear velocity and acceleration, as well as orientation of the move.
Drive trains vary in capacity, so the thrust of the actuator as well as load
and force of the actuator carrier will affect drive train choice.

INFOGRAPHIC
10 tips for

specifying rodless
electric linear

actuators

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/776?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=10TipsInfographic2&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/448?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=maximizingwp&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/452?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=Beltorscrewdrivewp&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://info.tolomatic.com/webinar-tips-on-selecting-electric-rodless-actuators?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=10TipsElectricActuatorWebinar&utm_campaign=Dwebook

8

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
(CONTINUED)
A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

GUIDE DOWNLOAD:

Learn about terminology and
the uses of each type of lead

screw design in our guide,
Which screw? Picking the

right technology. Click here
to download.

SCREW SELECTION

When it comes to specifying an electric linear actuator it is critical to select
the right lead screw for the application because the screw is the major
drive component in most electric actuators.

There are three primary types of screws used in linear actuators: acme, ball
and roller. The differences among these screw types are in the design of the
thread shape along with the design and operation of a matching nut.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/673?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ScrewSelectionGuide&utm_campaign=Dwebook

9

CONSIDER THE ENVIRONMENT
The IP rating system standardizes ingress protection levels for
enclosures and machine components like linear actuators. Electric
actuators are used in manufacturing applications that can expose
them to dust, liquids and chemical solutions. Generally, rod-style
models are better suited to harsh conditions. Unshielded rodless
actuators can be employed if conditions require a rating of IP54
or lower. For higher levels of ingress protection, rodless actuators
often require external shields or enclosures.

When selecting linear actuators for applications that require dust and
liquid ingress protection, consider the types of dust and liquids to
which the actuators will be exposed. This will ensure environmental
compatibility, optimal performance and long service life.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Learn more about the IP rating
system and how it relates

to linear actuator selection.
Download our white paper, IP

ratings and the manufacturing
environment: How to apply
linear actuators for quality,

safety and long service life.

COMPARING MANUFACTURERS’ SPECS
When it comes to electric linear actuator selection, a
product that has the highest output rating—in loads,
moments, or thrust—can have a distinct competitive
advantage. Often the product that has the highest
rating is seen to be the superior, most robust
choice. However, what really counts is how long
the actuator performs (that is, its useful life).

How can you use manufacturers’ published
specification ratings to make a meaningful
comparison? In order to compare components,
the specification values need to be normalized
to the rated life of travel the actuator is capable of
when external forces are applied. Then the resulting
data can be evaluated in the same units of measure.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Our whitepaper, Select the
right linear actuator: making

sense of manufacturer
specifications, explains
how to normalize specs.

Download it here.

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
(CONTINUED)
A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/450?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=IPratingsWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/450?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=IPratingsWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/450?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=IPratingsWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/446?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ManufacturerSpecsWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

10

Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless
(CONTINUED)
A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 3 Selecting the right actuator: Rod or rodless

CALCULATING ACTUATOR LIFE
Determining the useful life of machines and their
components is a fundamental challenge in any motion system
design project. The useful life (or service life) of a
machine or component like a linear actuator
is the period during which it continues to
operate and satisfy its required function.

The useful life of any actuator depends on
the life of the components that perform
most of the mechanical work or carry
the most load. Lead screw drives are an
example of such a critical component.

The life of a lead screw can be defined as the
actual life achieved by a screw before it fails for
any reason. Among possible reasons for failure
are: fatigue, excessive wear, corrosion, contamination,
insufficient structural strength, or loss of any function required by
the application.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

What is DLR, L10 and
Equivalent Load?

How do they affect actuator
life? Download our guide: How

to estimate life in ball and
roller screw-driven actuators.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Download our white
paper, The truth about

actuator life: screw
drive survival, for

examples of load-life
conversion calculations.

SIZE IT RIGHT!

Wish specifying electrical
linear actuators was easier?
Our electric actuator sizing
software could be just what
you need. It’s technology that’ll

save time and hassle when
selecting actuators.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/764?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=EstimateActuatorLifeGuide&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/764?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=EstimateActuatorLifeGuide&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/445?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=TruthActuatorLifeWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://sizeit.tolomatic.com/?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ActuatorSizingSoftware&utm_campaign=Dwebook

Motor selection: Stepper or servo?
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

I

V.

11

Electric linear actuators rely on motors to generate torque. Selecting
the appropriate motor type is a major consideration when specifying
an electric linear actuator. The decision must take into account the
application’s parameters. Two common motor options for electric
actuators are stepper motors and servo motors. A machine designer
needs to understand the advantages and disadvantages of both types
in order to specify the best motor for an application

SERVO MOTORS
A brushless servo motor has three wiring phases in the stator. The rotor has
several pairs of permanent magnets aligned with alternating poles. When
the phase windings are energized, torque is generated between the phase’s
electromagnet poles and the rotor’s magnetic poles causing the rotor
to rotate. A servo motor is paired with some type of encoder to provide
position and speed feedback. Servo actuators perform well in high speed
and force-sensitive applications. They are closed loop devices and require
the feedback of sensors plus additional cabling to connect to controllers.

SERVO MOTOR ADVANTAGES
• Higher degree of control over position and speed.
• Higher degree of accuracy due to closed

loop control.
• Maintain torque throughout speed range; can

output brief periods of “peak torque.”

SERVO MOTOR DISADVANTAGES
• More complex and may cost more.
• Control loops may require tuning which adds complexity.

STEPPER MOTORS
A stepper motor is a brushless DC motor that divides a full rotation into
equal steps. The rotor has magnetic teeth that align to the electromagnetic
poles in the stator. The motor’s position is known by the number of steps
commanded. The motor’s shaft can be commanded to move and hold at
a step without any feedback sensor. Electric actuators with stepper motors
offer excellent performance and lower cost for low speed, high torque and
high repeatability applications with open-loop control.

STEPPER MOTOR ADVANTAGES
• Open loop position control. No feedback

information needed.
• Lower cost.
• High torque at low speeds.
• Dentent torque (the torque required to turn the

motor when no current is applied to the windings)
is much higher in stepper motors and is beneficial
in preventing the weight of the load back-driving
the motor when the system is powered down.

• Excellent repeatability. Accuracy within 3-5%.

STEPPER MOTOR DISADVANTAGES
• Insufficient torque can lower accuracy. Motor may be oversized (up to

50% above maximum torque requirement), leading to higher cost.
• Motor resonance is common resulting in torque loss and noise.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Download our white
paper, Choosing

stepper- or servo-
driven actuators to

replace air cylinders, for
a thorough explanation.

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 4 Motor Selection: Stepper or servo?

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/454?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=%20StepperorServoDrivenWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

Motor selection : Stepper or servo?
(CONTINUED)

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 4 Motor Selection: Stepper or servo?

12

MOTOR MOUNTING
Attaching a motor to an electric linear actuator requires an adaptor or
housing. The mounting hardware needed varies based on motor type and
brand as well as on how the motor is to be mounted — either inline or
reverse parallel.

An inline configuration directly couples the motor’s driving shaft to the
actuator through a housing. This configuration provides excellent motor
support and allows maximum power transmission from the motor to the
actuator. The downside, though, is that this type of configuration takes
up horizontal space (length of motor + length of actuator).

A reverse parallel configuration is a space-saving alternative (on the
horizontal plane); however, some of the motor’s power will be lost
due to the gear or belt drive required. This loss may reduce some of
the actuator’s force.

The needs of your application will help you decide on the
appropriate configuration.

GET THE RIGHT FIT
WITH OUR YOUR

MOTOR HERE® PROGRAM

Selecting and assembling the
components of an electric actuator
system adds to your workload as a
busy engineer. We developed the

Your Motor Here® program to make
it quicker and easier to match motor

to actuator and get the right motor
mounting hardware.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/info-center/tools/your-motor-here?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=YourMotorHere&utm_campaign=Dwebook

System installation: Considerations
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 5 System installations: Considerations

V.
13

OPTIMIZING ACTUATOR ALIGNMENT
Many industrial machines rely on linear guidance components, often
driven by some type of linear actuator, to guide and support moving
elements. Guidance components include profiled rail, round rail
or other rolling or sliding bearing structures. However, guidance
components can affect system performance and actuator life by
introducing challenges such as:

• Inconsistent results
• Shorter-than-expected useful life
• Premature wear or failure of actuator components
• Erratic motion, such as speed variations or wobbling

When you are installing a linear motion system that includes guidance
components, be sure actuator compliance mechanisms are in place
to compensate for stress points. Also, you will need to address both
parallelism in the system and perpendicular alignment bending moment
issues. Careful consideration of these elements will give you optimal
performance of the actuator and guidance system.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Our white paper, Rules of
actuator and guide alignment

in linear motion systems,
provides an explanation of

these installation issues.
Download it here.

MINIMIZING ELECTRICAL NOISE
Electric drives and actuators operate in harsh conditions that subject
equipment to electrical noise—a random fluctuation in an electrical signal
that is present in all electronic circuits. Electrical noise can disrupt actuator
control signals, cause erratic movements or precipitate complete system
failure. By understanding electrical noise, system designers can take steps
to minimize interference and ensure greater reliability.

A designer needs to consider two types of electrical noise: ground
loop and induced noise. Both can be mitigated with appropriate
installation, cable separation and shielding. Communications issues
can be mitigated by minimizing noise and employing appropriate
daisy chaining.

To avoid difficulties, we suggest considering issues with electrical noise
and communication integrity early in the system design and installation
process. Because electrical noise cannot be eliminated completely
and a communication system can never be completely fail-proof, the
primary objectives during system design/installation are to mitigate
the risks associated with electrical interference and make informed
financial decisions based on the operating environment and costs
associated with potential system failure.

WHITEPAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Our white paper,
Minimizing electrical noise
in actuator drive systems

for maximum reliability and
performance, discusses the
causes of electrical noise, its

effects on communication and
how to minimize it. Download

the paper here.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/449?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=RulesofAlignmentWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/451?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=MinimizingNoiseWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

Electric actuator applications: Improved efficiency
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 6 Electric actuator applications: Improved efficiency

VI.

14

AUTOMOTIVE MANUFACTURING
As the global automotive industry continues to grow, demand for
automated production is also expanding to control quality and
production costs. As part of this move toward increased automation,
many automotive manufacturers employ servo-controlled resistance
spot welding equipment within their body-in-white production lines.

However, automobile manufacturers producing vehicles for markets
including China, Brazil, Korea and India may still use traditional
pneumatic spot welding equipment. As vehicle production in these
markets ramps up and consumers demand higher quality, these
manufacturers are considering a transition to robot-carried, servo-
controlled spot welding equipment. Servo-actuated resistance spot
welding guns provide better welds, require less maintenance, and offer
lower operating costs, increased life and better return-on-investment
(ROI) than their pneumatic counterparts.

PROCESS INDUSTRIES
Valves are critical components in processing plants because they
control the flow of raw materials and finished goods. Some valve
automation applications, especially control valves, require increasingly
sophisticated motion control solutions. To meet these demands,
engineers can use an emerging technology in valve
actuation: brushless servo valve actuators.

Control valves operate in two ways: linear
motion (rising stem) or rotary motion
(half turn or quarter turn). Each method
is designed for specific functions and
applications. Rising stem valves are
typically used in mission critical areas
of a process where reliability,
repeatability, accuracy and
responsiveness are all desired.
Brushless servo motion control
can provide performance
improvements beyond
traditional actuation methods.

Electric linear valve actuators (both brush and
brushless servo motor types) provide excellent control in valve
applications. Electric actuator technology has evolved, bringing costs
down, reducing the number of components, making set-up user friendly,
and dramatically improving overall system efficiencies when compared to
pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

For the full story
download our white

paper, How to select the
best linear actuator type
for valve automation in

process industries.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

For more information on the
advantages of electric servo
actuators over pneumatic

actuators, download our white
paper, Servo spot welding

offers superior performance
and lower lifetime costs for

auto manufacturing.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/779?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ElectricServoWeldingSlideshow&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/455?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ValveAutomationWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/442?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ServoSpotWeldingWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

Electric actuator applications: Improved efficiency
(CONTINUED)

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 6 Electric actuator applications: Improved efficiency

15

FOOD AND BEVERAGE PROCESSING
Production of food and beverages on today’s industrial scale would not
be possible without a high level of automation. Pneumatic, hydraulic
and electric actuators are critical moving components in food and
beverage processing and packaging equipment.

In addition to being
efficient, machines used to
process food must keep
food safe by not harboring
or introducing bacteria,
lubricating fluids or other
contaminants that could
harm consumers. As part
of food and beverage
production machines,
electric actuators must
be manufactured from
materials that resist
corrosion while not
leaching toxic substances
into food products or
packaging. Also, actuators
need to be designed
in a way that eliminates
collection points where

bacteria can flourish. Suitable actuators must be capable of
withstanding frequent washdowns with water, detergents, steam,

caustic soda, citric acid or other types of sanitary cleaning solutions.

MATERIAL HANDLING
Material handling systems keep manufacturing processes moving.

They bring raw materials to machines, take workpieces
to new processes, and package, palletize and prepare

finished goods for shipping. Every plant has some type
of material handling need, and most plants have a
range of systems, each with its own specifications.
This means material handling encompasses an
extremely wide variety of applications.

Conveying equipment gets this material handling work done, often with
the accurate and reliable functioning of linear actuators. When specifying
linear actuators for material handling, consider the application’s specific
needs for positioning accuracy, energy efficiency and cost of ownership.
If a facility produces several products, then actuators that are easily
programmable to several positioning set-ups may be needed. Also, it is
important to consider the manufacturing environment, both the presence
of harmful moisture and dust and the use of harsh chemicals like those
employed to wash down food processing equipment. Actuators must be
able to withstand these conditions.

For stories of how we have worked with material handling
equipment manufacturers to solve their challenges,
download these case studies:

• Tolomatic ERD electric actuators help global conveyor
manufacturer Intralox make all the right moves

• Hytrol puts the skinny on bulky conveyor diverters with
space-saving rodless cylinder from Tolomatic

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Our white paper,
Evaluating actuators for

washdown in food &
beverage applications,
discusses these issues
fully. Download it here.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/439?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=IntraloxCaseStudy&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/439?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=IntraloxCaseStudy&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/434?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=HytrolCaseStudy&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/434?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=HytrolCaseStudy&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://blog.tolomatic.com/

Conclusion: Total cost of ownership
COURTESY OF TOLOMATIC

A RESOURCE ON ELECTRIC LINEAR ACTUATORS Chapter 7 Conclusion: Total cost of ownership

VII.

16

ELECTRIC VS. PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC
LINEAR ACTUATORS
In the final analysis cost is a major factor in the acquisition of any piece
of automation equipment, but cost can be considered in different
ways. Evaluating the cost of automation has evolved from an overly
simplistic process to a more realistic one.

Purchase price often has been the only cost factor considered when
buying an automation device. That practice is giving way, though, to a
thorough analysis of the device’s “total cost of ownership” (TCO). The
TCO concept combines purchase price with the cost of operating the
device over its projected service life.

When it comes to linear actuators, pneumatic actuators (air cylinders) are
known for their low initial cost and durability. They have been a staple in
factory automation equipment for decades because they are simple, easy
to maintain and provide reasonable control over linear motion. Hydraulic
actuators are known for their high force output and can be used where
pneumatic power is not possible, but their characteristic of leaking fluid
is becoming a concern in today’s fragile outdoor environments. Since the
development of more flexible, precise and reliable electric actuators with
increased force capacities and greener, more efficient operation, there has
been a debate over which technology offers the best overall solution for
industrial plant optimization.

The case for switching to electric actuators has focused on the ability
of electric actuators to achieve more precise control of motion (in
terms of position, speed, acceleration and force), along with providing
superior accuracy and repeatability. That superior performance,
though, comes with a higher initial price.

While it’s true that electric actuators have a higher initial cost, this is not the
complete story. There are factors that can make an electric actuator a more
economical option than an air or hydraulic cylinder over the life of a device
or machine. These include efficiency, electric utility costs, air and hydraulic
fluid leaks, maintenance, actuator replacement, product quality, changeover
time, cycle times and contamination risks. These factors combined with
purchase price determine the total cost of ownership for an actuator.

Considering TCO early in the process of specifying linear actuators
means a machine designer will analyze the entire service life of a
choice with related costs, as well as the initial purchase price. This
analysis will show that in many cases choosing an electric actuator over
a pneumatic or hydraulic device will provide a lower TCO, making the
electric actuator the better choice.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Electric rod actuators
vs. hydraulic cylinders:

A comparsion of the
pros and cons of each

technology.

WHITE PAPER
DOWNLOAD:

Electric actuators vs.
pneumatic cylinders:
A comparison based

on total cost of
ownership

DOWNLOAD
INFOGRAPHIC:

For more information
on Calculating

total cost of linear
actuators.

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/780?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ElectricvsCylindersWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

http://www.tolomatic.com/Info-Center/Resource-Details/resource-details/443?utm_source=DesignWorld&utm_medium=Ebook&utm_content=ElectricvsPneumaticWP&utm_campaign=Dwebook

https://www.tolomatic.com/info-center/resource-details/infographic-calculating-total-cost-of-ownership

17

Contact Us
United States Headquarters

3800 County Road 116
Hamel, MN 55340, USA

Local Phone: 763.478.8000
Toll Free: 1.800.328.2174

Fax: 763.478.8080
www.tolomatic.com
help@tolomatic.com

European Office
Tolomatic Europe GmbH

Elisabethenstr. 20
65428 Rüsselsheim

Germany
Phone: +49 6142 17604-0

help@tolomatic.eu

China Facility
Tolomatic Automation Products

(Suzhou) Co. Ltd.
(ServoWeld® inquiries only)

No. 60 Chuangye Street, Building 2
Huqui District, SND Suzhou
Jiangsu 215011–P.R., China
Phone: +86 512 6750 8506

Fax: +86 512 6750 8507
servoweldchina@tolomatic.com

9900-9237_01

http://tolomatic.com

http://tolomatic.com

http://www.tolomatic.com

mailto:help%40tolomatic.com?subject=

mailto:servoweldchina%40tolomatic.com?subject=

Tweets by Tolomatic

https://www.facebook.com/Tolomatic/

https://www.linkedin.com/company/tolomatic

https://www.youtube.com/user/TolomaticInc

1. Button 15:
2. Button 11:

Page 2:
Page 3:
Page 4:
Page 5:
Page 6:
Page 7:
Page 8:
Page 9:
Page 10:
Page 11:
Page 12:
Page 13:
Page 14:
Page 15:
Page 16:

3. Button 10:

Page 2:
Page 3:
Page 4:
Page 5:
Page 6:
Page 7:
Page 8:
Page 9:
Page 10:
Page 11:
Page 12:
Page 13:
Page 14:
Page 15:
Page 16:

4. Button 17:
5. Button 18:
6. Button 19:
7. Button 16:
8. Button 13:

Page 17:

9. Button 12:

Page 17: